JP7479318B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as slot machines and pachinko machines.

Conventionally, gaming machines include slot machines (reel type gaming machines), pachinko gaming machines, arrange ball gaming machines, and jankyu gaming machines, and among these types of gaming machines, there is a slot machine such as that shown in Patent Document 1.

JP 2017-144015 A

In conventional gaming machines, various innovations have been made to improve the gameplay and make the game more interesting, and to make the gameplay smoother, but there is still room for further improvement.

The present invention aims to provide a gaming machine that can increase the enjoyment of gaming.

The present invention has the following features. In the following description of the characteristic configuration, an example of the corresponding configuration in the embodiment described below is shown in parentheses.

The gaming machine of the present invention is capable of displaying a time adjustment screen which allows the time to be adjusted, is capable of detecting a certain event which may occur on the gaming machine, is capable of displaying a history screen on a display means which allows history relating to a certain event to be displayed, the history screen is capable of displaying the time relating to a certain event, the certain event which can be displayed on the history screen includes a predetermined abnormality , the time can be changed when a change operation is performed on the time adjustment screen, and the time changed by the change operation can be confirmed when a confirmation operation is performed on the time adjustment screen, the time adjustment screen is displayed, and after a change operation is performed from a certain time to another certain time on the time adjustment screen but no confirmation operation is performed to the other certain time after the change operation, the predetermined abnormality is detected when the time adjustment screen is displayed and then a confirmation operation is performed to the other certain time and then the history screen is displayed, a time based on a certain time before the change operation was performed on the time adjustment screen can be displayed on the history screen as the time relating to the predetermined abnormality .

A gaming machine with the above configuration can increase the enjoyment of the game.

1 is a front view of a slot machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing a schematic configuration of the slot machine. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing the arrangement of symbols on the reels of the slot machine. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a background pattern displayed on the reels of the slot machine. FIG. A diagram showing symbol combination 1 in the above slot machine. A diagram showing symbol combination 2 in the above slot machine. A diagram showing symbol combination 3 in the above slot machine. A diagram showing symbol combination 4 in the above slot machine. FIG. 2 is a block diagram conceptually showing the functions of the slot machine. A diagram showing the relationship between each RT state in the above-mentioned slot machine. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing the relationship between each game mode in the slot machine. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing variables used in controlling the slot machine. In the above slot machine, (A) is a figure showing the contents of the lottery for transition to the advantageous zone, (B) is a lottery for chance mode 1, (C) is a lottery for chance mode 2-1, (D) is a lottery for chance mode 2-2, and (E) is a figure showing the contents of the lottery for chance game 3. In the above slot machine, (A) is a chance game number lottery, (B) is a chance cycle lottery, (C) is an EX1 mode lottery, (D) is an EX2 mode lottery, (E) is an AT mode lottery-1, (F) is an AT mode lottery-2, and (G) is an AT mode lottery-3. In the above slot machine, (A) is the Seven 1 draw, (B) is the Seven 2 draw, (C) is the AT mode rewrite draw, (D) is the Seven Loop draw, (E) is the Gold Seven Loop draw, (F) is the Gold Seven Loop rewrite draw, and (G) is the content of the add-on mode draw. In the above slot machine, (A) is a diagram showing the contents of the bell count change lottery, (B) is a Seven Stock 1 lottery, (C) is a Seven Stock 2 lottery, and (D) is a diagram showing the contents of the performance lever weight lottery. In the above slot machine, (A) is a diagram showing the contents of AT cycle lottery-1, (B) is an AT cycle lottery-2, (C) is a drawing of pullback 1 lottery-1, and (D) is a diagram showing the contents of pullback 1 lottery-2. In the above slot machine, (A) is a diagram showing the contents of the pullback 1 lottery-3, (B) is a pullback 2 lottery, and (C) is a diagram showing the contents of the AT cycle preferential game number lottery. 1A is a diagram showing the contents of a seven table 1 drawing in the above slot machine, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing the contents of a seven table 2 drawing. In the above slot machine, (A) is a diagram showing the contents of the lottery for bell number 1 -1, (B) is a lottery for bell number 1 -2, (C) is a lottery for bell number 2, and (D) is a lottery for bell number 3. In the above slot machine, (A) shows the corresponding relationship between the bonus condition device and the performance group A number, and (B) shows the corresponding relationship between the winning replay condition device and the performance group B number. A diagram showing the correspondence between the effect group number and the condition device group number in the above-mentioned slot machine. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing the winning numbers assigned to each condition device in the slot machine. In the above slot machine, (A) shows the bonus condition device, and (B) shows the winning re-play condition device (1). FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a winning re-play condition device (2) in the slot machine. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a winning re-play condition device (3) in the slot machine. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a winning replay condition device (4) in the slot machine. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a winning replay condition device (5) in the slot machine. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a winning replay condition device (6) in the slot machine. 13 is a flowchart showing the flow of a setting change process, a game progress control process, and a game start waiting process in the slot machine. 13 is a flow chart showing the flow of an internal lottery process in the slot machine, and FIG. 13 is a flow chart showing the flow of a group number setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing a flow of section type number management lever processing in the slot machine. 13 is a flowchart showing a further flow of the section type number management lever process. In the above slot machine, (A) is a flowchart showing the advantageous zone transition process, and (B) is a flowchart showing the chance game number lottery process. 13 is a flowchart showing the flow of processing when an AT wins in the above-mentioned slot machine. 13 is a flow chart showing the flow of the seven number correction process, the flow of the correction counter process, and the flow of the arrival flag process in the above slot machine. 13 is a flowchart showing the flow of lever processing when entering the AT in the above slot machine. 13 is a flowchart showing the flow of the loop CU rank set process, the seven loop lottery process, and the gold seven loop lottery correction process in the above slot machine. 13 is a flowchart showing the flow of a bell number counter correction process in the slot machine. 13 is a flowchart showing a flow of a lever wait process in the slot machine. 13 is a flow chart showing the flow of the lever processing for the main game state number 1, the flow of the chance mode number determination processing, and the flow of the lever processing for the main game state numbers 2 and 5 in the above slot machine. 13 is a flowchart showing the flow of lever processing after AT winning in the above-mentioned slot machine. 13A is a flow chart showing the flow of the main game state number 3 lever processing in the above slot machine, and FIG. 13B is a flow chart showing the flow of the gold seven loop rewrite lottery correction processing. In the above slot machine, (A) is a flow chart showing the flow of the main game state number 4 lever processing, and (B) is a flow chart showing the flow of the AT period preferential game number lottery processing. 13 is a flowchart showing a flow of a standby effect process in the slot machine. 13 is a flowchart showing the flow of section type number management game ending processing in the slot machine. 13 is a flowchart showing a flow of an accumulation counter process in the slot machine. 13 is a flowchart showing a flow of main game state number 0 complete stop processing in the slot machine. 13 is a flowchart showing the flow of the end processing after entering the AT in the above-mentioned slot machine. 13 is a flowchart showing the continuation of the above-mentioned AT entry end processing. 13A is a flow chart showing the flow of the main game state number 1 full stop processing, and FIG. 13B is a flow chart showing the flow of the main game state number 2, 5 full stop processing in the above slot machine. 13 is a flowchart showing a flow of main game state number 3 full stop processing in the above slot machine. 13 is a flowchart showing the continuation of the main game state number 3 full stop processing. 13 is a flowchart showing another continuation of the main game state number 3 full stop processing. 13 is a flowchart showing a flow of main game state number 4 full stop processing in the slot machine. 13A is a flow chart showing the flow of the main game state number 6 full stop processing, and FIG. 13B is a flow chart showing the flow of the main game state number 7 full stop processing in the above slot machine. This is a flowchart showing the flow of the advantageous zone clear counter management process in the above-mentioned slot machine. 13 is a flowchart showing a flow of a timer interrupt process in the slot machine. 1A is a diagram showing a first conversation effect display in the slot machine, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing a second conversation effect display. FIG. 13A is a diagram showing another aspect of the range image in the dialogue display of the conversation performance display in the above slot machine, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing an aspect in which the dialogue display of the conversation performance display is displayed in an overlapping manner. FIG. 13A is a diagram showing another mode in which the dialogue display of the conversation performance display is superimposed on the conversation performance display in the above slot machine, and FIG. In the above slot machine, (A) is a diagram showing a mode in which a conversation performance display is displayed while a press navigation performance display is being displayed, and (B) is a diagram showing another mode in which a conversation performance display is displayed while a press navigation performance display is being displayed. 1A is a diagram showing a first subtitle effect display in the slot machine, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing a second subtitle effect display. FIG. 13A is a diagram showing another aspect of the first subtitle effect display in the slot machine, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing another aspect of the second subtitle effect display. FIG. 13A shows an aspect of the slot machine in which a background frame is added to the characters of the second subtitle effect display, and FIG. 13B shows an aspect in which an error notification display is displayed together with the second subtitle effect display. FIG. 13A shows the state of the above slot machine when a subtitle effect display is displayed while a push navigation effect display is being displayed, and FIG. 13B shows the state of the subtitle effect display when the characters appear garbled. FIG. 13 shows an expectation level presentation display in the slot machine. 13A to 13F are diagrams showing the display transitions when a GET effect is executed in the above slot machine, in the order of (A) to (F). This is a timing chart showing the relationship between the timing of the third stop operation, the push navigation effect display, the awarding of game value, the GET effect sound, the GET effect display, and the subtitle effect display when executing the GET effect in the above-mentioned slot machine. FIG. 1A is a diagram showing a first scene change presentation in the slot machine, and FIG. FIG. 1A is a diagram showing the display state of the image display unit in the above slot machine just before the blackout effect is executed, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing the display state of the image display unit when the blackout effect is executed. 13 is a timing chart when the settlement switch in the second embodiment is operated alone. 13 is a timing chart showing the case where the max bet switch in the second embodiment is operated alone. 13 is a timing chart showing a case where the max bet switch is operated during the operation of the settlement switch in the second embodiment. 13 is a timing chart showing a case where a sub-switch is operated during operation of a settlement switch in the second embodiment. In the second embodiment, (A) is a timing chart when the stop switch is operated while the settlement switch is being operated, and (B) is a timing chart when the settlement switch is operated while the stop switch is being operated. 13 is a timing chart showing a case where an error occurs during operation of a settlement switch in the second embodiment. 13 is a timing chart showing a case where a reset switch is operated during operation of a settlement switch operated during an error in the second embodiment. In the second embodiment, (A) is a figure showing an example of the change in the push order navigation display image when the push order for the first stop operation is correct, and (B) is a figure showing an example of the change in the push order navigation display image when the push order for the first stop operation is incorrect. In the second embodiment, (A) is a figure showing an example of the change in the push order navigation display image when the push order for the first to third stop operations is correct, and (B) is a figure showing an example of the change in the push order navigation display image when the push order for the first to third stop operations is incorrect. A figure showing an example of the execution timing of the GET effect and the back lamp effect when the button press order is correct in the second embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of the execution timing of the GET effect and the back lamp effect and the display update timing of the number of credits in the second embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of reel control in the second embodiment. In the second embodiment, (A) is a flowchart showing the flow of control processing when a power outage occurs after the third stop operation is received, (B) is a flowchart showing the flow of re-rotation processing A, and (C) is a flowchart showing the flow of re-rotation processing B. A figure showing an example of the lighting state of the stop switch lamp during reel re-spinning in the second embodiment. A diagram showing the arrangement of symbols on each reel in a gaming machine of a third embodiment. A diagram showing pattern combinations in a gaming machine of a third embodiment. A diagram showing pattern combinations in a gaming machine of a third embodiment. A diagram showing pattern combinations in a gaming machine of a third embodiment. A diagram showing pattern combinations in a gaming machine of a third embodiment. A diagram showing types of condition devices in a gaming machine of a third embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a number placement table according to the winning probability of the winning number linked to the small role re-play condition device number in the gaming machine of the third embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a number placement table according to the winning probability of the winning number linked to the bonus condition device number in the gaming machine of the third embodiment. A diagram showing the correspondence between various condition devices, performance group numbers, and condition device group numbers in a gaming machine of a third embodiment. A transition diagram showing the transition conditions of the RT state in the gaming machine of the third embodiment. A diagram showing various variables referenced in the transition control of the main game state in a gaming machine of a third embodiment. A transition diagram showing the transition conditions of the main game state in a gaming machine of a third embodiment. A diagram showing the types of lotteries executed in each main game state in a gaming machine of a third embodiment. A diagram showing types of instructions given to a player in a gaming machine of a third embodiment. An explanatory diagram for explaining the timing that is considered to be a perfect push in the gaming machine of the third embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing the contents notified to a player in a normal big game in the gaming machine of the third embodiment. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the procedure for transitioning to a practice mode in a gaming machine of a third embodiment. FIG. A figure showing the content of a pressing image displayed to a player during practice mode in a gaming machine of a third embodiment. A figure showing the content of a pressing image displayed to a player during practice mode in a gaming machine of a third embodiment. A figure showing the content of a pressing image displayed to a player during practice mode in a gaming machine of a third embodiment. This figure shows the pattern number that determines whether a perfect push is successful and the difficulty level of the push in the push image displayed to the player in the gaming machine of the third embodiment. An explanatory diagram to explain the specifications for calculating a score based on the accuracy of vita-oshi in the gaming machine of the third embodiment. A figure showing the difference in the notification manner when a single drum notification is performed in non-practice mode and practice mode in a gaming machine of the third embodiment. A figure showing the difference in the notification manner when a third drum notification is performed in non-practice mode and practice mode in a gaming machine of the third embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing the contents of a game state 3: full stop process executed by a main control means when all reels stop during a type 1 BB game in a gaming machine of a third embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing the contents of a first stop time score calculation process executed by the sub-control means when the reel stops for the first time during a single reel notification in the gaming machine of the third embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing the contents of a second stop time score calculation process executed by the sub-control means when the second reel stops during a single reel drum notification in the gaming machine of the third embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing the contents of a third stop time score calculation process executed by the sub-control means when the last reel stops during a single reel drum notification in the gaming machine of the third embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing the contents of a first stop time score calculation process executed by the sub-control means when the reels first stop upon a three-time drum notification in the gaming machine of the third embodiment. A flowchart showing the contents of a second stop time score calculation process executed by the sub-control means when the second reel stops during a three-drum notification in a gaming machine of a third embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing the content of a third stop time score calculation process executed by the sub-control means when the last reel stops during a third reel drum notification in the gaming machine of the third embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing the contents of the score calculation process executed by the sub-control means when a number-adjustment role is won in the gaming machine of the third embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing the contents of a score calculation process when no instruction is given, which is executed by the sub-control means when no instruction is given in the gaming machine of the third embodiment. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the national ranking regarding timing accuracy displayed on the screen of the information terminal in the third embodiment. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the regional rankings regarding timing accuracy displayed on the screen of the information terminal in the third embodiment. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display timing of a reel stop suggestion screen and a game standby screen in a gaming machine of a fourth embodiment. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display timing of a reel stop suggestion screen and a game standby screen in a gaming machine of a fourth embodiment. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display timing of a reel stop suggestion screen and a game standby screen in a gaming machine of a fourth embodiment. FIG. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a system menu screen in a gaming machine of a fourth embodiment. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the timing at which an event that occurs during setting confirmation is reflected in the error history in the gaming machine of the fourth embodiment. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the timing at which an event that occurs during setting confirmation is reflected in the error history in the gaming machine of the fourth embodiment. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining how an event that occurs during setting confirmation is reflected in the error history in the gaming machine of the fourth embodiment. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining how an event that occurs during setting confirmation is reflected in the error history in the gaming machine of the fourth embodiment. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining how an event that occurs during setting confirmation is reflected in the error history in the gaming machine of the fourth embodiment. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of an error history display screen when an error occurs during reel rotation in a gaming machine of a fourth embodiment. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of an error history display screen when an error occurs during reel rotation in a gaming machine of a fourth embodiment. FIG. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the error history display screen when multiple errors occur during setting confirmation in the gaming machine of the fourth embodiment. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the error history display screen when multiple errors occur during play and setting confirmation in the gaming machine of the fourth embodiment. FIG. 13 is a front view of the slot machine according to the fifth embodiment. A front view showing the state where the front door is removed from the slot machine of the fifth embodiment. An oblique view of a pachinko game machine relating to the fifth embodiment. A rear view of a pachinko game machine of the fifth embodiment. A diagram showing LED boards arranged around the display screen of the slot machine of the fifth embodiment. 13A is a diagram showing a modified example of the LED board in the slot machine of the fifth embodiment, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing another modified example of the LED board. A diagram showing light-emitting components in a slot machine of a fifth embodiment. 13A is a diagram showing a modified example of the light emitting components in the slot machine of the fifth embodiment, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing another modified example of the light emitting components. In the slot machine of the fifth embodiment, (A) is a figure showing an example of the installation posture of the light-emitting components, (B) is a figure showing another example of the installation posture of the light-emitting components, and (C) is a figure showing yet another example of the installation posture of the light-emitting components. 13A and 13B are diagrams for explaining the biased state of the red LED element of the light-emitting component in the slot machine of the fifth embodiment, in which (A) is a diagram showing an example of a state in which the red LED element is biased to the right, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of a state in which the red LED element is biased downward. In the slot machine of the fifth embodiment, (A) is a diagram showing a state in which an LED element of a different color is installed between each red LED element of two light-emitting components arranged in the left-right direction, and (B) is a diagram showing a state in which an LED element of a different color is installed between each red LED element of two light-emitting components arranged in the up-down direction. In the slot machine of the fifth embodiment, (A) is a diagram showing a state in which no LED element of a different color is installed between the red LED elements of two light-emitting components arranged in the left-right direction, and (B) is a diagram showing a state in which an LED element of a different color in another light-emitting component is installed between the red LED elements of two light-emitting components arranged in the left-right direction. An oblique view of the board case unit in a pachinko game machine of the fifth embodiment, viewed from the rear. A view of the board case unit in a pachinko game machine of the fifth embodiment from the rear. A view of the board case unit in a pachinko game machine of the fifth embodiment from the front. A diagram showing a main control board housed in a board case of a board case unit in a pachinko game machine of a fifth embodiment. In the fifth embodiment of the pachinko game machine, (A) is a diagram showing a case where all LED segments of the LED indicator lights that make up the setting value display monitor are in an unlit state, (B) is a diagram showing a case where all LED segments of the LED indicator lights are in an lit state, and (C) is a diagram showing a case where some of the LED segments of the LED indicator lights are in an lit state. In the fifth embodiment of the pachinko game machine, (A) is a diagram showing a case where all LED segments of the LED indicator lights that make up the performance display monitor are in an unlit state, (B) is a diagram showing a case where all LED segments of the LED indicator lights are in an lit state, and (C) is a diagram showing a case where some of the LED segments of the LED indicator lights are in an lit state. A diagram showing the relationship between the height of the crimping member of the board case unit and the CPU in a pachinko game machine of the fifth embodiment. 13A and 13B are diagrams showing a step portion formed in a base case of a pachinko game machine of the fifth embodiment, in which (A) is a diagram showing the shape of the step portion, (B) is a diagram showing the step portion as viewed from the direction of the right edge portion of the base case, and (C) is a diagram showing the step portion with a colored sealing material affixed thereto. A diagram showing the relationship between the screws and connectors of the main control board in a pachinko game machine of the fifth embodiment.

Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the above drawings.
In the following explanation, "role determination process" refers to a selection action such as a lottery (also called "role determination") carried out using electronic devices, etc., in order to randomly select one or more role determination result numbers (winning items) from a number of pre-set role determination result numbers (consisting of one or more game roles or losses (except when losses are not set)). Here, the role determination result number specifies one or more game roles (also called "permitted roles" or "winning roles") or losses that are permitted to be established in a game in which the role determination result number is determined (selected). Note that role determination is also called "internal lottery" or "role lottery", and the "selection" in lottery or winning is also called "chosen" or "sen".

In addition, when describing "a game role is established" or "a game role is established", "establishment" is used as a concept indicating that the symbol combination (corresponding symbols) that constitutes the game role (whether it is a game role with a payout of game medals (minor role) or a game role without a payout (replay role or special role)) corresponding to the determined role determination result number is displayed in a predetermined stopping state (for example, a state in which they are lined up on an active line, which will be described later). However, the timing of establishment can be any appropriate timing, such as the time when the reel stop operation is performed at a time when the corresponding symbol of the game role can be stopped and displayed on the active line, the time when the corresponding symbol of the game role is stopped and displayed on the active line, the time when the slot machine identifies that the corresponding symbol of the game role is stopped and displayed on the active line, or the time when the identification result is stored in the memory area.

In the following description, the player's operation of inserting (manipulating) game medals into the medal insertion slot 21 (described below) and the operation of pressing the 1-BET switch 22 or the MAX-BET switch 23 to make available for play a specified number of credited (stored) game medals for play are collectively referred to as betting operations. This betting operation, as well as the player's operation of pressing the settlement switch 24 (described below), tilting the start lever (also referred to as the "start switch") 25, and pressing the stop switches (also referred to as the "stop buttons") 26a, 26b, and 26c are collectively referred to as game operations. In general, the term "insertion" in slot machines can mean either "putting game medals into the slot machine" or "making available for play." In the following explanation, we will generally use the word "input" to mean the former and the word "bet" to mean the latter.

The "number of medals paid out" (also called "number of medals paid out") refers to the number of medals awarded to a player in one game. The act of paying out medals includes the act of actually paying out medals from the slot machine to the outside (also called "actual payout") and the act of increasing the numerical value electromagnetically stored as medals stored in the slot machine (also called "storage addition payout").

In addition, the "number of game medals acquired" (also referred to as "number of medals acquired") means a numerical value counted as the total number of game medals acquired by a player (paid out to a player) during a specified period (which can be set arbitrarily, for example, during the AT period or bonus period).
In addition, the "difference in number of medals" (also called "difference number") refers to the total number of medals paid out during a given period minus the total number of medals bet (which may be a negative value). The "number of medals acquired" and the "difference in number" can be used as different concepts, but in the following they are treated as synonyms.

"Freeze" refers to a delay in the execution of a specific control process related to the progress of the game for a certain period of time. There are two types of freeze: a freeze that is set when the operation of the start lever 25 is accepted (also called a "reel spin start freeze"), and a freeze that is set after all reels have stopped spinning (also called a "reel spin stop freeze"). During the freeze period, the game is in a state where game operations by the player cannot be effectively accepted. During the freeze period, a reel effect (also called a "reel effect") may be performed. A reel effect is an effect in which reels 3a, 3b, and 3c (described below) are rotated and any combination of symbols is displayed in a stopped state, regardless of game operations by the player.

In the following explanation, "push navigation" refers to a process (action) that notifies the player of the order and position to press in order to assist in the realization of the game role selected by role determination. Among push navigations, those that specifically assist in the realization of a replay role are called "RP navigation" (RP is an abbreviation for replay), those that assist in the realization of a winning role (minor role) are called "prize navigation", and those that assist with the position to press to stop a specific symbol on an active line are called "eye push navigation" (mainly performed by the secondary control means). From another perspective, assisting with the position to press can also be said to assist the player with the timing at which to operate the stop switch. Furthermore, when it is necessary to distinguish between the push navigation performed on the main control means side and the push navigation performed on the sub-control means side, the former is also referred to as the "main side push navigation" ("main side RP navigation", "main side winning navigation", "main side eye push navigation") and the latter is also referred to as the "sub side push navigation" ("sub side RP navigation", "sub side winning navigation", "sub side eye push navigation") or as the "push navigation effect" ("RP navigation effect", "winning navigation effect", "eye push navigation effect"). The former and latter are also collectively referred to as the stop switch operation mode notification effect.

In the following explanations and drawings, values may be expressed not only in decimal but also in binary or hexadecimal notation. To distinguish between these, when expressed in binary, a "B" is added to the end of the value, and when expressed in hexadecimal, an "H" is added to the end of the value. When expressed in decimal, no special notation is added to the end of the value.

[First embodiment]
FIG. 1 shows a slot machine (referred to as "slot machine 1") as a first embodiment of a gaming machine according to the present invention, and the basic configuration of this slot machine 1 will be described below with reference to FIGS. 1 to 8.
<Appearance of the slot machine>
As shown in FIG. 1(A), the slot machine 1 has a front door 2 attached to the front of the main body cabinet so as to be able to open and close. On the front of the front door 2, an upper panel assembly 10, a middle panel assembly 20, a lower panel assembly 30 and a receiving tray assembly 40 are attached in order from the top.

In the center of the upper panel assembly 10, the display screen 11a (also called "image display unit DP") of the image display device (also called "liquid crystal display device") 11 (see Figure 2) arranged on the back side is arranged facing forward, and a first performance lamp 12, second performance lamps 13a and 13b, and third performance lamps 14a and 14b are arranged around it. In addition, a pair of upper speakers 15a and 15b are arranged on the left and right below the display screen 11a.

At the center of the middle panel assembly 20, a display window W is provided that faces the surfaces of the three reels 3a, 3b, and 3c that are arranged side by side inside the main body housing. Below this display window W, there are a medal insertion slot 21 for inserting game medals (game media), a 1-BET switch 22 for betting one game medal within the credited range, a MAX-BET switch 23 for betting the maximum bet allowable number of game medals (also called the "prescribed number", for example, three medals) at once, and a clearing switch 24 for paying out the bet game medals and/or the credited game medals. The machine is provided with a calculation switch 24, a start lever 25 which is operated to start the rotation of all the reels 3a, 3b, 3c (the reels are also called "drums"), three stop switches 26a, 26b, 26c for individually stopping the rotation of each of the reels 3a, 3b, 3c (the stop switch 26a on the left side of the figure corresponds to the reel 3a, the stop switch 26b in the middle corresponds to the reel 3b, and the stop switch 26c on the right side corresponds to the reel 3c), and a reject switch 27 for returning game medals that have been inserted through the medal insertion port 21 and remain there.

Each stop switch has a button-like operation receiving part that retracts when the player presses it with their hand and returns to its original position due to spring force or the like when the player releases their hand. When this operation receiving part is pressed (pushed by hand), the contacts of the electrical circuit close and the state changes from OFF to ON, and when the pressing operation is released (hand is released), the contacts open and the state changes from ON to OFF.

Between the medal slot 21 and the MAX-BET switch 23, there are provided a selection button (also called a "direction button" or "cross key") 54 and a decision button (also called a "menu button" or "PUSH button") 55 for the player to input information to the slot machine 1. Hereinafter, the selection button 54 and the decision button 55 are collectively referred to as "sub-buttons". As shown in FIG. 1B, the selection button 54 is composed of four buttons, an up button 54U, a down button 54D, a left button 54L, and a right button 54R, which specify the up, down, left, or right directions. Depending on the button operated by the player, one of the up, down, left, or right directions is specified. The decision button 55 is formed of a light-transmitting material, and has a light source such as an LED provided inside. When the operation of the decision button 55 is disabled, the light source inside the switch is turned off, and when it is enabled, it flashes (or may be lit).

When the sub-button is pressed (pushed by hand), the contacts of the electric circuit close and the state changes from OFF to ON, and when the pressing operation is released (hand is removed), the contacts open and the state changes from ON to OFF. When the sub-button is operated effectively, the sub-control means 200, which will be described later, may execute a predetermined presentation process according to the operation. There may also be a presentation process that prompts the player to operate the sub-button. Furthermore, by operating the sub-button in a predetermined procedure, it is possible to display an adjustment screen for adjusting the brightness of the screen of the image display device 11 and the volume of the speaker.

Here, the up button 54U, down button 54D, left button 54L, and right button 54R constituting the selection button 54 may be able to be turned on/off individually, or a cross-shaped key top (cross key) may be provided so that the button in the direction in which the cross key is tilted is turned on. When the up button 54U, down button 54D, left button 54L, and right button 54R can be turned on/off using the cross key, two adjacent buttons (up and right, right and down, down and left, left and up) can be turned on at the same time, but opposing buttons (up and down, right and left) may not be able to be turned on at the same time.

The inside of the medal insertion port 21 branches into an acceptance passage (leading to a hopper 50 described below) through which the inserted game medal passes if the inserted game medal is validly accepted, and a return passage (leading to a medal payout outlet 41 described below) through which the inserted game medal passes if the inserted game medal is not accepted, and a blocker 48 (see FIG. 2) is provided at the branching point. This blocker 48 is configured to selectively open one of the acceptance passage and the return passage and close the other, so that during the period when the inserted game medal is validly accepted, the blocker 48 guides the game medal inserted into the medal insertion port 21 to the acceptance passage, and during the other period, the blocker 48 guides the game medal inserted into the medal insertion port 21 to the return passage. In the following description, the ON state of the blocker 48 indicates a state in which a game medal inserted into the medal insertion port 21 is guided to an acceptance passage (a state in which a game medal can be accepted), and the OFF state of the blocker 48 indicates a state in which a game medal inserted into the medal insertion port 21 is guided to a return passage (a state in which a game medal cannot be accepted).

In addition, inside the medal insertion port 21, three insertion medal sensors 28a, 28b, 28c (see FIG. 2) are provided for detecting game medals. The insertion medal sensor 28a detects that a game medal has been inserted into the medal insertion port 21, and is installed upstream of the blocker 48 on the path along which the inserted game medal flows. The insertion medal sensor 28b detects that a game medal inserted into the medal insertion port 21 has been guided to the receiving path and effectively received, and is located downstream (closer to the hopper 50 described below) of the blocker 48. The insertion medal sensor 28c detects that a game medal inserted into the medal insertion port 21 has passed through the branching point between the receiving path and the return path, and is located near the branching point (slightly closer to the insertion medal sensor 28b than the blocker 48).

When both the inserted medal sensor 28a and the inserted medal sensor 28b detect a game medal, it means that the game medal has been inserted into the medal insertion port 21 and that the inserted game medal has been validly accepted. On the other hand, when the inserted medal sensor 28a detects a game medal but the inserted medal sensor 28b does not detect a game medal, it means that the game medal has been inserted into the medal insertion port 21, but the inserted game medal has not been validly accepted and has been returned. In addition, when the three inserted medal sensors 28a, 28b, and 28c detect the passage of game medals in an order different from the specified order (the order of 28a, 28c, and 28b) or when some of the inserted medal sensors do not detect the passage of game medals, it means that an abnormal passage such as a reverse flow of game medals has occurred.

The display window W is configured so that when all three reels 3a to 3c have stopped, three symbols per reel are displayed so that a total of nine symbols are visible to the player. The winning line 29 that horizontally connects the symbol display areas in the middle rows of the reels 3a, 3b, and 3c is activated when a specified number of game medals are bet, and is configured so that the presence or absence of a game combination can be determined based on the symbol combinations that are stopped and displayed on the activated winning line. The activated winning line is also called the "active line." In addition to the winning line 29, the line that horizontally connects the symbol display areas in the upper rows of the reels 3a, 3b, and 3c is called the upper line, and the line that horizontally connects the symbol display areas in the lower rows of the reels 3a, 3b, and 3c is called the lower line. In addition, the line connecting the symbol display areas of the upper section of reel 3a, the middle section of reel 3b, and the lower section of reel 3c is called a right-downward line, and the line connecting the symbol display areas of the lower section of reel 3a, the middle section of reel 3b, and the upper section of reel 3c is called a right-upward line.

In addition, various display lamps composed of LED lamps and the like are arranged in the slot machine 1. In this embodiment, the display lamps include a MAX-BET switch display lamp 46a, a BET number display lamp 46b, a slot possible display lamp 46c, a game start display lamp 46d, a replay display lamp 46e, a status display lamp 46f, a count display lamp 46g, a reserved number display lamp 46h, and a payout number display lamp 46j. These display lamps are configured to be controlled by a main control board 60 (main control means 100) described later.

The MAX-BET switch indicator lamp 46a is turned on when it is possible to bet gaming medals, and is disposed inside the MAX-BET switch 23. When turned on, it illuminates the MAX-BET switch 23 partially or entirely. The other indicator lamps are disposed to the side or below the indicator window W in the middle panel assembly 20.

The BET number indicator lamp 46b (hereinafter also referred to as "BET lamp 46b") indicates the number of game medals bet, and is composed of a 1-BET indicator lamp 46bC that is lit when one or more game medals are bet, a 2-BET indicator lamp 46bB that is lit when two or more game medals are bet, and a MAX-BET indicator lamp 46bA that is lit when three game medals are bet. The insertion possible indicator lamp 46c is lit when game medals can be inserted, and the game start indicator lamp 46d is lit when a game can be started by operating the start lever 25. The replay indicator lamp 46e is lit when a replay role described below is established in any game and game medals are automatically bet by the automatic bet process described below.

The status indicator lamp 46f is turned on when the accumulated (credited) game medals are to be cleared, and the number indicator lamp 46g indicates the number of possible push navigations (which is decremented by one each time a push navigation is executed, and may also be increased by a lottery or the like) when, for example, AT is set. The number of accumulated medals indicator lamp 46h (hereinafter also referred to as "CRE lamp 46h") indicates the number of accumulated game medals by incrementing one at a time, and the number of payouts indicator lamp 46j indicates the number of game medals to be paid out when a minor winning combination described below is achieved by incrementing one at a time. The number of accumulated medals indicator lamp 46h and the number of payouts indicator lamp 46j each consist of two 7-segment displays (consisting of 7 segment lamps for displaying numbers and one segment lamp for displaying a decimal point (dot)) to display the upper and lower digits of the numbers.

In addition, the payout number display lamp 46j is also configured to display letters (alphabet) or numbers (hereinafter also referred to as "error code") indicating the type of error when some abnormality (error) occurs in the slot machine 1. Errors set in this embodiment include HP error, HE error, H0 error, CE error, CP error, CH error, C0 error, C1 error, FE error, E1 error, E5 error, E6 error, E7 error, etc. The HP error is an error when it is determined that game medals are stuck at the medal payout outlet of the hopper 50 described later, the HE error is an error (hopper empty error) when it is determined that the game medals in the hopper 50 are empty, and the H0 error is an error when it is determined that the game medals have abnormally passed through the payout sensor. The CE error is an error (game medal retention error) when the inserted medal sensor judges that a game medal has been retained, the CP error is an error when it is judged that an inserted game medal has passed illegally, the C0 error is an error when it is judged that an abnormal input has been made to the inserted medal sensor, and the C1 error is an error when it is judged that an abnormality has occurred in the passage of the inserted medal sensor. The FE error is an error (full error) when it is judged that the auxiliary storage 85 described later is full, the E1 error is an error (RAM error) when the contents of the memory device (RAM) are not normal when the power is turned on, and the E5 error is an error (reel stop error) when the combination of patterns when all the reels stop is abnormal (the corresponding patterns constituting roles other than the role that can be established are stopped and displayed). The E6 error is an error (setting value error) when the value of the setting value (setting value) described later for determining the role determination probability is out of range, and the E7 error is an error (built-in random number error) when an abnormality is detected in the update state of the built-in random number used in each lottery, etc. The errors E1, E5, E6, and E7 (collectively referred to as "E-system errors") can be cleared by changing the settings as described below, and the other errors can be cleared by operating the reset switch 82 as described below.

Furthermore, this payout number display lamp 46j also has the function of displaying the navigation number, described below, which indicates the operation sequence (push sequence) of the stop switches 26a to 26c. The payout number display lamp 46j when displaying the navigation number is also referred to as the "main side push sequence display." In addition, this payout number display lamp 46j also has the function of displaying the setting value, described below, when confirming and changing the setting, described below. The payout number display lamp 46j when displaying the setting value is also referred to as the "setting value display."

A transparent lower panel cover 31 is attached to the center of the lower panel assembly 30, and decorative lamps 32a, 32b are arranged on both the left and right ends. A translucent lower panel base with a specified design and a lower panel illumination lamp (neither shown) are attached to the back side of the lower panel cover 31, and the design on the lower panel base is illuminated from behind when the lower panel illumination lamp is turned on.

The tray assembly 40 has a medal payout outlet 41 for paying out medals, and a medal storage tray 42 for storing medals facing the medal payout outlet 41. An ashtray 43 is provided to the left of the medal storage tray 42. In addition, on the left and right of the medal payout outlet 41, speaker ports 45a, 45b consisting of a number of small holes are formed facing the front of a pair of lower speakers 44a, 44b (see Figure 2) located on the back side of the tray assembly 40.

In addition, a hopper 50 (see FIG. 2) is provided inside the main body cabinet for dispensing game medals that are acquired when a predetermined winning mode is achieved as a result of playing, and this hopper 50 is provided with a medal detection unit 51 (see FIG. 2) for detecting game medals. This hopper 50 also has the function of physically storing game medals that have been inserted and validly accepted. Furthermore, an auxiliary storage 85 (see FIG. 2) is provided near the hopper 50 for storing game medals that have overflowed from the hopper 50, and a fullness detection unit 86 (see FIG. 2) is provided for detecting whether this auxiliary storage 85 is full (a state in which game medals may overflow from the auxiliary storage 85).

<Connection between the control board and each device>
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 2, the slot machine 1 is provided with three control boards, a main control board 60, a sub-main control board 70A, and a sub-sub control board 70B, as main control boards for controlling the slot machine 1 (the sub-main control board 70A and the sub-sub control board 70B are collectively referred to as the sub-control board 70). The main control related to the progress of the game (including the drive control of the reels 3a to 3c and the role determination process, etc.) is performed by a control circuit arranged on the main control board 60, and the lighting control by the lamps such as the back lamps 38a to 38c, etc. is performed by a control circuit arranged on the sub-main control board 70A. In addition, the control of the performance image display by the image display device 11 and the control of the sound generation from the speakers such as the upper speakers 15a and 15b are mainly performed by a control circuit arranged on the sub-sub control board 70B. Furthermore, information transmission between the main control board 60 and the sub-control board 70 can only be performed in one direction, from the main control board 60 to the sub-main control board 70A, and information transmission between the sub-main control board 70A and the sub-sub control board 70B can be performed in both directions.

<Configuration of main control board 60>
The main control board 60 is provided with a main CPU 61 that performs various arithmetic processing related to the game, a ROM 62 that is a read-only memory device that stores control programs and the like, and a RAM 63 ("RAM" is also referred to as "RWM") that is a memory device to which information can be written and read. The main CPU 61 controls each drive circuit and the like according to the control program stored in the ROM 62, thereby controlling the progress of the game in the slot machine 1. The ROM 62 and RAM 63 are non-volatile memory devices that are configured to be able to retain stored information even when power is not supplied.

The main CPU 61 is connected to a clock pulse generator 64 for generating a clock pulse (clock signal), a frequency divider 65 for dividing the clock pulse generated by the clock pulse generator 64, a random number generator 66 for generating random numbers used for determining a role based on the clock pulse (or the divided clock pulse), and a random number capture circuit 67 for capturing the random numbers generated by the random number generator 66. The clock pulse generator 64 is composed of two oscillators (not shown), and each oscillator outputs a clock signal that is asynchronous with each other. Hereinafter, the clock signal of a predetermined frequency output from one oscillator is referred to as an internal clock, and the clock signal of a predetermined frequency (which may be different from the internal clock, but may be the same) output from the other oscillator is referred to as an external clock. For example, the internal clock is used as an operating clock of the main CPU 61 or an update clock for random numbers used for a predetermined lottery other than determining a role, and the external clock is used as an update clock for random numbers used in determining a role. The main CPU 61, ROM 62, RAM 63, divider 65, random number generator 66, random number capture circuit 67, interface circuit 68, etc. may be mounted on a single IC chip to configure a one-chip microcomputer. The main CPU 61 is also configured to transmit signals to the motor drive circuit 36, the display lamp control circuit 47, the hopper drive circuit 52, and the sub-control board 70 via the interface circuit 68, and to receive signals from the reel position detection circuits 37a, 37b, 37c, the payout detection signal circuit 53, and the storage state signal circuit 87.

The motor drive circuit 36 is a circuit for controlling the rotation and stop of the stepping motors 35a, 35b, and 35c that rotate the reels 3a, 3b, and 3c, respectively, and the display lamp control circuit 47 is a circuit for controlling the various display lamps described above. The reel position detection circuits 37a, 37b, and 37c are circuits that transmit detection signals from reel sensors (not shown) installed on each of the reels 3a, 3b, and 3c to the main control board 60 (the detection circuit 37a corresponds to the reel 3a, the detection circuit 37b corresponds to the reel 3b, and the detection circuit 37c corresponds to the reel 3c). The hopper drive circuit 52 is a circuit that drives the hopper 50 to pay out game medals when a small winning combination is achieved, and the payout detection signal circuit 53 is a circuit that transmits a payout detection signal to the main control board 60 when the medal detection unit 51 detects that game medals have been paid out from the hopper 50. The storage status signal circuit 87 is a circuit that transmits a storage status signal indicating whether the auxiliary storage 85 is full or not to the main control board 60 according to the detection result of the fullness detection unit 86.

The slot machine 1 is also configured to receive power from a power supply device 80 via a main control board 60. A power switch 81, a reset switch 82, and a setting key switch 83 are connected to this power supply device 80, and signals from each of these switches are configured to be sent to the main CPU 61 via an interface circuit 68. Furthermore, the main CPU 61 is configured to receive a signal from a setting change switch 84 via the interface circuit 68.

The power switch 81 is a switch that accepts the operation of turning on and off the power to the slot machine 1 from the power supply device 80, and the reset switch 82 is a switch that is operated by a game store employee or the like when a certain error (an error other than the above-mentioned E-type error) occurs in the slot machine 1 and the cause of the error is removed and the error is resolved. By operating this reset switch 82, the information on the occurrence of the error stored in the main control board 60 and the sub-control board 70 is cleared, and the main control board 60 and the sub-control board 70 execute the process at the time of error resolution accordingly. In addition, the setting key switch 83 is a switch that is operated when checking and changing the setting value that determines the degree (rank) of the winning probability, and the setting change switch 84 is a switch for changing the setting value in multiple stages (six stages in this embodiment).

When the front door 2 is open (also called the "door open state") and power is being supplied to the slot machine 1 (the power switch 81 is ON), the setting key switch 83 is turned ON to switch to the setting confirmation mode, allowing the setting to be confirmed. Also, when the door is open and power is not being supplied to the slot machine 1 (the power switch 81 is OFF), the setting key switch 83 is turned ON, and the power switch 81 is turned ON in this state (power is turned on to the slot machine 1), switching to the setting change mode and allowing the setting to be changed. Furthermore, the setting value can be updated one step at a time each time the setting change switch 84 is operated in this state. Also, after the setting value is updated, the updated setting value is confirmed by tilting the start lever 25, and after the confirmation, the setting change operation is completed by turning the setting key switch 83 OFF.

The setting key switch 83 can be switched between ON and OFF by inserting a specified key (setting key) into a specified lock provided on the main body and rotating it. Also, setting confirmation and setting change cannot be performed while a game is being played (when game medals have been bet (including automatic bets) or when the reels are spinning), but can only be performed while the game is in standby. In the setting confirmation mode and setting change mode, the setting value is displayed on the payout number display lamp 46j using six integer values from "1" to "6" (a separate lamp for displaying the setting value may be provided inside the cabinet of the slot machine 1, etc.).

Power from the power supply device 80 is supplied to the sub-main control board 70A via the main control board 60, and further to the sub-sub control board 70B via the sub-main control board 70A (power may be supplied directly from the power supply device 80 to the sub-main control board 70A and the sub-sub control board 70B). A supply voltage monitoring circuit (not shown) that monitors the supply state of voltage is provided on the circuit that supplies power from the power supply device 80 to the main control board 60 and on the circuit that supplies power to the sub-main control board 70A via the main control board 60. Each supply voltage monitoring circuit is configured to determine that a power supply has been cut off when the supply voltage has dropped to a predetermined voltage value and output a power cut detection signal to the main CPU 61 and the sub-main CPU 71 described below. In addition, each supply voltage monitoring circuit is configured to determine that a power supply has been turned on when the supply voltage has returned to a predetermined voltage value (a value different from the voltage value for power cut determination (for example, a higher value), but may be the same value), and output a power-on detection signal to the main CPU 61 and the sub-main CPU 71. The voltage value when power loss is detected for the main control board 60 is set to a value higher than the voltage value when power loss is detected for the sub-main control board 70A, and the main control board 60 is configured to perform the process (power loss process) that it is programmed to execute when power is lost before the sub-main control board 70A (the same may be true for powering on).

In addition, the main CPU 61 receives signals from the reel stop signal circuit 91, start lever 25, inserted medal sensors 28a, 28b, 28c, 1-BET switch 22, MAX-BET switch 23, and settlement switch 24, which are connected to the switch board 90 or mounted on the switch board 90, via an interface circuit 68.

The main CPU 61 is also connected to a blocker 48 via an interface circuit 68, and is configured to control the blocker 48 on and off. In the following description, a signal for controlling the blocker 48 on and off is also referred to as a "blocker signal." Furthermore, although not shown, the slot machine 1 is provided with a door sensor that detects the open/closed state of the front door 2, and a signal from this door sensor is input to the main CPU 61 via the interface circuit 68. The main CPU 61 determines whether the front door 2 is closed (also referred to as a "door closed state") or open (door open state) based on the signal from the door sensor.

Also, although not shown in the figure, the main CPU 61 is configured to output a predetermined signal (also called an "outer end signal") to a data counter, hall computer, etc. via an external connection terminal board, etc., when a predetermined gaming state (for example, AT state or bonus state) is reached, and this outer end signal can be used to manage the number of times set in the predetermined gaming state, etc., and to present it to the player.

<Configuration of the Sub-Control Board 70>
The sub-control board 70 is composed of a sub-main control board 70A and a sub-sub control board 70B. The sub-main control board 70A is provided with a sub-main CPU 71 that mainly performs various arithmetic processing related to the management of effects, a ROM 72 that is a read-only storage device that stores control programs, and a RAM 73 that is a storage device that can write and read information. Each drive circuit operates according to the control program stored in the ROM 72, thereby controlling the management of image effects and sound effects in the slot machine 1, controlling lamp effects, and the like. The ROM 72 and the RAM 73 are non-volatile storage devices, and are configured to retain stored information even when power is not supplied. In addition, a clock pulse generator and a frequency divider (not shown) are connected to the sub-main CPU 71, and the sub-main CPU 71 executes a predetermined process according to the clock signal generated by the clock pulse generator and the frequency divider.

The sub-main CPU 71 is configured to receive various signals from the main control board 60 via the interface circuit 74 and transmit signals to the lamp control circuit 18. The lamp control circuit 18 is a circuit that controls the lighting of lamps such as the back lamps 38a to 38c. The sub-main CPU 71 also receives output signals from the selection button 54 and the decision button 55 via the interface circuit 74, and causes the sub-sub control board 70B to display a menu screen on the image display device 11 in response to the output signals received from each button, providing information in response to the player's selection operation, and changing the content of the presentation displayed on the image display device 11 during play.

The sub-main CPU 71 is configured to transmit various signals to the sub-sub control board 70B via the interface circuit 74, and to receive various signals from the sub-sub control board 70B. Hereinafter, signals (control signals) transmitted from the main control board 60 to the sub-main control board 70A will also be referred to as "control commands", and signals (alert signals and performance signals) transmitted from the sub-main control board 70A to the sub-sub control board 70B will also be referred to as "performance commands". Furthermore, signals (status signals) transmitted from the sub-sub control board 70B to the sub-main control board 70A will also be referred to as "status commands".

The sub-sub control board 70B is provided with a sub-sub CPU 75 which performs various calculation processes mainly related to the control of image and sound effects, a ROM 76 which is a read-only storage device storing control programs and the like, and a RAM 77 which is a storage device to which information can be written and read. The drive circuits and the like are operated according to the control programs stored in the ROM 76, thereby controlling image and sound effects and the like.
The RAM 76 and the RAM 77 are non-volatile storage devices that are configured to be able to retain stored information even when power is not supplied.

The sub-sub CPU 75 is configured to receive notification signals or performance signals from the sub-main control board 70A via the interface circuit 78, and transmit signals to the display device control circuit 16 and the speaker control circuit 17, as well as transmit a status signal to the sub-main control board 70A. The display device control circuit 16 is a circuit that controls the image display device 11 to display a predetermined performance image, and the speaker control circuit 17 is a circuit that controls the type and volume of sounds generated from speakers such as the upper speakers 15a and 15b. The image display device 11 is also configured to function as a push indicator (also called the "sub-side push order indicator") that displays the operation order (push order) of the stop switches 26a to 26c.

<Reel>
Each of the reels 3a, 3b, 3c is configured to rotate by driving a stepping motor 35a, 35b, 35c. Each of the reels 3a, 3b, 3c is configured of a cylindrical member having translucency, and a translucent reel tape on which a plurality of types of symbols shown in FIG. 3 are displayed is attached to the outer circumferential surface of each of the reels. Each of the reels 3a, 3b, 3c is provided with a back lamp 38a, 38b, 38c on the inner surface thereof. By turning on the back lamp 38a, 38b, 38c, the area of each of the reels 3a, 3b, 3c facing the display window W is entirely illuminated from the inner surface, or only a part of each of the reels 3a, 3b, 3c is illuminated so as to highlight a predetermined symbol combination (for example, a symbol corresponding to a game role arranged on the pay line 29 or a position other than the pay line 29) displayed in a stopped state on each of the reels 3a, 3b, 3c.

<Reel pattern arrangement>
In this embodiment, the symbols displayed by each of the reels 3a to 3c are arranged as shown in FIG. 3(a). Here, the "left reel" in FIG. 3(a) represents the reel 3a, the "middle reel" represents the reel 3b, and the "right reel" represents the reel 3c. In this way, a predetermined number of 10 types of symbols, "red seven", "gold seven", "black bar", "blue bar", "blank A", "blank B", "bell A", "bell B", "watermelon", and "replay" shown in FIG. 3(b), are arranged on each of the reels 3a to 3c. Each symbol arranged on the reel tape is printed in each symbol area divided into 20 equal parts in the longitudinal direction of the reel tape. Hereinafter, the reels 3a, 3b, and 3c are also referred to as the left reel (left reel), the middle reel (middle reel), and the right reel (right reel), respectively. Note that the symbols shown in Fig. 3 are intended to illustrate the arrangement of symbols on each of the reels 3a to 3c, and do not reflect the size of the symbols actually drawn on the reel tape (the relative ratio of the sizes of the symbols). As shown in Fig. 3(a), the symbol at the top of the longitudinal direction of this reel tape is the "Bell A" symbol, symbol number 19, and the symbol at the bottom is the "Replay" symbol, symbol number 0. Therefore, when the reel tape is attached to a reel, the joint of the reel tape will be between the "Bell A" symbol, symbol number 19, and the "Replay" symbol, symbol number 0.

(Background image of reel tape)
In the present embodiment, a background pattern is displayed (drawn) on each of the left and right edges of the reel tape of each of the reels 3a to 3c. An example of the background pattern is shown in FIG. 4. As shown by hatching in FIG. 4(a), in the present embodiment, a background pattern BPT with a wave motif is drawn on the left and right side edges of the reel tape RTP. The background pattern BPT is a seamless continuous pattern in which the length of four reel patterns is one unit (one pattern) in the longitudinal direction of the reel tape RTP. Therefore, the pattern part at the upper end UE of the background pattern BPT and the pattern part at the lower end LE are connected seamlessly to form a continuous pattern. However, at the joint part of the reel tape described above, there may be a misalignment at the joint of the background pattern due to an error in attaching the reel tape or the like.

As shown in FIG. 3, each reel in this embodiment has 20 symbols, and since the length of one unit of background pattern BPT (more precisely, the length in the direction of rotation of the reel) is four symbols, 20/4=5 units of background pattern BPT are drawn continuously. In other words, the length of one unit of background pattern is determined so that the total number of symbols on the reel is an even number when divided by the number of symbols corresponding to one unit of background pattern length. In other words, the total number of symbols on the reel is an integer multiple of the number of symbols corresponding to one unit of background pattern length.

Thus, because the number of symbols displayed in the display window W is three and the length of one pattern of background picture is four symbols (i.e., three or more symbols), even if multiple units of background picture BPT are drawn on the reel tape, no identical image portions will exist in the background picture BPT visible through the display window W when the reels stop. This makes it difficult for the player to realize that the background picture is a repeating pattern, and it is possible to show the player a visually varied background picture without losing interest.

The number of symbols corresponding to one unit of background pattern length is set to a number that is divisible by the total number of symbols on the reel, so that the multiple units of background patterns arranged on the reel tape will not contain a background pattern that is less than one unit in length, and the symbols can be arranged evenly and uniformly without bias among the background patterns for one revolution of the reel. This prevents biased parts of the background patterns from being momentarily displayed in the display window W while the reel is spinning, and being used as a guide to help with hitting the ball.

As shown in FIG. 4(a), the background picture drawn on the left edge of the reel tape RTP and the background picture drawn on the right edge are asymmetrical with respect to the center C of the reel tape RTP, so that the background picture is prevented from becoming monotonous and an interesting background picture can be displayed to the player. Here, the "asymmetrical picture" may be a completely different picture for the background picture on the right edge and the background picture on the left edge as shown in FIG. 4(a), or, for example, a background picture drawn on one edge may be rotated 180 degrees (upside down) and drawn on the other edge. Furthermore, the number of units of the background picture per revolution of the reel is the same 5 units for the background picture on the left edge and the background picture on the right edge, so that the correspondence between the background picture drawn on the left edge and the background picture drawn on the right edge of the reel tape RTP is always constant, and the background pictures on both sides can be made to have a sense of unity. This prevents the background image on the reel tape from making the player feel uneasy, which could affect the player's ability to stop the reels.

Next, the relationship between the reel patterns and the background pattern drawn on the reel tape will be described with reference to FIG. 4(b). FIG. 4(b) illustrates the reel patterns number 19 and 0 to 8 in the pattern arrangement shown in FIG. 3 in the reel tape RTP of the left reel 3a. In FIG. 4(b), the area from the left edge of the reel tape RTP to the most prominent part of the background pattern (the crest part of the background pattern) toward the center C of the reel tape RTP is the left area La. Also, the area from the right edge of the reel tape RTP to the most prominent part of the background pattern (the crest part of the background pattern) toward the center C of the reel tape RTP is the right area Ra. Also, the area between the left area La and the right area Ra is the central area Ca. In this embodiment, the width of the left area La (the length in the direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the reel tape (the direction of rotation of the reel)) and the width of the right area Ra are the same dimension.

As shown in FIG. 4B, the "replay" symbols of symbol numbers 19 and 4, the "bell A" symbols of symbol numbers 0 and 5, the "blank A" symbol of symbol number 3, and the "blank B" symbol of symbol number 8 are all drawn in a size that fits within the central area Ca of the reel tape. In other words, these symbols are not overlapped with the background picture, and such symbols are also called "single symbols." In contrast, the "watermelon" symbols of symbol numbers 1 and 6, the "red 7" symbol of symbol number 2, and the "blue bar" symbol of symbol number 7 are drawn in a size that extends from the central area Ca to both the left area La and the right area Ra. In other words, these symbols are overlapped with the background picture, and such symbols are also called "overlapping symbols."

In this way, by hiding a part of the background pattern with the overlapping pattern, the continuity of the background pattern is broken, and the player is less likely to notice that the background pattern is a repetition of one pattern. This makes it possible to present a background pattern that does not look monotonous and is not easily boring. In addition, by continuously arranging background patterns of one pattern, for example, if the appearance of the background pattern while the reel is rotating shows periodic changes, and it is possible to use the periodic changes as a guide to make a press, it is possible to make such a press difficult by breaking the continuity of the background pattern with the overlapping pattern. Therefore, the length of one pattern of background pattern may be two patterns, or the background pattern drawn on the left edge and the background pattern drawn on the right edge may be symmetrical, and in such a case, the above-mentioned effect can be achieved by arranging a certain number of overlapping patterns on the reel tape.

In the background pattern shown in FIG. 4, the width of the left area La and the width of the right area Ra are the same, but either one may be wider than the other. In addition, the size of the overlapping pattern shown in FIG. 4 covers both the left area La and the right area Ra, but it may cover only one of the areas. In addition, for example, a white reel tape may be colored and the background pattern and reel pattern may be drawn on it. In this case, the coloring applied to the reel tape may have a gradation that gradually becomes thinner from both side edges of the reel tape to the center (in this case, the original color of the reel tape (white) is exposed in the center of the reel tape). However, the coloring applied to the reel tape is not included in the background pattern, and the coloring has no effect on the boundary between the left area La and the center area Ca, and the boundary between the right area Ra and the center area Ca. In addition, the same background pattern as the background pattern shown in FIG. 4 may be drawn on the center reel 3C and the right reel 3R, or a separate background pattern may be drawn on each reel.

<Types of game roles>
In this embodiment, the symbol combinations displayed on the reels 3a to 3c are set as shown in Figures 5 to 8, and these are the symbol combinations (corresponding symbols) that constitute the game roles. In this embodiment, 51 types of game roles are set, including two types of special roles, BB roles 1 and 2 (BB roles; BB is an abbreviation for big bonus. They are also called "one type BB" or "bonus roles"), five types of replay roles, 1 to 5, and 44 types of winning roles (minor roles), 1 to 44. The symbol combinations (corresponding symbols) for achieving each game role, the number of game medals paid out when the game role is achieved, etc. are as shown in Figures 5 to 8.

BB roles 1 and 2 are game roles (bonus roles) that indicate that no game medals are paid out even if they are established, but that the establishment of a specific bonus (also referred to as "BB" in this embodiment) as a special role is activated, and a specific bonus game (also referred to as "BB game") executed under conditions different from normal games can be started from the next game, and that the game will transition to a special game state (also referred to as "BB in operation") that is advantageous to the player. BB role 1 corresponds to the symbol combination of "blue bar, blue bar, red seven," and BB role 2 corresponds to the symbol combination of "black bar, black bar, red seven" (the names of the symbols that make up the game roles are written in the order of reels 3a, 3b, and 3c. The same applies below). The bonus game that can be started by the establishment of BB role 1 or BB role 2 ends when a predetermined number of game medals (for example, 70 medals in this embodiment, but the number can be changed as appropriate) are acquired (as a modification, it may end when a predetermined number of games (for example, 30 games) have been played). BB roles 1 and 2 may be established in non-RT and RT1 (inside BB) described later, but are roles that cannot be established in RT2 (while BB is operating) ("-" in Figures 5 to 8 indicates that they are not established).

In this embodiment, only the BB role is provided as a special role, but an RB role (RB stands for regular bonus) or an MB role (MB stands for middle bonus, also called "two types of BB") may be provided as another special role. When an RB role is established, an RB game may be set to start as a bonus game from the next game, and when an MB role is established, an MB game may be set to start as a bonus game from the next game. In this case, the RB game may end, for example, when a minor role is established a predetermined number of times (e.g., 8 times) or when a predetermined number of games (e.g., 12 times) have been played, and the MB game may end, for example, when a predetermined number of game medals (e.g., more than 200) have been paid out. In addition, multiple special roles (for example, multiple types of BB roles may be provided, or both BB and MB roles may be provided).

When replay roles 1 to 5 are established, no game medals are paid out, but the player is permitted to play the next game without reducing the number of game medals he owns (without inserting new game medals). Note that replay role 1 is configured so that when its corresponding symbol "Bell A Replay (Blue Bar/Black Bar/Gold Seven/Red Seven)" (the "/" in () means "or") is stopped and displayed on the pay line 29, the symbol "Replay" is lined up on a downward-right line in the display window W. For this reason, replay role 1 is also called "Downward-right Replay" (replay is also written as "RP"). For the same reason, replay roles 2 to 4 are also called upward-right RP, upper RP, and middle RP, respectively. In addition, the replay role 5 is configured so that when the corresponding symbols "Bell A, (Blue Bar/Black Bar/Gold Seven/Red Seven), and Bell B" are stopped and displayed on the pay line 29, the symbol "watermelon" is lined up on the upper line in the display window W. For this reason, the replay role 1 is also called the "upper watermelon RP."

As shown in FIG. 3 (reel symbols), the "Replay" symbols on the left reel 3a, center reel 3b, and right reel 3c that constitute the replay role 4 are arranged at intervals of 5 symbols or less on each reel. As a result, when the replay role 4 is won, the corresponding symbol "Replay, Replay, Replay" can be displayed stopped (also called "pulled in") on the pay line 29 regardless of the push order or push position (see the explanation of the reel rotation stop control by the reel control means 134 described later). A role that can pull in the corresponding symbol (any of multiple pairs, if there are multiple pairs) onto the pay line 29 regardless of the operation timing of each stop switch, like this replay role 4, is also called a "100% pull-in possible game role" or a "game role with no misses". Note that replay roles 1 to 3 and 5 are also 100% pull-in possible game roles, like the replay role 4. In addition, replay roles 1 to 5 can be achieved in non-RT and RT1, which will be described later, but cannot be achieved in RT2.

Small roles 1 to 44 are game roles (winning roles) that are configured to pay out a specified number of game medals when they are achieved. Among the small roles 1 to 44, small roles 1 to 36 can be achieved in non-RT, RT1, and RT2, which will be described later, while small roles 37 to 39 can only be achieved in RT2 (when BB is in operation). In addition, small roles 1 to 23 and 40 to 43 are also called "1-coin roles" because the number of coins paid out when they are achieved is set to 1. Similarly, small roles 24 to 37 are also called "15-coin roles", and small roles 38 and 39 are also called "3-coin roles". The 15-coin role is also called the "bell small role".

The small win 37 is configured so that when the corresponding symbols "Bell A, watermelon, (blue bar/black bar/gold seven/red seven)" are stopped and displayed on the pay line 29, the "watermelon" symbols are lined up on a line sloping to the right in the display window W. For this reason, the small win 37 is also called the "watermelon small win." The small win 40 is a one-coin win whose corresponding symbols are "red seven, red seven, red seven." For this reason, the small win 40 is also called the "red sevens, one-coin win." The small wins 1 to 7 and 24 to 37 are gaming wins that can be drawn in 100%.

<Basic operations for playing games>
To play the slot machine 1, first, a player inserts a game medal into the medal insertion slot 21 to place a bet, or operates either the 1-BET switch 22 or the MAX-BET switch 23 to bet a specified number of game medals within the credit range, thereby activating the winning line 29. In this embodiment, the specified number of game medals required to activate the winning line 29 is set to three medals in each of the RT states of non-RT, RT1, and RT2 described later. However, the specified number is not limited to this, and can be changed as appropriate, such as by setting the specified number to a different value depending on the RT state. In addition, a plurality of winning lines may be provided, and the number of activated winning lines may be changed depending on the number of game medals bet.

Next, when the player operates the start lever 25, the number of bets is determined (the bet medals are used for playing), and the role determination process described below is performed. After that, it is confirmed that the minimum play time has elapsed, and then each of the reels 3a to 3c starts to spin. Here, the minimum play time refers to the minimum time that must be secured from when all the reels start to spin in one game until when all the reels start to spin in the next game, and in this embodiment, it is set to 4.1 seconds. When each of the reels 3a to 3c starts to spin, the multiple types of symbols displayed on the outer peripheral surfaces of the reels 3a to 3c are displayed moving up and down (usually from top to bottom) within the display window W. When the rotation of reels 3a to 3c reaches a predetermined speed and starts rotating at a constant speed, each stop switch 26a to 26c is enabled (the operation of the stop switch can be validly accepted), and when the player operates stop switch 26a, the rotation of reel 3a stops, when the player operates stop switch 26b, the rotation of reel 3b stops, and when the player operates stop switch 26c, the rotation of reel 3c stops.

If it is determined that the symbol combination displayed on the pay line 29 is a predetermined winning combination (a symbol corresponding to a game role that can win a game medal), the number of game medals corresponding to each winning combination is paid out by the hopper 50 or added as credits.

Next, the characteristic configuration of the slot machine 1 according to this embodiment will be described with additional reference to FIGS.
<Function Block>
As shown in FIG. 9, from a functional point of view, the slot machine according to this embodiment mainly includes a bet operation for betting game medals (for example, inserting a game medal into the medal insertion slot 21, or pressing the 1-BET switch 22 or the MAX-BET switch 23), a reel rotation start operation for spinning each of the stopped reels 3a to 3c (for example, tilting the start lever 25), and a reel rotation stop operation for stopping the rotation of the three reels 3a, 3b, and 3c that variably display a plurality of types of symbols (for example, The device is equipped with an operation signal output means 95 which outputs a signal (also referred to as a "game operation signal") corresponding to each game operation performed by the player, such as a game operation (for example, pressing the stop switches 26a, 26b, 26c), a settlement operation for paying out bets or accumulated (credited) game medals (for example, pressing the settlement switch 24), a main control means 100 (corresponding to the main control board 60) which performs main control related to the progress of the game, and a sub-control means 200 (corresponding to the sub-control board 70) which performs predetermined presentation control according to the game situation.

(1) Functional blocks of the main control means 100 The main control means 100 is broadly composed of a game state management means 110 that mainly manages the game state, a game progress management means 130 that mainly manages the game progress, and a main communication control means 150 that controls communication in the main control means 100. Of these, the game state management means 110 includes a set value control means 111, an RT state control means 112, a replay operation control means 113, a bonus operation control means 114, a freeze control means 115, a game mode control means 116, and a random number generation/acquisition means 117.

The game progress management means 130 includes a received medal management means 131, a role determination means 132, a performance group number determination means 133, a reel control means 134, a stop display pattern determination means 135, a paid medal management means 136, a blocker control means 137, a display lamp control means 138, a push order management means 139, and a condition device group number determination means 140, and the main communication control means 150 includes a control command transmission means 151 and an outer end signal transmission means 152. Note that each of the above-mentioned means in the main control means 100 is a functional representation of the main CPU 61, ROM 62, RAM 63, electronic circuits, and other hardware arranged on the main control board 60 shown in FIG. 2, and software such as a control program stored in the ROM 62, etc.

(1-1) Means Constituting the Game Status Management Means 110 The setting value control means 111 is configured to control a numerical value (also referred to as a "management setting value") for internally managing the setting value (six-stage configuration of setting 1 to setting 6) of the winning combination probability. In this embodiment, consecutive integer values from 1 to 6 (the integer values from 1 to 6 correspond to settings 1 to 6, respectively) are used as the management setting values. The data of the management setting values is stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 63, and is referred to when confirming the setting value in the winning combination determination process, and is also referred to when displaying the setting value on the setting value display (the payout number display lamp 46j) when confirming or changing the setting. The management setting value is changed in response to a setting change operation by a gaming store clerk. Specifically, the setting key switch 83 is operated to the ON state, and the setting change switch 84 is operated in that state, and the setting value is updated by one.

The RT state control means 112 is configured to control the setting of three RT states: non-RT, RT1, and RT2. Non-RT is the RT state that is set when the RAM (RAM 63) is initialized. RT1 is the RT state (also called "inside BB") that is set when the selection of a type 1 BB-A condition device or a type 1 BB-B condition device (winning BB role 1 or BB role 2) is carried over. RT2 is the RT state (also called "in BB operation") that is set from the next game when BB role 1 or BB role 2 is established, and during this RT2, a bonus game can be executed. In RT2, the replay role is not won, and it is set so that one of the winning J to Q condition devices is selected (no misses). The transition control of each of the above-mentioned RT states will be explained in detail later.

The replay operation control means 113 is configured to set a state (also called the "replay operation state") in which the player is permitted to play the next game without betting any game medals owned, when a replay role is established. When the replay operation state is set, information indicating that the replay operation state is in progress (also called the "replay operation state flag") is set (for example, the value "1" is stored) in a specified memory area of the RAM 63. The set replay operation state flag is cleared (for example, the value "0" is stored) at a specified point in time until the replay operation state is resolved.

The bonus operation control means 114 is configured to operate in the following manner: from the time when a bonus role (in this embodiment, BB role 1 or BB role 2) is won (when a type 1 BB-A condition device or a type 1 BB-B condition device is selected),
It is configured to execute a predetermined process during the period until the end of the bonus game that is executed when the B role 1 or BB role 2 is established. Specifically, when the BB role 1 or BB role 2 is won, information indicating that the BB role 1 or BB role 2 has been won (also called the "Type 1 BB winning flag") is set (for example, the value "1" is stored) in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 63. In addition, when the BB role 1 or BB role 2 is established, information indicating that the BB role is in operation (also called the "Type 1 BB operation flag") is set (for example, the value "1" is stored) in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 63.

The freeze control means 115 is configured to set a freeze that delays the execution of control processes related to the progress of the game (such as processes that accept bet operations, reel spin start operations, reel spin stop operations, etc.) for a predetermined time when a predetermined condition is met. In this embodiment, four types of freezes can be executed: win wait (freeze time 2 seconds), fake wait (freeze time 5 seconds), announcement wait (freeze time 2 seconds), and full stop end wait (freeze time 5 seconds).

The game mode control means 116 is configured to control the setting of eight game modes from game mode 0 to game mode 7. A game mode means a game state (also called a "main game state") that is controlled by the main control means separately from the RT state and is mainly related to the setting state of the AT. The game mode control means 116 also manages whether the player is staying in a normal zone or an advantageous zone, which will be described later, by using a zone type number (which takes a value of 0 or 1). Here, a zone type number of 0 indicates that the player is staying in a normal zone, and a zone type number of 1 indicates that the player is staying in an advantageous zone. Furthermore, the game mode control means 116 manages whether the player has won the AT by using an AT winning flag (which takes a value of 0 or 1). Here, an AT winning flag of 0 indicates that the player has not won the AT, and an AT winning flag of 1 indicates that the player has won the AT.

Game mode 0 is a normal (non-advantageous) game state. Game mode 0 is a mode in which the player stays in the normal zone, and does not perform lotteries related to AT play (assisted play). Game mode 1 is a game state also called "chance" in which the player stays when the zone type number is 1 but the AT has not been won. Game mode 2 is a game state also called "after AT win 1" in which the player stays when the zone type number is 1 and the AT has been won but the BB has not been won. Game mode 3 is an AT game state which is mainly entered when the AT has been won and the BB has been won. In this game mode 3, the push navigation described below is executed, making it a very advantageous game state for the player.

Game mode 4 is a game state that is mainly referred to as "after AT" in which the player remains after a BB is established in game mode 7 described below. Game mode 5 is a game state that is mainly referred to as "after AT win 2" in which the player remains after an AT is won in game mode 4. Game mode 6 is a game state that is mainly referred to as "inside chance" in which the player remains inside BB when the section type number is 1 and the AT has not been won. Game mode 7 is a game state that is mainly referred to as "inside post AT" in which the player remains after one AT ends and the reach flag is 0.

The above-mentioned eight game modes 0 to 7 are divided into game modes belonging to the normal zone (game mode 0) and game modes belonging to the advantageous zone (game modes 1 to 7). The normal zone is a period during which push navigation (prize-winning navigation, RP navigation, and eye-pushing navigation) is not performed, and is also a period during which information that can determine the push order (information such as condition device number and instruction number) is not transmitted from the main control means to the sub-control means. The normal zone is also a period during which a lottery can be held to determine whether or not to move to the advantageous zone (for example, a lottery for moving to the advantageous zone).

The favorable zone is a period during which push navigation can be performed, and is also a period during which information that can determine the push order can be sent from the main control means to the sub-control means. The favorable zone is also a period during which a lottery that changes the performance of the favorable zone (for example, an AT mode lottery) or a process that adds to the number of AT games during the favorable zone (for example, a seven stock 1 lottery, a seven stock 2 lottery) can be performed. Furthermore, during the favorable zone, a zone indicator (for example, a DP segment lamp other than the seven-segment lamp (also called an "favorable zone lamp") among the payout number display lamps 46j) is lit to notify the player that he or she is in the favorable zone. While staying in the favorable zone, a winning navigation may be performed at least once (in this case, if a winning navigation has not been performed even once, it may be possible not to move to the normal zone).

In addition, there is an upper limit (1500 games) on the period during which a player can stay continuously in the advantageous zone. Furthermore, when the upper limit is reached and the advantageous zone ends, all information related to the advantageous zone (for example, information such as the AT winning flag and the value of the seven stock counter) is cleared. Note that when the upper limit is reached and the advantageous zone ends, it is not necessary that a winning navigation has been performed even once during the stay in the advantageous zone. In addition, when the lottery for determining whether or not to move to the advantageous zone and the lottery for changing the performance of the advantageous zone are performed based on the role determination result (condition device), they may be limited to the role determination result that does not have a setting difference, and in particular, the lottery for changing the performance of the advantageous zone may be performed based on conditions other than the role determination result. In that case, they may be performed without referring to the setting value.

The random number generating and capturing means 117 is composed of the above-mentioned CPU 61, clock pulse generator 64, frequency divider 65, random number generator 66, and random number capturing circuit 67, and generates and captures random numbers used in various lotteries. In this embodiment, it has four 16-bit random number means (4ch: ch is an abbreviation for "channel") capable of generating a random number sequence with a maximum value range of "0 to 65535", and four 8-bit random number means (4ch) capable of generating a random number sequence with a maximum value range of "0 to 255", and each of them is capable of generating a random number sequence independently. The random numbers generated by these 16-bit random number means or 8-bit random number means are updated based on the clock signal generated by the clock pulse generator 64, so they are also called hardware random numbers (hard random numbers). Although not shown, in this embodiment, a random number generating means other than the random number generating and capturing means 117 is provided. This random number generation means is composed of the above-mentioned CPU 61 and RAM 63, and has a random number means capable of generating a sequence of random numbers within a predetermined numerical range as random numbers to be used for determining roles, etc. These random numbers are also called software random numbers (soft random numbers) because they are updated based on a program.

(Regarding RT state transition control)
The above-mentioned RT state transition control by the RT state control means 112 will be described with reference to Figure 10. As shown in this figure, when a type 1 BB-A condition device or a type 1 BB-B condition device is selected during non-RT, condition P1 is satisfied, and this triggers the RT state control means 112 to transition the RT state from non-RT to RT1. Also, during RT1, when BB role 1 or BB role 2 is established (also referred to as "BB establishment" or "BB operation"), condition P2 is satisfied, and this triggers the RT state control means 112 to transition the RT state from RT1 to RT2.

RT2 is an RT state (also called "BB in operation") that is set from the next game when BB role 1 or BB role 2 is established, and bonus games can be played during this RT2. In RT2, the replay role is not won, and it is set so that one of the winning J to Q condition devices is selected (no misses). During RT2, when more than a predetermined number (70) of game medals are won and the bonus game ends (also called "BB operation ends"), condition P3 is satisfied, and this triggers the RT state control means 112 to transition the RT state from RT2 to non-RT.

(Game mode transition control)
The transition control of the game mode by the game mode control means 116 will be described with reference to Figures 11 and 12. As shown in Figure 11, in game mode 0, the game mode 0 transitions to game mode 1 when condition Q1 is satisfied, the game mode 0 transitions to game mode 2 when condition Q2 is satisfied, the game mode 0 transitions to game mode 3 when condition Q3 is satisfied, and the game mode 0 transitions to game mode 6 when condition Q4 is satisfied. The contents of each transition condition (conditions Q1 to Q15) are shown in simplified form in Figure 11, but more detailed contents are described in the flow chart described later.

In game mode 1, satisfaction of condition Q5 triggers a transition from game mode 1 to game mode 0, satisfaction of condition Q6 triggers a transition from game mode 1 to game mode 6, satisfaction of condition Q7 triggers a transition from game mode 1 to game mode 2, and satisfaction of condition Q8 triggers a transition from game mode 1 to game mode 3. Here, the chance game number counter included in condition Q5 is a counter (taking a value from 0 to 30) that manages the number of games played in game mode 1, and the value of the chance game number counter is set to 30 when the game mode is switched to 1, and thereafter is decremented by 1 for each game (see also FIG. 12). In addition, the Type 1 BB winning flag included in conditions Q6 to Q8 is a flag (taking the value of 0 or 1) that manages whether or not a BB has been won in the role drawing in the game, and a Type 1 BB winning flag = 0 indicates that a BB has not been won in the game, and a Type 1 BB winning flag = 1 indicates that a BB has been won in the game (see also Figure 12).

In game mode 2, satisfaction of condition Q9 triggers a transition to game mode 3. In game mode 3, satisfaction of condition Q11 triggers a transition to game mode 0, and satisfaction of condition Q12 triggers a transition to game mode 7. The bell count counter included in conditions Q11 and Q12 is a counter (taking a value between 0 and 134) that manages the number of times (also called "bell count") that push navigation (winning navigation) can be executed during the AT, and winning navigation can be executed when the value of the bell count counter is 1 or greater (see also FIG. 12).

The seven numbers included in conditions Q11 and Q12 are numbers that manage the type of AT (red seven or gold seven), with seven number = 1 indicating red seven and seven number = 2 indicating gold seven (see also Figure 12). The seven counter is a counter (taking a value between 0 and 26) that manages the number of red sevens in stock, the cumulative counter is a counter (taking a value between 0 and 2412) that manages the number of game medals acquired (the difference in number) in one favorable zone, and the reach flag is a flag (taking a value between 0 and 1) that adjusts the upper limit of the number of game medals acquired (the difference in number) (see also Figure 12).

In game mode 6, satisfaction of condition Q10 triggers a transition to game mode 1. In game mode 7, satisfaction of condition Q10 triggers a transition to game mode 4. In game mode 4, satisfaction of condition Q8 triggers a transition from game mode 4 to game mode 3, satisfaction of condition Q13 triggers a transition from game mode 4 to game mode 0, and satisfaction of condition Q14 triggers a transition from game mode 4 to game mode 7. Here, the AT cycle counter included in conditions Q13 and Q14 is a counter (taking a value from 0 to 3) that manages the stay cycle during the AT.

In addition, when the condition Q7 is satisfied during the game mode 4, the game mode 4
The game mode is switched to game mode 5 from game mode Q1, and when condition Q9 is satisfied during game mode 5, the game mode is switched to game mode 3.

Furthermore, when the player is in any of game modes 1 to 7 (i.e., in the favorable zone), the game mode is switched to game mode 0 when condition Q15 is satisfied. The favorable zone clear counter included in condition Q15 is a counter (taking a value between 0 and 1500) that manages the number of games that have been played consecutively in the favorable zone, is set to 1500 when the player moves from the normal zone to the favorable zone, and is decremented by 1 each time a game is played in the favorable zone (see also FIG. 12). The net gain counter is a counter (taking a value between 0 and 2412) that manages the number of coins won (difference in number of coins) during the favorable zone, is set to 0 when the player moves from the normal zone to the favorable zone, and is updated according to the number of coins won thereafter (see also FIG. 12).

In this way, when transitioning from the normal zone to the advantageous zone, the value of the advantageous zone clear counter is set to "1500", and the value of the advantageous zone clear counter is decremented by 1 each time a game is played in the advantageous zone. When the value of the advantageous zone clear counter reaches "0", a forced transition to the normal zone occurs. Also, if a transition is made from the advantageous zone to the normal zone before the value of the advantageous zone clear counter reaches "0", the value of the advantageous zone clear counter is cleared (set to "0"), and when transitioning from the normal zone to the advantageous zone again, the value of the advantageous zone clear counter is reset to "1500".

In this embodiment, a net gain counter is also provided to count the number of game medals acquired (the difference in number of medals) during the favorable zone. The net gain counter is set to "0" at the start of the favorable zone (it may also be set to "0" at the end of the favorable zone), and the counter value is updated for each game thereafter according to the game results. When updating, if the difference in number of medals falls below 0, the counter value is corrected to "0", and if the difference in number of medals is a positive value, it is accumulated and updated as is (such correction may not be performed). When the accumulated difference in number of medals exceeds 2400, the favorable zone ends and the normal zone is entered. The accumulation counter is functionally a counter that performs the same count as the net gain counter. When checking the number of game medals acquired (the difference in number of medals) during control processing, the value of the accumulation counter may be referenced or the value of the net gain counter may be checked depending on the processing content.

In addition, a correction counter is also provided as a counter that performs counting related to the number of game medals won (difference in number) during the favorable zone. This correction counter is a counter (taking a value between 0 and 2101) that counts the number of game medals that can be won during one favorable zone (also called the "expected number won" or "expected number of medals that can be won"), which is calculated by adding the number of AT stocks such as red sevens and gold sevens and the value of the bell count counter to the value of the net increase counter (accumulation counter). When the value of the correction counter (expected number won) exceeds a predetermined value (2100), this may be used as a trigger to end the favorable zone at a predetermined timing and transition to the normal zone.

By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for a player to know when the advantageous zone ends. For example, when the advantageous zone ends only by the value of the advantageous zone clear counter or the value of the net gain counter, if these values are displayed to the player, the player can easily know when the advantageous zone ends by checking them. However, when a correction counter is provided, the advantageous zone ends when the value of the correction counter reaches a predetermined value even though the values of the advantageous zone clear counter and the net gain counter have not reached their upper limits. Therefore, it becomes difficult to know when the advantageous zone ends, and the interest in the game can be improved. In addition, by setting the predetermined value (2100) of the correction counter to a value smaller than the upper limit value (2400) of the net gain counter, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the advantageous zone ends during the AT. For example, if the value of the correction counter (expected number of wins) exceeds the predetermined value (2100) during the AT, if the next AT can be executed after the AT ends, the net gain counter will likely exceed the upper limit value (2400) during the execution of the next AT, and the advantageous zone will end. If the advantageous period ends during the AT, the player may become disappointed, but this can be prevented by ending the advantageous period when the correction counter value (expected number of wins) exceeds a predetermined value (2100).

(Lottery executed in each game mode)
Next, various lotteries performed by the game mode control means 116 in the above-mentioned game modes 0 to 7 will be described with reference to Figures 13 to 20. The advantageous zone transition lottery shown in Figure 13(A) is a lottery to determine whether or not to transition to an advantageous zone, and selects either a win (1) or a loss (0) based on the condition device group A number (condition device group numbers will be described later). The number of winning positions corresponding to each condition device group A number is as shown in the figure.

The chance mode 1 lottery shown in FIG. 13(B) is a lottery that determines the chance mode number (a number that controls the likelihood of winning in the lottery during chance (game mode 1)), and selects one of the chance mode numbers 0 to 4 based on the condition device group H number. The winning number corresponding to each condition device group H number is as shown in the figure.

Chance mode 2 lottery-1 shown in Figure 13 (C) is a lottery to determine the chance mode number during BB operation during chance (game mode 1), and selects one of chance mode numbers 0 to 4 (actually 0 or 4) based on the condition device group D number. The winning number corresponding to each condition device group D number is as shown in the figure.

The Chance Mode 2 Draw-2 shown in Figure 13 (D) is a draw to determine the chance mode number when BB is not in operation during chance (game mode 1), and selects one of the chance mode numbers 0 to 4 (actually 0 or 4) based on the condition device group B number. The winning number corresponding to each condition device group B number is as shown in the figure.

The chance mode 3 drawing shown in Figure 13 (E) is a drawing to determine a new chance mode number at the end of a stay cycle during chance (game mode 1), and a new chance mode number from 0 to 4 (actually 0 or 4) is selected based on the current chance mode number 1 to 3 (no drawing if the number is 0). The winning set value number corresponding to each chance mode number is as shown. Note that chance mode number 4 indicates an AT win. The chance mode drawings in Figures 13 (B) to (E) are collectively referred to as AT drawings.

The chance game number lottery shown in FIG. 14(A) is a lottery that determines the number of games to stay in chance (game mode 1) when any of chance mode numbers 1 to 3 is selected in the chance mode 1 lottery (also referred to as "chance mode winning"). Based on the selected chance mode number 1 to 3, one of the game numbers 0, 10, 20, or 30 is selected. The winning number corresponding to each chance mode number is as shown in the figure.

The chance cycle lottery shown in FIG. 14(B) is a lottery that determines the number of cycles when a chance mode is won, and selects one of the cycle numbers 0 to 4 based on the chance mode number 1 to 3 selected in the chance mode 1 lottery. The winning number corresponding to each chance mode number is as shown in the figure.

The EX1 mode lottery shown in Fig. 14(C) is a lottery to determine the add-on mode number after the AT win (the number that manages the stock add-on state during the AT), and selects one of the add-on mode numbers 0 to 2 (actually 1 or 2) based on the condition device group F number. The winning number corresponding to each condition device group F number is as shown in the figure.

The EX2 mode lottery shown in Figure 14 (D) is a lottery that is held while in game mode 2 or 5 in order to determine the add-on mode number after winning the AT, just like the EX1 mode lottery, and selects one of the add-on mode numbers 0 to 2 (actually 0 or 2) based on the condition device group F number. The winning number corresponding to each condition device group F number is as shown in the figure.

The AT mode lottery-1 shown in Figure 14 (E) is a lottery that is held especially while in game modes 0 to 2 in order to determine the next AT mode number (a number that controls the likelihood of winning in the lottery during the AT) when an AT is won, and one of the AT mode numbers 0 to 5 is selected based on the condition device group J number. The winning number corresponding to each condition device group J number is as shown in the figure.

The AT mode lottery-2 shown in Figure 14 (F) is a lottery that is held while in game modes 3 to 5 in order to determine the next AT mode number (a number that controls the likelihood of winning in the lottery during the AT) when an AT is won, just like AT mode lottery-1, and selects one of the AT mode numbers 0 to 5 based on the condition device group J number. The winning number corresponding to each condition device group J number is as shown in the figure.

The AT mode lottery-3 shown in Figure 14 (G) is the same as AT mode lottery-1 and -2, in that it determines the next AT mode number (a number that controls the likelihood of winning in the lottery during the AT) when an AT is won, and is a lottery that is held after all reels have stopped (also called "after all stops"), and selects one of the AT mode numbers 0 to 5 based on the condition device group J number. The winning number corresponding to each condition device group J number is as shown in the figure.

The Seven 1 drawing shown in FIG. 15(A) is a drawing that is conducted during play mode 1 or 4 and after a full stop in order to determine the type of AT (red seven or gold seven), and one of the seven numbers 0 to 2 is selected based on the condition device group F number. The winning number corresponding to each condition device group F number is as shown in the figure.

The Seven 2 drawing shown in FIG. 15(B) is a drawing that is conducted, like the Seven 1 drawing, specifically while in game mode 2 or 5 to determine the type of AT, and selects one of the Seven numbers 0 to 2 based on the condition device group F number. The winning number corresponding to each condition device group F number is as shown in the figure.

The AT mode rewrite lottery shown in FIG. 15(C) is a lottery to rewrite the AT mode number after the AT ends, and selects one of the AT mode numbers 0 to 5 based on the value of the advantageous zone clear counter (less than 300 or 300 or more). The winning number corresponding to each advantageous zone clear counter value is as shown in the figure.

The Seven Loop lottery shown in Figure 15 (D) is a lottery to decide whether or not to continue the Red Seven, and selects either a win (1) or a loss (0) based on the loop number (the number that controls the continuation rate of the Red Seven). The number of winning numbers corresponding to each loop number is as shown in the figure.

The Gold Seven Loop lottery shown in FIG. 15(E) is a lottery to decide whether or not to continue with Gold Seven, and selects either a winning number (1) or a losing number (0). The winning numbers assigned to winning numbers (1) and losing numbers (0) are as shown in the figure.

The Gold Seven Loop Rewrite Lottery shown in FIG. 15(F) is a lottery for rewriting the continuation rate of Gold Seven, and selects either a win (1) or a loss (0) based on the condition device group E number. The number of winning entries corresponding to each condition device group E number is as shown in the figure.

The add-on mode lottery shown in Figure 15 (G) is a lottery to determine the add-on mode number during the AT, and selects one of the add-on mode numbers 0 to 2 (actually 1 or 2). The winning number assigned to each add-on mode number is as shown in the figure.

The bell count change lottery shown in FIG. 16(A) is a lottery for rewriting the number of bells, and selects either a win (1) or a loss (0) based on the value of the bell count counter. The number of wins corresponding to each bell count counter value is as shown in the figure.

The Seven Stock 1 lottery shown in Figure 16 (B) is a lottery to decide whether or not to add to the AT stock number, and selects either a win (1) or a loss (0) based on the condition device group C number. The winning number corresponding to each condition device group C number is as shown in the figure.

The Seven Stock 2 drawing shown in FIG. 16(C) is the same as the Seven Stock 1 drawing, in that it is a drawing to determine whether or not to add to the AT stock number, and selects either a win (1) or a loss (0) based on the condition device group E number. The winning number corresponding to each condition device group E number is as shown in the figure.

The effect lever wait lottery shown in FIG. 16(D) is a lottery to decide whether or not to perform a fake wait as a freeze, and selects either a win (1) or a loss (0) based on the condition device group J number. The number of winning positions corresponding to each condition device group J number is as shown in the figure.

The AT Cycle Lottery-1 shown in Figure 17 (A) is a lottery that is held when the AT mode number is 1 or 2 in order to determine the number of stay cycles during the AT (the number of BB operations required to go from game mode 3 via game modes 7 and 4 to return to game mode 3) at the end of the AT, and selects one of the stay cycle numbers 0 to 3 (actually 1 to 3) based on the value of the bell count counter. The winning number corresponding to each bell count counter value is as shown in the figure.

The AT Cycle Lottery-2 shown in FIG. 17(B) is the same as the AT Cycle Lottery-1, and is a lottery held when the AT mode number is 3 or 4, in order to determine the number of stay cycles during the AT at the end of the AT. Based on the value of the bell count counter, one of the stay cycle numbers 0 to 3 (actually 1 to 3) is selected. The winning number corresponding to each bell count counter value is as shown in the figure.

The pullback 1 lottery-1 shown in FIG. 17(C) is a lottery that is held especially when the AT mode number is 1-3 to determine whether or not the AT will be won again after the AT has ended, and selects either a win (1) or a loss (0) based on the condition device group C number. The number of winning entries corresponding to each condition device group C number is as shown in the figure.

The pullback 1 lottery-2 shown in Figure 17 (D) is a lottery held when the AT mode number is 4, in order to determine whether or not the AT will be won again after the AT ends, just like the pullback 1 lottery-1, and selects either a win (1) or a loss (0) based on the condition device group C number. The number of winning entries corresponding to each condition device group C number is as shown in the figure.

The Pullback 1 Draw-3 shown in Figure 18 (A) is the same as Pullback 1 Draw-1 and -2, and is a draw that is held especially when the AT mode number is 5 to determine whether or not the AT will be won again after the AT has ended, and selects either a win (1) or a loss (0) based on the condition device group C number. The number of winning entries corresponding to each condition device group C number is as shown in the figure.

The pullback 2 lottery shown in FIG. 18(B) is a lottery to determine whether or not you will win the AT again after the number of stay cycles during the AT becomes 0, and selects either a win (1) or a loss (0) based on the AT mode number. The number of winning entries corresponding to each AT mode number is as shown in the figure.

The AT cycle preferential game number lottery shown in Figure 18 (C) is a lottery to determine the number of games (also called the "preferential state game number") that will be set to a specified preferential state after the AT ends, and selects one of the preferential state game numbers 0, 10, 20, or 30 based on the AT mode number. The winning number corresponding to each AT mode number is as shown in the figure.

The Seven Table 1 lottery shown in Figure 19 (A) is a lottery to determine the Seven Table Number (the number that manages the table that determines the continuation rate during red sevens), and one of the Seven Table Numbers 0 to 15 is selected based on the AT mode number. The winning number corresponding to each AT mode number is as shown in the figure.

The Seven Table 2 drawing shown in FIG. 19(B) is the same as the Seven Table 1 drawing, in that it is a drawing to determine the Seven Table number, and one of the Seven Table numbers 0 to 15 is selected based on the condition device group G number. The winning number corresponding to each condition device group G number is as shown in the figure.

The Bell Number 1 Draw-1 shown in Figure 20 (A) is a draw for the first time, which is conducted especially when the game mode is 0 to 2, to determine the number of bells, and selects one of the bell numbers 0 to 4, 6, 10, 11, or 20 based on the CU rank number (a number that manages the ease of counting up). The winning number corresponding to each CU rank number is as shown in the figure.

The Bell Number 1 Draw-2 shown in Figure 20(B) is the same as the Bell Number 1 Draw-1, and is the first draw to determine the number of bells, especially when the game mode is 4 or 5. Based on the CU rank number, one of the bell numbers 0 to 4, 6, 10, 11, or 20 is selected. The winning numbers corresponding to each CU rank number are as shown in the figure.

The Bell Number 2 lottery shown in Figure 20 (C) is a lottery for the second or subsequent times to determine the number of bells, and selects one of the bell numbers 0 to 4, 6, 10, 11, or 20 based on the CU rank number. The winning number corresponding to each CU rank number is as shown in the figure.

The Bell Number 3 drawing shown in FIG. 20(D) is the same as the Bell Number 2 drawing, and is a drawing for the second or subsequent times to determine the number of bells, and selects one of the bell numbers 0 to 4, 6, 10, 11, or 20. The winning numbers assigned to each bell number are as shown in the figure.

(1-2) Means Constituting the Game Progress Management Means 130 Returning to FIG. 9, the received medal management means 131 is configured to control whether the actually accepted medals (the medals that are guided to the receiving passage and detected by the inserted medal sensor 28b, also referred to as "accepted medals") among the medals inserted from the medal insertion port 21 (also referred to as "inserted medals") are to be directly bet or credited. In this embodiment, when the number of bets does not reach the maximum bet allowable number (the number of bets required to execute a game (the specified number "3")), the accepted medals are to be directly bet, and when the number of bets reaches the maximum bet allowable number and the number of credits does not reach the maximum credit allowable number (for example, "50"), the accepted medals are to be credited.

The accepted medal management means 131 is also configured to perform automatic betting processing (processing to set a state in which the same number of game medals as the number of bets in the previous game are bet without reducing the number of game medals held by the player) in a game that has been set to the replay operation state. Even in the replay operation state, if the number of credits has not reached the maximum credit allowable number, the inserted game medals are accepted as game medals to be credited (it is also possible to not accept them). If the number of bets has reached the maximum bet allowable number and the number of credits has also reached the maximum credit allowable number, the inserted game medals are not accepted and are returned.

The role determination means 132 is configured to perform a role determination process (internal lottery) to select at least one role determination result from multiple role determination results (condition devices) based on a preset role determination probability (lottery setting number) when the start lever 25 is operated (when the operation of the start lever 25 is validly accepted). This role determination process is performed using a random number generated by the above-mentioned 16-bit random number means. Specifically, when the start lever 25 is operated, the random number generated by the 16-bit random number means is captured. Then, when performing the role determination process, the captured random number is read, a predetermined software random number is added to the read random number, and the condition device is selected using the random number after the addition. It is also possible to select a condition device using the read random number without adding the predetermined software random number.

The role determination process is performed by referring to a predetermined role determination table (not shown). The role determination table is configured such that the lottery placement number data corresponding to each condition device is stored in a predetermined storage area (multiple addresses) in ROM 62 according to the set value. When one or more condition devices are selected in the role determination process, the game role corresponding to the selected condition device becomes the role that is allowed to be established in the game. Information on the selected condition device (winning role) is stored in a predetermined storage area of RAM 63, but if the information on the winning item stored in one game is information on the winning of a small role or a replay role, it is cleared (reset to "0") after the end of the game, regardless of whether these small roles or replay roles are established. On the other hand, if the BB role is won but not established, information on the winning of the BB role is stored and not cleared until the BB role is established.

The performance group number determination means 133 is configured to perform processing to associate a performance group number with the condition device selected by the role determination processing. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 21, the performance group A group number (0 or 1) is associated with the bonus condition device, and the performance group B group number (0 to 29) is associated with the winning replay condition device. For example, as shown in FIG. 21(A), the performance group A group number 1 is commonly associated with the 1st type BB-A condition device and the 1st type BB-B condition device. Also, as shown in FIG. 21(B), the performance group B group number 13 is commonly associated with the winning-A1 to A12 condition devices, in which differences in the push order can cause advantages or disadvantages in the game (effect on the ball output) or cause differences in the number of game medals paid out (number of medals won), and the performance group B group number 14 is commonly associated with the winning-B1 to B12 condition devices.

In contrast, for replay-A to L condition devices that correspond to the winning of replay roles in which differences in the pressing order do not affect the game's advantage or disadvantage (no effect on the number of balls issued), and winning replay condition devices that correspond to the winning of minor roles (winning roles) in which differences in the pressing order do not affect the number of game medals paid out (number won) or in which the number of game medals that can be won is small (for example, less than the specified number of bets), different performance group B numbers are associated with each individual condition device.

Returning to FIG. 9, the reel control means 134 is configured to, upon operation of the start lever 25 (operation of the start lever 25 being validly accepted), start the rotation of the reels 3a to 3c after confirming that the minimum play time has elapsed, and, after all reels that have started to rotate are in a constant speed rotation state, to sequentially stop the rotation of the corresponding reels 3a to 3c upon sequential operation of the stop switches 26a, 26b, 26c (operation of each of the stop switches 26a to 26c being validly accepted).

The spinning stop control of each reel 3a to 3c is performed according to the operation mode (push order, operation timing, etc.) of the stop switches 26a to 26c based on each stop table (not shown) that is set according to the role determination results selected by the role determination process. Each reel 3a to 3c is controlled so that each reel 3a to 3c stops within a predetermined allowable stop time (e.g., 190 milliseconds) from the timing when the stop switches 26a, 26b, 26c are operated (within the range of the maximum number of slipping frames, 5 frames, in this embodiment).

In other words, if a specific game role is selected as a role that is allowed to be achieved as a result of the role determination process, the reels 3a to 3c are controlled to stop so that the symbols corresponding to the selected game role are stopped and displayed on the pay line 29 as much as possible within the allowable stop time, and in the case of a miss, none of the symbols corresponding to the game roles are stopped and displayed on the pay line 29. Note that if a replay role or small role is won while a special role is being carried over, or if a special role and a replay role or small role are both won, the reel spin stop control may be performed with priority given to the replay role, which is set in the order of replay role, special role, and small role (small role may be given priority over special role).

The stop display symbol determination means 135 is configured to determine which symbol is displayed as stopped on the reels 3a to 3c based on the timing at which the stop switches 26a to 26c are operated, and to determine whether a game role has been established based on the combination of symbols determined to be displayed as stopped on the pay line 29 (which may be different from the combination of symbols that is actually displayed as stopped).

When a minor win is achieved, the payout medal management means 136 pays out a number of game medals according to the achieved minor win by a pooled addition payout that adds to the number of credits if the number of credits has not reached the maximum credit allowable number, or by actual payout that drives the hopper 50 via the hopper drive circuit 52 if the number of credits has reached the maximum credit allowable number. In addition, when a settlement operation (pressing the settlement switch 24) is validly accepted, the payout medal management means 136 drives the hopper 50 to pay out the number of game medals that were bet or the number of game medals that were credited.

The blocker control means 137 is configured to output a blocker signal for controlling the blocker 48 described above, and switch the blocker 48 between an ON state (a state in which game medals can be accepted) and an OFF state (a state in which game medals cannot be accepted). When the blocker 48 is in the OFF state, game medals inserted into the medal insertion port 21 are guided to the return passage and returned. However, the insertion of game medals is detected by the inserted medal sensor 28a.

The display lamp control means 138 is configured to control the lighting and extinguishing of the various display lamps mentioned above (MAX-BET display lamp 46a, BET lamp 46b, insert possible display lamp 46c, play start display lamp 46d, replay display lamp 46e, status display lamp 46f, count display lamp 46g, CRE lamp 46h, payout number display lamp 46j) via the display lamp control circuit 47. When the payout number display lamp 46j is made to function as a main side push order annunciator, the payout number display lamp 46j is controlled by the push order management means 139.

The push order management means 139 is configured to select an instruction number (any one of 0 to 6) corresponding to the push order to be notified, depending on the role determination result (condition device) selected by the role determination process. Instruction number 0 is selected when the push order is not to be notified, and instruction numbers 1 to 6 are selected when it is desired to notify the push order. In this embodiment, instruction number 1 corresponds to the push orders of "left center right", instruction number 2 corresponds to "left left center", instruction number 3 corresponds to "center left right", instruction number 4 corresponds to "center right left", instruction number 5 corresponds to "right left center", and instruction number 6 corresponds to "right center left".

The push sequence management means 139 is also configured to make the payout number display lamp 46j function as a main side push sequence indicator and perform push navigation (main side push navigation) by announcing the selected instruction number. This push navigation uses two 7-segment lamps (hereinafter sometimes abbreviated as "7-seg") provided on the payout number display lamp 46j to announce the navigation number. For example, the left 7-segment lamp displays "=", and the right 7-segment lamp displays the numerical value of the instruction number (for example, "2" for instruction number 2). The "=" displayed on the left 7-segment lamp is to distinguish it from when the payout number display lamp 46j displays the payout number. When navigation number 0 is selected, no display is made by the payout number display lamp 46j, but in another embodiment, "=" may be displayed on the left 7-segment display and "0" may be displayed on the right 7-segment display, or "0" may be displayed on both the left and right 7-segment displays, or "0" may be displayed on only one of the left or right 7-segment displays.

The condition device group number determination means 140 is configured to determine the condition device group number used to select the winning value in various lotteries according to the performance group A group number and the performance group B group number determined by the performance group number determination means 133. Specifically, the condition device group numbers are divided into 10 types from the condition device group A number to the condition device group J number, and each combination of the performance group A group number and the performance group B group number is previously associated with each number value from the condition device group A number to the condition device group J number. The specific association is as shown in FIG. 22. For example, for the combination of the performance group A group number 1 and the performance group B group number 0, the condition device group A number 1, the condition device group B number 2, the condition device group C number 2, the condition device group D number 0, the condition device group E number 0, the condition device group F number 1, the condition device group G number 0, the condition device group H number 1, the condition device group I number 0, and the condition device group J number 1 are associated with each other. In addition, the notes column in the table in Figure 22 lists abbreviations that indicate the contents of each combination of performance group A group number and performance group B group number.

(Detailed explanation of the role determination process)
The role determination process executed by the role determination means 132 is a series of processes that draws a role based on a predetermined probability (role determination probability) once per game, and determines a symbol combination that can be stopped and displayed on a valid line based on the winning number determined by the role drawing. More specifically, first, a role is drawn based on the role determination probability, and one winning number is determined from a plurality of winning numbers (including losses) by this role drawing. Each winning number is previously linked to a bonus condition device number or a winning replay condition device number, and when one winning number is determined, the bonus condition device number or winning replay condition device number linked to the winning number is stored in a predetermined memory area of the RAM. Here, the bonus condition device number and the winning replay condition device number are stored in different memory areas. This makes it possible to align the symbol combinations associated with the condition devices of the various condition device numbers stored in the RAM on the valid line.

In the above example, either the bonus condition device number or the winning replay condition device number is linked to one winning number, but both the bonus condition device number and the winning replay condition device number may be linked to one winning number.

The above-mentioned winning probability can be set arbitrarily. In addition, the winning probability can be configured to be changeable according to the above-mentioned setting value set by a game store clerk or the like. In this embodiment, there are six setting value configurations, from setting 1 to 6, and there are winning numbers with different winning probability depending on the setting value, and winning numbers with constant winning probability even if the setting value is changed. Hereinafter, setting the winning probability to change depending on the setting value is referred to as "setting difference". It is possible to arbitrarily determine whether or not to set a setting difference for each winning number. As an example, there is no setting difference for the winning number linked to the condition device number of the condition device that is the lottery trigger for the lottery that affects the payout rate (the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of game medals used for play) in the slot machine 1, and there is no need to set a setting difference for the winning number linked to the condition device number of the condition device that is not the lottery trigger.

Figure 23 shows the winning numbers assigned to each winning number (total number of places: 65,536) as an example of the probability of winning a winning combination in slot machine 1. Figure 23 does not show the winning numbers, but shows the condition devices of the condition device numbers linked to each winning number. In this example, the winning numbers in each RT state of non-RT, RT1, and RT2 are shown for three settings of setting 1, setting 3, and setting 6. According to this example, the probability of selecting a winning number linked to a type 1 BB-A condition device number or a winning number linked to a type 1 BB-B condition device number during non-RT is set to about 7/100, which is relatively high. In addition, the probability of selecting any of the winning numbers corresponding to the winning-A1 to A12 condition device numbers during non-RT or RT1 is set to about 7/10, which is quite high.

The table in Figure 24(A) shows the type of bonus condition device, the bonus condition device number assigned to that bonus condition device, and the symbol combination associated with each condition device (referred to as "winning role" in Figure 24(A)). The tables in Figure 24(B) and Figures 25 to 29 show the type of winning replay condition device, the winning replay condition device number assigned to that winning replay condition device, and the symbol combination associated with each condition device (referred to as "winning role" in Figure 24(B) and Figures 25 to 29). The contents of some of the condition devices will be explained in detail below.

In the bonus condition device shown in FIG. 24(A), the type 1 BB-A condition device is assigned the bonus condition device number 1, and the type 1 BB-B condition device is assigned the bonus condition device number 2. The bonus condition device number 0 indicates that it does not correspond to any bonus condition device. The type 1 BB-A condition device is associated with the symbol combination of BB role 1, and this symbol combination can be displayed as stopped during non-RT, which will be described later. Also, if the symbol combination of BB role 1 cannot be aligned on an active line, the game moves to RT1, which will be described later, and the state in which the symbol combination can be aligned is carried over. On the other hand, in RT2, the symbol combination of BB role 1 cannot be aligned on an active line, and therefore, that state is not carried over ("RT2 (BB in operation)" in FIG. 24(A)).
"-" in the column indicates that the symbol combination is not in a state where it can be aligned, and the state where it can be aligned is not carried over.) The symbol combination of BB2 is associated with the type 1 BB-B condition device, and this symbol combination can be displayed as stopped during non-RT. Also, if the symbol combination of BB2 cannot be aligned on an active line, it transitions to RT1, and the state where the symbol combination can be aligned is carried over. Also, in RT2, the symbol combination of BB2 is not in a state where it can be aligned on an active line, and therefore, the state is not carried over.

The replay-A to L condition devices shown in FIG. 24(B) are assigned winning replay condition device numbers from 1 to 12. These condition devices are condition devices to which replay symbol combinations are associated, and are configured so that during non-RT and RT1, the replay symbol combinations can be aligned, but not during RT2. Also, if any of the winning replay device numbers 1 to 12 in FIG. 24(B) is linked to the winning number determined by the role drawing, the symbol combination shown in the "winning role" column corresponding to the condition device of that number can be aligned on an active line. For example, if the winning number 1 is determined by the role drawing, the replay-A condition device of winning replay condition device number 1 can be aligned with any one of the symbol combinations of replay roles 1 to 4 associated with the replay-A condition device. Also, if the winning number 12 is determined by the role drawing, it will be possible to complete any one of the symbol combinations of replay roles 2 to 5 associated with the replay-L condition device of winning replay condition device number 12. The number 0 shown in FIG. 24(B) indicates that a winning number has been determined that will result in a state in which no winning or replay symbol combinations can be completed, i.e., a loss. In this embodiment, a loss state can only occur during non-RT, but it may also occur during RT1 or RT2.

The winning-A1 to A12 condition devices shown in Fig. 24(B), Fig. 25, and Fig. 26 are assigned winning replay condition device numbers from 13 to 24, respectively. These condition devices are condition devices to which symbol combinations of small prizes are associated. Also, during non-RT and RT1, it may be possible to arrange symbol combinations corresponding to the winning-A1 to A12 condition devices, but it is configured so that such a state does not occur during RT2. The winning-B1 to B12 condition devices shown in Figs. 26 to 28 are assigned winning replay condition device numbers from 25 to 36, respectively. These condition devices are condition devices to which symbol combinations of small prizes are associated, and during non-RT and RT1, it may be possible to arrange symbol combinations corresponding to the winning-B1 to B12 condition devices, but it is configured so that such a state does not occur during RT2. The winning-C to -E condition devices shown in FIG. 29 are assigned winning replay condition device numbers from 37 to 39. These condition devices are condition devices to which symbol combinations of minor prizes are associated, and during non-RT and RT1, it may be possible to line up symbol combinations corresponding to the winning-C to -E condition devices, but during RT2, it is configured so that such a state does not occur.

(Detailed explanation of reel control according to the result of the lottery)
Next, a description will be given of reel control executed by the reel control means 134 when a state in which a symbol combination corresponding to each of the above-mentioned condition devices can be achieved will be given.
(a) Reel control for 1 type BB During a non-RT in which a symbol combination corresponding to the 1 type BB-A condition device shown in Fig. 24 (A) can be arranged, or during an RT1 in which a symbol combination corresponding to the 1 type BB-A condition device can be arranged is carried over, if the player's push position allows the corresponding symbols "blue bar, blue bar, red seven" of the BB role 1 to be pulled onto the effective line 29, then the BB role 1 is established. Similarly, during a non-RT in which a symbol combination corresponding to the 1 type BB-B condition device can be arranged, or during an RT1 in which a symbol combination corresponding to the 1 type BB-B condition device can be arranged is carried over, if the player's push position allows the corresponding symbols "black bar, black bar, red seven" of the BB role 2 to be pulled onto the effective line 29, then the BB role 2 is established.

(b) Reel control for replay When the symbol combination corresponding to the replay-A to D condition devices shown in FIG. 24(B) is aligned, reel control is performed so that the replay role 4 (middle RP) is always established, regardless of the push order or push position, even during non-RT or RT1. Also, when the symbol combination corresponding to the replay-E to G condition devices is aligned during non-RT or RT, reel control is performed so that the replay role 1 or 3 is established. Also, when the symbol combination corresponding to the replay-H to J condition devices is aligned during non-RT, replay role 2 (right-up RP) is always established regardless of the push order or push position, whereas when the symbol combination is aligned during RT1, reel control is performed so that the replay role 4 (middle RP) is always established regardless of the push order or push position. Furthermore, when a symbol combination corresponding to the replay-K, L condition device is aligned during a non-RT, replay role 5 (upper row watermelon RP) is always achieved regardless of the push order or push position, whereas when a symbol combination corresponding to the replay-K, L condition device is aligned during RT1, reel control is performed so that replay role 4 (middle row RP) is always achieved regardless of the push order or push position.

When a losing winning number is determined during RT1, if the pressing order is a specified one, such as reverse pressing (the stop switch 26c is operated first), a symbol combination of "red seven, red seven, red seven" (also called "red sevens") may be displayed in the display window W (for example, on the pay line 29) depending on the pressing positions when the losing winning number is determined. This red sevens symbol is the same as the corresponding symbol of the small win 40 (red sevens symbol), but the small win 40 is only formed during RT2 (see FIG. 8). Therefore, the red sevens symbol that is stopped and displayed during RT1 is always a losing symbol.

(c) Reel control for winning When the symbol combinations corresponding to the winning-A1 to A12 condition devices shown in Fig. 24 (B), Fig. 25, and Fig. 26 are aligned during non-RT, a predetermined 1-coin role is always established regardless of the push order or push position, and when they are aligned during RT1, reel control is performed so that the role that is established differs depending on the push order or push position. For example, the winning-A11 condition device shown in Fig. 26 is a condition device corresponding to symbol combinations of small roles 6, 10, 15, 16, 21, and 34, and when these symbol combinations are aligned during non-RT, reel control is performed so that the small role 6, which is a 1-coin role, is always established regardless of the push order or push position.

On the other hand, when the symbol combination corresponding to the winning-A11 condition device is aligned during RT1, the reel control is performed so that when the push order is "middle, right, left", the small prize 6, which is a 15-coin prize, is formed with a probability of 1/1, when the push order is "right, middle, left", the small prize 34, which is a 15-coin prize, is formed with a probability of 1/1, and when the push order is other than "left, middle, right", "left, right, middle, left, right", "middle, right, left"), any of the small prizes 10, 15, and 16, which are 1-coin prizes, is formed with a probability of 1/8. Note that "left", "middle", and "right" refer to the stop switches 26a, 26b, and 26c, and the order of these indicates the order of operation. For example, "middle, right, left" represents the push order in which the stop switches are operated in the order 26b → 26c → 26a. In Figures 25 to 28, each push order is shown in the order of numbers "1", "2", and "3". In the diagram, "123", "132", "213", "231", "312", and "321" correspond to the push orders of "left center right", "left left center", "center left right", "center right left", "center right left", and "right center left", respectively.

During RT1, the state where the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus condition device can be arranged is carried over, so BB role 1 or BB role 2 may be established depending on the push order and push position. For example, if the symbol combination corresponding to the prize-winning-A11 condition device can be arranged during RT1 in which the state where the symbol combination corresponding to the 1st type BB-B condition device (i.e., the symbol combination of BB role 2) is carried over, when the push order is "middle right left" or "right middle left", small role 6 and small role 34 are always established, respectively, so BB role 2 is not established. On the other hand, when the push order is other than "left middle right", "left left middle", "middle left left", "middle right left"), if the corresponding symbol of small role 10, 15, or 16 can be drawn depending on the push position, BB role 2 is not established, but if these corresponding symbols cannot be drawn, and conversely, if the corresponding symbol of BB role 2, "black bar/black bar/red seven", can be drawn, the reel control is performed so that BB role 2 is established.

To be more specific, let us take the example of the "left, center, right" push order. First, let us explain the case where the push position on the first left reel is within the range where the symbol "red seven" can be drawn. In this case, reel control is performed on the left reel to draw the symbol "red seven", so at that stage, there remains the possibility of either small win 16 or small win 21 being achieved. Next, if the push position on the second center reel is within the range where the symbol "blue bar" can be drawn, reel control is performed on the center reel to draw the symbol "blue bar", so at that stage, there remains the possibility of small win 16 being achieved, and finally, if the push position on the third right reel is within the range where the symbol "blue bar" can be drawn, reel control is performed on the right reel to draw the symbol "blue bar", so finally, small win 16 (corresponding symbols "red seven, blue bar, blue bar") is achieved. On the other hand, if the push position on the second middle reel is within a range that can pull in the "red seven" symbol, reel control is performed on the middle reel to pull in the "red seven" symbol, and a miss (no winning combination is achieved) is confirmed at that stage (there remains a possibility that the "red seven red seven red seven" symbol combination will ultimately be displayed), and finally, if the push position on the third right reel is within a range that can pull in the "red seven" symbol, reel control is performed on the right reel to pull in the "red seven" symbol, and the "red seven red seven red seven" symbol combination will ultimately be displayed.

Next, we will explain the case where the first left reel is pushed in a range that can pull in the "black bar" symbol. In this case, reel control is performed on the left reel to pull in the "black bar" symbol, so at that stage, there remains the possibility of either BB role 2, small role 10, or small role 15 being formed. Next, if the second center reel is pushed in a range that can pull in the "black bar" symbol, reel control is performed on the center reel to pull in the "black bar" symbol, so at that stage, there remains the possibility of BB role 2 being formed, and finally, if the third right reel is pushed in a range that can pull in the "red seven" symbol, reel control is performed on the right reel to pull in the "red seven" symbol, so finally, BB role 2 (corresponding symbols "black bar, black bar, red seven") is formed. On the other hand, if the push position on the second middle reel is within the range where the "gold seven" symbol can be pulled in, reel control will be performed on the middle reel to pull in the "gold seven" symbol, so there is still a chance of achieving minor win 10 at that stage, and finally, if the push position on the third right reel is within the range where the "gold seven" symbol can be pulled in, reel control will be performed on the right reel to pull in the "gold seven" symbol, so ultimately minor win 10 (corresponding symbols "black bar gold seven gold seven") will be achieved.

The reel control is performed so that the winning combinations of the winning-B1 to B12 condition devices shown in Figures 26 to 28 are different depending on the push order and the push position, whether they are aligned during non-RT or RT1. For example, the winning-B7 condition device shown in Figure 27 is a condition device to which the symbol combinations of small roles 4, 5, 8, 13, 18, 23, and 30 are associated, and when these symbol combinations are aligned during non-RT, the reel control is performed so that when the push order is "middle first", the small role 30, which is a 15-piece role, is established with a probability of 1/1, and when the push order is "left first" or "right first", the small role 5, which is a 1-piece role, is established with a probability of 1/1. Note that "left first" represents the push order in which the stop switch 26a is operated first, "middle first" represents the push order in which the stop switch 26b is operated first, and "right first" represents the push order in which the stop switch 26c is operated first. In Figures 26 to 29, the pressing orders for "left first,""middlefirst," and "right first" are displayed as "1 - - -,""- - 2 - -," and "- - - 3," respectively.

On the other hand, if the symbol combination corresponding to the winning-B7 condition device is aligned during RT1, when the push order is "middle left right", the small role 4 or small role 5, which is a 1-coin role, will be established with a probability of 1/1, when the push order is "right left middle", the small role 30, which is a 15-coin role, will be established with a probability of 1/1, and when the push order is other push orders ("left middle right", "left left middle", "middle right left", "right middle left"), any of the small roles 8, 13, 18, and 23, which are 1-coin roles, will be established with a probability of 1/8. Also, during RT1 in which the symbol combination corresponding to the type 1 BB-A condition device (i.e. the symbol combination of BB role 1) is carried over, if the symbol combination corresponding to the winning-B7 condition device is aligned, when the push order is "middle left left" or "right left middle", the small roles 4, 5, and small role 30 will always be established, so the BB role 1 will never be established. On the other hand, when pressing in any other order ("left-center-right", "left-right-center", "center-right-left", "right-center-left"), if the pressing position allows the corresponding symbols of minor symbols 8, 13, 18, and 23 to be drawn in, BB role 1 is not established. However, if these corresponding symbols cannot be drawn in, and conversely, if the corresponding symbols of BB role 1, "blue bar/blue bar/red seven", can be drawn in, then the reels are controlled so that BB role 1 is established.

The symbol combinations of the winning-C to E condition device shown in Figure 29 are designed to always produce a minor prize 36, which is a 15-coin prize, regardless of the order or position of the buttons pressed, whether they are matched during a non-RT or RT1.

The winning-F to Q condition devices shown in FIG. 29 are configured so that the associated symbol combinations are not aligned during non-RT or RT1, but are selected during RT2. Of these, the winning-F, G, L, and M condition devices perform reel control so that when the associated symbol combinations are aligned during RT2, the watermelon minor role (minor role 24 to 37), which is a 15-coin role, is always achieved regardless of the push order or push position. When the symbol combinations associated with the winning-I, J, K, O, P, and Q condition devices are aligned during RT2, reel control is performed so that a 1-coin role (minor role 1 to 23, 40 to 44) is achieved depending on the push position. When the symbol combinations associated with the winning-H condition devices are aligned during RT2, reel control is performed so that a 3-coin role (minor role 38, 39) is achieved depending on the push position. When the symbol combination associated with the winning-N condition device is in a state where it can be aligned during RT2, if the push order is "left first" or "center first", a 1-coin role will be achieved depending on the push position, and if the push order is "right first", a 7-match 1-coin role (minor role 40) will be achieved depending on the push position.

(1-3) Means Constituting the Main Communication Control Means 150 The control command transmission means 151 is configured to transmit control commands including various information related to the game at a predetermined timing. For example, the control commands transmitted before the start lever 25 is operated include a control command including information indicating which game mode is set (also referred to as a "game mode command"), a control command including information indicating which RT state is set (also referred to as an "RT command"), and a control command including information indicating the operation state of replay (also referred to as an "operation state command"). In addition, the control commands transmitted in response to the operation of the start lever 25 include, for example, a control command including information on the instruction number (also referred to as an "instruction number command"), and a control command including information on the performance group number (performance group A number and performance group B number) (also referred to as a "performance group number command"). In addition, control commands including information on set values, control commands including information on the values of various counters such as a bell count counter, control commands including information instructing the performance content to be executed by the sub-control means, and control commands including information to be transmitted in the bonus game described below may be transmitted before the start lever 25 is operated, when the start lever 25 is operated, or at some other trigger.

In this way, when the operation of the start lever 25 is validly accepted, various control commands (collectively referred to as "lever operation acceptance commands") equivalent to the instruction number command and the performance group number command in the slot machine 1 are transmitted from the control command transmission means 151 to the sub-control means 200 (more specifically, the sub-main control means 200A) described below. By receiving this lever operation acceptance command, the sub-control means 200 can identify that the operation of the start lever 25 has been validly accepted (that the start lever 25 has been operated validly).

In addition, the control command transmission means 151, when the minimum play time has elapsed, transmits a control command (also referred to as a "all reels start rotation command") including information indicating that all reels will start rotating before all reels start rotating. Furthermore, when the first stop operation (operation of the stop switch to stop the reels for the first time) is accepted, a control command (also referred to as a "first stop acceptance command") including information indicating that the first stop operation has been accepted is transmitted, and when the first reel stop (stop of the reels corresponding to the first stop operation) is accepted, a control command (also referred to as a "first stop command") including information on the first reel stop is transmitted. Similarly, when the second stop operation (operation of the stop switch to stop the reels next) is accepted, a control command (also referred to as a "second stop acceptance command") including information indicating that the second stop operation has been accepted is transmitted, and when the second reel stop (stop of the reels corresponding to the second stop operation) is accepted, a control command (also referred to as a "second stop command") including information on the second reel stop is transmitted. Similarly, when the third stop operation (finally the operation of the stop switch to stop the reels) is accepted, a control command (also called the "third stop acceptance command") is sent that includes information indicating that the third stop operation has been accepted, and when the third drum stop (stopping of the reels corresponding to the third stop operation) is accepted, a control command (also called the "third stop command") is sent that includes information about the third drum stop.

In this way, each time each stop switch validly accepts a stop operation and switches from an OFF state to an ON state, the control command sending means 151 sends a control command (first, second, and third stop acceptance commands) including information indicating that the stop operation has been accepted to the sub-control means 200 (more specifically, the sub-main control means 200A) described below. Then, by receiving these stop acceptance commands, the sub-control means 200 can identify that each stop switch has validly accepted a stop operation (first, second, and third stop operation).

In addition, after each stop switch has accepted a stop operation effectively, when the stop operation is released and each stop switch switches from the on state to the off state, the control command transmission means 151 transmits a control command (stop operation release command) including information indicating that the accepted stop operation has been released. Specifically, a control command including information indicating that the first stop operation has been released (referred to as the "first stop operation release command"), a control command including information indicating that the second stop operation has been released (referred to as the "second stop operation release command"), and a control command including information indicating that the third stop operation has been released (referred to as the "third stop operation release command") are transmitted. By receiving these stop operation release commands, the sub-control means 200 can identify that the stop operation accepted effectively by each stop switch has been released (the player's hand has been removed from the stop switch). Note that the first and second stop operation release commands may not be transmitted, and only the third stop operation release command may be transmitted.

Furthermore, the control command sending means 151 sends a control command including information on all reels stopping (also called a "all stop command") before determining the stopping pattern, and a control command including information on the number of game medals to be paid out (also called a "payout number command") after determining the stopping pattern. In addition, at a predetermined timing after all reels have stopped, it sends a control command including information on the winning determination result (also called a "role determination result command"). Communication between the main control means 100 and the sub-control means 200 (sub-main control means 200A) is only possible in one direction, from the former to the latter.

The outer edge signal transmitting means 152 is configured to transmit an outer edge signal to an external device such as a data counter or hall computer when a predetermined game state is reached. In this embodiment, when the game mode 3 in the advantageous zone is in a state where the symbol combination associated with the winning-A1 to A12 condition device or the winning-B1 to B12 condition device is aligned, the outer edge signal is output when a situation occurs in which 15 game medals are paid out twice (consecutively). Such a situation can occur even when inside the BB or not inside the BB (not inside the BB). If the outer edge signal is output only when such a situation occurs inside the BB, it is possible to determine that the game is inside the BB by the output of the outer edge signal. In contrast, in this embodiment, the outer edge signal is output when the above-mentioned situation occurs, whether inside the BB or not inside the BB. Therefore, even if the outer edge signal is output, it is difficult to reliably determine whether the game is inside the BB. However, the possibility of 15 game medals being paid out when not inside the BB is much lower than when inside the BB. Therefore, when an outer end signal is output, there is a high possibility that it was output inside the BB. Therefore, even if a player checks the number of times the outer end signal has been output using an external device, etc., and judges that number to be the number of times the player has transitioned to inside the BB, that judgment will not deviate greatly from the actual situation (it is possible to ensure reliability when the outer end signal is interpreted as a signal indicating that the player is inside the BB).

(2) Functional blocks of the sub-control means 200 The sub-control means 200 is composed of a sub-main control means (also referred to as the "first sub-control means") 200A that mainly manages (instructs) the lamp performances, image performances, and audio performances, and a sub-sub control means (also referred to as the "second sub-control means") 200B that mainly controls (executes) the image performances and audio performances.

(2-1) Means Constituting the Sub-Main Control Means 200A The sub-main control means 200A is roughly divided into a presentation management means 210 and a sub-main communication control means 230. The presentation management means 210 is provided with a game presentation management means 211, an annunciation presentation management means 212, and a lamp presentation control means 213, while the sub-main communication control means 230 is provided with a control command receiving means 231, a presentation command transmitting means 232, and a status command receiving means 233. The above-mentioned means in the sub-main control means 200A are functional representations of hardware such as the sub-main CPU 71, ROM 72, RAM 73, and electronic circuits arranged on the sub-main control board 70A shown in FIG. 2, and software such as a control program stored in the ROM 72.

(Means constituting the performance management means 210)
The game presentation management means 211 is configured to manage the timing of presentation of images and sounds (also called "game presentation") executed by the sub-sub control means 200B, mainly for the purpose of improving the interest and playability of the game, based on control commands from the main control means 100. Game presentations include, for example, continuous presentations, single presentations, assist presentations, and the like.

A continuous performance is a performance that continues over multiple play periods, and examples of this include displaying images that tell a continuous story over multiple play periods, mainly using the image display device 11, and displaying performance images that symbolize the player being in a specific play mode (for example, play mode 5). When performing continuous performances or single performances, which will be described below, performances using performance lamps 12, 13a, 13b, 14a, 14b or decorative lamps 32a, 32b may be performed, or a combination of performances using speakers 15a, 15b, 44a, 44b may be performed.

A one-off effect is an effect that is executed one-off when a specific situation arises during the progress of the game. For example, an example is an effect in which the image display device 11 displays an image that suggests the expected winning probability of the game role as each reel spins. Another example of a one-off effect is an effect in which, when the number of AT games (number of bells) is added by the main control means 100, the value of the added number of AT games (for example, characters such as "+10") is displayed on the display screen 11a of the image display device 11.

The assist effect is an effect to assist the player, and in this embodiment, the push navigation effect is mainly performed according to the information of the navigation number transmitted by the navigation number command from the main control means 100. This push navigation effect (sub-side push navigation) is a one-off effect that uses the image display device 11 as a sub-side push order display device to display the push order (correct push order) according to the navigation number to the player on the display screen 11a. In this embodiment, the RP navigation effect (sub-side RP navigation) corresponding to the above-mentioned RP navigation, the prize navigation effect (sub-side prize navigation) corresponding to the prize navigation, and the eye push navigation effect (sub-side eye push navigation) corresponding to the eye push navigation are executed.

Specific examples of push navigation effects (RP navigation effects, winning navigation effects) that notify the push order include displaying numbers indicating the corresponding push order (for example, for the "left first" push order, "1" is displayed at the bottom left of the display screen 11a, and for the "center left and right" push order, the numbers indicating the push order are arranged in the order of "2", "1", and "3" from the left at the bottom of the display screen 11a). When displaying the first to third push orders, the display of the first push order may be erased when the player operates the first stop switch according to the displayed first push order, the display of the second push order may be erased when the player operates the second stop switch according to the displayed second push order, and the display of the third push order may be erased when the player operates the third stop switch according to the displayed third push order.

In addition, if the player operates the stop switch in a different order from the displayed push order, the push navigation effect may be immediately terminated. Furthermore, when the push order is displayed, the sound "middle", the sound "left", and the sound "right" may be output from the speakers 15a, 15b, etc. in association with the next operation to be performed. Furthermore, the effect lamp 13a may be associated with "left", the effect lamp 12 with "middle", and the effect lamp 13b with "right", and may be made to light up or blink in association with the next operation to be performed. Also, a display for performing sub-side push navigation may be provided. For example, a display consisting of three 7-segment lamps arranged horizontally may be provided under the display window W, and in the case of the push order of "right-center-left", the numbers "3", "2", and "1" may be displayed on the left, center, and right 7-segment lamps, respectively.

The notification effect management means 212 is configured to manage the execution timing of the image and sound effects (hereinafter referred to as "notification effects") executed by the sub-sub control means 200B based on a control command from the main control means 100, mainly for the purpose of notifying the player of information related to the game. Examples of notification effects include an error notification effect that notifies the occurrence of an error with text information such as "error occurred" and an effect that notifies the preparation of an image when the power is restored with text information such as "image preparation". In addition, an example of a notification effect is an effect that displays an image (also referred to as "attention drawing image") containing text information to call the player's attention in order to prevent the player from becoming too absorbed in the game (addiction).

The lamp effect control means 213 is configured to control various lighting effects using the effect lamps 12, 13a, 13b, 14a, 14b, the decorative lamps 32a, 32b, and the back lamps 38a to 38d. It is also configured to perform suggestive effects, which will be described later.

(Means constituting the sub-main communication control means 230)
The control command receiving means 231 is configured to receive control commands from the main control means 100 and store them in a predetermined storage area such as the RAM 73 (for example, a command buffer for the received control commands).

The performance command transmission means 232 is configured to transmit a performance command including various information related to the performance (e.g., a performance command including image information) to the sub-sub control means 200B based on a control command from the main control means 100.

The status command receiving means 233 is configured to receive a status command (e.g., a status command including information that a reception error has occurred for a performance command) from the sub-sub control means 200B and store it in a predetermined storage area such as the RAM 73 (e.g., a command buffer for the received status command).

(2-2) Each means constituting the sub-sub control means 200B In contrast to the sub-main control means 200A configured as above, the sub-sub control means 200B is roughly divided into a presentation execution control means 250 and a sub-sub communication control means 270. The presentation execution control means 250 is provided with a game presentation execution control means 251 and an announcement presentation execution control means 252, and the sub-sub communication control means 270 is provided with a presentation command receiving means 271 and a status command transmitting means 272. Note that each of the above-mentioned means in the sub-sub control means 200B is a functional representation of what is constituted by hardware such as the sub-sub CPU 75, ROM 76, RAM 77, and electronic circuits arranged on the sub-sub control board 70B shown in FIG. 2, and software such as a control program stored in the ROM 76.

(Means constituting the performance execution control means 250)
The game presentation execution control means 251 is configured to control the image display device 11, speakers 15a, 15b, etc., based on presentation commands from the sub-main control means 200A, and execute the above-mentioned game presentation.

The notification performance execution control means 252 is configured to control the image display device 11, speakers 15a, 15b, etc. based on performance commands from the sub-main control means 200A, and execute the above-mentioned notification performance.

(Means constituting the sub-sub communication control means 270)
The performance command receiving means 271 is configured to receive performance commands from the sub-main control means 200A and store them in a predetermined storage area such as the RAM 77 (for example, a command buffer for received performance commands).

The status command sending means 272 is configured to send the above-mentioned status command to the sub-main control means 200A.

The transmission of control commands from the control command transmission means 151, the transmission of performance commands from the performance command transmission means 232, and the transmission of status commands from the status command transmission means 272 are all performed by a serial communication method (parallel communication method may also be used). Each of the transmission means 151, 232, and 272 has a similar configuration, and is configured with a command buffer (also called "CB") as a storage area for temporarily storing commands to be transmitted, a command processing unit that performs processing such as writing and reading the commands to be transmitted, and a command transmission unit that transmits commands by serial communication.

The CB has multiple memory areas, each distinguished by an address, and is configured to be able to store one byte of command data in each memory area. The command processing unit is configured to generate command data to be sent and write it to the address area indicated by the write pointer of the CB, and also to read previously written command data from the address area indicated by the read pointer of the CB and write it to the TDR (transmit data register) of the command sending unit. The command sending unit is configured to transfer the command data written to the TDR to the TSR (transmit shift register), where it is converted to serial data and sent.

When using the parallel communication method, previously written command data is read from the address area indicated by the CB read pointer, and the command data is written to a specified output port (output port for sending to the sub-control means) for transmission. In this embodiment, one command is usually two bytes long (the checksum is one byte long). The communication method is asynchronous (start-stop synchronous), and has one stop bit and one parity bit (even parity) (the communication method and command structure can be changed as appropriate).

<Main control processes>
Below, among the control processes performed by the main control means 100 of the slot machine 1, the setting change process, the game progress control process, and the timer interrupt process will be described with additional reference to Figures 30 to 58. Note that for variables such as counters and flags used in the following description, brief explanations are given in the variable list of Figure 12.

<Settings change process>
First, the basic flow of the setting change device process will be described with reference to Fig. 30 (A). The setting change device process is executed when the setting is changed, and stores "0" in all storage areas (addresses in RAM 63 that store information about advantageous zones) that affect the performance of the instruction function (step K1).

<Game Progress Control Processing>
Next, the basic flow of the game progress control process will be described with reference to Fig. 30(B) to Fig. 57. The game progress control process is a process that is repeatedly executed during a game, and as shown in Fig. 30(B), first, a game start standby process is performed (step S1). In this game start standby process, as shown in Fig. 30(C), it is determined whether the total stop wait number is 0 or not (step S11). Here, if the total stop wait number is not 0, the process waits for a standby time corresponding to the total stop wait number (step S12) and proceeds to step S13, and if the total stop wait number is 0, the process proceeds directly to step S13. Then, in step S13, 0 is saved in the total stop wait number, and the game start standby process is terminated and returned.

After the game start standby process is completed, the process proceeds to step S2 in FIG. 30(B). Here, the process waits in that state until the operation of the start lever 25 is accepted, and when it is accepted, the internal lottery start process is performed (step S3). In this internal lottery start process, an internal lottery is performed (step S21) as shown in FIG. 31(A). In this internal lottery, the bonus condition device number and the winning replay condition device number are determined. After the internal lottery is performed, the process proceeds to group number set process.

In the group number set process, as shown in FIG. 31(B), a value corresponding to the bonus condition device number (see FIG. 21(A)) is stored in the performance group A number (step S31), and a value corresponding to the winning replay condition device number (see FIG. 21(B)) is stored in the performance group B number (step S32). Next, values corresponding to the performance group A number and performance group B number (see FIG. 22, same below) are stored in the condition device group A number (step S33), values corresponding to the performance group A number and performance group B number are stored in the condition device group D number (step S34), and values corresponding to the performance group A number and performance group B number are stored in the condition device group G number (step S35).

Similarly, values corresponding to the performance group A number and performance group B number are stored in the condition device group B number (step S36), values corresponding to the performance group A number and performance group B number are stored in the condition device group C number (step S37), and values corresponding to the performance group A number and performance group B number are stored in the condition device group E number (step S38). Furthermore, values corresponding to the performance group A number and performance group B number are stored in the condition device group I number (step S39), values corresponding to the performance group A number and performance group B number are stored in the condition device group F number (step S40), and values corresponding to the performance group A number and performance group B number are stored in the condition device group H number (step S41). Then, values corresponding to the performance group A number and performance group B number are stored in the condition device group J number (step S42), and the process proceeds to the section type number management lever processing.

In the section type number management lever process, as shown in FIG. 32, first, it is determined whether the section type number is 0 (normal section) (step S51). If the section type number is 0, the process proceeds to step S52 to determine whether the BB is not yet activated. If the BB is not yet activated, it is determined whether the BB is in progress (step S53). If the BB is not in progress, the process proceeds directly to step S55. If the BB is in progress, it is determined whether the condition device group A number is 1 (step S54). If the condition device group A number is 1, the process proceeds to step S51. On the other hand, if the BB is in progress as determined in step S52 above, or if the condition device group A number is not 1 as determined in step S54 above, the process does not proceed to step S51, but proceeds to the standby performance process described below.

In step S51, the favorable zone transition process is performed. In this favorable zone transition process, as shown in FIG. 34 (A), it is determined whether the condition device group A number is 0 or not (step S71), and if it is 0, the favorable zone transition process is terminated and the process returns. On the other hand, if the condition device group A number is not 0, a favorable zone lottery is performed (step S72), and the lottery result is saved in the zone type number (step S73). Next, it is determined whether the zone type number is 0 or not (step S74), and if it is 0, the favorable zone transition process is terminated and the process returns. On the other hand, if the zone type number is not 0, a chance mode 1 lottery is performed (step S75), and the lottery result is saved in the chance mode number (step S76). Furthermore, a seven table 1 lottery is performed (step S77), and the lottery result is saved in the seven table number (step S78).

Next, it is determined whether the chance mode number is 4 or not (step S79). Here, if the chance mode number is not 4, the process proceeds to step S83, where a chance game number drawing process is performed. In this chance game number drawing process, as shown in FIG. 34(B), a chance game number drawing is performed (step S91), the drawing result is stored in the chance game number counter (step S92), and then a return is made. Upon return from the chance game number drawing process, the process proceeds to step S84 in FIG. 34(A), where a chance period drawing is performed. Then, the drawing result is stored in the chance period counter, and the advantageous zone transition process is terminated and a return is made.

On the other hand, if the chance mode number is determined to be 4 in step S79, the process proceeds to step S80 and AT winning processing is performed. In this AT winning processing, as shown in FIG. 35, first, 1 is stored in the AT winning flag (step S101). Next, an AT mode drawing is performed and the drawing result is stored in the AT mode number (step S102), and then a Seven 1 drawing is performed and the drawing result is stored in the Seven number (step S103). Next, Seven number correction processing is performed (step S104).

In this seven number correction process, as shown in FIG. 36(A), first, the correction counter process is performed (step S121). In this correction counter process, as shown in FIG. 36(B), the correction counter data (counter that adds up the value of the gold seven counter and the value of the seven counter) is set to 0 (step S131), and it is determined whether the seven number is 2 or not (step S132). If the seven number is 2, the correction counter data is set to the value of the gold seven counter (step S133), and 1 is added to the correction counter data (step S134), and the process proceeds to step S135. On the other hand, if the seven number is not 2 as determined in the above step S132, the process proceeds directly to step S135. In this step S135, the seven counter value is added to the correction counter data, and the process proceeds to step S136. In step S136, a value calculated based on each value of the cumulative counter, the correction counter data, and the bell count counter is saved in the correction counter data, and the process returns from the correction counter process.

When the correction counter process is returned, the process proceeds to step S122 in FIG. 36 (A) to determine whether the correction counter value is 1901 or more. If the correction counter value is 1901 or more, the process returns after saving 1 in the seven number (step S123), and if the correction counter value is not 1901 or more, the process returns as is. In the reach flag process described later, the process procedure branches depending on whether the correction counter value is 2101 or more. In contrast, in this process, whether to save 1 in the seven number is determined depending on whether the correction counter value is 1901 or more, and the value of the correction counter used for branching judgment (also called the "discrimination value") is different. This is because saving 1 in the seven number allows at least one AT game next time, and the discrimination value is set to be less than 2101 in the reach flag process, taking into consideration that the number of game medals that can be acquired in the future will increase accordingly. In this way, by changing the discrimination value according to the situation, the number of game medals that can be acquired in the future can be managed without overcounting more than necessary.

When the seven number correction process is returned, the process proceeds to step S105 in FIG. 35 to determine whether the seven number is 1. If the seven number is not 1, the process stores 3 in the gold seven counter (step S106) and proceeds to step S107. If the seven number is 1, the process proceeds directly to step S107. In this step S107, the arrival flag process is performed.

In this reach flag processing, as shown in FIG. 36 (C), first, correction counter processing is performed (step S141). After the correction counter processing is completed, it is determined whether the correction counter is 2101 or greater (step S142), and if it is 2101 or greater, 1 is saved in the reach flag (step S143), and the reach flag processing is completed and the process returns. On the other hand, if the correction counter is not 2101 or greater, it is determined whether the main game state number is 3 (step S144), and if it is 3, the process returns directly, and if it is not 3, 0 is saved in the reach flag (step S145) and the process returns.

When returning from the arrival flag processing, proceed to step S108 in FIG. 35 and determine whether or not the condition device group A number is 1. If the condition device group A number is 1, the AT winning processing ends and returns. On the other hand, if the condition device group A number is not 1, an EX mode 1 drawing is performed (step S109), the drawing result is saved in the EX mode number (step S110), and then the AT winning processing ends and returns.

When returning from the AT winning processing process, proceed to step S81 in FIG. 34 (A) and determine whether the condition device group A number is 1. If the condition device group A number is not 1, the transition to the advantageous zone ends and returns, and if the condition device group A number is 1, the AT entry lever processing is performed (step S82).

In this AT entry lever process, as shown in FIG. 37, first, loop CU rank set process is performed (step S151). In the loop CU rank set process, as shown in FIG. 38(A), the seven set counter is incremented by 1 (step S171), a value corresponding to the seven table number and the seven set counter is stored in the loop number (step S172), a value corresponding to the seven table number and the seven set counter is stored in the CU rank number (step S173), and then the process returns.

When the loop CU rank set process is returned, the process proceeds to step S152 in FIG. 37 to determine whether the seven number is 1. If the seven number is 1, the process proceeds to step S154 to perform the seven loop lottery process. In the seven loop lottery process, as shown in FIG. 38(B), a seven loop lottery is performed (step S181), the lottery result is stored in the seven counter (step S182), and the process returns. When the seven loop lottery process is returned, the process proceeds to step S155 in FIG. 37, where the arrival flag process is executed and the process proceeds to step S156. On the other hand, if the seven counter value is not 0 as determined in step S153 above, the process proceeds directly to step S156. Also, if the seven number is not 1 as determined in step S152 above, the gold seven counter value is decremented by 1 (step S158), and gold seven loop lottery correction process is performed (step S159).

In this gold seven loop lottery correction process, as shown in FIG. 38(C), it is determined whether the arrival flag is 0 or not, and if it is not 0, the gold seven loop lottery correction process is terminated and the process returns. On the other hand, if the arrival flag is 0, the correction counter process is performed (step S192), and after the correction counter process is terminated, it is determined whether the value of the correction counter is smaller than 1900 or not (step S193). Here, if the value of the correction counter is 1900 or more, the gold seven loop lottery correction process is terminated and the process returns. On the other hand, if the value of the correction counter is smaller than 1900, the gold seven loop lottery is performed (step S194), and it is determined whether the result is 0 or not (step S195). Here, if the result of the gold seven loop lottery is 0, the gold seven loop lottery correction process is terminated and the process returns. On the other hand, if the result of the gold seven loop lottery is not 0, 3 is stored in the gold seven counter (step S196), the arrival flag process is performed (step S197), and the process returns.

Upon return from the Gold Seven Loop lottery correction process, the process proceeds to step S156 in FIG. 37, where a draw for the add-on mode is performed and the result is saved in the add-on mode number (step S157). Next, a correction counter process is performed (step S160), and after completion of this, a draw for 1 bell count is performed (step S161), and the result is saved in the bell count counter (step S162). Next, a bell count counter correction process is performed (step S163).

In this bell counter correction process, as shown in FIG. 39, first, the value of the allowable number of bells (the value of the number of bells allowed until the correction counter reaches the upper limit) calculated based on the difference between the upper limit value (2100) of the correction counter and the current value is stored in the correction counter (step S201). Next, it is determined whether the arrival flag is 0 or not (step S202), and if it is not 0, it proceeds directly to step S203, and if it is 0, it is determined whether the value of the correction counter is smaller than the value of the bell counter (step S206), and if it is smaller, it proceeds to step S203. In step S203, 7 is stored in the bell counter, and after saving, the bell counter correction process is terminated and returned. When returning from the bell counter correction process, it proceeds to step S164 in FIG. 37, where the arrival flag process is executed, and the AT entry lever process is terminated and returned. When returning from the AT entry lever process, the advantageous zone transition process in FIG. 34 (A) is also terminated and returned, and it proceeds to step S56 in FIG. 32, where the lever time wait process is executed.

In this lever time wait process, as shown in FIG. 40, first, it is determined whether the condition device group A number is 1 or not (step S211). Here, if the condition device group A number is 1, it is determined whether the AT winning flag is 0 or not (step S212), and if the AT winning flag is 0, 2 is stored in the lever weight number (step S213), and if it is not 0, 1 is stored in the lever weight number (step S214). Then, after storing, it ends the lever time wait process and returns. On the other hand, if the condition device group A number is not 1 in the judgment of the above step S211, it proceeds to step S215 and determines whether the main game state number is smaller than 2 or not. Here, if the main game state number is smaller than 2, it proceeds directly to step S217, and if the main game state number is 2 or more, it is determined whether the main game state number is 4 or not (step S230), and if it is 4, it proceeds to step S217. On the other hand, if the main game state number is not 4, it ends the lever time wait process and returns directly.

In step S217, it is determined whether the AT winning flag is 0, and if it is 0, the lever time wait processing is terminated and the process returns. On the other hand, if the AT winning flag is not 0, a lever effect weight lottery is performed (step S218). Then, it is determined whether the result is 0 (step S219), and if it is 0, the lever time wait processing is terminated and the process returns. On the other hand, if the result of the lever effect weight lottery is not 0, the process proceeds to step S213, where 2 is saved as the lever weight number, and after saving, the lever time wait processing is terminated and the process returns. On returning from the lever time wait processing, the process returns to the section type number management lever processing in FIG. 32, and proceeds to the standby performance processing described below.

On the other hand, if the section type number is not 0 in the judgment of step S51 in FIG. 32, 0 is stored in the lever full stop flag (step S57), and it is judged whether the condition device group A number is 1 or not (step S58). If the condition device group A number is 1, 1 is stored in the type 1 BB winning flag (step S59), and if it is not 1, 0 is stored in the type 1 BB winning flag (step S60). After storing, it is judged whether the winning replay condition device number is any of 13 to 36 (step S61). If the winning replay condition device number is any of 13 to 36, a value corresponding to the winning replay condition device number is stored in the instruction number (step S62), and then the process proceeds to step S63 in FIG. 33. If the winning replay condition device number is not any of 13 to 36, the process proceeds directly to step S63.

In step S63, the main game state number is determined, and depending on the main game state number, if the main game state number is 1, the main game state number 1 lever process is performed (step S64), and if the main game state number is 2, the main game state number 2, 5 lever process is performed (step S65). If the main game state number is 3, the main game state number 3 lever process is performed (step S66), if the main game state number is 4, the main game state number 4 lever process is performed (step S67), and if the main game state number is 5, the main game state number 2, 5 lever process is performed (step S68). After each lever process is performed, the process proceeds to step S56 in FIG. 32. On the other hand, if the main game state number is any other number, no particular process is performed and the process proceeds directly to step S56.

In the main game state number 1 lever processing, as shown in FIG. 41 (A), a chance mode 2 drawing is performed (step S241), and then a chance mode number determination process is performed (step S2421). In this chance mode number determination process, as shown in FIG. 41 (B), it is determined whether the result of the chance mode 2 drawing or chance mode 3 drawing is 0 (step S251). Here, if the result is 0, the chance mode number determination process is terminated and the process returns, and if the result is not 0, the result of the drawing is saved in the chance mode number (step S252) and then the process returns.

When the chance mode number determination process is returned, the process proceeds to step S243 in FIG. 41 (A) to determine whether the chance mode number is 4 or not. If the chance mode number is not 4, the process proceeds to step S247 to determine whether the 1st type BB winning flag is 0 or not. If it is 0, the process ends the main game state number 1 lever process and returns. If it is not 0, the chance game number lottery process is performed, and after that, the main game state number 1 lever process is terminated and returns. On the other hand, if the chance mode number is 4 in the determination of step S242, the process proceeds to step S244 to perform AT winning process. After that, the process determines whether the 1st type BB winning flag is 0 or not (step S245). If it is 0, the process ends the main game state number 1 lever process and returns. If it is not 0, the AT entry lever process is performed, and then returns.

In the main game state number 2, 5 lever processing, as shown in FIG. 41 (C), first, the AT winning lever processing is performed (step S261). In this AT winning lever processing, as shown in FIG. 42, first, it is determined whether the arrival flag is 0 or not (step S271). Here, if the arrival flag is not 0, the AT winning lever processing is terminated and returned as it is, and if the arrival flag is 0, it proceeds to step S272 and it is determined whether the EX mode number is 1 or not. Here, if the EX mode number is 1, an EX mode 2 drawing is performed (step S273), and it is determined whether the drawing result is 2 or not (step S274). Here, if the drawing result is 2, 2 is saved as the EX mode number (step S275), and then it proceeds to step S276. On the other hand, if the EX mode number is not 1 in the above step S272, it proceeds directly to step S276 from there, and if the result of the EX mode 2 drawing is not 2 in the above step S274, it proceeds directly to step S276 from there.

In step S276, it is determined whether the seven table number is smaller than 13. If the seven table number is smaller than 13, it is determined whether the drawn flag is 0 (step S277), and if it is 0, it is further determined whether the condition device group G number is 0 (step S278), and if the condition device group G number is not 0, it proceeds to step S279. In step S279, a seven table 2 drawing is performed, and it is determined whether the drawing result is 0 (step S280). If the result of the seven table 2 drawing is 0, it proceeds directly to step S282, and if the result of the seven table 2 drawing is not 0, it saves the drawing result in the seven table number (step S281), and then proceeds to step S282. In step S282, 1 is saved in the drawn flag, and it proceeds to step S283. On the other hand, if the seven table number is 13 or more in the determination in step S276, if the drawn flag is not 0 in the determination in step S277, or if the condition device group G number is 0 in the determination in step S278,
In each case, the flow proceeds from there to step S283.

In step S283, it is determined whether the seven number is 1. If the seven number is 1, a seven 2 lottery is performed (step S284), and it is determined whether the lottery result is 2 (step S285). If the result of the seven 2 lottery is 2, the lottery result is stored in the seven number (step S286), and a seven number correction process is performed (step S287). After the seven number correction process is performed, it is determined whether the seven number is 2 (step S288), and if it is 2, 3 is stored in the gold seven counter (step S289), and the process proceeds to step S290. On the other hand, if the seven number is not 1 in the determination in step S283, if the result of the seven 2 lottery is not 2 in the determination in step S285, or if the seven number is not 2 in the determination in step S289, the process proceeds to step S291. In step S291, a seven stock 1 lottery is performed, and the lottery result is added to the seven counter, and then the process proceeds to step S290. In this step S290, the reach flag processing is performed, and then after the AT is won, the lever processing ends and the process returns.

When returning from the lever processing after winning the AT, proceed to step S262 in FIG. 41 (C) and determine whether the Type 1 BB winning flag is 0. If the Type 1 BB winning flag is 0, the main game state number 2, 5 lever processing ends and returns, and if it is not 0, the AT entry lever processing is performed, and then the game state number 2, 5 lever processing ends and returns.

In the main game state number 3 lever processing, as shown in FIG. 43 (A), first, it is determined whether the command number is 0 or not (step S301). Here, if the command number is not 0, the value of the bell count counter is subtracted by 1 (step S302), and then the process proceeds to step S303. If the command number is 0, the process proceeds directly to step S303. In step S303, it is determined whether the reach flag is 0 or not. Here, if the reach flag is not 0, the main game state number 3 lever processing is terminated and the process returns, and if the reach flag is 0, a seven stock 2 lottery is performed (step S304), and the lottery result is added to the seven counter (step S306). Next, the reach flag processing is performed (step S306), and it is determined whether the reach flag is 0 or not (step S307). Here, if the reach flag is not 0, the main game state number 3 lever processing is terminated and the process returns, and if the reach flag is 0, it is determined whether the value of the gold seven counter is 1 or 2 (step S308). Here, if the value of the Gold Seven counter is not 1 or 2, the main game state number 3 lever processing ends and returns, but if the value of the Gold Seven counter is 1 or 2, it proceeds to the Gold Seven loop rewrite lottery correction processing.

In the gold seven loop rewrite lottery correction process, as shown in FIG. 43(B), first, the correction counter process is performed (step S311), and then it is determined whether the correction counter value is smaller than 1900 (step S312). If the correction counter value is 1900 or more, the gold seven loop rewrite lottery correction process is terminated and the process returns. If the correction counter value is smaller than 1900, the gold seven loop rewrite lottery is performed (step S313), and it is determined whether the lottery result is 0 or not (step S314). If the result of the gold seven loop rewrite lottery is 0, the gold seven loop rewrite lottery correction process is terminated and the process returns. If the result is not 0, 3 is stored in the gold seven counter (step S316). Then, the arrival flag process is performed (step S316), and then the gold seven loop rewrite lottery correction process is terminated and the process returns. Upon return from the gold seven loop rewrite lottery correction process, the main game state number 3 lever process in FIG. 43(A) is also terminated and the process returns.

In the main game state number 4 lever processing, as shown in FIG. 44 (A), a pull-back 1 lottery is performed, and it is determined whether the lottery result is 0 or not (step S321). Here, if the result of the pull-back 1 lottery is not 0, AT winning time processing is performed (step S323), and then it is determined whether the 1st type BB winning flag is 0 or not (step S324). Here, if the 1st type BB winning flag is 0, the main game state number 4 lever processing is terminated and returned, and if the 1st type BB winning flag is not 0, the AT entry time lever processing is performed (step S325), and then the main game state number 4 lever processing is terminated and returned. On the other hand, if the result of the pull-back 1 lottery is 0 in the judgment of the above step S322, proceed to step S326, and it is determined whether the 1st type BB winning flag is 0 or not. Here, if the type 1 BB winning flag is 0, the main game state number 4 lever processing ends and returns, and if the type 1 BB winning flag is not 0, the AT cycle preferential game number lottery processing proceeds. In this AT cycle preferential game number lottery processing, as shown in FIG. 44(B), a lottery for the AT cycle preferential game number is performed (step S331), the lottery result is stored in the AT cycle preferential game number counter (step S332), and the AT cycle preferential game number lottery processing ends and returns. With the return from this AT cycle preferential game number lottery processing, the main game state number 4 lever processing in FIG. 44(A) also ends and returns.

Next, the standby effect processing performed after the section type number management lever processing in FIG. 32 will be described. In this standby effect processing, as shown in FIG. 45, first, it is determined whether the section type number is 0 or not (step S341). Here, if the section type number is not 0, it is determined whether the main game state number is 3 or not (step S342), and if the main game state number is 3, it is further determined whether the value of the seven set counter is 1 or not (step S344). Here, if the value of the seven set counter is 1, it is determined whether the seven table number is smaller than 15 or not (step S344), and if it is smaller than 15, it proceeds to step S345, and if it is 15 or more, it proceeds to step S347. In step S347, it is determined whether the winning replay condition device number is one of 1 to 12 or 37 to 39 or not, and if it is determined that it is not one of them, it proceeds to step S345, and if it is determined that it is one of them, it ends the standby effect processing and returns. On the other hand, if the section type number is determined to be 0 in step S341 above, or if the main game state number is determined to be not 3 in step S342 above, the process proceeds directly to step S345.

In step S345, it is determined whether the lever weight number is 0. If the lever weight number is 0, the process proceeds to step S345. If the lever weight number is not 0, the process waits for a time period corresponding to the lever weight number, saves 0 as the lever weight number (step S349), and then proceeds to step S346. In step S346, it is determined whether the standby effect number is 0. If the standby effect number is 0, the process ends the standby effect process and returns. On the other hand, if the standby effect number is not 0, the process executes a standby effect (step S349), then ends the standby effect process and returns.

Upon returning from the end of the standby performance process, the section type number management lever process in FIG. 32 also ends, which also ends the internal lottery start process in FIG. 31 (A), and proceeds to step S4 in FIG. 30 (B). In this step S4, it is continuously determined whether all the reels have stopped, and if all the reels have stopped, game medals are paid out (only if a winning combination is achieved) (step S5), and further, count management is performed to perform processing such as updating the displayed number on the display (not shown), which shows the number of game medals won during the AT, etc., according to the number of game medals paid out (step S6). After that, the section type number management game end process is performed (step S8).

In this section type number management game end process, as shown in FIG. 46, first, it is determined whether the section type number is 0 or not (step S361). Here, if the section type number is 0, the section type number management game end process is ended as it is and returned. On the other hand, if the section type number is not 0, 1 is stored in the lever full stop flag (step S362), and the cumulative counter process is performed (step S363). In the cumulative counter process, as shown in FIG. 47, it is determined whether the replay operation pattern (the corresponding pattern of the replay role) is displayed (step S381), and if it is displayed, the cumulative counter process is ended as it is and returned. On the other hand, if the replay operation pattern is not displayed, the number of game medals paid out (including the case of 0) is added to the value of the cumulative counter (step S382), and the value of the cumulative counter is further subtracted by 3 (step S383), and the cumulative counter process is ended and returned.

After returning from the cumulative counter process, the process proceeds to step S364 in FIG. 46 to determine the main game state number. Then, depending on the main game state number, if the main game state number is 0, main game state number 0 full stop process is performed (step S365), if the main game state number is 1, main game state number 1 full stop process is performed (step S366), and if the main game state number is 2, main game state number 2, 5 full stop process is performed (step S367). Also, if the main game state number is 3, main game state number 3 full stop process is performed (step S368), if the main game state number is 4, main game state number 4 full stop process is performed (step S369), and if the main game state number is 5, main game state number 2, 5 full stop process is performed (step S370). Furthermore, if the main game state number is 6, main game state number 6 full stop process is performed (step S371), and if the main game state number is 7, main game state number 7 full stop process is performed (step S372).

In the main game state number 0 full stop processing in step S365 of FIG. 46, as shown in FIG. 48, first, it is determined whether or not the AT winning flag is 0 (step S391). Here, if the AT winning flag is 0, it is determined whether or not the condition device group A number is 1 (step S392), and if the condition device group A number is 1, it is further determined whether or not BB is not established (step S392). Then, if BB is not established, 6 is saved in the main game state number (step S394), and the main game state number 0 full stop processing is terminated and returned. On the other hand, if the condition device group A number is not 1 in the judgment of the above step S392, and if BB is established in the judgment of the above step S393, 0 is saved in the main game state number (step S396), and the main game state number 0 full stop processing is terminated and returned. Also, if the AT winning flag is not 0 in the judgment of the above step S391, it proceeds to step S396, where it is determined whether or not the condition device group A number is 1. Here, if the condition device group A number is not 1, 2 is saved in the main game state number (step S398), the main game state number 0 full stop processing is terminated, and the process returns. On the other hand, if the condition device group A number is 1, the process proceeds to step S397, and the game end processing is performed when the AT is entered.

In this game end process when entering the AT, as shown in FIG. 49, 0 is stored in the chance mode number (step S401), 0 is stored in the chance game number counter (step S402), and 0 is stored in the chance cycle counter (step S403). After that, 0 is stored in the EX mode number (step S404), 0 is stored in the AT cycle counter (step S405), and 0 is stored in the completed drawing flag (step S406). Furthermore, 3 is stored in the main game state number (step S407), and the advantageous zone lamp is turned on (step S408).

Next, as shown in FIG. 50, it is determined whether or not three "red seven" symbols are displayed in a row on the upper line in the display window W (step S409), and if they are displayed in a row, the process proceeds to step S410, and if they are not displayed in a row, the process proceeds to step S412. In step S412, it is determined whether or not three "red seven" symbols are displayed in a row on the pay line 29 in the display window W, and if they are displayed in a row, the process proceeds to step S410, and if they are not displayed in a row, the process proceeds to step S413. In step S413, it is determined whether or not three "red seven" symbols are displayed in a row on the lower line in the display window W, and if they are displayed in a row, the process proceeds to step S410, and if they are not displayed in a row, the process proceeds to step S414. In step S414, it is determined whether or not three "red seven" symbols are displayed in a row on the lower right line in the display window W, and if they are displayed in a row, the process proceeds to step S410, and if they are not displayed in a row, the process proceeds to step S415. In step S415, it is determined whether or not three "red seven" symbols are displayed stopped in a row on an upward sloping line in the display window W. If they are, the process proceeds to step S410; if they are not, the process proceeds to step S416.

If the process proceeds to step S410 (when three "red seven" symbols are displayed in a row in the display window W), 1 is stored in the wait number when the reels stop, and 0 is stored in the standby effect number (step S411), and the process proceeds to step S418 in FIG. 49. On the other hand, if the process proceeds to step S416 (when three "red seven" symbols are not displayed in a row in the display window W), 0 is stored in the wait number when the reels stop, and 1 is stored in the standby effect number (step S417), and the process proceeds to step S418 in FIG. 49. In this step S418, it is determined whether the seven number is 2 or not. Here, if the seven number is not 2, the game termination process when the AT starts is terminated and the process returns, and if the seven number is 2, 2 is added to the standby effect number (step S419), and the game termination process when the AT starts is terminated and the process returns. When the process returns from the game termination process when the AT starts, the main game state number 0 full stop process in FIG. 48 is also terminated and the process returns.

In the main game state number 1 full stop processing in step S366 of FIG. 46, as shown in FIG. 51 (A), the chance game number counter is decremented by 1 (step S431), and it is determined whether the game is a BB operation end game (a game in which the operation of the BB game ends) or not (step S432). If the game is not a BB operation end game, proceed directly to step S435, and if it is a BB operation end game, save 0 in the chance game number counter (step S433), decrement the chance cycle counter by 1 (step S434), and proceed to step S435. In step S435, it is determined whether the AT winning flag is 0 or not. If the AT winning flag is 0, it is determined whether the value of the chance game number counter is 0 or not (step S436), and if the value of the chance game number counter is 0, it is further determined whether the value of the chance cycle counter is 0 or not (step S437). If the chance cycle counter value is 0, chance mode 3 is drawn (step S438), and then chance mode number determination processing is performed (step S439).

Next, it is determined whether the chance mode number is 4 or not (step S441). Here, if the chance mode number is not 4, 1 is stored in the advantageous zone counter (step S441), the main game state number 1 full stop processing is terminated and returned. On the other hand, if the chance mode number is 4, AT winning processing is performed (step S445), and then 2 is stored in the main game state number (step S448), the main game state number 1 full stop processing is terminated and returned. On the other hand, if the value of the chance game number counter is not 0 in the judgment of the above step S436, and the value of the chance period counter is not 0 in the judgment of the above step S437, it proceeds to step S442 and determines whether the 1st type BB winning flag is 0 or not. Here, if the 1st type BB winning flag is 0, the main game state number 1 full stop processing is terminated and returned. On the other hand, if the Type 1 BB winning flag is not 0, it is determined whether or not the Type 1 BB operating symbol is not displayed (step S443), and if the Type 1 BB operating symbol is not displayed, 6 is saved in the main game state number (step S444), and if the Type 1 BB operating symbol is not displayed, the main game state number 1 full stop processing ends and returns.

Also, if the AT winning flag is not 0 in the judgment of step S435, proceed to step S446 and judge whether the type 1 BB winning flag is 0 or not. Here, if the type 1 BB winning flag is 0, save 2 in the main game state number (step S448), end the main game state number 1 full stop processing, and return. On the other hand, if the type 1 BB winning flag is not 0, perform the game end processing when entering the AT (step S447), and then end the main game state number 1 full stop processing and return.

In the main game state number 2, 5 full stop processing in step S367 of FIG. 46, as shown in FIG. 51 (B), it is determined whether the type 1 BB winning flag is 0 or not (step S421), and if the type 1 BB winning flag is 0, the process remains as is, and if the type 1 BB winning flag is not 0, the process performs the game end processing when entering the AT (step S422), and then ends the main game state number 2, 5 full stop processing and returns.

In the main game state number 3 full stop processing in step S368 of FIG. 46, as shown in FIG. 52, first, it is determined whether the value of the bell counter is 0 or not (step S451). Here, if the value of the bell counter is not 0, the main game state number 3 full stop processing is terminated and returned, and if the value of the bell counter is 0, it proceeds to step S452 to determine whether the seven number is 1 or not. Here, if the seven number is 1, it proceeds to step S452 to determine whether the value of the seven counter is 0 or not, and if the value of the seven counter is 0, it proceeds to step S454 to determine whether the value of the cumulative counter is smaller than 2001 or not. Here, if the value of the cumulative counter is smaller than 2001, it is determined whether the value of the reach flag is 0 or not (step S455), and if the value of the reach flag is 0, an AT mode rewrite lottery is performed (step S456). Next, it is determined whether the lottery result is 0 (step S457), and if the lottery result is 0, the process proceeds directly to step S459, and if the lottery result is not 0, the lottery result is saved in the AT mode number (step S458) and then the process proceeds to step S459.

In step S459, an AT cycle lottery is performed, and the lottery result is stored in the AT cycle counter (step S460). Furthermore, a seven table 1 lottery is performed (step S462), and the lottery result is stored in the seven table number (step S463). Next, an AT cycle preferential game number lottery process is performed (step S464), and then 0 is stored in the AT winning flag (step S465), 0 is stored in the seven number (step S466), and 0 is stored in the seven counter (step S467). Next, 0 is stored in the gold seven counter (step S468), 0 is stored in the seven set counter (step S469), and 0 is stored in the loop number (step S470). Next, 0 is stored in the CU rank number (step S471), 0 is stored in the reach flag (step S472), and 0 is stored in the add-on mode number (step S473). Furthermore, 0 is stored in the bell count counter (step S474), and 0 is stored in the total acquisition counter (step S475). Then, 7 is stored in the main game state number (step S476), and 2 is stored in the wait number when all games are stopped (step S477), after which the main game state number 3 all-stop processing ends and the process returns.

On the other hand, if the seven number is not 1 in the judgment of step S452, and if the seven counter is not 0 in the judgment of step S453, the process proceeds to step S481 in FIG. 53, and judges whether the value of the seven set counter is 7 or not. If the value of the seven set counter is not 7, the process proceeds directly to step S484, and if the value of the seven set counter is 7, 15 is stored in the seven table number (step S482), and 0 is further stored in the seven set counter (step S483), and then the process proceeds to step S484. In step S484, a loop CU rank set process is performed, and then it is judged whether the seven number is 1 or not (step S485). If the seven number is not 1, it is judged whether the value of the gold seven counter is 0 or not (step S487), and 1 is stored in the seven number (step S488), and then the process proceeds to step S489. On the other hand, if the seven number is 1, the value of the seven counter is decremented by 1 (step S488), and then the process proceeds to step S489.

In step S489, it is determined whether the value of the seven counter is 0, and if the value of the seven counter is 0, it is determined whether the arrival flag is 0 (step S490). Here, if the arrival flag is 0, a seven loop lottery process (step S491) and an arrival flag process (step S492) are performed, and then the process proceeds to step S493. On the other hand, if the value of the seven counter is not 0 in the determination of step S489 above, or if the arrival flag is not 0 in the determination of step S490 above, the process proceeds directly to step S493. Also, if the value of the gold seven counter is not 0 in the determination of step S487 above, the process proceeds to step S495, and it is determined whether the value of the gold seven counter is 3. Here, if the value of the gold seven counter is not 3, the process proceeds directly to step S497, and if the value of the gold seven counter is 3, 3 is saved in the standby performance number (step S496) before proceeding to step S497. In step S497, the value of the Gold Seven counter is decremented by 1, and then the Gold Seven loop lottery process is executed (step S498), and then the process proceeds to step S493.

In step S493, a draw for the add-on mode is performed, and the result of the draw is stored in the add-on mode number (step S494). After that, the process proceeds to step S501 in FIG. 54, where correction counter processing is performed. Next, a draw for the number of bells change is performed (step S502), and it is determined whether the result of the draw is 0 or not (step S503). Here, if the result of the number of bells change draw is 0, a draw for number of bells 2 is performed (step S504), and the result of the draw is stored in the number of bells counter (step S505), before proceeding to step S508. If the result of the number of bells change draw is not 0, a draw for number of bells 3 is performed (step S506), and the result of the draw is stored in the number of bells counter (step S507), before proceeding to step S508.

In step S508, bell counter correction processing is performed, and then arrival flag processing is performed (step S509). Next, 3 is stored in the lever wait number (step S510), and it is determined whether the standby effect number is 0 or not (step S511). If the standby effect number is 0, 1 is stored in the standby effect number (step S512), and the process proceeds to step S477 in FIG. 52. On the other hand, if the standby effect number is not 0, the process proceeds directly to step S477. Then, 2 is stored in the full stop wait number, and the main game state number 3 full stop processing is terminated and the process returns.

In the main game state number 4 full stop processing in step S369 of FIG. 46, as shown in FIG. 55, the value of the AT cycle preferential game number counter is subtracted by 1 (step S521), and it is determined whether the game is a BB operation end game or not (step S522). If the game is not a BB operation end game, the process proceeds directly to step S525, and if the game is a BB operation end game, 0 is stored in the AT cycle preferential game number counter (step S523), and the value of the AT cycle counter is further subtracted by 1 (step S524), and then the process proceeds to step S525. In step S525, it is determined whether the AT win flag is 0. If the AT win flag is 0, it is determined whether the value of the AT cycle counter is 0 (step S526), and if the value of the AT cycle counter is also 0, a draw for pullback 2 is performed (step S527). Then, it is determined whether the lottery result is 0 or not (step S528), and if the lottery result is 0, 1 is stored in the advantageous zone clear counter (step S529), and the main game state number 4 full stop processing ends and returns.

On the other hand, if the value of the AT cycle counter is not 0 in the judgment of step S526, the process proceeds to step S534, where it is judged whether the 1st type BB winning flag is 0 or not. Here, if the 1st type BB winning flag is 0, the main game state number 4 full stop processing is terminated and the process returns. On the other hand, if the 1st type BB winning flag is not 0, the process proceeds to step S535.
The process proceeds to step S535 to determine whether BB has not been established. If BB has not been established, the process ends the main game state number 4 full stop processing and returns, whereas if BB has been established, the process saves 7 in the main game state number (step S536), ends the main game state number 4 full stop processing and returns.

If the AT winning flag is not 0 in the determination in step S525, the process proceeds to step S531 to determine whether the Type 1 BB winning flag is 0 or not. If the Type 1 BB winning flag is not 0, the process proceeds to step S532 to perform game ending processing when entering the AT, end the main game state number 4 full stop processing, and return. On the other hand, if the Type 1 BB winning flag is 0, the process proceeds to step S533 to save 5 in the main game state number, end the main game state number 4 full stop processing, and return. Furthermore, if the result of the pullback 2 lottery is not 0 in the determination in step S528, the process proceeds to step S530 to perform AT winning processing, and then save 5 in the main game state number (step S533), end the main game state number 4 full stop processing, and return.

In the main game state number 6 full stop processing in step S371 of FIG. 46, as shown in FIG. 56 (A), it is determined whether or not BB has been established (step S541). If BB has not been established, the main game state number 6 full stop processing ends and returns, whereas if BB has been established, 1 is saved in the main game state number (step S542), after which the main game state number 6 full stop processing ends and returns.

In the main game state number 7 full stop processing in step S372 of FIG. 46, as shown in FIG. 56 (B), it is determined whether or not BB has been established (step S551). If BB has not been established, the main game state number 7 full stop processing ends and returns, whereas if BB has been established, 4 is saved as the main game state number (step S552), and the main game state number 6 full stop processing ends and returns.

After executing any of the full stop processes for main game state numbers 0 to 7 shown in steps S365 to S372 in FIG. 46, the process proceeds to step S373 in FIG. 46. Here, 0 is saved in the instruction number, the section type number management game end process is ended, and a return is made. Upon return from the section type number management game end process, the process proceeds to step S8 in FIG. 30(B) and advantageous zone clear counter management process is performed.

In the favorable zone clear counter management process, as shown in FIG. 57, the value of the favorable zone clear counter is subtracted by 1 (step S561), and it is determined whether the value of the favorable zone clear counter is 0 from before the current subtraction (step S562). If the value of the favorable zone clear counter is not 0 before the current subtraction, proceed to step S565, and determine whether the value of the favorable zone clear counter has become 0 as a result of the current subtraction. If the value of the favorable zone clear counter has become 0 as a result of the current subtraction, proceed directly to step S566. On the other hand, if the value of the favorable zone clear counter is not 0 after the current subtraction, proceed to step S567, and determine whether a replay operation pattern has been displayed in the game. If a replay operation pattern has been displayed in the game, proceed directly to step S569, and if not, add the value obtained by subtracting the number of bets from the number of game medals paid out in the game to the net increase counter (step S568), and then proceed to step S569.

In step S569, it is determined whether the value of the net increase counter is 2401 or more, and if the value of the net increase counter is below 2401, the process proceeds to step S566, and if the value is 2401 or more, the process ends the favorable zone clearing counter management process and returns. In step S566, 0 is stored in all storage areas that store data values that affect the performance related to the instruction function, and the process proceeds to step S563. On the other hand, if the value of the favorable zone clearing counter is 0 before the current subtraction as determined in step S562, the process proceeds to step S563. In step S563, it is determined whether the zone type number is 0, and if the zone type number is 0, the process ends the favorable zone clearing counter management process and returns. On the other hand, if the zone type number is not 0, 1500 is stored in the favorable zone clearing counter (step S564), and the process ends the favorable zone clearing counter management process and returns.

<Timer interrupt processing>
Next, the timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. 58. In this embodiment, the processes of reading each game operation signal outputted according to the game operation such as the betting operation performed by the player, detecting (checking) the signal level, transmitting each control command, driving control of the reel, etc. are performed by the timer interrupt process performed at a preset fixed time (for example, 2.235 milliseconds). In this timer interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 58, first, the interrupt initial process (saving the register, prohibiting the interrupt, etc.) is performed (step MT11), and then it is determined whether or not a power cut is detected (step MT12). Here, if a power cut is detected, the power cut process is performed (step MT25). In the power cut process, the save of the register, the saving of the stack pointer, the saving of the interrupt state, etc. are performed. In addition, the holding of the information on the role determination result and the information on the game state (including the information on the AT) stored in a predetermined memory area, the calculation and storage of the checksum, etc. are also performed.

On the other hand, if a power outage has not been detected, the interrupt counter value is updated (decremented by "1") (step MT13), and then a timer measurement is performed (step MT14). This timer measurement involves subtracting or adding to the timer value of any timer set in the game progress control process described above. Next, the input port is read (step MT15). When reading the input port, the signal levels of each game operation signal input to the input port are read and stored, and the signal levels are determined.

Next, reel drive control processing is performed to control the drive of reels 3a to 3c (acceleration, deceleration, constant speed maintenance, stop maintenance, etc.) (step MT16). In this reel drive control processing, the reel drive pulse output counter value indicating the timing to switch the output phase (excitation phase) of the stepping motor is updated according to the reel drive state (stop, reel rotation waiting, accelerating, constant speed, decelerating, etc.), and reel drive pulse data for driving the stepping motor is acquired, updated, output, etc. In the next step MT17, it is determined whether the reel drive control processing has been performed for all reels. If not, the process returns to step MT16 and the reel drive control processing is performed again. On the other hand, if all reels have been performed, a port output process is performed to perform excitation output for reels, hoppers, blockers, etc. (step MT18), and a control command transmission process is performed to transmit the control commands stored in the control command buffer (CB) (step MT19).

Next, the process proceeds to step MT20, where the outer end signal (external signal) data stored in a specified memory area is read out and the outer end signal is output. Next, an LED display is performed to cause the above-mentioned display lamp to execute a specified display (step MT21). In this LED display, for example, the following display is executed on the payout number display lamp 46j. That is, if no error (excluding E-system errors) has occurred, the payout number "0-9" is displayed based on the number of game medals paid out, or a numerical value "1-6" is displayed based on a set value. Furthermore, when an announcement of the push order is made, the display mode of the instruction number "=1" to "=6" is displayed. Furthermore, if an error (excluding E-system errors) has occurred, an error display is executed based on the value of the error number.

Next, the process proceeds to step MT22, where error management is performed. In this error management, an error check is first performed. In this error check, it is determined whether an H0 error has occurred,
It judges whether an error has occurred, whether a CP error has occurred, whether a CH error has occurred, whether a C0 error has occurred, whether a C1 error has occurred, whether an E6 error has occurred, whether an E7 error has occurred, and further, if an E6 error or an E7 error has occurred, it displays an error on the payout number display lamp 46j and stops the game. If an E-system error occurs, the error can be restored by executing the above-mentioned setting change processing. After this error check, if an error has occurred, it performs processing of an output request set at the time of error detection to transmit error information to the sub-control means 200. After executing this error management processing, it performs processing to update the random numbers used for role determination, etc. (step MT23), and further performs interrupt return processing (register return, interrupt permission, etc.) (step MT24), and returns from the interrupt.

Next, with reference to Figures 59 to 71, we will explain the effects (hereinafter referred to as "display effects") that are performed by images displayed on the display screen 11a (image display section DP) of the image display device 11 in the slot machine 1. Examples of display effects that are performed in this embodiment include conversation effects (also referred to as "dialogue effects"), subtitle effects (also referred to as "telop effects"), expectation effects (also referred to as "object effects"), GET effects, scene switching effects, and blackout effects.

(Conversational performance)
The conversation performance is, for example, a performance in which people, animals, plants, robots, monsters (whether real or imaginary) and the like (collectively referred to as "characters") set as image characters of a gaming machine converse, and predetermined lines uttered by each character are displayed on an image display unit such as a liquid crystal panel, and sound is output from an audio output unit such as a speaker. The conversation performance may play a role of informing the player of content unrelated to the game result, such as introducing the character to the player, explaining the content regarding the game method, or explaining the content regarding the model and specifications of the gaming machine, or may play a role of informing the player of content related to the game result, such as suggesting the expectation of an advantageous game. An advantageous game refers to a game that is more advantageous to the player than usual (for example, a game during AT (including ART) or a bonus game in a slot machine, a game during a jackpot in a pachinko machine, a probability-varying game, or a time-saving game, and is hereinafter also referred to as "advantageous game"). The expectation of granting an advantageous game refers to the expectation (reliability, certainty) of obtaining a game result (e.g., winning an AT in a slot machine, winning an AT add-on, winning an add-on with many AT add-ons, winning a bonus, winning an advantageous bonus, winning a rare role, winning a jackpot in a pachinko machine, winning a chance jackpot (a jackpot more advantageous than a jackpot without a chance jackpot), winning a 16-round jackpot (a jackpot with many balls that are put out), etc.) that has a high probability of executing an advantageous game or of allowing the execution of an advantageous game (including the case where it is 100%). In the conversation performance, a predetermined display (also called a "conversation performance display") for the conversation performance is displayed on the image display unit DP at a predetermined timing. Note that the display is not limited to a two-dimensional (flat) image display, but also includes a three-dimensional (stereoscopic) display such as a hologram. Note that the conversation performance may be a mode in which two or more characters talk to each other, or a mode in which one character talks to the player. In short, at the very least, the requirements for dialogue presentation are met if there is a character image and dialogue text that corresponds to the character image.

The conversation production display is a display related to the remarks of each character in a conversation between multiple characters, and includes a display of the character and a display that can be identified as a character. The character display is, specifically, for example, a display of a picture (picture) showing the appearance (appearance, mainly the face) of the character who is speaking (also referred to as a "character image display"). On the other hand, the display that can be identified as a character is, specifically, for example, a display of characters showing the content of the character's remarks (also referred to as a "line display" in the conversation production display). In addition to the character image display and the line display, the conversation production display usually includes a display that can identify the name of the character. The display that can identify the name of the character is, specifically, for example, a display of characters showing the name of the character who is speaking (also referred to as a "character name display"). The conversation production display is configured to include a character image display, a line display, and a character name display, but a conversation production display that does not include a character name display and is composed of a character image display and a line display may be provided. As specific examples of conversation performance displays, a first conversation performance display KD1 is shown in FIG. 59(A), and a second conversation performance display KD2 is shown in FIG. 59(B).

The first conversation performance display KD1 is composed of a character picture display KG1 that displays the appearance of character CH1, a character name display KN1 that displays the name of character CH1 ("Kenji"), and a line display KS1 that displays the lines of character CH1 ("It's a nice day today, isn't it?"). In the line display KS1, a frame-shaped image (also called an "area image") KW1 that indicates a certain range is displayed together with the lines to make it easier to understand the range of one line, to make it easier to understand which character is speaking, and to make the lines stand out. Similarly, the second conversation performance display KD2 is composed of a character picture display KG2 that displays the appearance of character CH2, which is different from character CH1, a character name display KN2 that displays the name of character CH2 ("Pamela"), and a line display KS2 that displays the lines of character CH2 ("You're so carefree"). In the line display KS2, the area image KW2 is also displayed.

In the first conversation performance display KD1, the character image display KG1, the character name display KN1, the dialogue display KS1, and the range image KW1 are displayed in a predetermined area of the image display unit DP at a predetermined identical timing during one game as each display component constituting the first conversation performance display KD1. Similarly, in the second conversation performance display KD2, the character image display KG2, the character name display KN2, the dialogue display KS2, and the range image KW2 are displayed in another predetermined area of the image display unit DP (e.g., an area that does not overlap with the area where the first conversation image KG1 is displayed) at another predetermined identical timing during one game as each display component constituting the second conversation performance display KD2. As a modification example, for example, in the first conversation performance display KD1, the character image display KG1 and the character name display KN1 are displayed first, and then (e.g., 0.2 seconds later), the dialogue display KS1 is displayed together with the range image KW1, and the display timing between the display components may be slightly different. This also applies to the second conversation performance display KD2.

Regarding the timing at which the conversation performance display is displayed, any timing triggered (display trigger) by the operation of a predetermined switch controlled by the main control means (e.g., the 1-BET switch 22 and the MAX-BET switch 23 (hereinafter collectively referred to as "bet switches"), the start lever 25 and the stop switches 26a, 26b, 26c, etc., collectively referred to as "main switches") can be appropriately set as the display timing (display start timing) of the conversation performance display. For example, during one game, the first conversation performance display KD1 may be displayed on the image display unit DP at a predetermined timing (the same timing as the lever operation acceptance or a predetermined time has elapsed since the lever operation acceptance) after the start lever 25 accepts the operation (also referred to as the lever operation acceptance) triggered by the valid acceptance of the operation of the start lever 25. Furthermore, during the same game, when any of the three stop switches 26a, 26b, 26c has validly accepted the first stop operation, the second conversation presentation display KD2 may be displayed on the image display unit DP at a predetermined timing (the same timing as when the first stop operation is accepted or a predetermined time has elapsed since the first stop operation was accepted) after the first stop operation was validly accepted (the time when the first stop operation was accepted). In addition, when the first conversation performance display KD1 to the second conversation performance display KD2 are displayed at the timing of the acceptance of the third stop operation, the first conversation performance display KD1 to the second conversation performance display KD2 displayed on the image display unit DP are erased when the operation of the bet switch to start the next game or the operation of the start lever 25 is accepted, and when the operation of the bet switch to start the next game or the operation of the start lever 25 is accepted and the first conversation performance display KD1 to the second conversation performance display KD2 are erased, if the voice of the lines output from the voice output unit has not yet been output, the first conversation performance display KD1 to the second conversation performance display KD2 on the image display unit DP are erased, but the voice of the lines may be output to the end. However, if the operation of the start lever 25 for the next game selects a performance that the player wants to pay attention to, such as a rare role announcement or freeze, or a new conversation performance, the voice of the lines is stopped from being output at the timing after the operation of the start lever 25 is accepted. By configuring in this way, even a player who wants the game to progress quickly can understand the contents of the presentation. It goes without saying that the sound of the dialogue may be erased together with erasing the first conversation presentation display KD1 through the second conversation presentation display KD2 on the image display unit DP.

The timing at which the conversation presentation display is displayed can be set to any timing triggered (display trigger) by the operation of a sub-button controlled by the sub-control means. For example, during one game, an image (e.g., an image combining an image of the decision button 55 and the word "PUSH") that prompts the player to operate the decision button 55 is displayed on the image display unit DP. Then, in response to the display, the decision button 55 is effectively operated (including cases where it is effective by operating it once and cases where it is effective by operating it a predetermined number of times in succession), and the first conversation presentation display KD1 or the second conversation presentation display KD2 may be displayed on the image display unit DP at a predetermined timing (the same timing as the decision button operation or a timing at which a predetermined time has passed since the decision button operation) after the decision button 55 is operated (also referred to as the "decision button operation time"). Furthermore, in the case of a pachinko machine, the timing at which the conversation display is displayed can be set to, for example, the point at which a predetermined amount of time has elapsed since the game ball entered the starting hole (also referred to as "entering the starting hole").

During one game, the conversation performance display may be displayed in a case where none, only one, or multiple conversation performance displays are displayed. The difference in the number of conversation performance displays displayed during one game may not be related to the game result, or the game result may differ depending on the number. For example, the expectation of an advantageous game may be higher when two or more conversation performance displays are displayed than when only one conversation performance display is displayed during one game. Whether or not to display the conversation performance display, the type of conversation performance display to be displayed (for example, the type of dialogue in the dialogue display), the number, and the display timing are determined based on, for example, the game state (for example, whether or not it is in an advantageous zone), the result of the internal lottery (for example, whether or not a rare role has been won), and other lottery results such as the AT lottery and the AT addition lottery (or may be determined based on the satisfaction of any other predetermined condition). When multiple conversation performance displays are displayed, at most one conversation performance display is displayed per display trigger.

For example, in a case where the first conversation performance display KD1 and the second conversation performance display KD2 are displayed during one game, if the first conversation performance display KD1 is displayed as a trigger for operating the start lever 25, the second conversation performance display KD2 will be displayed after one of the three stop switches 26a, 26b, and 26c has effectively accepted the first stop operation. In other words, the second conversation performance display KD2 will not be displayed before the first stop operation is effectively accepted (it is also possible to provide a case where it is displayed). This makes it possible to increase the interest of the game by, for example, making the expectation of an advantageous game different depending on which trigger caused the conversation performance display to be displayed. In addition, by allowing up to one display per display trigger, it is possible to prevent the player from mistaking the trigger for the conversation performance display to be displayed and from confusing the multiple displayed conversation performance displays.

Three or more conversation production displays may be displayed on the image display unit DP during one game. For example, the first conversation production display KD1 is displayed in response to the operation of the start lever, and the second conversation production display KD2 is displayed in response to the reception of the first stop operation. Then, during the same game, a third conversation production display (not shown) is displayed at a predetermined timing after the reception of the second stop operation (the same timing as the reception of the second stop operation or a timing when a predetermined time has passed since the reception of the second stop operation) in response to one of the remaining two stop switches effectively receiving the second stop operation, and a fourth conversation production display (not shown) is displayed at a predetermined timing after the reception of the third stop operation (the same timing as the reception of the third stop operation or a timing when a predetermined time has passed since the reception of the third stop operation) in response to the remaining one stop switch effectively receiving the third stop operation. The character in the third conversation production display and the character in the fourth conversation production display may be different characters from the character CH1 and the character CH2, or may be the same character.

When multiple conversation production displays are displayed on the image display unit DP during one game, the conversation production display displayed first continues to be displayed without being erased (hidden) from the image display unit DP even if the conversation production display displayed later is displayed. For example, in the above example, the first conversation production display KD1 displayed first continues to be displayed as it is even if the second conversation production display KD2 is displayed, and then, even if the third conversation production display is displayed, the first and second conversation production displays KD1 and KD2 are not hidden and continue to be displayed as they are. Furthermore, even if the fourth conversation production display is displayed after that, the first to third conversation production displays are not hidden and are displayed at that time. In this way, by making the conversation production display displayed first continue to be displayed even if the conversation production display displayed later is displayed, multiple conversation production displays can be displayed simultaneously (so that the display periods of each conversation production display overlap each other) on the image display unit DP during one game. This makes it possible to obtain a production effect in which the image display unit DP looks lively by using multiple conversation production displays. In addition, in cases where the player is likely to feel bored due to a game state (e.g., during a non-advantageous period) in which the player is unlikely to obtain a favorable game result, by displaying multiple conversation performance displays throughout one game, it is possible to draw the player's attention to those conversation performance displays and reduce the player's sense of boredom. Also, the expectation of receiving an advantageous game may differ depending on the trigger at which the conversation performance display is displayed, in which case the player can be made interested in the timing of the display of the conversation performance, making it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

In the conversation performance display, the content of the character's lines (for example, the content of the line display KS1 in the first conversation performance display KD1 or the content of the line display KS2 in the second conversation performance display KD2) may be set to have no relation to the game result regardless of the content, or the game result may differ depending on the content of the lines. For example, in a case where the content of the line display KS2 is "You're so carefree" (see FIG. 59(B)) or "That's really true" (see FIG. 60), the content may be set to have no effect on the game result in either case, or the expectation of a more advantageous game may be higher in the latter case than in the former case. Also, the content of the lines may be changed when the decision button 55 is operated. In addition, as a case where the content of the dialogue changes by operating the decision button 55, there may be a case where the dialogue is displayed (the dialogue display starts) by operating the decision button 55, and a case where the content of the dialogue changes by operating the decision button 55 after the dialogue is displayed. In a case where the content of the dialogue changes by operating the decision button 55 after the dialogue is displayed (the dialogue voice is also output at the same time), the operation (operation reception) of the decision button 55 may be enabled before the dialogue voice has ended, or the operation of the decision button 55 may be enabled after the dialogue voice has ended. When the operation of the decision button 55 is enabled before the dialogue voice has ended, if the decision button 55 is operated in the middle of the dialogue voice, the dialogue being output is interrupted and a new line is output, which is a specification that is preferred by players who want to know the result of the game quickly. In addition, when the operation of the decision button 55 is enabled after the dialogue voice has ended, the dialogue is not interrupted, which is a specification that is preferred by players who want to enjoy the performance.

The characters displayed in the dialogue display in the conversation performance display may always be of the same font, size, and color, or the font, size, color, etc. may vary depending on the game situation and the timing of the display of the conversation performance display. The expectation of an advantageous game may differ depending on the font, size, color, etc. For example, in addition to a mode in which the outer line (contour) of the character or the area inside the outer line, or both, are normal colors (e.g., black or white), the dialogue display may be displayed in blue (also referred to as "blue dialogue display") and in red (also referred to as "red dialogue display"), and in that case, the expectation of an advantageous game may be higher with the red dialogue display than with the blue dialogue display.

As an example, FIG. 61(A) shows an example of a blue dialogue display for the character Kenji's line "It's a nice day today," with the area inside the outline of the text in blue, and a red dialogue display for the character Pamela's line "That's true, isn't it?" with the outline of the text in red (with the area inside the outline in white). In this example, the size of the text in the red dialogue display is made larger than the size of the text in the blue dialogue display, and the difference in size also suggests to the player that the red dialogue display has a higher expectation of awarding a more advantageous game. In the red dialogue display, not only the text size of the dialogue display, but also the size of the character in the character picture display and the text size of the character name display may be made larger. In other words, in the red dialogue display, one or two or all of the text size of the dialogue display, the text size of the character name display, and the size of the character may be made larger than those in the blue dialogue display (only the color of the text, etc. may be changed, and the text size, etc. may be the same). In addition, when multiple conversation performance displays are displayed during one game, the text of the dialogue displayed in the first conversation performance display (e.g., the first conversation performance display KD1) may be of one size or font, and the text of the dialogue displayed in the second or subsequent conversation performance displays (e.g., the first conversation performance display KD1) may be of multiple different sizes or fonts.

When multiple dialogue display displays with different expectations for providing advantageous play, such as blue dialogue display and red dialogue display, are displayed during one game, the dialogue display with the higher expectation is displayed later (it is also possible to provide a case where it is displayed first). Therefore, when multiple dialogue display displays are displayed during one game, the first dialogue display (e.g., the first dialogue display KD1) is likely to display dialogue displays in normal colors or dialogue displays in colors with low expectation, and the second or subsequent dialogue display (e.g., the second dialogue display KD2) is likely to display dialogue displays in colors with high expectation. In the case of blue dialogue display and red dialogue display, for example, the blue dialogue display is displayed upon receipt of the operation of the start lever 25, and the red dialogue display is displayed upon receipt of the first stop operation. It is also possible to provide a case where the red dialogue display with a relatively high expectation is displayed so as to overlap the blue dialogue display with a relatively low expectation. When the blue dialogue display is displayed overlappingly, the red dialogue display may hide part or all of the characters in the blue dialogue display (see FIG. 60(B)), or the red dialogue display may be overlapped so as not to hide the characters in the blue dialogue display (see FIG. 61(A)). In addition, when the second conversation production display KD2 is displayed after the first conversation production display KD1, the color indicating the expectation level of the second conversation production display KD2 will not be displayed in a color lower than the color indicating the expectation level of the first conversation production display KD1. This is also applied when the third conversation production display or the fourth conversation production display is displayed, and the expectation level of the later conversation production will not be lower than that displayed in the previous conversation production. This is to prevent a situation where it becomes difficult to know how much expectation there is if a red dialogue display with high expectation is displayed first in the first conversation production display KD1 and then a blue dialogue display with low expectation is displayed in the second conversation production display KD2. In addition, displaying a normal dialogue display in the second conversation performance display KD2 after displaying a red dialogue display in the first conversation performance display KD1 does not cause confusion for the player, so there is no problem. In addition, when a conversation performance occurs before and after a reach performance in a pachinko machine, the expectation level of the conversation performance display displayed after the reach performance may be lower than the expectation level of the conversation performance display displayed before the reach performance. This is because the expectation level increases stepwise because the reach performance is sandwiched in between. For example, before the reach performance, the player is interested in whether or not it will be a reach, so if the red dialogue display of the conversation performance appears at this stage, the player expects whether or not it will be a reach. In contrast, after the reach performance, the player is interested in whether or not it will be a jackpot, so if the blue dialogue display of the conversation performance appears at this stage, the player expects whether or not it will be a jackpot. Since the targets of expectation are different in this way, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand performance configuration even if the expectation level drops before and after the reach performance. In addition, the characters displayed in the conversation performances before and after the reach performance may be the same character, or the same character may be displayed in a different manner (for example, with a different costume or facial expression), or may be different characters.

The colors of the characters (colors other than the normal colors) in the dialogue display are not limited to blue and red. For example, in addition to the blue dialogue display and the red dialogue display, a green dialogue display in which the characters are green, a pattern dialogue display in which the characters are a specific pattern (for example, a pattern that symbolizes the gaming machine manufacturer), and a rainbow dialogue display in which the characters are rainbow colored may be provided. The expectation of a favorable game may increase in the order of blue dialogue display < green dialogue display < red dialogue display < pattern dialogue display < rainbow dialogue display. In this case, the dialogue display with the highest expectation (rainbow dialogue display in this example) may be a confirmation presentation with a 100% expectation (for example, indicating AT confirmation, bonus confirmation, jackpot confirmation, etc.).

The dialogue display in the dialogue presentation is usually composed of words and sentences in characters that the player can understand. However, it may be composed of characters whose meaning is incomprehensible, such as characters in an ancient language, garbled characters, or characters containing shapes and symbols (▽, ●, ※). When dialogue display containing characters whose meaning is incomprehensible is displayed, the expectation of receiving an advantageous game may be higher than when dialogue display composed of characters whose meaning is understandable is displayed. Furthermore, the character string (sentence) in the dialogue display may be displayed on a single line (see FIG. 59), or may be broken down into two or more lines (including cases where the character is composed of two or more sentences) (see FIG. 60).

The range image KW1 in the first conversation performance display KD1 and the range image KW2 in the second conversation performance display KD2 are both in the shape of a so-called speech bubble, but the shape of the range image is not limited to this shape and can be any shape. The shape of the range image may always be the same, or may be different depending on the game situation or the display timing of the conversation performance display. Furthermore, the difference in the shape of the range image may differ the expectation level for the game result, etc. For example, there are cases where the range image is displayed in the shape of a speech bubble and cases where the range image is displayed in the shape of an arrow, and the expectation level for granting a favorable game may be higher in the latter case than in the former case. Note that such range images may not be displayed, and the characters of the dialogue display may be displayed in an exposed state (without being surrounded by a frame, etc.).

The color, pattern, etc. of the area inside the outline of the range image may always be the same, or may be different depending on the game situation or the display timing of the conversation performance display. The expectation level of the advantageous game may be different depending on the color, pattern, etc. of the area inside the outline. For example, in a case where the area inside the outline of the range image has a mode in which it is displayed in blue (also included in blue dialogue display) and a mode in which it is displayed in red (also included in red dialogue display) in addition to a mode in which it is displayed in a normal color, the expectation level of the advantageous game may be higher in the mode in which it is displayed in red than in the mode in which it is displayed in blue.

As an example, FIG. 60(A) shows an example of the dialogue display for character Kenji in which the area inside the outline of the range image is blue, and the dialogue display for character Pamela in which the area inside the outline of the range image is red. Note that the color of the area inside the outline of the range image is not limited to blue and red. For example, it is also possible to have the area inside the outline of the range image green (this is also included in green dialogue display), a specific pattern (this is also included in pattern dialogue display), or rainbow colored (this is also included in rainbow dialogue display). Also, in the example of FIG. 60(A), there may be cases where the red dialogue display is displayed overlapping the blue dialogue display.

The character image display in the conversation performance display may always be the same for the same character, or may be different for the same character depending on the game situation or the display timing of the conversation performance display. The expectation of granting an advantageous game move may differ depending on the mode of the character image display. For example, in a case where the character image KG1 in the first conversation performance display KD1 is displayed in a mode in which it is displayed with a hat and a mode in which it is displayed without a hat, the expectation of granting an advantageous game move may be higher in the mode in which it is displayed with a hat than in the mode in which it is not worn.

When a conversation performance display is displayed on the image display section DP, a different type of performance display (another image) may be displayed on the same image display section DP. In such a case, the conversation performance display and the other performance display can be rendered on different layers using a layer function installed in the graphic software used to create the image. For example, when an image (also called a "background image") consisting of a moving image or still image is displayed so as to occupy almost the entire area of the screen of the image display section DP, if it is desired to display a conversation performance display so as to overlap a part of the background image, the conversation performance display can be rendered on a layer on the near side (the front side closer to the player) than the layer on which the background image is rendered. In this way, even if the conversation performance display is displayed overlapping the background image, it is possible to ensure sufficient visibility of the conversation performance display. Note that when multiple conversation performance displays are displayed, each conversation performance display may be rendered on a separate layer.

When an error occurs while the conversation performance display is displayed on the image display unit DP, an error notification display for notifying the occurrence of the error may be displayed on the image display unit DP. In this case, the error notification display is displayed on a layer closer to the user than the layer on which the conversation performance display is displayed, and is displayed so as to overlap the conversation performance display. As an example, FIG. 61(B) shows an example in which an HP error notification display for notifying the occurrence of an HP error is displayed so as to overlap the conversation performance display. In this example, the dialogue display of the conversation performance display is hidden by the HP error notification display, and the content cannot be seen. In this way, when the conversation performance display and the error notification display are displayed simultaneously on the image display unit DP, the error notification display is displayed so as to overlap the dialogue display of the conversation performance display, and the content of the dialogue display cannot be seen (it is also possible to provide a case in which the error notification display is displayed so that the content of the dialogue display can be seen). In addition to the occurrence of the various errors described above, the error notification display is displayed when a communication error or a door open error occurs, and in the case of a pachinko machine, when a left hit warning or a lower tray full error occurs, etc. In addition, there is a reel rotation stop suggestion image as a notification effect for a player in the slot machine 1, which is not an error. This is an effect in which "Please stop the reels" is displayed on the image display unit after a predetermined time (for example, one minute) of reel rotation has elapsed. Even when the reel rotation stop suggestion image is displayed, it is displayed in front of the conversation effect display (on the layer on the front side), so the conversation effect display is difficult to see (it may not be visible at all or only part of it may be invisible). Therefore, the text "Please stop the reels" is displayed clearly, so that the attention of the player is effectively drawn. Note that the reel rotation stop suggestion image may be erased when a stop operation is accepted for one of the multiple reels that are rotating, or when a stop operation is accepted for all reels. Also, even when a volume change image is displayed due to a button operation related to a volume change being accepted during a game (while the reels are rotating in the case of a slot machine, or while the volume is changing in the case of a pachinko machine), the volume change image is displayed in front of the conversation effect display. The volume change image is a meter display that indicates the volume level, and the display ends when a confirmation operation is performed after the volume is changed or when time has passed, and the conversation production display becomes visible again.

When an assist effect is displayed on the image display unit DP, a conversation effect display may be displayed on the image display unit DP. As an example, FIG. 62 shows a state in which a conversation effect display is displayed when a push navigation effect display (particularly a push order navigation effect display that notifies the push order) is displayed on the image display unit DP. In this example, as shown in FIG. 62(A), when a push navigation effect display that notifies the "center left and right" push order from the first stop operation to the third stop operation is displayed in the lower area of the image display unit DP, a conversation effect display of the character name Kenji is displayed. At this time, the conversation effect display of Kenji is displayed in an area above the display area of the push navigation effect display so as not to overlap with the push navigation effect display. Also, as shown in FIG. 62(B), when a push navigation effect display that notifies the "left and right" push order from the second stop operation to the third stop operation is displayed in the lower area of the image display unit DP after the first stop operation is accepted, a conversation effect display of the character name Pamela is displayed. At this time, Pamela's conversation performance display is displayed in an area above the display area of the press navigation performance display, so as not to overlap with the press navigation performance display.

In this way, when the conversation performance display is displayed on the image display unit DP while the assist performance is displayed on the image display unit DP, the conversation performance display is displayed so as not to overlap with the push navigation performance display. More specifically, the dialogue display and the character name display in the conversation performance display are displayed without overlapping with the push navigation performance display, while a part of the character image display (for example, the character's torso or hand part) may be displayed overlapping with the push navigation performance display. In that case, for example, the conversation performance display is rendered on the layer on the back side (the rear side away from the player), and the push navigation performance display is rendered on the layer on the front side, thereby ensuring the visibility of the push navigation performance display. Note that a case may be provided in which the dialogue display and a part of the character name display in the conversation performance display are displayed so as to overlap with the push navigation performance display. Even in that case, it is preferable to render, for example, the conversation performance display on the layer on the back side, and the push navigation performance display on the layer on the front side, thereby ensuring the visibility of the push navigation performance display. In addition, the dialogue displayed in the conversational presentation shown in Figures 62(A) and (B) ("It seems like it's best to press the buttons according to the push order navigation" and "Follow the navigation") are examples of cases where the content of the dialogue displayed in the conversational presentation is about how to play. In addition to this, the content about how to play can be a variety of other things, such as "It seems like it's hot if you pull a watermelon during the specialized zone", "Push from the left during normal play", "Follow the navigation during AT", and "If a UFO appears somewhere in the background image during normal play, it's your chance".

When the conversation production display is displayed on the image display unit DP, the conversation production sound is output from the sound output unit in synchronization with the display timing (display start timing). The conversation production sound is basically the same as the dialogue content of the character in the conversation production display. For example, when the content of the dialogue display KS1 in the first conversation production display KD1 is "It's a nice day today," the corresponding conversation production sound is "It's a nice day today." In contrast, a case may be provided in which a sound with a content different from the dialogue content of the character in the conversation production display is output as the conversation production sound. For example, when the content of the dialogue display KS1 is an incomprehensible content such as "※↓●//っをg◇＃," a conversation production sound with an understandable content such as "It's a nice day today" may be output. When the dialogue content in the conversation production display and the content of the conversation production sound are different, the expectation of an advantageous game may be increased compared to when the two contents are the same.

(Subtitle direction)
Subtitle effects (also called "telop effects") are effects in which, for example, a character appearing in a background image (moving image) makes a statement (which may be a statement during a conversation with another character or a monologue), and the text indicating the content of the statement is displayed like a telop that appears on a screen during a television broadcast or a subtitle in a movie. Subtitle effects mainly serve to inform the player of content related to the game, such as suggesting the progress of the game, but may also serve to inform the player of content unrelated to the game. In the subtitle effect, a subtitle effect display for the subtitle effect is displayed on the image display unit DP at a predetermined timing. Also, the subtitle effect may serve to inform the player of content related to the game result, such as suggesting the expectation of the granting of an advantageous game. An advantageous game refers to a game that is more advantageous to a player than usual (for example, a game during the AT (including during the ART) or a bonus game in a slot machine, a game during a jackpot in a pachinko machine, a probability-varying game, or a time-saving game (collectively referred to as "advantageous game"). The expectation of granting an advantageous game refers to the expectation (reliability, probability) of performing an advantageous game or obtaining a game result that increases the probability (including 100%) of allowing the performance of an advantageous game (for example, an AT win in a slot machine, an AT add-on win, an add-on win with a large number of AT add-ons, a bonus win, an advantageous bonus win, a rare role win, a jackpot win in a pachinko machine, a chance jackpot (a jackpot that is more advantageous than a jackpot without a chance jackpot), a 16-round jackpot (a jackpot with a large number of balls that are paid out in a jackpot), etc.). In the subtitle production, a subtitle production display for the subtitle production is displayed on the image display unit DP at a predetermined timing.

The subtitle effect display is a display related to the remarks of a character appearing in a background image, and is composed of a display that can be identified as text. A display that can be identified as text is, for example, a display of text (also called a "telop display") that shows the content of the character's remarks (corresponding to the lines in a conversation effect display). Note that when the subtitle effect display is displayed, the character does not necessarily have to be displayed in the background image. In short, the requirement for the subtitle effect display is met if text is displayed on the background image. The subtitle effect display is displayed on a layer that is closer to the player than the layer on which the background image is displayed. Therefore, even if the subtitle effect display is displayed superimposed on the background image, the visibility of the subtitle effect display (especially the telop display) is sufficiently ensured. As an example of the subtitle effect display, a first subtitle effect display JD1 is shown in FIG. 63 (A), and a second subtitle effect display JD2 is shown in FIG. 63 (B).

The first subtitle performance display JD1 is configured to include a caption display JT1 that shows the contents of a statement made by the character CH1 ("It's fine weather, so it looks like a good chance!") appearing in one scene in the background image HG1 displayed on the image display unit DP during one game. In this way, the first subtitle performance display JD1 is configured to include the caption display JT1, and does not include a display showing the name of the character CH1 ("Kenji") (referred to as a "character name display" as in the conversation performance display). The second subtitle performance display JD2 is configured to include a caption display JT2 that shows another statement made by the character CH1 ("The weather is looking ominous!") appearing in another scene in the background image HG1 displayed on the image display unit DP during the same one game. In this way, the second subtitle performance display JD2 is configured to include the caption display JT2, and does not include a character name display (it is also possible to provide a subtitle performance display that includes a character name display). Note that the name of the character may be displayed as part of the contents of the statement in the caption display. In this case, the display of the name is considered to be different from the character name display.

Regarding the timing at which the subtitle effect display is displayed, any timing triggered (display trigger) by the operation of a specific switch controlled by the main control means side, such as the bet switch, the start lever 25, or the stop switches 26a, 26b, and 26c, can be appropriately set as the display timing (display start timing) of the subtitle effect display. For example, during one game, the first subtitle effect display JD1 may be displayed on the image display unit DP at a specific timing (simultaneous with the lever operation reception or a specific time has passed since the lever operation reception) after the start lever 25 has effectively received the operation (the time of lever operation reception) triggered by the effective reception of the operation of the start lever 25. Also, during the same one game, the second subtitle effect display JD2 may be displayed on the image display unit DP at a specific timing (simultaneous with the first stop operation reception or a specific time has passed since the first stop operation reception) after the first stop operation has effectively received (the time of first stop operation reception) triggered by the effective reception of the first stop operation by any of the three stop switches 26a, 26b, and 26c. In addition, in the case of a pachinko machine, the timing at which the subtitle effect display is displayed can be set to, for example, the point when a predetermined time has passed since the game ball enters the start hole (also referred to as ``entering the start hole'' or ``start of the fluctuation''), any point in time when the SP reach effect is displayed after the reach is established, the point when a predetermined time has passed since the large prize hole is opened (also referred to as ``opening of the large prize hole'' or ``start of the jackpot''), or the point when a predetermined time has passed since the game ball enters the large prize hole (also referred to as ``entering the large prize hole'').

During one game, there may be no subtitle display, only one subtitle display, or multiple subtitle displays. Whether or not to display a subtitle display, the type of subtitle display to be displayed (e.g., the type of subtitle display content), the number of subtitle displays, and the display timing are determined based on, for example, the game state (e.g., whether or not the game is in a favorable zone), the result of an internal lottery (e.g., whether or not a rare role has been won), and other lottery results such as an AT lottery or an AT addition lottery (or may be determined based on the satisfaction of any other predetermined condition). Note that even if the result of the internal lottery is the same, a subtitle display is more likely to be displayed during a favorable zone than during a non-favorable zone. When multiple subtitle display displays are displayed, multiple subtitle display displays may be displayed per display trigger. For example, in a case where a first subtitle performance display JD1 and a second subtitle performance display JD2 are displayed during one game, the first subtitle performance display JD1 is displayed in response to the operation of the start lever 25, and the second subtitle performance display JD2 may be displayed before any of the three stop switches 26a, 26b, and 26c effectively accepts the first stop operation (it is also possible to allow only one display per display trigger).

Three or more subtitle effect displays may be displayed on the image display unit DP during one game. For example, the first subtitle effect display JD1 may be displayed upon receipt of the start lever 25 operation, the second subtitle effect display JD2 may be displayed upon receipt of the first stop operation, and then, during the same game, a third subtitle effect display (not shown) may be displayed at a predetermined timing (simultaneous with receipt of the second stop operation or a predetermined time has passed since receipt of the second stop operation) after the second stop operation is effectively accepted (when the second stop operation is accepted) upon receipt of one of the remaining two stop switches effectively accepting the second stop operation, and further, a fourth subtitle effect display (not shown) may be displayed at a predetermined timing (simultaneous with receipt of the third stop operation or a predetermined time has passed since receipt of the third stop operation) after the third stop operation is effectively accepted (when the third stop operation is accepted) upon receipt of the remaining one stop switch effectively accepting the third stop operation.

In addition, when comparing the percentage of cases where the subtitle effect display is triggered by the acceptance of the operation of the start lever 25 (including the cases of 0% and 100%, the same applies below) with the percentage of cases where the subtitle effect display is triggered by the acceptance of the third stop operation, the percentage of cases where the subtitle effect display is triggered by the acceptance of the third stop operation is relatively higher. This is in consideration of the psychology of the player who wants to concentrate on the operation of the stop switch after the operation of the start lever, and by relatively increasing the percentage of the subtitle effect display displayed after the third stop operation, it becomes easier for the player to pay attention to the subtitle effect display. In addition, when the background image is a single-shot effect (an effect that starts and ends during one game), the subtitle effect display is rarely triggered by the acceptance of the first stop operation or the second stop operation, but when the background image is a continuous effect (an effect that continues over multiple games), the subtitle effect display is often triggered by the acceptance of the first stop operation or the second stop operation. For example, when comparing a case where the subtitle effect display is displayed when the background image is a single effect (case H1) with a case where the subtitle effect display is displayed when the background image is a continuous effect (case H2), the rate at which the subtitle effect display is displayed in response to the acceptance of the first stop operation is relatively higher in case H2 than in case H1. This is because the continuous effect plays the role of notifying a player of a predetermined game result (such as winning the AT) of high interest to the player, and the effect content is often advanced with each acceptance of a stop operation to draw attention to the effect content, so that it is easy to provide an opportunity to display the subtitle effect display in response to the progress of the continuous effect in response to the acceptance of the first stop operation or the second stop operation. By displaying the subtitle effect display, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the content of the continuous effect (the progress of the effect).

When multiple subtitle performance displays are displayed on the image display unit DP during one game, the subtitle performance display displayed first is erased (hidden) from the image display unit DP at the time the subtitle performance display displayed later is displayed. In other words, the subtitle performance display displayed first is erased from the image display unit DP before the subtitle performance display displayed later is displayed (including approximately simultaneous timing). For example, in the above example, the first subtitle performance display JD1 displayed first is hidden before the second subtitle performance display JD2 is displayed, the second subtitle performance display JD2 is hidden before the third subtitle performance display is displayed, and the third subtitle performance display is hidden before the fourth subtitle performance display is displayed. In this way, by making the first subtitle performance display hidden before the subtitle performance display displayed later is displayed, it is possible to perform subtitle performance while appropriately switching the subtitle performance display in accordance with the progress of the game and the background image. Therefore, it is possible to execute a subtitle performance with a good tempo that is consistent with the progress of the game and the background image.

The subtitle performance display may be hidden when a predetermined time has elapsed after it has been displayed, or when a predetermined switch is operated, or when the next subtitle performance display is displayed. For example, the subtitle performance display displayed in response to the operation of the start lever 25 may be hidden when any of the first to third stop operations is accepted, or when a predetermined time (e.g., 3 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the display regardless of the acceptance of the stop operation, or when the next subtitle performance display is displayed even before the first stop operation is accepted, it may be hidden just before the subtitle display performance is displayed. As a specific example, in a case in which the first subtitle performance display JD1 is displayed in response to the operation of the start lever 25 and the second subtitle performance display JD2 is displayed in response to the acceptance of the third stop operation, the first subtitle performance display JD1 may be hidden first after the third stop operation is accepted, and then the second subtitle performance display may be displayed.

The subtitle effect display may be displayed according to the movement (e.g., the movement of the mouth, eyes, or hands) of a character appearing in a background image. For example, in a case where the background image HG1 (moving image) starts to be displayed at the same time as the lever operation, and a scene (referred to as scene A) in which the character CH1 in the background image HG1 moves his/her mouth occurs at a point in time (e.g., one second) after the start of the scene, the first subtitle effect display JD1 may be displayed according to scene A. In order to match the timing of scene A with the display timing of the first subtitle effect display JD1, the following method may be adopted. As a premise, in response to the result of an internal lottery or the like performed on the main control means side at the time of accepting the lever operation, the sub-main control means selects whether or not to execute the background image and the subtitle effect display and the display contents, and as a result, the display of the background image HG1 and the display of the first subtitle effect display JD1 are determined.

In this case, the sub-main control means 200A first transmits a command (called command A) for communicating the result of the decision to the sub-sub control means 200B. The sub-sub control means that receives command A reads out the image file of the background image HG1 and starts displaying the background image HG1 on the image display unit DP, and also reads out the image file of the first subtitle performance display JD1 and displays the first subtitle performance display JD1 on the image display unit DP in accordance with the timing of scene A (determined, for example, by the number of frames leading up to scene A and the frame rate, etc.). A counter for timing may be set and the timing of scene A may be measured using this counter. The counter may be set by the sub-main control means 200A or by the sub-sub control means 200B. When the sub-main control means 200A sets the counter, it may be set when command A is sent, or the sub-sub control means 200B may send a command (called command B) to the sub-main control means 200A when it reads the image file of the background image HG1, and set the command B when the sub-main control means 200A receives it. Then, when a predetermined time is reached after the counter is set, a command (called command C) for notifying the time is reached is sent to the sub-sub control means, and the sub-sub control means 200B displays the first subtitle effect display JD1 on the image display unit DP when it receives this command C. The subtitle effect display is displayed on a layer closer to the player than the layer on which the background image is displayed. This makes it possible to ensure sufficient visibility of the subtitle effect display (especially the telop display) even if the subtitle effect display is displayed superimposed on the background image.

In the subtitle effect display, the contents of the telop display (for example, the contents of the telop display JT1 in the first subtitle effect display JD1 and the contents of the telop display JT2 in the second subtitle effect display JD2) may be set to have no relation to the game result regardless of the contents, or the expectation of the advantageous game may differ depending on the contents of the telop display. For example, in a case where the contents of the telop display JT2 are "The weather is getting ominous!" (see FIG. 63(B)) and "It's a perfect sunny day in Japan!!" (see FIG. 64(B)), the expectation of the advantageous game may be set to have no effect on either case, or the expectation of the advantageous game may be set to be higher in the latter case than in the former case. In addition, the contents of the telop display may be changed when the decision button 55 is operated. Note that there are conversational effects and subtitle effects as effects in which the display contents change in response to the operation of the decision button 55, and the conversational effects change the display contents in response to the operation of the subbutton relatively more often than the subtitle effects. In addition, in a pachinko machine, a conversation performance and a subtitle performance may be displayed during one variation, and in this configuration, the expectation level of the conversation performance and the subtitle performance may not be related. For example, the conversation performance is displayed in red dialogue, while the subtitle performance is displayed in blue text. In particular, when a conversation performance is displayed before a reach performance and a subtitle performance is displayed after a reach performance, the expectation level is different, so this is more preferable. In addition, a mode in which the expectation level increases such as the first subtitle performance display JD1 being in white text and the second subtitle performance display JD2 being in red text may be considered. Furthermore, a mode in which the expectation level decreases such as the second subtitle performance display JD2 being in red text and the third subtitle performance display being in white text may be considered. This mode is suitable for use as a subtitle performance when the background image is in a mode in which a failure is displayed. For example, when a presentation is being made to see whether or not a favorable bonus will be awarded (such as a bonus win or AT win in the case of a slot machine, or a presentation to see whether or not a reach will be reached or a jackpot will be reached in the case of a pachinko machine), if a subtitle presentation (such as the text "Let's go!") is displayed in red to heighten the sense of anticipation, and then, in a scene showing that the presentation to see whether or not the favorable bonus will be awarded has been a miss (such as the text "You lost"), if this subtitle presentation were also displayed in red, it would be difficult to tell whether the miss was due to a miss or a revival, so the text "You lost" is displayed in white.

The characters in the subtitle display in the subtitle effect display may always be the same font, size, and color, or the font, size, color, etc. may vary depending on the game situation and the timing of the subtitle effect display. The expectation of an advantageous game may differ depending on the font, size, color, etc. For example, in addition to a mode in which the outer line (contour) of the characters or the area inside the outer line, or both, are normal colors (black or white), the subtitle display may be displayed in blue (also called "blue subtitle display") and in red (also called "red subtitle display"), and in that case, the expectation of an advantageous game may be higher with a red subtitle display than with a blue subtitle display.

As an example, Fig. 64 (A) and (B) show an example of a blue caption display for caption display JT1 "It's a good day, so it looks like we have a chance!", with the area inside the outline of the characters in blue, and a red caption display for caption display JT2 "It's a perfect sunny day!!" with the area inside the outline of the characters in red. In this example, the size of the characters in the red caption display is made larger than the size of the characters in the blue caption display, and the font of the characters in the red caption display is changed, and these differences also suggest to the player that the red caption display has a higher expectation of awarding a more advantageous game. Note that when multiple caption display effects are displayed during one game, the characters in the caption display in the first caption display may be of one size and font, and the characters in the caption display in the second and subsequent caption display may be of multiple sizes and fonts. When multiple subtitle effects with different expectations for providing advantageous play, such as blue and red subtitle effects, are displayed during one game, the subtitle effect with the higher expectation may be displayed later.

The colors of the characters, etc. in the telop display (colors other than the normal colors) are not limited to blue and red. For example, in addition to the blue telop display and the red telop display, a green telop display in which the characters, etc. are green and a rainbow telop display in which the characters, etc. are rainbow-colored may be provided. The expectation of a favorable game may increase in the order of blue telop display < green telop display < red telop display < rainbow telop display. In this case, the telop display with the highest expectation (rainbow telop display in this example) may be a confirmation performance with a 100% expectation (for example, indicating AT confirmation, bonus confirmation, jackpot confirmation, etc.). Note that in the case of a telop display displayed in a specific scene of the background image, the characters, etc. may not be displayed in a specific color. For example, when a telop display with content related to the lyrics is displayed in a scene where a character is singing on the background screen, the rainbow telop display may not be used. Furthermore, the caption display (rainbow caption display) which serves as the confirmation effect is set to be hidden when a predetermined switch or the like is operated by the player after the start of display, and is not hidden when a predetermined time has passed since the start of display. This prevents the confirmation effect from disappearing over time, which could confuse the player. Note that when a demo screen is displayed on the image display unit DP, the rainbow caption display that has been displayed up until that point may be hidden. Caption displays of other colors (for example, blue caption display) may be hidden when a predetermined time has passed since the start of display.

The caption display in the subtitle effect display is usually composed of words and sentences in characters that the player can understand. However, it may be composed of characters whose meaning is incomprehensible, such as characters in an ancient language, garbled characters, or characters containing figures and symbols (▽, ●, ※), etc. When a caption display containing characters whose meaning is incomprehensible is displayed, the expectation of receiving an advantageous game may be increased compared to when a caption display composed of characters whose meaning is understandable is displayed. Furthermore, the character string (sentence) in the caption display is basically displayed in one line without line breaks, but there may be cases where the character string (sentence) is displayed across two or more lines (including cases where the character string is composed of two or more sentences).

In the subtitle display, the characters of the telop display are often displayed in a bare state (not surrounded by a frame or the like), but may be displayed surrounded by a frame or the like. As an example, FIG. 65(A) shows a state in which the characters of the telop display JT2, "The weather is getting ominous!", are surrounded by a frame (called a "background frame") JW1. The illustrated background frame JW1 has a rectangular outer border, and the area inside the outer border is decorated with a predetermined pattern. The background frame's form (the shape of the outer border and the color and pattern of the area inside the outer border) is not limited to such a form and can be any form (including a form without an outer border). The form of the background frame may always be the same, or may be different depending on the game situation or the display timing of the conversation display. The degree of expectation of an advantageous game may be different depending on the form of the background frame. For example, in addition to the mode in which the area inside the outline of the background frame is displayed in a normal color, a mode in which it is displayed in blue (also included in blue caption display) and a mode in which it is displayed in red (also included in red caption display) may be provided, so that the expectation of awarding a more advantageous game is higher when it is displayed in red than when it is displayed in blue.

When an error occurs while the subtitle performance display is displayed on the image display unit DP, an error notification display to notify the occurrence of the error may be displayed on the image display unit DP. In this case, the error notification display is displayed on a layer closer to the layer on which the subtitle performance display is displayed, but is displayed so as not to overlap with the subtitle performance display. As an example, FIG. 65(B) shows an example in which an HP error notification display to notify the occurrence of an HP error is displayed in an area on the image display unit DP above the area in which the subtitle performance display JD2 is displayed so as not to overlap with the subtitle performance display JD2. In this way, when the subtitle performance display and the error notification display are displayed simultaneously on the image display unit DP, the error notification display is displayed without overlapping with the subtitle performance display (however, the background image (which may include characters) may overlap with the error notification display and at least a part of it may not be clearly visible), ensuring the visibility of the contents of the telop display (it is also possible to provide a case in which at least a part of the telop display is hidden by the error notification display). The types of errors when the error notification display is performed are the same as those described in the explanation of the conversation performance. Depending on the type of error, an error may be displayed on the entire screen (such as a PAM error or an error on the sub control side), so in this case the caption display may not be visible. Also, even if the above-mentioned reel spinning suggestion image is displayed, it does not overlap with the subtitle effect, so the visibility of the subtitle effect is guaranteed (however, the background image (which may include characters) may overlap with the error notification display and at least a part of it may not be clearly visible). Since the reel spinning suggestion image is not an error, the video related to the subtitle effect continues to be executed. Therefore, if the text part of the subtitle effect is not visible, it is difficult to understand the progress of the effect. With this configuration, it is possible to alert the player while allowing them to understand the content of the effect. Also, even if a volume change image is displayed due to the volume change button being accepted during play (while the reels are spinning in the case of a slot machine, or while the volume is changing in the case of a pachinko machine), the text part of the subtitle effect is visible.

When an assist effect is displayed on the image display unit DP, a subtitle effect display may be displayed on the image display unit DP. As an example, FIG. 66(A) shows a state in which a subtitle effect display is displayed when a push navigation effect display (push order navigation effect display) is displayed on the image display unit DP. In this example, when a push navigation effect display that notifies the push order of "center left and right" from the first stop operation to the third stop operation is displayed in the lower area of the screen of the image display unit DP, the first subtitle effect display JD1 is displayed. The first subtitle effect display JD1 is displayed so as to overlap with the push navigation effect display in the lower area of the screen, which is in the same position as the area in which the push navigation effect display is displayed. At this time, the first subtitle effect display JD1 is displayed and displayed on a layer that is further back (rearward away from the player) than the layer in which the push navigation effect display is displayed. Therefore, while some of the characters of the caption display JT1 are hidden and cannot be seen by the push navigation effect display, the visibility of the push navigation effect display, which is of great interest to the player, is ensured. The subtitle effect display may be displayed in a different area from the display area of the press navigation effect display so as not to overlap with the press navigation effect display (however, the background image (which may include characters) may overlap with the press navigation effect display and at least a part of it may not be clearly visible). The subtitle effect display may not be displayed when the press navigation effect display is displayed. In particular, when the subtitle display effect is displayed in response to the receipt of the third stop operation, it is preferable to display the subtitle effect display after the press navigation effect display is hidden. This allows the player to concentrate on operating the stop switch while paying attention to the navigation content while the press navigation effect display is displayed, and to pay attention to the subtitle effect display after the operation is completed and the press navigation effect display is hidden. The press navigation effect display has multiple types of modes, such as a mode that notifies the press order of "center left right" and a mode that notifies the press order of "left center right" and a mode that notifies the press order of "right center left".

When the subtitle production display is displayed on the image display unit DP, the subtitle production sound is output from the sound output unit in synchronization with the display timing (display start timing). The subtitle production sound is basically the same as the content of the telop display in the subtitle production display. For example, if the content of the telop display JT2 in the second subtitle production display JD2 is "It's a perfect sunny day in Japan!!", the corresponding subtitle production sound will be "It's a perfect sunny day". In contrast, a case may be provided in which a sound with a content different from the content of the telop display in the subtitle production display is output as the subtitle production sound. For example, as shown in FIG. 66(B), if the content of the telop display JT2 is garbled and meaningless, such as "▲/%*p・n↑→?a≫!na", a subtitle production sound with a different understandable content, "It's a perfect sunny day", may be output. And, when the content of the telop display in the subtitle production display and the content of the subtitle production sound are different, the expectation of granting an advantageous game may be increased compared to when the two contents are the same. In addition, when the caption display is incomprehensible such as garbled characters, the expectation level may be higher than when the caption display is incomprehensible. In addition, when the caption display is incomprehensible such as garbled characters, the size, font, color, etc. of the characters of the caption display are displayed in a manner that the expectation level of the advantageous game is low. In this way, by displaying the caption effect in a manner that the characters are garbled but the expectation level is low, it becomes unclear whether the expectation level is high or low, and the player who sees it can feel a sense of incongruity. Then, it is possible to give a surprise to a player who has the impression that the expectation level is low from such a caption effect display due to the gap with the actual high expectation level. In addition, when a caption display with incomprehensible content is displayed, the garbled characters may be eliminated and the display content may be changed to one that can be understood by operating the decision button 55. In addition, a typo effect may be executed with an effect such as a caption display with garbled characters. For example, if the content of the caption display JT2 in the second subtitle performance display JD2 is normally "It's a perfect sunny day in Japan!!", in the typo performance, the content of the caption display JT2 in the second subtitle performance display JD2 becomes "It's a perfect sunny day in Japan!!", and "壁" is displayed as "壁". In this case too, while raising the expectation level compared to a normal caption display, the size, font, color, etc. of the characters in the caption display are displayed in a manner that lowers the expectation level of providing an advantageous game, making it possible to provide a surprise due to the gap with the actual high expectation level.

As described above, the conversation production display and the subtitle production display are similar in that both include the display of characters related to the remarks of the characters. As a production display in which characters are displayed, there are some that display the title characters of a certain production such as a continuous production when the production starts, and some that display characters in a production (cut-in production) in which an image unrelated to the previous flow is inserted into a background image. However, these production displays differ from the conversation production display and the subtitle production display in that the content of the displayed characters is not directly related to the remarks of the characters. When comparing the conversation production display and the subtitle production display, the conversation production display has more types of modes (colors and sizes of characters, etc.) that suggest differences in the expectation of granting advantageous games than the subtitle production display. In addition, the conversation production display is displayed in the upper area of the screen of the image display unit DP than the subtitle production display. As a general tendency, the conversation production display is relatively more often displayed in response to the acceptance of an operation of the start lever 25, and the subtitle production display is relatively more often displayed in response to the acceptance of a third stop operation. For example, when there are 80 types of conversational performance displays and 70 types of subtitle performance displays, approximately 75% of the 80 types of conversational performance displays are displayed upon receipt of the operation of the start lever, and approximately 80% of the 70 types of subtitle performance displays are displayed upon receipt of the third stop operation. Also, the number of characters of the subtitle display in the subtitle performance display is relatively larger than the number of characters of the dialogue display in the conversational performance display. For example, if the average number of characters of each dialogue display in the 80 types of conversational performance displays is N, the average number of characters of each subtitle display in the 70 types of subtitle performance displays is about 1.5×N. The conversational performance displays are relatively often displayed during normal (normal game state) such as during non-AT, and the subtitle performance displays are relatively often displayed during continuous performance execution or freeze. For example, approximately 70% of the 80 types of conversational performance displays are displayed during normal, and approximately 75% of the 70 types of subtitle performance displays are displayed during continuous performance execution or freeze.

(Expectation creation)
The expectation presentation is a presentation that suggests to the player the expectation of an advantageous game. In the expectation presentation, an expectation presentation display for the expectation presentation is displayed on the image display unit DP at a predetermined timing. The expectation presentation display is, for example, a display whose display mode can be changed according to the expectation of an advantageous game, and is configured to include a display object (also called an "object") having a predetermined form. As an example of an expectation presentation display, an expectation presentation display OD1 is shown in FIG. 67.

The expectation level performance display OD1 includes a heart-shaped object OJ1 displayed in a predetermined area of the image display section DP. The object OJ1 has different display modes depending on the expectation level of granting advantageous play. Specifically, the color of the area inside the outline of the object OJ1 changes depending on the expectation level. In this example, in addition to the mode in which the color of the area inside the outline of the object OJ1 is a normal color (e.g., white), there are a mode in which it is displayed in blue (also referred to as "blue object display"), a mode in which it is displayed in yellow (also referred to as "yellow object display"), a mode in which it is displayed in green (also referred to as "green object display"), a mode in which it is displayed in red (also referred to as "red object display"), a mode in which it is displayed in blue (also referred to as "blue object display"), a mode in which it is displayed in a specific pattern (also referred to as "pattern object display"), and a mode in which it is displayed in rainbow colors (also referred to as "rainbow object display"). The expectation level of granting advantageous play is set to increase in the order of blue object display < yellow object display < green object display < red object display < pattern object display < rainbow object display. Furthermore, in the case of the expectation effect display that produces the highest expectation (in this example, a rainbow object display), it is set as a confirmation effect with a 100% expectation (for example, indicating a confirmed AT, a confirmed bonus, a confirmed jackpot, etc.).

Regarding the timing at which the expectation effect display is displayed, any timing triggered (display trigger) by the operation of a predetermined switch controlled by the main control means side, such as the bet switch, the start lever 25, the stop switches 26a, 26b, 26c, etc., can be appropriately set as the display timing (display start timing) of the expectation effect display. For example, a predetermined timing after the lever operation is accepted, a predetermined timing after the first stop operation is accepted, a predetermined timing after the second stop operation is accepted, or a predetermined timing after the third stop operation is accepted can be set as the display timing of the expectation effect display. In addition, in the case of a pachinko machine, for example, the timing at which a predetermined time has passed since the start hole winning, the timing at which a predetermined time has passed since the big winning hole opening, or the timing at which a predetermined time has passed since the big winning hole winning can be set as the display timing of the expectation effect display.

Figure 67 illustrates an example in which the expectation level production display OD1 and the second subtitle production display JD2 are simultaneously displayed on the image display unit DP. In this way, the expectation level production display and the subtitle production display may be displayed on the image display unit DP at the same time, or may be displayed separately so that the display times do not overlap. Comparing the expectation level production display and the subtitle production display, the number of stages (e.g., the number of colors) indicating the difference in expectation level is greater in the expectation level production display than in the subtitle production display. This is because the subtitle production display also has the function of increasing the understanding of the progress of the game, etc., depending on the contents of its subtitle display, and therefore, compared to the expectation level production display whose main purpose is to notify the difference in expectation level, the number of stages indicating the difference in expectation level may be smaller. In addition, the rainbow object display of the expectation level production display and the rainbow subtitle display of the subtitle production display are common in that they both represent a confirmed production, but in the case of other colors, the expectation level is not necessarily the same even if the colors are the same. For example, comparing the blue object display of the expectation level production display and the blue subtitle display of the subtitle production display, the blue subtitle display is set to suggest a higher expectation level than the blue object display. The expectation level effect display and the caption display may be superimposed, in which case the caption display will be displayed in front (on the front layer). Also, when the expectation level effect display and the caption display are superimposed, it may be difficult to tell if they are the same color, so they may be displayed in a way that avoids using the same color.

In addition, as a general trend, the difference in color of the expectation performance display is often related to the difference in the result of the internal lottery (winning role) (for example, a red object display corresponds to a rare role winning), and the difference in color of the subtitle performance display and the conversation performance display is often related to the expectation of winning in a lottery other than the internal lottery, such as an AT win or a big win. The shape of the object in the subtitle performance display is not limited to the heart shape shown as an example, and can be various shapes. For example, in addition to the heart shape, a balloon-shaped object may be provided. In addition, as another embodiment, a chair-shaped object and a desk-shaped object, or a bottle-shaped object and a cup-shaped object may be provided. In addition, compared to the types of objects in the expectation performance display (types due to differences in shape), there are more types of telop displays in the subtitle performance display (types due to differences in the content of the telop). This is because, as described above, the subtitle performance display also has the function of increasing the understanding of the progress of the game, etc., depending on the content of the telop display. By increasing the types of telop displays, it is possible to explain various game situations. In the case of FIG. 67, there is no embodiment in which the color of the characters, etc. in the subtitle performance display is a specific pattern, but such an embodiment may be provided. However, even if the characters in the caption are a pattern, there is a risk that the player will not be able to see that it is a pattern because the size of the characters is small. Therefore, if a pattern is used for the characters in the subtitle effect display, an expectation effect display with the same pattern may be displayed on the image display unit DP together with the subtitle effect display.

(GET performance)
The GET effect is an effect that indicates to the player that game value (game medals) will be awarded when a push order role such as a bell minor role is achieved during, for example, an announcement game during an AT (a game in which push navigation is executed). In the GET effect, a GET effect display for the GET effect is displayed on the image display unit DP at a predetermined timing. The GET effect display is a display for appealing to the player that game value will be awarded. As an example of a GET effect display, a GET effect display GD1 is shown in Figures 68 (D) and (E).

The GET effect display GD1 is composed of an image of the characters "GET!", and is displayed on the image display section D
The GET effect display is displayed in a predetermined area of P (in this example, the area is approximately in the center of the screen, but this can be changed as appropriate). When the GET effect display is displayed on the image display unit DP, a GET effect sound is output from the sound output unit in synchronization with the display timing (display start timing). The GET effect sound is a sound for appealing to the player that game value has been awarded, and is, for example, the sound "GET", which has the same content as the word "GET!" in the GET effect display GD1 (the content of the sound may be different from the content of the words).

The execution timing of the GET performance (GET performance display GD1 and GET performance sound) will be described with reference to Figures 68 and 69. As shown in Figure 68 (A), when the push navigation performance display ND1 notifying the push order of "middle, left, right" is displayed on the image display unit DP, if the first stop operation is accepted according to the push navigation performance display ND1, as shown in Figure 68 (B), the push navigation performance display ND1 changes to a state notifying the push order of "left and right" and is displayed on the image display unit DP. Here, when the second stop operation is accepted according to the push navigation performance display ND1, as shown in Figure 68 (C), the push navigation performance display ND1 changes to a state notifying the push order of "right" and is displayed on the image display unit DP. Furthermore, when the third stop operation is accepted (the operation part of the stop switch (in this example, the right stop switch) that accepted the third stop operation is pressed, and the stop switch is switched from the off state to the on state), the push navigation performance display ND1 is hidden.

After the push navigation display ND1 is hidden, the game value is awarded (the game medals are paid out by the hopper and the credits are added) and the GET display is executed. In detail, the awarding of the game value, the output of the GET display sound, and the display of the GET display start when the third stop operation is released (the operation part of the stop switch that accepted the third stop operation is released and the stop switch switches from the on state to the off state). In FIG. 69, these start timings are approximately simultaneous, but the start timings of each may be slightly shifted. The GET display sound that has started to be output ends before the awarding of the game value ends. After the output of the GET display sound ends, the awarding of the game value ends, and the GET display is hidden after the awarding of the game value ends. In this way, by delaying the timing at which the display of the GET effect display ends compared to the timing at which the output of the GET effect sound ends and the timing at which the awarding of the game value ends, the player can focus his or her attention on the fact that game value will be awarded by hearing the GET effect sound, and can also confirm once again that game value has been awarded by looking at the GET effect display after hearing the GET effect sound and after the game value has been awarded, which can give the player a sense of elation.

In a game in which a GET effect is performed, a subtitle effect display may be displayed on the image display unit DP upon receipt of a third stop operation. FIG. 68(E) shows an example in which a second subtitle effect display JD2 (telop display JT2) is displayed in an area on the lower side of the screen from the area in which the GET effect display GD1 is displayed on the image display unit DP without overlapping with the GET effect display GD1. It is preferable that the subtitle effect display to be displayed upon receipt of a third stop operation is displayed at the time when the GET effect display is hidden, that is, the display of the subtitle effect display starts before the time when the GET effect display is hidden. By doing so, the player's interest can be immediately directed to the subtitle effect display at the time when the GET effect display is hidden. In the example of FIG. 69, the display start timing of the subtitle effect display is set to be located between the end of the game value provision and the time when the GET effect display is hidden, but this is not limited to this. For example, the display of the subtitle effect display may be started at any timing within the period from when the third stop operation is accepted to when the GET effect display is not displayed (also referred to as the "subtitle effect display start suitable period"), or at a predetermined timing before the third stop operation is accepted. As described above, the press navigation effect display is all erased upon the acceptance of the third stop operation, the GET effect display is not yet displayed upon the acceptance of the third stop operation, and the subtitle effect display is started to be displayed upon the acceptance of the third stop operation or at a time point earlier than that, or after the display of the GET effect display has started. The subtitle effect display that has been started to be displayed upon the acceptance of the third stop operation or at a time point earlier than that continues to be displayed after the acceptance of the third stop operation, but the press navigation effect display is all erased upon the acceptance of the third stop operation, so that the subtitle effect display is not hidden by the press navigation effect display and can be clearly seen. In addition, the release of the third stop operation is triggered to display the GET effect display, but this GET effect display is originally displayed at a position that does not overlap with the subtitle effect display and disappears over time, so that the subtitle effect display is easily visible even after the GET effect display is displayed. Therefore, even if a push navigation effect display is displayed or a congratulatory effect display (including a GET effect display) for improving the satisfaction of the player is displayed, the player can understand the contents of the caption display of the subtitle effect display.

(Scene change direction)
The scene switching performance is a display performance consisting of multiple scenes that may be switched when the start lever or the stop switch is operated (for example, displayed on the image display unit DP). Each scene is composed of a progression performance in which the display content changes over time, and a cyclic performance that can be displayed after the progression performance ends and in which the same display content is repeated. The progression performance is mainly composed of moving images, and the cyclic images are composed of moving images or still images. The scene switching performance may be composed as a single performance or as a continuous performance. As an example of the scene switching performance, a first scene switching performance is shown in FIG. 70(A), and a second scene switching performance is shown in FIG. 70(B).

As shown in FIG. 70(A), the first scene switching performance is composed of four scenes, from the first scene to the fourth scene. The first scene is composed of a progression performance P1 and a cyclic performance L1, the second scene is composed of a progression performance P2 and a cyclic performance L2, the third scene is composed of a progression performance P3 and a cyclic performance L3, and the fourth scene is composed of a progression performance P4 and a cyclic performance L4. In the first scene switching performance, the display of the progression performance P1 of the first scene begins in response to the acceptance of the operation of the start lever 25. If a predetermined time (time T1) elapses after the start of the display of the progression performance P1 without the first stop operation being accepted, the display of the progression performance P1 ends at that point and the display of the cyclic performance L1 begins. This cyclic performance L1 continues to be displayed until the first stop operation is accepted.

After that, when the first stop operation is validly accepted, that acceptance triggers a switch from the first scene to the second scene, and the display of the progress presentation P2 for the second scene begins. Note that if the first stop operation is validly accepted after the display of the progress presentation P1 for the first scene has begun and before time T1 has elapsed, the first scene switches to the second scene without displaying the cyclical presentation L1, and the display of the progress presentation P2 for the second scene begins. If a predetermined time (time T2) elapses after the display of the progress presentation P2 begins without the second stop operation being accepted, at that point the display of the progress presentation P2 ends and the display of the cyclical presentation L2 begins. This cyclical presentation L2 continues to be displayed until the second stop operation is accepted.

After that, when the second stop operation is validly accepted, the acceptance triggers a switch from the second scene to the third scene, and the display of the third scene's progress presentation P3 begins. Note that if the second stop operation is validly accepted after the display of the second scene's progress presentation P2 has begun and before time T2 has elapsed, the second scene switches to the third scene without displaying the circular presentation L2, and the display of the third scene's progress presentation P3 begins. If a predetermined time (time T3) elapses after the display of the progress presentation P3 begins without the third stop operation being accepted, at that point the display of the progress presentation P3 ends and the display of the circular presentation L3 begins. This circular presentation L3 continues to be displayed until the third stop operation is accepted.

Thereafter, when the third stop operation is validly accepted, the scene is switched from the third scene to the fourth scene upon acceptance, and the progress performance P4 of the fourth scene is started to be displayed.
If the third stop operation is validly accepted before the time T3 has elapsed after the display of the scene progression effect P3 has started, the loop effect L3 is not displayed, the third scene is switched to the fourth scene, and the display of the fourth scene progression effect P4 starts. If a predetermined time (time T4) elapses after the display of the progression effect P4 starts without a bet operation, lever operation, settlement operation, etc. for the next game (collectively referred to as the "next game operation") being accepted, the display of the progression effect P4 ends at the time that the time has elapsed, and the display of the loop effect L4 starts. This loop effect L4 continues to be displayed until the next game operation is accepted (it may be ended when a predetermined time has elapsed after the display starts).

In the first scene switching performance, comparing the display continuation time (time T2) of the progress performance P2 of the second scene that is switched by the acceptance of the first stop operation, the display continuation time (time T3) of the progress performance P3 of the third scene that is switched by the acceptance of the second stop operation, and the display continuation time (time T4) of the progress performance P4 of the fourth scene that is switched by the acceptance of the third stop operation, the time T4 is set relatively longer than the times T2 and T3. This is because after the first stop operation or the second stop operation, it is difficult for the player to pay attention to the content of the progress performance because he or she is concentrating on performing the next stop operation, whereas after the third stop operation, the stop operation is completed, so the player has more time to pay attention to the content of the progress performance. In other words, by setting the time of the progress performance after the third stop operation relatively longer, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the content of the progress performance after the third stop operation and improve the enjoyment of the game. Furthermore, by relatively lengthening the duration of the progression presentation after the third stop operation, it becomes easier to suggest game results, etc., in the progression presentation after the third stop. This tendency is not limited to a specific scene change presentation, but is a tendency that extends to all of the multiple types of scene change presentations. For example, if there are a total of 50 types of scene change presentations performed during continuous presentations and a total of 10 types of scene change presentations performed during single presentations, then time T4 is set relatively longer than times T2 and T3 as an overall tendency (average value) for a total of 60 types of scene change presentations.

In addition, in the first scene switching performance, the first scene is switched to the second scene regardless of which of the three stop switches on the left, center, and right sides accepts the first stop operation. Similarly, the second scene is switched to the third scene regardless of which stop switch accepts the second stop operation, and the third scene is switched to the fourth scene regardless of which stop switch accepts the third stop operation. By doing so, the control process in the sub-control means can be simplified. That is, each time a stop operation is accepted, the first, second, and third stop acceptance commands are transmitted from the main control means to the sub-control means, and the sub-control means can know that the first, second, and third stop operations have been accepted by those commands. The first, second, and third stop acceptance commands also contain information about which stop switch has been operated. However, in the first scene switching performance, the scene can be switched without referring to that information, as long as it is known which stop acceptance command is issued during one game. Therefore, it is possible to omit referring to information about which stop switch has been operated, thereby simplifying the process for scene switching. Furthermore, regardless of the order in which the player operates the three stop switches 26a, 26b, and 26c while playing the game, the scene can be switched at the appropriate timing, making it easier to ensure consistency between the progress of the game and the presentation content. Note that the sub-control means can determine which stop acceptance command it is based on the number of stop commands received, as long as it knows that it is a stop acceptance command, so there is no particular need for information indicating which stop operation acceptance it is. Therefore, it is possible to omit information indicating which stop operation acceptance it is from the information included in each stop command, in which case it is possible to reduce the amount of information in the stop acceptance command and also to reduce memory storage capacity.

As shown in FIG. 70(B), the second scene switching performance is composed of two scenes, from the first scene to the second scene. The first scene is composed of a progress performance P11 and a cyclic performance L11, and the second scene is composed of a progress performance P12 and a cyclic performance L12. In the second scene switching performance, the display of the progress performance P11 of the first scene begins when the start lever is operated. If a predetermined time (time T11) elapses between the start of the display of the progress performance P11 and the acceptance of the third stop operation, the display of the progress performance P11 ends at that time and the display of the cyclic performance L11 begins. This cyclic performance L11 continues to be displayed until the third stop operation is accepted. In addition, in the second scene switching performance, the scene does not change when the first stop operation or the second stop operation is accepted.

After the display of the cyclic effect L11 starts, if the third stop operation is accepted validly after the first and second stop operations are accepted, the acceptance triggers a switch from the first scene to the second scene, and the display of the progress effect P12 of the second scene starts. If the third stop operation is accepted validly before time T11 has elapsed after the display of the progress effect P11 of the first scene has started, the cyclic effect L11 is not displayed, the first scene is switched to the second scene, and the display of the progress effect P12 of the second scene starts. If a predetermined time (time T12) has elapsed without the next game operation being accepted after the display of the progress effect P12 starts, the display of the progress effect P12 ends at that point, and the display of the cyclic effect L12 starts. This cyclic effect L12 continues to be displayed until the next game operation is accepted (it may also end when a predetermined time has elapsed after the display starts).

In the second scene switching performance, the first scene will not be switched to the second scene even if the first stop operation is received by any of the three stop switches 26a, 26b, and 26c on the left, center, and right. Similarly, the first scene will not be switched to the second scene even if the second stop operation is received by any of the stop switches. On the other hand, when the third stop operation is received, the first scene will be switched to the second scene regardless of which stop switch receives the third stop operation. For example, when the middle stop switch 26b receives the first or second stop operation, the scene will not be switched to the second scene, but when the middle stop switch 26b receives the third stop operation, the scene will be switched to the second scene. Also, when the middle stop switch 26b receives the third stop operation, the scene will be switched to the second scene, and when the left stop switch 26a or the right stop switch 26c receives the third stop operation, the scene will be switched to the second scene. By doing so, the control process in the sub-control means can be simplified. That is, since the scene can be switched without referring to the information on which stop switch was operated, which is included in the first, second, and third stop acceptance commands sent from the main control means to the sub-control means each time a stop operation is accepted, the process for switching scenes can be simplified. Also, since the scene can be switched at an appropriate timing regardless of the order in which the player operates the three stop switches 26a, 26b, and 26c while playing the game, it becomes easier to ensure consistency between the progress of the game and the presentation content.

As described above, in the second scene change performance, even if the first stop operation or the second stop operation is accepted, the scene does not change as a result. In this embodiment, there are other scene change performances besides the first and second scene change performances, but as a general trend, in the scene change performance, when comparing the case where the scene change is triggered by the acceptance of the third stop operation with the case where the scene change is triggered by the acceptance of the first stop operation or the second stop operation, the rate of scene change is relatively higher in the case where the scene change is triggered by the acceptance of the third stop operation than in the case where the scene change is triggered by the acceptance of the first stop operation or the second stop operation (the former case is 0%, the latter case is 10%).
0% is also possible). This is because after the first stop operation or the second stop operation, the player is concentrating on performing the next stop operation and it is difficult for the player to pay attention to the content of the progress presentation, whereas after the third stop operation, the player has more time to pay attention to the content of the progress presentation because the stop operation is completed. In other words, by setting the ratio of the scene change triggered by the third stop operation relatively high, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the content of the progress presentation after the third stop operation and improve the enjoyment of the game. In addition, by setting the ratio of the scene change triggered by the third stop operation relatively high, it becomes easier to suggest the game result in the progress presentation after the third stop.

(Blackout)
The blackout effect is a display effect that makes the display appear less visible. The blackout effect is executed, for example, when a predetermined effect display suggests a game result that is unfavorable to the player (for example, no AT win, no bonus win, no AT top-up win, no big win in pachinko machines, etc.). The blackout effect is often executed when the final scene of a continuous effect is displayed, but it can also be executed in a single effect. An example of the blackout effect is shown in FIG. 71.

Figure 71 (A) shows the display state of the image display unit DP just before the blackout effect is executed. In this example, the image display unit DP displays a final scene display RD1 showing the final scene of the continuous effect, a subtitle effect display JD3 having a caption display JT3 with the content "Will it be a storm tomorrow?", a first area RY1 showing the number of games remaining in the AT ("23G remaining"), and a second area RY2 showing the name of the game state ("decisive battle stage"). The continuous effect, for example, displays a moving image of the character CH1 challenging something over multiple games. In addition, the final scene display RD1 expresses the character CH1, who failed the challenge, hanging his head, suggesting that the game result was unfavorable to the player. In addition, sound is output at the start of the final scene display RD1, but the output of the sound may be configured to end when the blackout effect is performed for the final scene display RD1. In such a configuration, the absence of sound can clearly indicate to the player that it is over. Needless to say, if an error occurs in this state, an error sound will be output.

Figure 71 (B) shows the display state of the image display unit DP when the blackout effect is executed. In the blackout effect of this example, the final scene display RD1 is displayed as being dark overall, reducing visibility. The visibility of the subtitle effect display JD3 is also reduced. On the other hand, the first area RY1 and the second area RY2 maintain their original brightness and do not reduce visibility. By doing so, it is possible to impress upon the player that a game result that is unfavorable to the player has been obtained, while ensuring visibility of information regarding the subsequent game, making it possible to clearly inform the player of the content. The areas in the image display unit DP that do not reduce visibility even during the blackout effect (also referred to as "non-blackout areas") are not limited to the first area RY1 or the second area RY2. In the case of slot machines, the non-darkened areas can be the areas that display the number of credits, the number of bets, the number of games played, the number of game values acquired, and the areas that display sub-effects such as mini-games. In the case of pachinko machines, the non-darkened areas can be the areas that display reserved symbols, the areas that display variable symbols (so-called mini symbols) that are different from decorative symbols, the areas that display the number of reserved symbols, and the areas that show the variable reserved icons. The mini symbols are also called second symbols, and are symbols that are always displayed even if the first symbols disappear due to reach effects, etc., and they indicate the progress of the game, allowing the player to always understand the progress of the game.

Also, if a predetermined time has passed without the next game operation being performed after the blackout effect is executed, the visibility of the final scene display RD1 may be further decreased (for example, made darker). By doing so, it is possible to make the player distinguish between blackouts as a result of consecutive effects and blackouts due to no progress in the game, without mistaking them. Note that instead of decreasing the visibility in two stages, the visibility may be gradually decreased over time.

A layer structure may be used to reduce the visibility of the display during blackout effects. For example, a first layer depicting the final scene display RD1 is placed at the back, a second layer depicting the subtitle effect display JD3 is placed closer to the first layer, and a third layer depicting the first region RY1 and the second region RY2 is placed even closer to the first layer (the layer depicting the first region RY and the layer depicting the second region RY2 may be separate). Then, during blackout effects, a fourth layer is placed between the second and third layers, and a process is performed to reduce the brightness of the entire region of the fourth layer, thereby reducing the visibility of the final scene display RD1 and the subtitle effect display JD3 while maintaining the visibility of the first region RY1 and the second region RY2.

Rather than lowering the brightness of the fourth layer, the visibility may be reduced by increasing the opacity of the fourth layer or by depicting a large number of thin lines or fine patterns in the fourth layer. Rather than using layers, the visibility may be reduced by applying a blurring process such as a mosaic to the image of the final scene display RD1. Visibility may also be reduced by reducing the brightness of the backlight of the image display unit DP. In this case, it is possible to reduce power consumption by reducing the brightness of the backlight. Also, in the example of FIG. 71(B), the subtitle display JD3 with reduced visibility is displayed as is, but it may be hidden during the blackout effect.

If the player obtains a favorable game result during the continuous performance (for example, an AT win, a bonus win, an AT additional win, or a jackpot in the case of a pachinko machine), a display suggesting that a favorable game result has been obtained (also called a "success display") is often displayed in the final scene of the continuous performance, and in this case, a blackout effect is not performed. On the other hand, even if a favorable game result has been obtained, a display suggesting that an unfavorable game result has been obtained (also called a "failure display") may be displayed once, and then a display suggesting that a favorable game result was actually obtained (also called a "revival display") may be displayed. In this case, the blackout effect may be executed while the failure display is displayed. If a blackout effect is executed while a failure display is displayed and a revival display is then displayed, the blackout effect is terminated before the revival display is displayed. This allows the revival display to be displayed after ensuring visibility, making it possible for the player to clearly recognize that a favorable game result has been obtained.

In addition, when comparing the advantageous game results awarded when a failure display, a blackout effect, and a revival display have been performed (or when there is no blackout effect), with the advantageous game results awarded when a success display is performed without a revival display, it may be possible to make it so that there are relatively more cases where a more advantageous game result (for example, winning an add-on specialized zone where AT additions are likely to occur, winning an AT with a large number of initial games, a jackpot with a large number of rounds in pachinko machines, or a probability-varying jackpot with a high jackpot probability) is awarded when there is a revival display. By doing so, it is possible to keep the player's expectations up and not be disappointed even when a failure display or blackout effect is performed.

When visibility is reduced by the blackout effect, for example, the decision button 55 may be operated to display an adjustment screen for adjusting the light amount (brightness) of the screen or the volume of the effect sound. In that case, the visibility of the light amount and volume adjustment screen is ensured even during the blackout effect. In addition, if an error occurs during the blackout effect, an error notification display may be displayed to notify the occurrence of the error. In this case, the visibility of the error notification display is ensured even during the blackout effect. Note that the blackout effect can also be executed in situations other than the continuous effect. For example, the blackout effect may be triggered by the stop operation of the stop switch being performed in a push order different from the push order notified by the push navigation effect (also referred to as a "push order failure"). In this case, the blackout effect can be executed at the time of the push order failure, whether the push order is failed in the first stop operation or the second stop operation. In that case, it is possible to set a non-blackout area in which visibility is not reduced, just like in the case of the blackout effect in the continuous effect.

Although the first embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment and can be modified as appropriate. For example, in the correction counter of the first embodiment, a first threshold and a second threshold (first threshold < second threshold) may be set, and the probability that the number of games played before the next AT is started is higher when one AT ends with the correction counter value exceeding the second threshold than when one AT ends with the correction counter value exceeding the first threshold but not the second threshold. This makes it possible to create a wave of change in the number of balls (number of game medals acquired) within the range of 2400, which is the upper limit at the end of one favorable zone, and to suppress excessive acquisition of game medals.

In addition, the types of characters displayed in the demo effects (effects that are displayed when not playing, and that are executed a predetermined time after play has ended; also referred to as "standby effects") and the conversation effects may be configured so that there are more types of characters displayed in the conversation effects. Characters that appear less frequently (so-called premium characters) may not be displayed in the demo effects, but may appear in conversation effects or other effects. This may create a situation in which an unknown character appears (a character that you know exists but do not know will appear), and the appearance of such a character can effectively heighten anticipation. In addition, the demo effects are configured so that conversation effects and subtitle effects are not displayed.

[Second embodiment]
The slot machine according to the second embodiment (hereinafter also referred to as the "slot machine of the second form") will be described below with additional reference to Figures 72 to 85. Below, the characteristic parts of the slot machine of the second form will be mainly described. The characteristic parts described below are not limited to the slot machine of the second form, but can be combined with other embodiments. The slot machine of the second form has a basic configuration that is common or similar to that of the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment described above, and a description thereof will be omitted. In addition, each control process such as the role determination process and the reel control process described in the slot machine 1 can be applied to the slot machine of the second form in the same manner or with some changes to the process contents.

<Basic configuration>
Before describing the characteristic parts, the basic configuration of the slot machine of the second embodiment (the configuration particularly relevant to the description of the characteristic parts) will be briefly described. Although not shown, the slot machine of the second embodiment includes three reels (corresponding to the reels 3a to 3c described above), a start lever (corresponding to the start lever 25 described above) operated when starting the rotation of all the reels, and three stop switches (corresponding to the stop switches 26a to 26c described above) on the left, center, and right sides that accept a stop operation for individually stopping the rotation of each reel. In addition, the slot machine of the second embodiment includes a MAX-BET switch (corresponding to the MAX-BET switch 23 described above) operated when betting game medals, a settlement switch (corresponding to the settlement switch 27 described above) operated when settling the game medals bet or credited, and a sub-switch operated when playing a game for presentation or displaying game machine information. Furthermore, the slot machine of the second embodiment includes three control boards as main control boards: a main control board, a sub-main control board, and a sub-sub control board (the main control board 60 described above, the sub-main control board 70 described above).
The slot machine of the second embodiment is provided with an image display unit corresponding to the display screen 11a of the image display device 11 in the slot machine 1, and various display effects are executed in this image display unit.

Each stop switch, like the stop switch in the first embodiment, has a button-shaped operation acceptance section that retracts when the player presses it with their hand and returns to its original state due to spring force or the like when the player releases their hand. When this operation acceptance section is pressed (pushed by hand), the contacts of the electrical circuit close and the switch changes from an OFF state to an ON state, and when the pressing operation is released (hand is released), the contacts open and the switch changes from an ON state to an OFF state. In addition, the button portion of each stop switch has a built-in stop switch lamp whose lighting state changes depending on the progress of the game, etc.

The max bet switch has a button-shaped operation acceptance part that retracts when the player presses it with their hand and returns to its original state due to spring force or the like when the player releases their hand. When this operation acceptance part is pressed (pushed by hand), the contacts of the electrical circuit close and the state changes from OFF to ON, and when the pressing operation is released (hand is released), the contacts open and the state changes from ON to OFF. The button part of the max bet switch also has a built-in max bet switch lamp that changes lighting state depending on the progress of the game, etc.

The settlement switch has a button-like operation acceptance part that retracts when the player presses it with their hand and returns to its original position due to spring force or the like when the player releases their hand. When this operation acceptance part is pressed (pushed by hand), the contacts of the electrical circuit close and the state changes from OFF to ON, and when the pressing operation is released (hand is released), the contacts open and the state changes from ON to OFF.

The sub-switch has the same structure and function as the decision button 55 of the first embodiment. This sub-switch has a button-shaped operation receiving part that retracts when the player presses it with their hand and returns to its original position due to a spring force or the like when the player releases their hand, and a cross-shaped operation receiving part with an arrow; when these operation receiving parts are pressed (pushed by hand), the contacts of the electric circuit close and the state changes from OFF to ON, and when the pressing operation is released (hand is released), the contacts open and the state changes from ON to OFF.

Control over operation reception for the start lever, stop switch, max bet switch, and settlement switch is performed by the main control board, while control over operation reception for the sub-switches and control of various effects on the image display unit is performed by the sub-control board (sub-main control board or sub-sub control board). The start lever, stop switch, etc. controlled by the main control board (main control means) are collectively referred to as the "main switch." In addition, the max bet switch lamp is controlled by the main control board, and the stop switch lamp is controlled by the sub-control board (sub-control means), but the max bet switch lamp may be controlled by the sub-control board, or the stop switch lamp may be controlled by the main control board. Below, several characteristic parts of the second form of slot machine will be explained in order.

<Processing when the settlement switch or other switches are operated>
The processing contents when the settlement switch or other switches are operated will be described with reference to Figures 72 to 78. In this embodiment, the on/off state of each main switch operated by a player or the like is read in a timer interrupt process executed by the main control board at a preset fixed time interval (for example, 2.235 milliseconds).
The on/off state of the sub-switch is read in a similar interrupt process performed by the sub-control board. In Figures 72 to 75, the timing of the timer interrupt process by the main control board is indicated by short arrows aligned on the time axis.

(When the settlement switch is operated independently)
FIG. 72 shows the timing at which the on/off state of the settlement switch is switched and the timing at which the settlement process is started when the settlement switch is operated alone. In this example, as a result of reading the on/off state of the settlement switch in each timer interrupt process, the timer is set at the time when the settlement switch is switched from the off state to the on state (also referred to as the "time when it is operated on"), and measurement of the elapsed time from that time is started. Then, when the on state of the settlement switch continues for a predetermined time (hereinafter referred to as "T01") or more from the start of measurement, a predetermined flag (also referred to as the "settlement switch ON acceptance flag") indicating that the operation of the settlement switch has been validly accepted is set. Next, a process is performed to determine that the settlement switch ON acceptance flag has been set, and the settlement switch ON acceptance flag is cleared as a result of the determination, and the settlement process is started. If the process of the determination is not performed, the settlement switch ON acceptance flag is cleared after a predetermined time (for example, in the next timer interrupt process).

The settlement process includes the settlement (refund) of bet medals if any, and the settlement (refund) of credit medals if any. In addition, the 1-BET lamp, 2-BET lamp, and 3-BET lamp (corresponding to the 1-BET display lamp 46bC, 2-BET display lamp 46bB, and MAX-BET display lamp 46bA in the first embodiment) for displaying the number of bets are turned off, and the displayed number in the credit number display unit (corresponding to the accumulated number display lamp 46h in the first embodiment) for displaying the number of credits is updated (subtracted). In addition, a control command including information indicating that the operation of the settlement switch has been validly accepted is transmitted to the sub-control board. In response to this command, the sub-control board performs a performance corresponding to the settlement process. Specifically, for example, a predetermined sound corresponding to the settlement (also called a "settlement sound") is output from the speaker, and a predetermined image (also called a "settlement image") indicating that the settlement is in progress is displayed on the image display unit. In addition, if the number of bets or the number of credits is displayed on the image display unit, the displayed number of bets and the number of credits are updated (subtracted). In FIG. 72, the time from when the settlement switch is turned on until the settlement switch ON reception flag is set (also referred to as the "settlement switch valid operation time") is denoted as T11. This settlement switch valid operation time T11 is not strictly the same as the time from when the settlement switch is turned on until the settlement process starts, but the difference is so short that it is imperceptible to humans (on the order of a few milliseconds). Therefore, below, the time from when the settlement switch is turned on until the settlement process starts is considered to be the same length of time as the settlement switch valid operation time T11.

The settlement process is performed in response to the operation of the settlement switch when the settlement switch is operated during a period during which the operation of the settlement switch is validly accepted (also referred to as a "settlement operation acceptable period"). The settlement operation acceptable period is, for example, a period from the end of one game (for example, the time when all reels stop and the payout process of the game medals is completed) to the start of the next game (for example, the time when the start lever is operated and the reels start to rotate). If the settlement switch is operated during a period other than the settlement operation acceptable period, the settlement process is not performed. For example, the settlement switch ON flag is not set, or the flag is not judged. In this example, the settlement of the bet and the credited game medals is performed by only one ON operation of the settlement switch, but the settlement of the bet game medals may be performed when the settlement switch is operated once, and the settlement of the credited game medals may be performed when the settlement switch is operated again. In addition, when the settlement switch is turned on, the betted game medals are settled, and when the on state continues for a predetermined period of time (long press), the credited game medals are settled.

(When the Max Bet switch is operated independently)
FIG. 73 shows the timing when the ON/OFF state of the MAX BET switch is switched and the timing when the bet process is started when the MAX BET switch is operated alone. In this example, as a result of reading the ON/OFF state of the MAX BET switch in each timer interrupt process, the timer is set at the time when the MAX BET switch is switched from the OFF state to the ON state (the time when it is operated ON), and the measurement of the elapsed time from that time is started. Then, when the ON state of the MAX BET switch continues for a predetermined time (hereinafter referred to as "T02") or more from the start of the measurement, a predetermined flag (also called "MAX BET switch ON acceptance flag") indicating that the operation of the MAX BET switch has been validly accepted is set. After that, a process is performed to determine that the MAX BET switch ON acceptance flag has been set, and the MAX BET switch ON acceptance flag is cleared as a result of the determination, and the bet process is started. If the process of the determination is not performed, the MAX BET switch ON acceptance flag is cleared after a predetermined time (for example, in the next timer interrupt process).

The bet process involves betting a number of medals from the credited medals according to the number of bets immediately before the max bet switch operation (for example, 3 medals when the previous bet number is 0 medals, 2 medals when the previous bet number is 1 medal, and 1 medal when the previous bet number is 2 medals). The 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp are turned on, and the displayed number in the credit number display unit is updated (subtracted). Furthermore, a control command including information indicating that the max bet switch operation has been validly accepted is transmitted to the sub-control board. In response to this command, the sub-control board performs a performance according to the bet process. Specifically, for example, a predetermined sound (also called a "bet sound") according to the bet is output from the speaker. Furthermore, when the number of bets or the number of credits is displayed on the image display unit, the displayed number of bets is updated (added) and the number of credits is updated (subtracted). In FIG. 73, the time from when the max bet switch is operated to ON until the settlement switch ON acceptance flag is set (also called the "max bet switch valid operation time") is indicated as T12. For the same reason as the settlement switch valid operation time T11, in the following, the time from when the max bet switch is turned on to when the bet process starts is considered to be the same length of time as the max bet switch valid operation time T12.

In this example, when the operation of the max bet switch is accepted effectively, the 1 to 3 bet lamps are turned on almost simultaneously (including the case where there is a time difference of about several milliseconds that cannot be sensed by humans). On the other hand, the bet number displayed on the image display unit is updated one by one so that the update process can be visually confirmed, and the bet sound is also output one by one so that the bet number can be identified by sound. For example, when three game medals are bet in response to the operation of the max bet switch, the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp that were off until just before are turned on almost simultaneously. In contrast, the displayed bet number on the image display unit is incremented by one and displayed as "BET: 0" → "BET: 1" → "BET: 2" → "BET: 3", and the bet sound is output one by one, such as "Pong" → "Pong" → "Pong". In this way, by turning on the 1 to 3 bet lamps almost simultaneously, the player can be notified early that a bet has been made, and it becomes possible to progress the game promptly. On the other hand, the number of bets displayed on the image display unit is updated and the bet sound is output one at a time, so it is possible to notify the number of game medals bet in an easy-to-understand manner, even for players who are unfamiliar with the game.

The timing of updating the number of displayed bets in the image display section and the timing of outputting the bet sound may be appropriately set according to the time required for updating the image and outputting the sound. Alternatively, a command indicating the timing of updating (for example, three commands for three bets) may be sent from the main control board to the sub-control board at a predetermined time according to the number of bets, and the image may be updated and the sound may be output in response to the timing of receiving each command. In addition, when a demo image (an image displayed when the slot machine is in a pause state for a predetermined time or more after all reels have stopped, also called a "demo screen") is displayed on the image display section, if a game medal is bet in response to the operation of the max bet switch, the demo image is switched to a predetermined image (also called a "game in progress image") that is displayed during the game, and the number of bets is displayed. In that case, the number of displayed bets is configured so that "BET: 3" is already displayed at the stage when the demo image is switched to the game in progress image. This is to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable because the difference between the actual bet timing and the update timing of the displayed bet number becomes large when the displayed bet number is updated by one after the image is switched. On the other hand, the bet sound is output one by one without waiting for the completion of image switching, even while demo images are being displayed or while demo images are being switched to game-in-progress images. Therefore, even while demo images are being displayed, the player can confirm that a bet has been placed by the bet sound.

Note that betting processing is performed in response to the operation of the max bet switch when the max bet switch is operated during a period during which the operation of the max bet switch is validly accepted (also referred to as the "max bet operation acceptable period"). The max bet operation acceptable period is, for example, the period from the end of one game to the number of bets in the next game reaching 3. During this max bet operation acceptable period, the max bet lamp is lit in a predetermined manner (for example, a predetermined lighting color) to indicate that a bet is possible. If the max bet switch is operated during a period other than the max bet operation acceptable period, betting processing is not performed. For example, the max bet switch ON flag is not set, or the flag is not judged. Note that the contents of the settlement processing and the start timing of the processing when the 1 bet switch is operated are the same as when the max bet switch is operated.

(If the Max Bet switch is operated while the Settlement switch is being operated)
FIG. 74 shows the timing of settlement processing when the max bet switch is operated during settlement switch operation (during settlement switch valid operation time T11). The settlement switch is turned on during the settlement operation acceptable period, and the max bet switch is turned on during the max bet operation acceptable period. The time when the max bet switch operation is stopped and the max bet switch is switched from the on state to the off state (also referred to as the "off operation time") is outside the range of the settlement switch valid operation time T11. In this example, the operation of the max bet switch is invalid, while the operation of the settlement switch is valid. Specifically, even if the settlement switch valid operation time T11 has passed with the settlement switch in the on state from the time when the settlement switch is turned on, the settlement switch ON acceptance flag is not set, and the settlement processing is not started. The settlement switch ON acceptance flag is set after the time when the max bet switch is turned off. Then, a process is performed to determine whether the settlement switch ON reception flag has been set, and the determination triggers the clearing of the settlement switch ON reception flag and the start of the settlement process. Therefore, the start of the execution of the settlement process may be later than when the settlement switch is operated alone. The settlement switch ON reception flag may be set when the settlement switch valid operation time T11 has elapsed from the time when the settlement switch is operated on (the set timing is shown by a broken line in FIG. 74), and the settlement process may be started by performing a process to determine whether the settlement switch ON reception flag has been set after the time when the max bet switch is operated off. In addition, if the max bet switch is operated off during the settlement switch valid operation time T11, the settlement process may be started at the same timing as when the settlement switch is operated alone.

On the other hand, even if the max bet switch remains on for the max bet switch valid operation time T12 from the time the max bet switch is operated on, the max bet switch ON acceptance flag is not set and the bet process is not executed. In this way, in this example, if the player mistakenly operates the max bet switch during the settlement switch valid operation time T11, the settlement process is executed but the bet process is not executed. This prevents the settlement process, which is executed when the player wants to end play, and the bet process, which is executed when the player wants to continue play, from being executed simultaneously, which would confuse the player. Also, if the bet process is configured to be executed in response to the operation of the max bet switch even while the settlement switch is being operated, the player would have to go through the trouble of operating the settlement switch again to settle the bet medals, but this example prevents such trouble from occurring.

In this example, the max bet lamp, which is turned on in a predetermined manner when the max bet operation acceptance period begins, remains on even after the settlement switch is turned on, and is turned off when the settlement process begins. If the max bet lamp is on when the gaming center is dark, the position of the max bet switch is easily visible, and the player who sees the lamp on can be motivated to play. Therefore, by keeping the max bet lamp on until the settlement process begins, the player can see the max bet lamp on for a longer period of time than when the max bet lamp is turned off when the settlement switch is turned on, and the motivation of the player who is about to finish playing can be increased. Also, by keeping the max bet lamp on until the settlement process begins, it becomes easy for the player to understand that the settlement of the game medals will be performed without a bet. Therefore, the player can know the number of game medals to be settled before the settlement process begins by checking the number of credits displayed at the time before the settlement process begins.

In addition, in this example, when a game medal is groomed from an insertion port (corresponding to the medal insertion port 21 in the first embodiment) at a predetermined timing (also referred to as the "effective grooming timing"), the groomed game medal is configured to be bettable during the period from when the settlement switch is turned on to when the settlement process is started. Specifically, for example, this is realized by making the groomed game medal acceptable without turning the blocker off even when the settlement switch is turned on. The effective grooming timing may be any of the following: a time before the settlement switch is turned on, a time approximately the same as when the settlement switch is turned on, and a time before the settlement switch is turned on. In contrast to this example, for example, if the blocker is turned off in response to the settlement switch being turned on, and the groomed game medal is carelessly made unacceptable, there is a risk that a state (also referred to as a "game medal swallowing state") will occur in which the groomed game medal is actually contained in the slot machine but is not recognized as such. This example makes it possible to prevent such a situation in which the gaming medal is swallowed.

(If the sub-switch is operated while the settlement switch is being operated)
FIG. 75 shows the timing of the settlement process when the sub switch is operated during the settlement switch operation (during the settlement switch valid operation time T11). The settlement switch is operated ON during the settlement operation acceptable period, and the sub switch is operated ON during the period during which the operation of the sub switch is validly accepted (also referred to as the "sub switch operation acceptable period"). The sub switch operation acceptable period is, for example, a period during which an image for encouraging the player to operate the sub switch (for example, an image displaying the characters "PUSH" and an arrow "↓" pointing to the position of the sub switch. Also referred to as the "sub switch operation prompting image") is displayed on the image display unit. In this example, the operation of the settlement switch is also valid, and the operation of the sub switch is also valid. Specifically, the settlement process is started at the same timing as when the settlement switch is operated alone. Also, when the ON state of the sub switch continues for a predetermined time or more from the time when the sub switch is operated ON, a predetermined flag (also referred to as the "sub switch ON acceptance flag"; not shown) indicating that the operation of the sub switch has been validly accepted is set. Thereafter, a process is performed to determine whether the sub switch ON reception flag is set, and the determination triggers the sub switch ON reception flag to be cleared, and a predetermined effect (also referred to as a "sub switch operation trigger effect") corresponding to the operation of the sub switch is started. In FIG. 75, the time from when the sub switch is operated to ON until the sub switch operation trigger effect is started is indicated as T13. These effects and processes related to the operation of the sub switch are executed by the sub control board. Examples of the sub switch operation trigger effect include an effect in which an image is displayed or a sound is output suggesting that there is a high possibility (expectation) of the game progressing to a situation advantageous to the player (for example, the addition or continuation of the AT) (also referred to as a "sub switch operation success effect"), and an effect in which an image is displayed or a sound is output suggesting that there is a low or no possibility of the game progressing to a situation advantageous to the player (also referred to as a "sub switch operation failure effect").

The contents of the sub-switch operation trigger performance may include, for example, outputting a predetermined sound (also referred to as a "sub-switch operation trigger sound") from the speaker or displaying a predetermined image (also referred to as a "sub-switch operation trigger image") on the image display unit. In this way, in this example, when the sub-switch is operated during the settlement switch effective operation time T11, the sub-switch operation trigger performance is executed. Therefore, even if a player who operates the settlement switch to end the game inadvertently operates the sub-switch after seeing the sub-switch operation prompt image, the sub-switch operation trigger performance can be executed smoothly. In addition, when the settlement process starts after the start of the sub-switch operation trigger performance, the output of the settlement sound or the display of the settlement image accompanying the start of the settlement process may be configured not to be executed, or may be executed after the end of the sub-switch operation trigger performance. When the output of the settlement sound or the display of the settlement image is not executed, the processing load can be reduced compared to when it is executed. When the output of the settlement sound or the display of the settlement image is executed after the end of the sub-switch operation trigger performance, it is easy for the player to understand that the settlement has been executed. Also, a settlement sound may be output even while the sub-switch operation trigger performance is being executed. Outputting the settlement sound makes it easier for the player to know that settlement has been completed. When the settlement sound is output, its output timing may be adjusted so that it does not overlap with the output timing of the sub-switch operation trigger sound, or such output timing adjustment may not be performed and the settlement sound and the sub-switch operation trigger sound may be allowed to be output at approximately the same time. When such output timing adjustment is performed, it becomes easier for the player to hear the settlement sound, making it easier for the player to know that settlement has been completed. On the other hand, when such output timing adjustment is not performed, the processing load can be reduced compared to when adjustment is performed.

In addition, during the period when the demo image is displayed on the image display section (also referred to as the "demo display period"), the sub-switch operation prompt image is not displayed, so the period is basically not a period during which the sub-switch operation can be accepted. Therefore, even if the sub-switch is operated during this demo display period, it is invalid. However, even during the demo display period, the operation of the sub-switch can be validly accepted and the sub-switch operation trigger effect can be executed. If the operation of the sub-switch is invalid, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused by the start of the sub-switch operation trigger effect when the player mistakenly operates the sub-switch while operating the settlement switch. If the operation of the sub-switch is valid, it is possible to increase the opportunities for executing the sub-switch operation trigger effect. Furthermore, when the settlement process is started during the demo display period, the demo image may be left as it is and the settlement image may not be displayed and only the settlement sound may be output, or the demo image may be switched to the settlement image and displayed, and the settlement sound may also be output. When only the settlement sound is output, it is not necessary to perform processing for displaying the settlement image, so the processing load can be reduced. When the demo image is switched to the settlement image and displayed, and the settlement sound is also output, it is easy for the player to understand that the settlement has been made.

(When the liquidation switch and other main switches are operated at the same time)
FIG. 76(A) shows the timing at which the settlement process is executed when a specified main switch (in this example, the stop switch) is operated while the settlement switch is being operated (during the settlement switch valid operation time T11), and FIG. 76(B) shows the operation timing when the settlement switch is operated while the stop switch is being operated. This is during a period during which the operation of the stop switch cannot be validly accepted (also referred to as a "stop operation unacceptable period"). The stop operation unacceptable period is, for example, a period during which all reels are stopped. Although not shown in FIG. 76, the on/off state of the settlement switch and the stop switch is read for each timer interrupt process.

If the stop switch is operated during the settlement switch valid operation time T11, as shown in FIG. 76 (A), the operation of the settlement switch becomes valid and the settlement process starts according to that operation. The timing at which the settlement process starts varies depending on the timing at which the stop switch is turned off, but in either case, the settlement process starts after the stop switch is turned off. Specifically, if the time at which the stop switch is turned off is outside the range of the settlement switch valid operation time T11, the settlement process does not start even if the settlement switch remains on from the time at which the settlement switch is turned on and the settlement switch valid operation time T11 has elapsed. The settlement switch ON reception flag (not shown) is set after the stop switch is turned off, and the settlement process starts after the stop switch is turned off. Therefore, the start time of the settlement process is later than when the settlement switch is operated alone. On the other hand, if the time at which the stop switch is turned off is within the range of the settlement switch valid operation time T11, the settlement process starts at the same timing as when the settlement switch is operated alone. In this way, if the stop switch is operated during the settlement switch valid operation time T11, the operation of the settlement switch is made valid, so that even if a player mistakenly operates the stop switch while operating the settlement switch, the settlement process can be carried out smoothly without the settlement switch being operated again.

If the settlement switch is operated while the stop switch is being operated, as shown in FIG. 76(B), the operation of the settlement switch is invalid and the settlement process corresponding to that operation is not started. Specifically, when the settlement switch is operated while the stop switch is being operated, even if the time when the stop switch is turned off is within the settlement switch valid operation time T11 or outside the range of the settlement switch valid operation time T11 (the timing shown by the dashed line in FIG. 76(B)), the operation of the settlement switch is invalid and the settlement process corresponding to that operation is not started. In order to start the settlement process, the settlement switch needs to be operated again. In this way, since the settlement process is not performed when the settlement switch is operated while the stop switch is being operated, the process required to perform the settlement process (such as setting the settlement switch ON reception flag and the process of determining that the settlement switch ON reception flag has been set) can be uniformly not performed while the stop switch is being operated, which makes it possible to reduce the processing load.

In addition, even if the settlement switch is operated while the stop switch is being operated, when the stop switch is turned off during the settlement switch valid operation time T11, the operation of the settlement switch may be accepted as valid and the settlement process may be executed. In this way, in the case where a player who operates the settlement switch while mistakenly operating the stop switch realizes that he has operated the stop switch and turns off the stop switch early, it becomes possible to smoothly settle without operating the settlement switch again. In this example, a predetermined main switch is set as the stop switch, but if another main switch is operated during the settlement switch valid operation time T11, it may be processed in the same way as in this example. For example, there is a case where the start lever is operated during the settlement switch valid operation time T11 in a state where no bet is made (a period during which the operation of the start lever is not accepted as valid).

(If an error occurs during operation of the settlement switch)
FIG. 77 shows the start and end timings of error notification when a predetermined error (for example, a full error in the auxiliary storage of game medals) occurs during the operation of the settlement switch (during the settlement switch valid operation time T11). The settlement switch is turned on during the settlement operation acceptable period. Although not shown in FIG. 77, the on/off state of the settlement switch is read for each timer interrupt process. In this example, the on/off state of a predetermined error signal that detects the occurrence of an error (for example, a signal from a full sensor (corresponding to the full detection unit 86 in the first embodiment) that detects the storage state of game medals in the auxiliary storage) and the on/off state of the reset switch (corresponding to the reset switch 82 in the first embodiment) are read for each timer interrupt process (the same applies to FIG. 78 described later).

As shown in the figure, in this example, during the settlement switch valid operation time T11, the error signal switches from an OFF state (error undetected state) to an ON state (error detected state), and if the ON state continues for a predetermined time, it is determined that an error has occurred at that point, and a predetermined error process is executed to start an error notification. In this error notification, for example, information indicating the type of error that has occurred is displayed on an error indicator (corresponding to the above-mentioned payout number display lamp 46j) provided on the front door, an image notifying the occurrence of the error (also referred to as an "error notification image") is displayed on the image display unit, and a sound notifying the occurrence of the error (also referred to as an "error notification sound") is output from the speaker. The error notification by the error indicator is controlled by the main control board, and the error notification image and error notification sound are controlled by the sub-control board.

In addition, as shown in the figure, after the error notification starts, the cause of the error is removed and the error is resolved, causing the error signal to switch from on to off. After that, the reset switch is turned on, and the main control board determines that the reset switch has switched from off to on, which triggers the execution of a predetermined error release process to end the error notification. The reset switch is turned on outside the valid settlement switch operation time T11. In this example, the operation of the settlement switch is invalid and the settlement process corresponding to that operation is not started. In order to start the settlement process, the settlement switch needs to be operated again after the error is resolved. If the settlement process is executed even when an error has occurred, there is a risk that the player will have doubts that the settlement was not performed correctly. In this example, if an error occurs during the operation of the settlement switch, the settlement process is not performed, so this situation can be prevented.

As described above, in this example, if an error occurs during the settlement switch valid operation time T11, the error is detected and an error notification is made. Therefore, even when a player is operating the settlement switch to end a game, it is possible to notify the player early on that an error has occurred that could have a significant impact on the progress of the game. Also, compared to a configuration in which error detection and notification are not performed if an error occurs during the settlement switch valid operation time T11, the period during which the occurrence of an error cannot be notified can be reduced.

(If the reset switch is operated while the settlement switch is being operated)
FIG. 78 shows the timing of the end of the error notification when the settlement switch is turned on during the occurrence of a specific error (during the error notification) and the reset switch is turned on during that operation (in this example, during the settlement switch valid operation time T11). As shown in the figure, when the reset switch is turned on during the settlement switch valid operation time T11, the main control board determines that the reset switch has switched from the off state to the on state, and uses this as a trigger to end the error notification. In this example, the operation of the settlement switch is also invalidated and the settlement process corresponding to that operation is not started. In order to start the settlement process, the settlement switch needs to be operated again. Note that in this example, the time when the reset switch is turned on is during the settlement switch valid operation time T11, but even if the time when the reset switch is turned on is outside the range of the settlement switch valid operation time T11 (the settlement switch maintains the on state), the same process is performed.

In this way, in this example, if the reset switch is turned on while the settlement switch is being operated during an error (during the settlement switch valid operation time T11), the error notification is terminated and the machine is able to return to the normal state (a state in which play can be performed). Therefore, compared to a configuration in which the machine is not able to return to the normal state even if the reset switch is turned on during the settlement switch valid operation time T11, it is possible to increase the period during which the machine can return to a state in which play can be performed, thereby increasing the operating rate of the slot machine. Note that in this example, the operation of the settlement switch is invalidated and settlement processing is not performed, but it is also possible to perform settlement processing. In that case, it is possible to execute the settlement processing smoothly without the settlement switch being operated again.

<Push order navigation effect and GET effect>
In the second type of slot machine, for example, when a push order role is selected during the AT, a push order navigation effect is executed to notify the player of the push order (correct push order) that is advantageous to the player. In addition, when the player operates the stop switch according to the notified correct push order and the push order role is established, a GET effect (also called a "win effect") is executed to show the player that a game medal will be awarded. Below, these push order navigation effects and GET effects will be explained with reference to Figures 79 to 82. Note that the push order navigation effect and the GET effect are controlled by the sub-control board. When the push order navigation effect is executed, push order navigation is also executed by the push order indicator (corresponding to the above-mentioned payout number display lamp 46j) controlled by the main control board.

(When you press the buttons correctly, and when you press the buttons incorrectly)
In the push order navigation effect, a predetermined image (also referred to as a "push order navigation effect image") related to the push order notification is displayed on the image display unit. The display state of this push order navigation effect image changes depending on the stop operation (operation of the stop switch) by the player. An example of the state of the push order navigation effect image is shown in FIG. 79 together with a diagram of the left stop switch SS1, the middle stop switch SS2, and the right stop switch SS3. FIG. 79(A) shows an example of the transition of the push order navigation effect image when the push order is correct (when the first stop operation is performed according to the correct push order), and FIG. 79(B) shows an example of the transition of the push order navigation effect image when the push order is incorrect (when the first stop operation is performed in an order different from the correct push order).

In this example, as shown in Fig. 79 (A) and (B), when a push order role such as a bell minor role is selected in a game during AT, a navigation image NV1 for mainly indicating the correct push order and a navigation background image NH1 for mainly improving the game interest during a stop operation are displayed. The navigation background image NH1 is displayed in a layer (second layer) lower (rear) than the layer (first layer) in which the navigation image NV1 is displayed, and when it is displayed at a position overlapping with the navigation image NV1, it may be hidden behind the navigation image NV1 and partially invisible. The navigation image NV1 in this example indicates the correct push order of "left, center, right", and until the first stop operation is performed, a figure displaying the number 1 in a circular frame (also called the "first stop operation display"), a figure displaying the number 2 in a circular frame (also called the "second stop operation display"), and a figure displaying the number 3 in a circular frame (also called the "third stop operation display") are displayed in this order from the left at the bottom of the image display unit. The first stop operation display is displayed larger than the second and third stop operation displays. In the navigation background image NH1 in this example, three star-shaped figures of large, medium and small sizes are displayed in the first to third stop operation displays until the first stop operation is performed.
The third stop operation display is displayed corresponding to each of the third stop operation displays.

After the push order navigation performance image (navigation image NV1 and navigation background image NH1) is displayed, when the left stop switch SS1 is operated as the first stop operation according to the correct push order as shown in FIG. 79 (A), the display mode of the navigation image NV1 and the navigation background image NH1 changes as follows. First, at the timing when the left stop switch SS1 is operated, the shape of the frame surrounding the number 1 in the first stop operation display of the navigation image NV1 changes from a circle to a jagged star shape. Also, at the same timing, the color of the leftmost star-shaped figure in the navigation background image NH1 changes, it becomes smaller, and it is displayed at an angle. After that, the first stop operation display of the navigation image NV1 gradually becomes smaller and disappears from the image display unit as if fading out, and the leftmost star-shaped figure in the navigation background image NH1 gradually becomes smaller and disappears from the image display unit as if flying away into the distance. At this time, appropriate sound may be output from the speaker according to the change in the mode of the navigation image NV1 and the navigation background image NH1. For example, the sound "bang" may be output when the shape of the frame of the first stop operation display in the navigation image NV1 changes from a circle to a star shape, or the sound "whoosh" may be output when the first stop operation display becomes smaller and the star-shaped figure at the far left of the navigation background image NH1 flies away. Such sounds are also called "push order navigation performance sounds."

On the other hand, after the push order navigation performance image (navigation image NV1 and navigation background image NH1) is displayed, if the first stop operation (operation of the middle stop switch SS2 in this example) is performed in an order different from the correct push order, the navigation image NV1 and navigation background image NH1 change as shown in FIG. 79 (B). First, at the timing when the middle stop switch SS2 is operated, the first stop operation display, the second stop operation display, and the third stop operation display of the navigation image NV1 disappear from the image display unit almost simultaneously. The time until these disappear is shorter than the time from the first stop operation to the disappearance of the first stop operation display when the push order is correct. In contrast, the navigation background image NH1 changes in the same way as when the push order is correct. That is, at the timing of the first stop operation, the color of the leftmost star-shaped figure in the navigation background image NH1 changes, it becomes smaller, and it is displayed diagonally tilted. After that, the leftmost star-shaped figure in the navigation background image NH1 gradually becomes smaller and disappears from the image display unit as if flying away into the distance. At this time, the same push order navigation sound effect as when the button presses are correct may be output, a push order navigation sound effect different from when the button presses are correct may be output, or the push order navigation sound effect may not be output at all.

As described above, in this example, when the push order is correct, a part of the navigation image NV1 (only the stop operation display corresponding to the stop switch that was operated to stop) disappears, whereas when the push order is incorrect, the entire navigation image NV1 disappears at the same time. In this way, the way in which the navigation image NV1 disappears (the effect when it disappears) changes between when the push order is correct and when the push order is incorrect, so that the player can intuitively recognize whether the push order is correct or incorrect. In addition, by simultaneously erasing all of the navigation image NV1 when the push order is incorrect, it is possible to prevent a situation that is of concern when the navigation image NV1 is continued to be displayed even when the push order is incorrect, such as the player misunderstanding the stop operation order after the push order is incorrect, or the player feeling embarrassed when the navigation image NV1 after the push order is incorrectly seen by people around them. In addition, in this example, the time from the stop operation to the disappearance of the navigation image NV1 is set to be shorter when the push order is incorrect than when the push order is correct. In this way, the time it takes for the navigation image NV1 to disappear differs between when the push order is correct and when the push order is incorrect, making it easier for the player to recognize whether the push order is correct or incorrect. Note that, in the case of the above-mentioned sub-switch operation prompt image (an image displaying the letters "PUSH"), it is configured to disappear from the image display unit at a predetermined timing after the sub-switch is operated, but the time it takes for it to disappear is set to be longer when a sub-switch operation failure presentation is performed (also referred to as "sub-switch operation failure") than when a sub-switch operation success presentation is performed (also referred to as "sub-switch operation success"). This is to prevent the player from having difficulty in knowing whether the sub-switch has been operated or not if the sub-switch operation prompt image is erased too quickly when the sub-switch operation is incorrect.

On the other hand, as described above, in this example, the display of the navigation background image NH1 changes in the same manner whether the button is pressed correctly or not, and the timing of the display change is also the same. Therefore, the same image data can be used when the button is pressed correctly and when the button is pressed incorrectly, so that the amount of image data for the navigation background image NH1 can be reduced, which can also lead to a reduction in memory capacity. In addition, by displaying the same navigation background image NH1 as when the button is pressed correctly at the same timing even when the button is pressed incorrectly, it is possible to prevent the player from losing the sense of exhilaration due to a mistake in the button press during the AT, where the player is likely to feel exhilarated. In addition, if the navigation image NV1 is not only completely erased when the button is pressed incorrectly, but the navigation background image NH1 is displayed differently from when the button is pressed correctly, there is a risk that the player will misunderstand the game situation (for example, that the AT is in progress), but this example prevents such a situation from occurring.

(Push order navigation and GET effects)
Figure 80 shows an example of the state of the push order navigation effect image from the first stop operation to the third stop operation. Figure 80 (A) shows an example of the transition of the push order navigation effect image when the push order is correct (when the first stop operation to the third stop operation are performed according to the correct push order), and Figure 80 (B) shows an example of the transition of the push order navigation effect image when the push order is incorrect (when the first stop operation to the third stop operation are performed in an order different from the correct push order).

After the push order navigation performance image (navigation image NV1 and navigation background image NH1) is displayed, as shown in FIG. 80(A), when the left stop switch SS1 is operated as the first stop operation according to the correct push order, the first stop operation display of the navigation image NV1 and the leftmost star-shaped diagram of the navigation background image NH1 disappear from the image display section as described above, and at the same time, the second stop operation display of the navigation image NV1 and the central star-shaped diagram of the navigation background image NH1 are displayed large. After that, when the middle stop switch SS2 is operated as the second stop operation according to the correct push order, the second stop operation display of the navigation image NV1 and the central star-shaped diagram of the navigation background image NH1 disappear from the image display section (the disappearance is the same as in the case of the first stop operation display and the leftmost star-shaped diagram), and at the same time, the third stop operation display of the navigation image NV1 and the rightmost star-shaped diagram of the navigation background image NH1 are displayed large. Furthermore, when the right stop switch SS3 is operated as the third stop operation according to the correct button press sequence, the third stop operation display of the navigation image NV1 and the rightmost star-shaped diagram of the navigation background image NH1 disappear from the image display section (they disappear in the same manner as the first stop operation display and the leftmost star-shaped diagram), and then the GET performance is executed. In this GET performance, for example, an image GT1 displaying the words "GET!!" (also called the "GET performance image") is displayed on the image display section, and the sound "GET" (also called the "GET performance sound") is output from the speaker.

On the other hand, if the push order navigation performance image (navigation image NV1 and navigation background image NH1) is displayed and the first stop operation (operation of the middle stop switch SS2 in this example) is performed in an order different from the correct push order, as shown in FIG. 80(B), the entire navigation image NV1 disappears, and the star-shaped figure in the center of the navigation background image NH1 is displayed large. After that, when the left stop switch SS1 is operated as the second stop operation, the star-shaped figure in the center of the navigation background image NH1 of the navigation image NV1 disappears from the image display section (the disappearance is the same as when the push order is correct), and the star-shaped figure on the rightmost side of the navigation background image NH1 is displayed large. Furthermore, when the right stop switch SS3 is operated as the third stop operation, the star-shaped figure on the rightmost side of the navigation background image NH1 disappears from the image display section (the disappearance is the same as when the push order is correct). Note that if the push order is incorrect, the GET performance (GET performance image GT1 and GET performance sound) is not executed.

(GET effect and backlight effect when the button is pressed correctly)
When the push order is correct, in addition to the GET performance, the back lamps located inside the reels (first
In addition, a back lamp effect is also executed using the left reel RE1, the center reel RE2, and the right reel RE3. FIG. 81 shows a schematic diagram of the left reel RE1, the center reel RE2, and the right reel RE3, and also shows an example of the execution timing of the GET effect and the back lamp effect when the push order is correct.

After the push order navigation performance image (navigation image NV1 and navigation background image NH1) is displayed, as shown in FIG. 81, when the left stop switch SS1 is operated as the first stop operation according to the correct push order, the left reel RE1 stops spinning, and the push order role configuration pattern (in this example, shown as a hexagonal pattern) is displayed in a stopped state in the middle of the left reel RE1. Also, the first stop operation display of the navigation image NV1 and the star-shaped figure at the leftmost side of the navigation background image NH1 disappear from the image display unit as described above. After that, when the middle stop switch SS2 is operated as the second stop operation according to the correct push order, the middle reel RE2 stops spinning due to the second stop operation to the middle stop switch SS2, and the push order role configuration pattern is displayed in a stopped state in the middle of the middle reel RE2. Also, the second stop operation display of the navigation image NV1 and the star-shaped figure in the center of the navigation background image NH1 disappear from the image display unit. Furthermore, when the right stop switch SS3 is operated as the third stop operation according to the correct push order, the right reel RE3 stops spinning and the push order role configuration symbol is displayed in a stopped state in the middle of the right reel RE3. In addition, the third stop operation display of the navigation image NV1 and the star-shaped image at the far right of the navigation background image NH1 disappear from the image display section.

When the navigation image NV1 and the navigation background image NH1 are all gone, the back lamp performance begins. In the illustrated example, the back lamps that illuminate the middle area are turned on and the back lamps that illuminate the upper and lower areas are turned off so that the three push order role configuration patterns lined up in a horizontal row stand out. After the back lamp performance begins, the GET performance image GT1 begins to be displayed on the image display unit. When the GET performance image GT1 is displayed, the mode of the back lamp performance begins to change. In the illustrated example, the area illuminated by the back lamp begins to expand toward the upper and lower sides. After the GET performance image GT1 begins to be displayed, the display mode changes (in the illustrated example, the size of the characters gradually decreases) and the image display unit disappears. In addition, during the period when the display mode of the GET performance image GT1 is changing, the back lamp performance returns to the normal lighting mode that illuminates the area from the upper to lower rows.

Until the navigation image NV1 completely disappears (becomes invisible), the player concentrates on the stop operation while watching the display of the navigation image NV1. Therefore, in this example, as described above, the back lamp effect and the GET effect are executed after the timing when the navigation image NV1 completely disappears, and this allows the player to intuitively recognize that the push order is correct and that a game medal will be awarded in a natural flow without losing the player's concentration. Note that in this example, the back lamp effect starts slightly earlier than the GET effect (the GET effect is the display of an image) and ends first, but this is not limited to this. The start and end timings of the GET effect and the back lamp effect can be set appropriately, such as starting the GET effect first and ending first, or starting the back lamp effect first but ending first.

(Get effect, back lamp effect and credit number display update)
If the button press sequence is correct and the GET effect is executed, naturally, game medals are also awarded. If game medals are awarded by adding credits, the number of credits displayed in the credit number display unit (corresponding to the above-mentioned stored number display lamp 46h, also called the "credit lamp") is also updated. FIG. 82 illustrates the credit number display unit CRL, and shows an example of the execution timing of the GET effect and the back lamp effect, and the display update timing of the credit number. Note that the execution timing of the GET effect and the back lamp effect in FIG. 82 is the same as that shown in FIG. 81.

In the example shown in FIG. 82, the number of game medals awarded is 15 (the maximum number awarded in one game), and the number of credits displayed on the credit number display unit CRL is updated by incrementing by 1 from 30 to 45 depending on the actual timing of awarding of each game medal. As shown, the update of the number of credits on the credit number display unit CRL begins after the navigation image NV1 and the navigation background image NH1 have all disappeared (see FIG. 81), and at a timing when the back lamp effect has started to be executed but the GET effect (display of the GET effect image) has not started. The update of the number of credits on the credit number display unit CRL ends at a predetermined timing within the period when both the GET effect and the back lamp effect are being executed. The GET effect and the back lamp effect end after the update of the number of credits has completely finished.

In this example, when the credit number update in the credit number display unit CRL is completed, the GET effect and the back lamp effect executed in association with the awarding of the game medal are configured to continue. If the GET effect or the back lamp effect ends despite the situation in which the display update of the credit number continues, even if the player who confirmed the end of the GET effect etc. tries to start the next game, the player may not be able to start because the awarding of the game medal has not been completed, which may cause the player to feel strange or the tempo of the game to be disrupted. In this example, the GET effect and the back lamp effect end after the update of the credit number in the credit number display unit CRL (awarding of the game medal) is completed, so that the player who confirmed the end of the GET effect etc. can proceed with the game at a good tempo without feeling strange. Note that, in the above, the back lamp effect in which the reel is illuminated from the inside by the back lamp is described as an example, but other reel illumination effects may be used. For example, there is a reel lighting effect in which the reels are illuminated from the outside by a lighting lamp (also called a "reel window frame lamp") located near the frame of the reel window (corresponding to the display window W described above) on the back side of the front door.

<Control when reel restart occurs due to power outage>
In the slot machine of the second embodiment, when a power interruption occurs during the rotation of the reels, the reels that were rotating when the power interruption occurred are re-spinned after the power is restored. The control contents regarding the reel re-spinning after the power is restored will be described below with reference to Figs. 83 to 85. The slot machine of the second embodiment includes three stepping motors (corresponding to the stepping motors 35a, 35b, and 35c in the first embodiment) that rotate the three reels, respectively, and controls the rotation of the reels by switching the excitation phase of the stepping motors. In addition, the slot machine of the second embodiment includes indexes that are indicators of the rotational positions of the reels, an index sensor (corresponding to the reel sensor in the first embodiment) that detects the indexes, and a reel counter that performs a predetermined count to determine the rotational positions (symbol positions) of the reels, and is configured to reset the reel counter every time the reel sensor detects an index.

First, an overview of reel control will be described with reference to FIG. 83. Here, the stepping motor has four phases (φ0, φ1, φ2, φ3), and is controlled by a 1-2 excitation method (a method of sequentially switching between eight excitation phase steps: φ0, φ0-φ1, φ1, φ1-φ2, φ2, φ2-φ3, φ3, φ3-φ0) during acceleration and constant speed, and is controlled by a deceleration method that excites all phases φ0 to φ3 during deceleration (the configuration and control method of the stepping motor can be changed as appropriate). Also, the excitation phase is switched in an interrupt process (corresponding to the timer interrupt process described above) that is executed at predetermined intervals.

As shown in Fig. 83, when a reel start operation (operation of the start lever) is accepted, this triggers the execution of an acceleration state process (a process in which the reels are rotated while accelerating until a predetermined rotation speed is reached). In the acceleration state process, as shown in the figure, from the start point,
When the number of times the interrupt process is executed (also referred to as the "interrupt count") reaches 100, the excitation phase switching of the first step is performed. Thereafter, when the interrupt count reaches 50, the excitation phase switching of the second step is performed, and further, when the interrupt count reaches 10, 5, and 2, the excitation phase switching of the third, fourth, and fifth steps is performed. Then, when the next interrupt process is executed after the interrupt process in which the excitation phase switching of the fifth step is performed (when the interrupt count is 1), the excitation phase switching of the sixth step is performed, and the acceleration state process (excitation switching from the first step to the sixth step) is completed (the value of the interrupt count, which determines the timing of switching the excitation phase, can be changed as appropriate).

When the acceleration state process is completed, the constant speed state process (processing for rotating the reel at a constant speed) is executed. In the constant speed state process, the excitation phase is switched each time the interrupt process is executed (each time the interrupt count is 1). When the reel stop operation (operation of the stop switch to stop the reel) is accepted during the execution of the constant speed state process, the reel's planned stop position (position for starting the deceleration state process described below) and the pattern to be stopped on the effective line (also called the "planned stop pattern") are determined according to the timing of the acceptance, and the deceleration start process (also called the "slip process") is executed to rotate (slip) the reel at a constant speed until it moves to the planned stop position. Then, when the reel moves to the planned stop position, the deceleration state process (processing for stopping the reel while decelerating) is executed, and the planned stop pattern is stopped on the effective line. In the deceleration state process, all phases φ0 to φ3 are excited while the interrupt process is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 6 times).

Note that during execution of the constant speed state process, a step-out determination is appropriately performed to determine whether or not the stepping motor has lost synchronism (whether or not the reel is rotating poorly). For example, this step-out determination is performed as follows. Here, when the reel is rotating normally, the stepping motor switches the excitation phase by 336 steps to rotate the reel once. In this case, when the reel is in a constant speed state, it advances one step for each interrupt, so if the reel is rotating normally, the reel will rotate once with 336 interrupts. Therefore, the number of interrupts is counted by a reel counter or the like, and when the reel has rotated once (when the index is detected by the index sensor), the count is cleared and the number of interrupts is counted again. In this way, if the index is not detected even when the number of interrupts exceeds 336, it is possible to determine that a step-out (rotation failure) has occurred. Note that if it is determined that a step-out has occurred, the acceleration state process is executed again.

(If a power outage occurs after the stop command is accepted)
Next, the processing procedure when a power failure occurs after a stop operation is accepted will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIG. 84 (A) to (C). Each flowchart describes not only the processing contents but also the state of the slot machine. Here, a case where a power failure occurs after a third stop operation is accepted in a state where the first reel (the reel stopped by the first stop operation) and the second reel (the reel stopped by the second stop operation) are stopped will be described as an example. When a power failure occurs after the first stop operation is accepted, the processing when a power failure occurs after the second stop operation is accepted is similar to the processing when a power failure occurs after the third stop operation is accepted.

As shown in FIG. 84(A), when the constant speed state process is being performed on the third drum (the reel stopped by the third stop operation) (J11), when the third stop operation is accepted (J12), the stop target pattern of the third drum is determined (J13), and the deceleration start process is performed on the third drum (J14). After the deceleration start process is started, if a power cut is detected before the third drum stops (J15), the power cut process is performed (J16). Then, after the power is restored (J17), the re-spin process A is performed on the third drum (J18), and the stop target pattern determined in step J11 is displayed as stopped on the active line. In this example, the re-spin process A is automatically started after the power is restored. In contrast, for example, if a power cut occurs during the deceleration start process (during the slip process), the power cut may be detected as an error, and the error state is released by operating a reset switch after the power is restored, and the re-spin process A may then be started.

In the above re-rotation process A, as shown in FIG. 84 (B), an acceleration state process is executed (J21), and then a constant speed state process is executed (J22). In addition, an out-of-step determination is performed as appropriate while the constant speed state process is being executed. Then, a deceleration start process is executed (J23), and then a deceleration state process is executed (J24). Note that if a power outage is detected before the third stop operation is accepted (during the third constant speed rotation of the barrel), re-rotation process B shown in FIG. 84 (B) is executed. This re-rotation process B differs from re-rotation process A in that after the constant speed state process is executed, a stop operation is accepted (J221), and then a deceleration start process is executed.

In this example, if a power outage occurs after the start of the deceleration start process, the out-of-step determination is performed even during the reel re-spinning after the power is restored. Therefore, compared to when the out-of-step determination is not performed, it is possible to stop the pattern to be stopped before the power outage on the effective line more accurately. The pattern to be stopped on the effective line after the re-spin is not simply a pattern of the same form as the pattern to be stopped before the power outage, but a pattern that is also the same in the arrangement position on the reel. For example, a bell pattern with pattern number 3, a bell pattern with pattern number 8, a bell pattern with pattern number 13, and a bell pattern with pattern number 18 are arranged on one reel, and each bell pattern is a pattern of the same form. In this case, when the pattern to be stopped before the power outage is the bell pattern with pattern number 3, the pattern to be stopped after the re-spin is also the bell pattern with pattern number 3 (see FIG. 3 for the pattern number). In the case where, for example, a watermelon symbol is placed in symbol number 2 adjacent to the bell symbol number 3, and a cherry symbol is placed in symbol number 12 adjacent to the bell symbol number 13, if the symbol to be stopped after the re-spin is set to the bell symbol number 13 even though the bell symbol number 3 was the symbol to be stopped before the power outage, the contents of the nine symbols displayed in the reel window will be different when the bell symbol number 3 stops on an active line and when the bell symbol number 13 stops on an active line. This example makes it possible to prevent such a situation from occurring.

(Differences due to differences in timing of power outage)
As shown in FIG. 84(B), in the slot machine of the second embodiment, when a power interruption occurs after the acceptance of a stop operation, the reel for which a stop operation has been accepted is re-spinned, and the reel for which a stop operation has been accepted is stopped at a predetermined position without accepting a stop operation again. A second stop operation performed on the reel for which a stop operation has been accepted is invalid and cannot be accepted. On the other hand, when a power interruption occurs after the acceptance of a stop operation, as shown in FIG. 84(C), after the reel before the acceptance of the stop operation is re-spinned, the stop operation on the reel before the acceptance of the stop operation is validly accepted. After the re-spin, the stop switch lamp of the stop switch corresponding to the reel for which a stop operation has been accepted is controlled to a state indicating invalid (for example, a light-off state), whereas the stop switch lamp of the stop switch corresponding to the reel before the acceptance of the stop operation is controlled to a lighted state indicating valid (for example, a red light-on state) until the reel is stopped.

A specific example is shown in Figure 85. Here, we assume a situation in which the left stop switch SS1 is operated as the first stop operation to stop the left reel RE1, and then the middle stop switch SS2 is operated as the second stop operation, a power outage occurs while the middle reel RE2 is spinning, and after the power is restored, the middle reel RE2 and right reel RE3 spin again. In this case, the stop switch lamp of the middle stop switch SS2, which has already accepted the second stop operation, is controlled to an off state, and the stop switch lamp of the right stop switch SS3, which has not accepted the third stop operation, is controlled to an on state.

In this way, in this example, the lighting state of the stop switch lamp during the reel re-spinning after the power is restored is configured to be different between when the power outage occurs after the stop operation is accepted and when the power outage occurs before the stop operation is accepted. Therefore, the player can be notified by the lighting state of the stop switch lamp whether the reel that is being re-spinned after the power is restored is a reel for which the stop operation was accepted before the power outage, or a reel for which the stop operation was not accepted before the power outage. Note that the configuration may be such that a predetermined sound effect (also referred to as a "reel spinning sound effect") that gives the player a sense of exhilaration during normal reel rotation that is not a re-spinning operation is output from the speaker. In this case, it is preferable to output the reel spinning sound effect during the re-spinning. By outputting the reel spinning sound effect during the re-spinning, the player can be made to feel a sense of exhilaration during the re-spinning.

(If an error occurs while the reel is re-spinning after power is restored)
It is also assumed that an error occurs during the reel re-spinning after the power is restored. In the slot machine of the second form, when a predetermined error (for example, an error of full game medals in the auxiliary storage) occurs during the reel re-spinning after the power is restored, the error is not immediately notified even if the error is detected, but is notified after the re-spinning reel has stopped. Specifically, for example, when a predetermined error occurs during the execution of the re-spinning process A (see FIG. 84(B)) for a reel for which a stop operation has been accepted, the error is detected, but the error is notified after the reel for which a stop operation has been accepted has stopped. By making it possible to detect errors even during re-spinning, it is possible to reduce the period during which errors cannot be detected. In addition, if an error is notified during the re-spinning of the reel, the player may misunderstand that the error notification is for notifying the reel that it has been re-spinned, but in this example, it is possible to prevent such misunderstanding from occurring.

When an error is reported both using an error indicator controlled by the main control board and an image display unit or speaker controlled by the sub-control board, for example, the error may be reported using the error indicator even while the reel is re-spinning, and the error may be reported using the image display unit or speaker after the re-spinning reel has stopped. Also, if a specified error occurs at a specified timing during execution of re-spin process B (see FIG. 84(C)) for the reel before the stop operation is accepted, an error may be reported immediately after the error is detected. For example, if an error is detected before the stop operation is accepted during re-spin process B, the stop operation may not be accepted effectively and an error may be reported immediately.

(If power is interrupted again while the reels are spinning again after power is restored)
It is also assumed that a power cutoff (also referred to as a "re-power cutoff") may occur again during the re-spinning of the reel after the power is restored. In addition, there are multiple possible timings for the re-power cutoff. For example, the timing for the re-power cutoff may be a time before the index is detected after the re-spinning of the reel starts (also referred to as a "time when the re-spin index is not detected") and a time after the index is detected after the re-spinning of the reel starts (also referred to as a "time after the re-spin index is detected"). In addition, the time after the re-spin index is detected may be divided into a time within a period from the index detection to the start of the deceleration start process (a period during which the rotation position of the reel during the re-spinning is outside the range in which the pattern to be stopped can be pulled onto the activated line) (also referred to as a "time before the deceleration start after the re-spin index is detected") and a time within a period after the index is detected and after the deceleration start process starts (a period during which the rotation position of the reel during the re-spinning is within the range in which the pattern to be stopped can be pulled onto the activated line) (also referred to as a "time after the deceleration start after the re-spin index is detected").

In the slot machine of the second type, even if the second power outage occurs at any time, such as when the re-spin index is not detected, before the start of deceleration after the re-spin index is detected, or after the start of deceleration after the re-spin index is detected, the reel is rotated again (also called "re-spin") after the power is restored from the second power outage until the index is detected, and then the symbols to be stopped are stopped on the pay line. Therefore, even if the power is re-spinned at any time, the symbols to be stopped can be stopped on the pay line based on the detection time of the index in the third spin. Therefore, even if the reel stopped due to the second power outage is moved, it is possible to accurately stop the symbols to be stopped on the pay line by spinning the reel again.

As a modified embodiment, if a power outage occurs again when the re-spin index is not detected, the process is the same as above, but if the power outage occurs again before the start of deceleration after the re-spin index is detected or after the start of deceleration after the re-spin index is detected, the reel may not be rotated a third time. According to such a modified embodiment, if a power outage occurs again when the re-spin index is not detected, the symbols to be stopped can be accurately stopped on the active line based on the detection time of the index in the third spin. Also, if a power outage occurs again after the re-spin index is detected, the deceleration start process (slip process) is already being performed, so there is a fairly high probability that the symbols to be stopped can be stopped on the active line before the reel stops due to the second power outage. Also, since a third spin is not performed, it is possible to move to the next game as soon as the re-spin is restored. On the other hand, if a power outage occurs again before the re-spin index is detected, the deceleration start process is not performed at the time of the second power outage, so there is a low probability that the symbols to be stopped can be stopped on the active line before the reel stops due to the second power outage. However, the fact that the re-spin is not performed again is the same, so the effect of being able to move on to the next game quickly is obtained.

As another modified embodiment, if a power outage occurs again when the re-spin index is not detected, or if the power outage occurs again after deceleration has started after the re-spin index is detected, the process is the same as in the modified embodiment described above. However, if the power outage occurs again before the re-spin index is detected and before deceleration has started, the reels may be rotated again after power is restored from the re-spinning until at least the index is detected, and then the symbol to be stopped may be stopped on the active line. In this way, the same effect as in the modified embodiment described above can be obtained if a power outage occurs again when the re-spin index is not detected, or if the power outage occurs again after deceleration has started after the re-spin index is detected. Also, even if a power outage occurs again before deceleration has started after the re-spin index is detected, the symbol to be stopped may be stopped accurately on the active line.

[Third embodiment]
The slot machine according to the third embodiment (hereinafter also referred to as the "third embodiment slot machine") will be described below with additional reference to FIGS. 86 to 120. The following mainly describes the characteristic parts of the third embodiment slot machine. The characteristic parts described below are not limited to the third embodiment slot machine, and can be combined with other embodiments. The third embodiment slot machine has a basic configuration that is common or similar to the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment described above, and description thereof will be omitted. In addition, each control process such as the role determination process and reel control process described in the slot machine 1 can be applied to the third embodiment slot machine in the same manner or with some changes to the process contents.

The characteristic configuration of the slot machine according to this embodiment will be described below.
<Basic specifications>
(Valid line)
In the slot machine of this embodiment, five winning lines are set: an upper horizontal line, a middle horizontal line, a lower horizontal line, a downward line to the right, and an upward line to the right. When a specified number of medals are inserted, these five winning lines become active lines. The specified number differs depending on the type of game, and is two medals during RB-A game described later, and three medals during other games.

(Pattern arrangement)
In this embodiment, 21 symbols are arranged on each of the reels 3a to 3c as shown in FIG. 86(a) ("left reel", "middle reel", and "right reel" in FIG. 86(a) represent the reels 3a, 3b, and 3c, respectively). The types of symbols arranged on each of the reels 3a to 3c are 10 types, namely, "red seven", "blue seven", "bar", "replay A", "replay B", "star A", "star B", "watermelon", "cherry A", and "cherry B", as shown in FIG. 86(b). The arrows shown in FIG. 86(a) indicate the direction in which the symbols on each reel scroll within the display window W when the reels 3a to 3c are rotating during a game (except during a freeze effect).

(Types of Gaming Roles)
In this embodiment, the symbol combinations that will give the player a special bonus when stopped and displayed on each of the reels 3a to 3c are set as shown in FIG. 87 to FIG. 90. In the slot machine of this embodiment, the special bonuses that will be given include the payout of medals, replay, and bonus play. Such special bonuses are also referred to as special bonuses related to game media. Hereinafter, in this embodiment, a symbol combination that will give medals when aligned on a winning line is called a symbol combination of a small prize, and the fact that the symbol combination of a small prize is aligned on a winning line is called a winning of a small prize. Furthermore, a symbol combination that will allow a replay to be performed when aligned on a winning line is called a replay symbol combination, and the fact that the symbol combination of a replay is aligned on a winning line is called a replay alignment. Furthermore, a symbol combination that will allow a bonus game to be performed when aligned on a winning line is called a bonus symbol combination, and the fact that the symbol combination of a bonus is aligned on a winning line is called a bonus alignment.

There are three types of bonus games: Type 1 BB game (also called "big bonus"), RB game (also called "regular bonus"), and SB game (also called "single bonus"). There are four types of symbol combinations, Type 1 BB01 to BB04, that start Type 1 BB game. The symbol combination for Type 1 BB01 is "Red Seven, Red Seven, Red Seven", the symbol combination for Type 1 BB02 is "Blue Seven, Blue Seven, Blue Seven", the symbol combination for Type 1 BB03 is "Bar, Bar, Bar", and the symbol combination for Type 1 BB04 is "Red Seven, Blue Seven, Red Seven".

When any of these symbol combinations line up on an active line, a 1st type BB game starts from the next game, and RB-B game (1st type special role) is repeatedly executed during the 1st type BB game. As described later, during the RB-B game, a small role is always won in every game, so the RB-B game can be said to be an advantageous game state for the player. The end condition of the RB-B game is met when the number of games in which a small role is won reaches two after the start of the RB-B game, or when two games have been played. However, during the 1st type BB game, when the RB-B game being played ends, a new RB-B game starts from the next game. For this reason, the 1st type BB is also called the "1st type special role continuous operation device". In this way, the RB-B game is repeatedly executed, and when the number of medals paid out during the 1st type BB game exceeds 279, the end condition of the 1st type BB game is met. Here, when the number of medals paid out during Type 1 BB play exceeds 279, even if the above-mentioned conditions for ending the RB-B game have not been met, the RB-B game ends, and Type 1 BB play ends.

The symbol combination that starts an RB-A game is "Red Seven Red Seven Bar," and when this symbol combination lines up on an active line, the RB-A game starts from the next game. The RB-A game is the same first-class special device as the RB-B game, and since a small role is always won in every game during an RB-A game, just like in an RB-B game, it can be said to be an advantageous game state for the player. However, the end condition of an RB-A game is different from that of an RB-B game, and is met when the number of games in which a small role is won reaches 5, or when a 12-game game is played.

The symbol combination that starts the SB game is "Replay B, Blue Seven, Replay B", and when the symbol combination is aligned on the winning line, the normal role game is played only for the next one game. As described later, in the normal role game, the probability of winning a small role is slightly higher than in the normal game, but the number of medals paid out is more likely to be less than the specified number, so it cannot be said to be an advantageous game state for the player. For example, in the case of a gaming machine that does not notify the fact that the SB has been won in a game, it is preferable for the player to operate the stop switch at a timing when the symbol combination that starts the SB game does not stop and display in the normal game. In other words, in the normal game, if the stop switch is operated at a random position, the symbol combination that starts the SB game may stop and display, so that a tense game can be provided even in the normal game. In this embodiment, "normal play" refers to play that is not a type 1 BB game, a type RB-A game, or a game with a normal role, and in which the type 1 BB01-04 and RB condition devices are not operating.

As for the replay symbol combinations, five types of symbol combinations or symbol combination groups are set, namely, replay 01 to 05, as shown in FIG. 87. Of these, the symbol combination group of replay 05 is made up of six symbol combinations. As for the symbol combinations of the minor prizes, 40 types of symbol combinations or symbol combination groups are set, namely, winning 01 to 40, as shown in FIG. 87 to FIG. 90. Also, when winning 01 to 03 wins (the corresponding symbol combinations are aligned on the active line), 10 medals are paid out, so these symbol combinations are also called 10-coin roles. Similarly, the symbol combination of winning 04 is also called 5-coin roles, the symbol combinations of winning 05 to 13, 39, and 40 are called 1-coin roles, the symbol combinations of winning 14 to 23 are called 2-coin roles, the symbol combinations of winning 26 to 37 are called 10-coin roles, and the symbol combination of winning 38 is also called 7-coin roles. The winning symbol combinations of 24 and 25 are called 15-coin combinations during RB-A play, and 10-coin combinations during RB-B play.

<Function block of main control means>
<Means of determining roles>
In this embodiment, the role determination process executed by the means corresponding to the role determination means 132 shown in Fig. 9 will be described. First, referring to Fig. 91, each condition device number in this embodiment and the type of the condition device corresponding thereto will be described. Fig. 91(a) shows the correspondence between the bonus condition device number and the bonus condition device, and the symbol combinations corresponding to each bonus condition device. Also, Fig. 91(b) shows the correspondence between the winning replay condition device number and the condition device related to replay or the condition device related to winning, and the symbol combinations corresponding to each of the condition devices related to replay and the condition device related to winning.

As shown in FIG. 91(a), each bonus condition device in this embodiment is assigned a bonus condition device number, and bonus condition device number 0 does not correspond to any bonus condition device. Bonus condition device number 1 is assigned to the type 1 BB-A condition device, and this condition device is associated with the symbol combination of type 1 BB01. Bonus condition device number 2 is assigned to the type 1 BB-B condition device, and this condition device is associated with the symbol combination of type 1 BB02. Bonus condition device number 3 is assigned to the type 1 BB-C condition device, and this condition device is associated with the symbol combination of type 1 BB03. Bonus condition device number 4 is assigned to the type 1 BB-D condition device, and this condition device is associated with the symbol combination of type 1 BB04.

In addition, the RB condition device is assigned the bonus condition device number 5, and the RB symbol combination is associated with this condition device. The SB condition device is assigned the bonus condition device number 6.
The symbol combination of 1 type BB01 to 1 type BB04, RB and SB are as shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 91(b), the winning replay condition devices are assigned winning replay condition device numbers 0 to 27. The winning replay condition device number 0 indicates that no winning condition device or replay condition device is associated with the device. The condition devices of replay-A to replay-F are assigned winning replay condition device numbers 1 to 6, respectively. The condition devices of replay-A to replay-F are also associated with a group of replay-related symbol combinations shown in the "Constituent Symbol Combination" column. The condition devices of win-A1 to A3 are assigned winning replay condition device numbers 7 to 9, respectively. The condition devices of win-B to S are assigned winning replay condition device numbers 10 to 27, respectively. In addition, the condition devices for winning-A1 to A3 and winning-B to S are each associated with a winning symbol combination or symbol combination group shown in the "Constituent Symbol Combination" column.

(Observation probability of winning the lottery)
Next, the winning probability of the role drawing executed in the role determination process of this embodiment will be described with reference to the number setting tables shown in Figures 92 and 93. The number setting tables shown in Figures 92 and 93 show the winning number assigned to each winning number. In this embodiment, the random number generator corresponding to the random number generator 66 shown in Figure 2 is capable of generating pseudo-random numbers from 0 to 65535 (integer values), so there are 65536 possible random value values for the pseudo-random numbers. Therefore, the winning probability is calculated by dividing the winning number assigned to each winning number shown in the number setting tables in Figures 92 and 93 by 65536.

The type of winning number to be drawn in the role drawing and its probability of winning vary depending on the RT state, the type of game being played, and the setting value. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 92, the winning probability of the winning number α+1 (α is an integer, for example, 0) to which the condition device number of replay-A is linked varies depending on the RT state. Also, as shown in FIG. 92 and FIG. 93, the winning probability of the winning number to which the condition device number of the bonus or the condition device number of the small role is linked (for example, α+2 to 6, α+8, α+51, α+52, etc.) varies depending on the setting value. Also, as shown in FIG. 92(a) to (e), the type of winning number to be drawn varies depending on whether the game currently being played is a normal game, a game with a normal role, a game inside a type 1 BB or RB, a type 1 BB game, or a RB-A game. In this embodiment, three types of RT states are set: "Non-RT", "RT1", and "Type 1 BB activated/RB-A activated", and transitions between these RT states are controlled by means corresponding to the RT state control means 112 shown in FIG. 9 (details will be described later). In addition, four set values are set, from "1" to "4", and as shown in FIG. 93, the higher the set value, the higher the probability of winning the winning number (such as α+51) linked to the bonus condition device number.

93 is a number setting table of winning numbers linked to the bonus condition device number, and in this embodiment, the bonus role drawing is performed only when the RT state is non-RT, and is not performed inside the 1st type BB or RB, and during the 1st type BB game or RB-A game. In addition, there are winning numbers (α+19, α+29, α+40, α+50, α+52, α+60) linked only to the bonus condition device number, and winning numbers linked to the bonus condition device number and the replay or small role condition device number. When a winning number linked to both the bonus condition device number and the replay or small role condition device number is determined by the role drawing, the bonus condition device number and the replay or small role condition device number linked to the determined winning number are stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM of the main control means 100. For example, if the winning number α+20 is determined by the draw, the bonus condition device number 1 (see Figure 91(a)) is stored in the memory area in the RAM of the main control means 100 where bonus condition device numbers are stored, and the winning re-play condition device number 5 (see Figure 91(b)) is stored in the memory area in the RAM of the main control means 100 where winning re-play condition device numbers are stored.

Figure 92 is a table showing the number of places for the draw for small roles and replay roles, and the types of winning numbers that are the subject of the draw are different for non-RT state (normal), non-RT state (SB in operation), RT1, RB-A in operation, and RB-B in operation. Here, non-RT state (normal) refers to a state in which the RT state is non-RT and normal role play is not being performed. Also, non-RT state (SB in operation) refers to a state in which the RT state is non-RT and normal role play is being performed. RB-A in operation refers to a state in which RB-A play is being performed, and RB-B in operation refers to a state in which RB-B play is being performed (i.e., type 1 BB play is being performed).

Comparing the number table for the non-RT state (normal) (Fig. 93(a)) and the number table for the non-RT state (SB in operation) (Fig. 93(b)), the total number of places assigned to the condition devices related to winning is one more in the non-RT state (SB in operation). However, the number of winning places for the winning number α+9 (linked to the condition device number of winning -J) is greater than the number of winning places for the winning number α+10 (linked to the condition device number of winning -K). Therefore, since there is a high possibility that fewer medals than the specified number will be paid out (the condition device of winning -J is associated with a pattern combination of one-coin roles), playing with a normal role is not advantageous for the player. Also, in RT1, when the winning number shown in Fig. 93 is determined by the role drawing, only the winning replay condition device number linked to that winning number is stored in RAM, and the bonus condition device number is not stored in RAM. Also, in RT1, as shown in FIG. 93(c), the probability of winning the winning number linked to the prize replay condition device number of the minor role is the same as in the non-RT state (normal state), but the probability of winning the winning number linked to the prize replay condition device number of the replay entry is higher than in the non-RT state (normal state). In RB-B game executed during the first type BB game, as shown in FIG. 93(d), the winning number linked to one of the condition device numbers of prize-L to prize-Q is determined, and in RB-A game, as shown in FIG. 93(e), the winning number linked to the condition device number of prize-R or prize-S is determined, so it can be said that when these games are being played, the game state is advantageous to the player.

<Performance group number determination means and condition device group number determination means>
Next, in this embodiment, the performance group number and the condition device group number determined by the means corresponding to the performance group number determination means 133 and the condition device group number determination means 140 shown in Fig. 9 will be described with reference to Fig. 94. First, as shown in Fig. 94(a), if the winning replay condition device number 0 is linked to the winning number determined by the role drawing, the performance group number will be 0. Also, if any of the winning replay condition device numbers 1 to 4 is linked to the determined winning number, the performance group number will be 1, and if the winning replay condition device number 5 or 6 is linked, the performance group number will be 2.

Furthermore, if the winning number determined by the role drawing is linked to any of the winning replay condition device numbers 7 to 9, the performance group number will be 3. Also, if the winning number determined by the role drawing is linked to any of the winning replay condition device numbers 10 to 27, as shown in Figure 94 (a), the performance group number will be one of the performance group numbers 3 to 21 depending on the winning replay condition device number.

In this embodiment, the condition device group number corresponds to the bonus condition device number. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 94(b), if the bonus condition device number 0 or 6 is linked to the winning number determined by the role drawing, the condition device group number is 0. Also, if any of the bonus condition device numbers 1 to 4 is linked to the winning number determined by the role drawing, the condition device group number is 1. Furthermore, if the bonus condition device number 5 is linked to the winning number determined by the role drawing, the condition device group number is 2. Although details will be described later, in this embodiment, when the winning number corresponding to the condition device numbers of 1 type BB-A to D and RB is determined by the role drawing, the main game state will transition from the normal zone to the advantageous zone, and the above-mentioned condition device group number can be said to be a summary of the main game state to which the transition will be made within the advantageous zone at that time.

<RT state control means>
Next, in this embodiment, the transition control of the RT state performed by the means corresponding to the RT state control means 112 shown in FIG. 9 will be described with reference to FIG. 95. When the operation for changing the above-mentioned set value is performed, a predetermined storage area of the RAM 63 of the main control means 100 is cleared, and the RT state becomes "non-RT" (see arrow A). When a winning number linked to any of the bonus condition device numbers (1 to 4) of 1 type BB-A to D is determined in "non-RT", the state becomes inside 1 type BB, or when a winning number linked to the bonus condition device number 5 of RB is determined, the state becomes inside RB, and the RT state transitions to "RT1" (see arrow B). Then, in "RT1", when a symbol combination corresponding to 1 type BB is aligned on an active line in 1 type BB, or when a symbol combination corresponding to RB is aligned on an active line in RB, the RT state transitions to "1 type BB operation time/RB-A operation time" (see arrow C). When "Type 1 BB is activated/RB-A is activated," when the end condition for Type 1 BB play is met, or when the end condition for RB-A play is met, the RT state will transition to "non-RT" before the next game begins (see arrow D).

<Main Game State Control Means>
Next, in this embodiment, the transition control of the game mode performed by the main game state control means corresponding to the game mode control means 116 shown in FIG. 9 will be described. In the following description, the game mode is called the main game state, and each main game state is represented by the main game state number MS. The main game states in this embodiment are set to five types, namely, "normal zone" (MS = 0), "high probability" (MS = 1), "inside RB/in operation of RB" (MS = 2), "inside 1st type BB/in operation of 1st type BB" (MS = 3), and "in AT" (MS = 4). Here, "high probability", "inside RB/in operation of RB", "inside 1st type BB/in operation of 1st type BB" and "in AT" belong to the advantageous zone. In the transition control of these main game states, in addition to the above-mentioned performance group number and condition device group number, various variables related to the game state are referenced. Therefore, referring to FIG. 96, the main variables related to the game state in this embodiment will be described. The various variables described below are stored in respective designated memory areas in the RAM 63 of the main control means 100.

(Variable type)
In FIG. 96, the main game state number is a variable indicating the value (any of 0 to 4) of the main game state number MS corresponding to the main game state currently in the game. The performance group number is a variable indicating the value (any of 0 to 21) of the performance group number (see FIG. 94(a)) determined according to the winning replay condition device number linked to the winning number determined by the role drawing. The condition device group number is a variable indicating the value (any of 0 to 2) of the condition device group number (see FIG. 94(b)) determined according to the bonus condition device number linked to the winning number determined by the role drawing. The instruction number is a number for managing the operation sequence of the stop switches 26a, 26b, and 26c and the notification content of the pattern to be pressed (the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch), and is set to a number from 0 to 6 according to the notification content (details will be described later).

The favorable zone clear counter is a counter that manages the number of games that have been played consecutively in the favorable zone, and the counter value has a numerical range of 0 to 1500. That is, it is set to 1500 when moving from the normal zone to the favorable zone, and is updated (e.g., subtracted by 1) each time a game is played in the favorable zone. The MY counter is also called the net increase counter, and is a counter that manages the difference (difference) between the number of medals inserted during the favorable zone and the number of medals paid out. The numerical range of the count value is 0 to 2412, and the counter is set to 0 when moving from the normal zone to the favorable zone, and thereafter the count value is updated according to the number of medals inserted and paid out in each game.

In addition, during the favorable zone, if the updated MY counter value (difference in number) based on the current MY counter value, the number of medals inserted for the game, and the number of medals paid out for the game falls below "0", the MY counter is set to store "0". For example, if the current MY counter value is 2, the number of medals inserted for the game is 3, and the number of medals paid out for the game is 0, then 2-3+0<0, and so the MY counter value is set to store 0.

The AT play count counter is a counter for managing the remaining number of games (hereinafter referred to as the "AT play count") that can be played "in AT" (MS = 4), and the numerical range of the count value is set to 0 to 1500. When the main game state transitions to "in AT", an initial value (e.g. 30) is set in the AT play count counter, and the count value is updated (e.g. subtracted by 1) each time a game is played "in AT". In addition, when various additional draws described below are performed, the value of the number of games determined by the additional draw is added to the count value. In addition, during play "in AT", the player is presented as if he is playing two types of AT games, a first AT game and a second AT game (details will be described later).

The provisional addition counter is a counter for managing the number of added plays to be notified to the player when the start lever 25 is operated when the count value of the AT play count counter is added (added). The numerical range of the count value of this counter is set to 0 to 50. The high probability play count counter is a counter for managing the remaining number of plays (hereinafter referred to as the "high probability play number") in which a "high probability" (MS=1) play can be played, and the numerical range of the count value is set to 0 to 255. When the player wins the high probability transition lottery described below, a predetermined value (e.g. 30) is added to the high probability play count counter, and the count value is updated (e.g. decremented by 1) each time a "high probability" play is played.

The high probability flag is a flag for determining whether the main game state is in "high probability" or not, and when it is "0", it indicates that it is not in "high probability" and when it is "1", it indicates that it is in "high probability". The AT flag is a flag for determining whether the main game state is in "AT" or not, and when it is "0", it indicates that it is not in "AT" and when it is "1", it indicates that it is in "AT". The 1-piece role counter is a counter for counting the number of times a 1-piece role is won during RB-A play, and the numerical range of the count value is 0 to 8. The loop rate number is a number for managing the probability (hereinafter referred to as "loop rate") that a new 1st AT game will start when the above-mentioned 1st AT game is once ended, and the numerical range is set to 0 to 2. In other words, in this embodiment, three types of loop rates are set in advance.

The standby effect number is a number for managing the freeze effect that is executed when all reels come to a stop, and the numerical range is set to 0 to 2. Here, if a freeze is not executed, the standby effect number is "0". Also, if both the all stop freeze 1 drawing and the all stop freeze 2 drawing (described later) are won in non-RT or RT1, the standby effect number is "1". Here, the all stop freeze 1 drawing is executed when the winning number α+27 (1st class BB-A+winning-I. See FIG. 93) or α+47 (1st class BB-C+winning-H) is determined in the role drawing. Also, the all stop freeze 2 drawing is executed when the all stop freeze 1 drawing is won.

When the count value of the AT play count counter is 1 or more, if a winning number (see FIG. 93) that is not linked to a winning replay condition device number of Winning-B to E or Replay-B to D is determined by the role drawing among the winning numbers corresponding to the bonus condition device number by the role drawing, the standby performance number will be "2." Here, the winning numbers that are not linked to a winning replay condition device number of Winning-B to E or Replay-B to D are α+21 to α+23, α+30, α+32 to α+34, α+41 to α+44, α+53 to α+55, and α+60, as shown in FIG. 93.

The freeze effect executed when the standby effect number is "2" has a longer freeze time than the freeze effect executed when the standby effect number is "1". The ED flag is a flag for determining whether or not the main game state has transitioned to an ending state when the main game state is in an advantageous zone, and is "0" when the state has not transitioned to an ending state, and is "1" when the state has transitioned to an ending state. Here, the transition to the ending state occurs when the value of the advantageous zone clear counter mentioned above exceeds a predetermined value (e.g., 1250), or when the value of the MY counter exceeds a specific value (e.g., 2200).

The bell spill counter is a counter that counts the number of times that when one of the winning numbers α+2 to α+4 (see Figures 92 (a) and (c)) is determined by the winning lottery after the transition to the ending state, the symbol combination (any of winning 01 to 03) associated with the winning replay condition device number linked to the determined winning number does not line up on an active line (i.e., the notified push order is ignored), and the numerical range of the count value is set to 0 to 241. The internal play count counter is a counter that counts the number of plays performed inside a type 1 BB or RB, and the numerical range of the count value is set to 0 to 4.

(Conditions for transition to main game state)
As described above, the transition control of the main game state is performed based on the values of the various variables described above and the performance group number and condition device group number determined according to the winning number determined by the role drawing. Next, referring to FIG. 97, each transition condition of the main game state will be described. First, when the main game state is in the "normal section", if the condition device group number becomes "0" according to the winning number determined by the role drawing (the bonus condition device number becomes "0" or "6" (see FIG. 94 (b))) and the performance group number becomes "7" (the winning replay condition device number becomes "15" (see FIG. 94 (a))), the state transitions to "high probability" (see arrow A). In the "high probability", when the condition device group number becomes "0" according to the winning number determined by the role drawing and the value of the high probability game number counter becomes "0", the state transitions to the "normal section" (see arrow E).

In addition, in the "normal section", if the condition device group number becomes "2" (bonus condition device number becomes "5") according to the winning number determined by the role drawing, it will transition to "RB inside/RB operating" (see arrow I), and if the condition device group number becomes "1" (bonus condition device number becomes any of "1" to "4"), it will transition to "Type 1 BB inside/Type 1 BB operating" (see arrow C). Similarly, in the "high probability" section, if the condition device group number becomes "2" according to the winning number determined by the role drawing, it will transition to "RB inside/RB operating" (see arrow E), and if the condition device group number becomes "1" (Type 1 BB-A to D condition devices are activated), it will transition to "Type 1 BB inside/Type 1 BB operating" (see arrow F).

When RB-A play is started while "inside RB/RB in operation", if the RB-A play end condition is met afterwards and the AT play count counter value is "0", it will transition to the "normal section" (see arrow K). On the other hand, when RB-A play is started while "inside RB/RB in operation", if the RB-A play end condition is met afterwards and the AT play count counter value is "1" or greater, it will transition to "in AT" (see arrow K).

In addition, if a type 1 BB game is started while "inside type 1 BB/type 1 BB in operation" and the end condition of the type 1 BB game is subsequently met and the value of the AT game number counter is "0", the game will transition to the "normal section" (see arrow K). In contrast, if a type 1 BB game is started while "inside type 1 BB/type 1 BB in operation" and the end condition of the type 1 BB game is subsequently met and the value of the AT game number counter is "1" or greater, the game will transition to "in AT" (see arrow K).

When "AT" is in progress, if the condition device group number becomes "2" according to the winning number determined by the role drawing, it will transition to "RB in progress/RB in operation" (see arrow 'Shi'), and if the condition device group number becomes "1" (Type 1 BB-A to BB-D condition devices are activated), it will transition to "Type 1 BB in progress/Type 1 BB in operation" (see arrow 'S'). Also, when the condition device group number becomes "0" according to the winning number determined by the role drawing and the value of the AT game count counter becomes "0", it will transition to the "normal section" (see arrow 'Sa'). Furthermore, when the value of the ED flag becomes "1" and the value of the MY counter plus the value of the bell spill counter multiplied by 10 exceeds 2400, it will also transition to the "normal section" (see arrow 'Se').

In addition, in the "High Probability", "Inside RB/RB in operation", "Inside Type 1 BB/Type 1 BB in operation" and "During AT" (i.e. while in the favorable zone), when the value of the favorable zone counter becomes "0" or the value of the MY counter exceeds 2400, the main game state will transition to the "Normal Zone" (see arrow S).

(Type of drawing executed in each main gaming state)
Next, referring to FIG. 98, the types of drawings executed in each main game state will be described. First, the drawings executed in the "normal section" (MS=0) and "high probability" (MS=1) include the all stop freeze 1 drawing, the all stop freeze 2 drawing, the special first AT game drawing, and the special first AT game additional drawing. As described above, the all stop freeze 1 drawing and the all stop freeze 2 drawing are executed when the winning number is determined to be α+27 or α+47 by the role drawing triggered by the operation of the start lever 25. In detail, first the all stop freeze 1 drawing (the winning probability is about 98%) is executed, and if it is a winning number, the all stop freeze 2 drawing (the winning probability is about 9.8%) is executed.

The special first AT game lottery is a lottery that determines whether or not to transition to the special first AT game after the bonus game ends. In normal first AT game, the first AT game ends and transitions to the second AT game when a predetermined number of games have been played (the number of games may be added by a lottery, as described below), but in special first AT game, even if the predetermined number of games have been played, there is a possibility that a new first AT game will start according to the loop rate described above. The special first AT game lottery is executed according to the winning number determined by the role lottery executed in response to the operation of the start lever 25. The special first AT game additional lottery is executed when the special first AT game lottery is won, and the above-mentioned loop rate is determined by the lottery.

Next, there is a high probability transition lottery in the lottery executed in the "normal section" (MS = 0), "high probability" (MS = 1), and "AT" (MS = 4). The high probability transition lottery is executed by pressing the start lever 2
This is executed according to the winning number determined by the lottery performed by the operation of 5. When the high probability transition lottery is won, a predetermined value is added to the high probability play number counter shown in FIG.

Next, the drawings executed in the "normal zone" (MS = 0), "high probability" (MS = 1), "inside RB/during RB play" (MS = 2) and "during AT" (MS = 4) include the first AT game add-on drawing, the loop rate drawing and the loop drawing. The first AT game add-on drawing is a drawing to select one from a number of pre-determined numbers of add-on games. The loop rate drawing is a drawing to select one from a number of pre-determined loop rates. The loop drawing is a drawing to determine whether or not to start a new first AT game based on the loop rate drawing described above. These drawings are executed when a predetermined winning number is determined by a role drawing triggered by the operation of the start lever 25 and a predetermined symbol combination is lined up in the game.

Next, among the drawings that are executed "inside RB/while playing RB" (MS=2) and "inside 1BB/while playing 1BB" (MS=3), there is an inside instruction drawing. This drawing is for deciding whether or not to notify the operation order of the stop switches 26a-26c (i.e., push order navigation) when inside RB or inside 1BB, and is executed according to the winning number determined by the role drawing that is triggered by the operation of the start lever 25.

Next, the drawings that are executed "inside 1BB/during 1BB play" (MS=3) include the second AT game add-on drawing, the 3-time body add-on 1 drawing, the 3-time body add-on 2 drawing, and the 3-time body add-on 3 drawing. These drawings are executed when a specific symbol combination is completed when all reels have stopped. The second AT game add-on drawing is a drawing to select one from a number of pre-determined add-on play numbers. The 3-time body add-on 1 drawing, the 3-time body add-on 2 drawing, and the 3-time body add-on 3 drawing will be described in detail later, but they are executed depending on how many of the three reels have stopped at a predetermined position (in other words, the eye-pressing was successful) when a predetermined winning number is determined by the role drawing.

Specifically, when the eye-pressing is successful for one reel, only the 3-times body-added 1 draw is executed. When the eye-pressing is successful for two reels, the 3-times body-added 1 draw and the 3-times body-added 2 draw are executed. When the eye-pressing is successful for all reels, the 3-times body-added 1 draw, the 3-times body-added 2 draw, and the 3-times body-added 3 draw are executed. These draws determine the value to be added to the number of games played in the second AT game, and the 3-times body-added 2 draw is more likely to result in a larger number of games being added than the 3-times body-added 1 draw. Also, the 3-times body-added 3 draw is more likely to result in a larger number of games being added than the 3-times body-added 2 draw.

<Method of controlling the pressing order>
In this embodiment, the contents notified by the means corresponding to the push order management means 139 shown in FIG. 9 will be described with reference to FIG. 99. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 99(a), there are five types of instruction contents A1 to A5 notified to the player by both the payout number display lamp 46j (instruction monitor) and the image display device 11. Also, as shown in FIG. 99(b), there are nine types of instruction contents B1 to B9 notified to the player by only the image display device 11. When the instruction contents are notified using the instruction monitor, an instruction number (0 to 5) is displayed on the instruction monitor. Here, instruction number 0 is displayed when the push order is not notified.

The instruction content A1 notifies the "red seven" symbol as the symbol to be targeted (hereinafter referred to as the "target symbol"), and displays "=1" as the instruction number 1 on the payout number display lamp 46j. At this time, the message "Aim for the red seven" is displayed on the display screen 11a of the image display device 11. The instruction content A2 notifies the "blue seven" symbol as the target symbol, and displays "=2" as the instruction number 2 on the payout number display lamp 46j. At this time, the message "Aim for the blue seven" is displayed on the display screen 11a. The instruction content A3 notifies the "bar" symbol as the target symbol, and displays "=3" as the instruction number 3 on the payout number display lamp 46j. At this time, the message "Aim for the blue seven" is displayed on the display screen 11a.

Instruction content A4 notifies the user to press the "Star A" symbol, which is symbol number 13 on center reel 3b, into the middle of display window W as the target symbol. In this case, the payout number display lamp 46j displays "=4" as instruction number 4. At this time, the display screen 11a displays the message "Press (Replay, ☆, ☆) on the middle reel!".

Instruction content A5 notifies the player to press the "Star A" symbol with symbol number 14 on the left reel 3a to the middle of the display window W, press the "Star B" symbol with symbol number 12 on the middle reel b to the middle of the display window W, and press the "Cherry B" symbol with symbol number 0 on the right reel c to the middle of the display window W. In this case, the payout number display lamp 46j displays "=5" as instruction number 5. At this time, the display screen 11a displays the message "Precisely press (☆, ☆, blue seven) on the left reel, (☆, ☆, bar) on the middle reel, and (Replay A, Cherry B, red seven) on the right reel!".

Instruction B1 notifies the user of the "red seven" symbol as the target symbol, and when this notification is made, the display screen 11a displays the message "Aim for the red seven." Instruction B2 notifies the user of the "blue seven" symbol as the target symbol, and when this notification is made, the display screen 11a displays the message "Aim for the blue seven." Instruction B3 notifies the user of the "bar" symbol as the target symbol, and when this notification is made, the display screen 11a displays the message "Aim for the bar."

Instructions B4 to B9 notify the operation sequence of the stop switches 26a to 26c. Instruction B4 notifies the operation sequence of left → center → right, and the character string "1, 2, 3" is displayed on the display screen 11a. Instruction B5 notifies the operation sequence of left → right → center, and the character string "1, 3, 2" is displayed on the display screen 11a. Instruction B6 notifies the operation sequence of center → left → right, and the character string "2, 1, 3" is displayed on the display screen 11a. Instruction B7 notifies the operation sequence of right → left → center, and the character string "3, 1, 2" is displayed on the display screen 11a. Instruction B8 notifies the operation sequence of center → right → left, and the character string "2, 3, 1" is displayed on the display screen 11a. Instruction content B9 notifies the user of the operation order of right → center → left, and the character string "3, 2, 1" is displayed on the display screen 11a.

<Pattern Position Detection Means>
In this embodiment, the game progress management means 130 shown in Fig. 9 further includes a symbol position detection means. This symbol position detection means detects the symbol number and step number at a predetermined detection position when the player's operation (stop operation) on the stop switches 26a to 26c is accepted. Here, in this embodiment, the detection position is a position shifted downward by an angle equivalent to one step of the stepping motor from the boundary between the lower and middle rows of the display window W.

Each of the stepping motors in this embodiment corresponding to the stepping motors 35a, 35b, and 35c shown in Figure 2 is a four-phase stepping motor, and when these stepping motors are driven by a predetermined excitation method (for example, 1-2 phase excitation), the number of steps per rotation is 504 (the rotation angle of one step is about 0.71 degrees). Therefore, in this embodiment, since there are 21 symbols on one reel, the number of steps per symbol is 504/21=24.

The stepping motor can detect one rotation by, for example, a reel sensor installed corresponding to each of the reels 3a, 3b, and 3c detecting an index (detection piece) provided on each of the reels 3a, 3b, and 3c. In addition, to rotate and drive each stepping motor, a timer interrupt process is used to switch the phase to be excited among the four phases (φ0, φ1, φ2, φ3). Therefore, the number of steps the stepping motor has rotated can be counted based on the number of times the timer interrupt process is executed. For example, if a stepping motor that rotates once in 504 steps is driven and controlled by a timer interrupt process executed every 1.49 milliseconds, the rotation speed of the reel when it reaches a constant speed (when the reel is driven at a constant speed) will be approximately 79.90 rotations per minute (79.90 rpm).

When the reels are driven to rotate by a stepping motor with 504 steps per rotation, since each reel has 21 symbols (see FIG. 86), 24 timer interrupt processes are executed to rotate the reels by one symbol. In this embodiment, the main control means 100 determines the position of the symbol based on the count values of the 1 symbol counter, which counts the number of steps for one symbol, and the symbol number counter, which counts the symbol number. For example, when the reel 3 rotates at a constant speed, as shown in FIG. 100(a), the center position (step 12) in the symbol area of symbol number 0 coincides with the center position C in the middle of the display window W. Here, the reference numbers of the reels shown in the figure do not distinguish between the left reel, the center reel, and the right reel, so the notations a to c that are added to the reference number 3 are omitted.

At this time, the value of the symbol number counter detected at the aforementioned detection position (a position shifted one step downstream from the boundary between the middle and lower sections of the display window W) becomes "20", which indicates the symbol number in the lower section of the display window W, and the value of the 1 symbol counter becomes "1". In this state, as shown in FIG. 100(b), when the reel 3 rotates one step, the value of the 1 symbol counter is subtracted by one and becomes "0" for a moment, but is immediately set to a value of "24". At this time, the value of the symbol number counter is updated from "20" to "0". Then, each time the reel 3 rotates one step, the value of the 1 symbol counter is subtracted by one, and as soon as the value becomes "0", the value of "24" is set, and the value of the symbol number counter is updated from "0" to "1".

The symbol position detection means of this embodiment detects the value of the symbol number counter and the value of the 1 symbol counter at the detection position at the time when the operation of the stop switch corresponding to the reel 3 is accepted. As a result, the main control means 100 determines the symbol number and the position of the symbol area in the lower row of the display window W based on each count value detected by the symbol position detection means.

(Vita Push Range)
Next, the timing at which the target symbol (eye-pressing symbol) can be stopped at the lower level of the display window W will be described with reference to Figs. 100(b) to (d). In these figures, the arrow indicates the rotation direction of the reel 3. In this embodiment, the earliest stop operation timing at which the symbol with symbol number 0 can be stopped at the lower level of the display window W by Vita-pressing is when the stop switch is operated when the value of the symbol number counter at the detection position is "0" and the value of the 1 symbol counter is "24", as shown in Fig. 100(b). Even if the symbol with symbol number 0 is stopped and displayed at the lower level due to the operation of the stop switch being operated earlier than this timing (for example, when the symbol position detection means detects the symbol number 20 when the stop operation is accepted), in this embodiment, the symbol with symbol number 0 is treated as having been stopped at the lower level by one or more frames of pull-in control rather than Vita-pressing.

The latest operation timing for stopping the symbol number 0 at the lower row of the display window W by a vita-push is when the stop switch is operated when the value of the symbol number counter at the detection position is "0" and the value of the 1 symbol counter is "5", as shown in FIG. 100(c). Here, in this embodiment, when stopping the symbol number 0 at the lower row, when the value of the 1 symbol counter becomes "5", the stepping motor is excited in all phases to start braking the reel. As a result, the reel continues to rotate by inertia, but it will eventually stop when the position of the step 12 of the symbol number 0 reaches approximately the center position C in the lower row of the display window W. On the other hand, if the value of the 1 symbol counter is "4" or less when the stop switch is operated, the reel control means of this embodiment does not perform braking by exciting all phases, so that the symbols from symbol number 1 onwards will stop at the lower row of the display window W. From the above, if the value of the 1 symbol counter is "5" when the stop switch is operated, it can be said that the timing of the stop operation is the latest (in other words, the most accurate) perfect push.

In this way, in this embodiment, if the value of the symbol number counter detected by the symbol position detection means is "0" when the stop switch is operated, and the value of the 1 symbol counter is within the range of "24" to "5", then when reel 3 stops in the state shown in Figure 100(d), it is treated as if the symbol with symbol number 0 has been pressed into the lower row of the display window W.

In the above example, the determination of vita-oshi was made at the lower position of the display window W, but the determination of vita-oshi may be made at the middle or upper position of the display window W. For example, if the value of the symbol number counter detected by the symbol position detection means is "0" and the value of the 1 symbol counter is within the range of "24" to "5", the symbol with symbol number 1 may be treated as having been vita-oshied in the middle of the display window W, or the symbol with symbol number 2 may be treated as having been vita-oshied in the upper position of the display window W.

The detection position is not limited to a position shifted one step downstream from the boundary between the middle and lower sections of the display window W, and may be any position. For example, if the center position of the lower section of the display window W is set as the detection position, when the stop switch is operated within the range from when the symbol number counter value is "20" and the 1 symbol counter value is "13" to when the symbol number counter value is "0" and the 1 symbol counter value is "16", the symbol with symbol number 0 may be treated as having been pressed into the lower section of the display window W.

In this embodiment, when the operation of the stop switch is accepted, the following information is transmitted from the main control means 100 to the sub-control means 200: (a) information that allows the user to grasp the symbol number of the symbol that was located in the lower section of the display window W when the stop switch was operated (e.g., the count value of the symbol number counter detected by the symbol position detection means); (b) information that allows the user to grasp the position of that symbol in the lower section of the display window W (e.g., the count value of the 1 symbol counter detected by the symbol position detection means); and (c) information that allows the user to grasp the symbol number of the symbol that will ultimately be stopped and displayed in the lower section of the display window W (hereinafter, also referred to as "stop operation information" in this embodiment). This stop operation information may be transmitted from the main control means 100 to the sub-control means 200 by, for example, a left reel stop acceptance command, a center reel stop acceptance command, or a right reel stop acceptance command. Furthermore, the stop operation information sent from the main control means 100 to the sub-control means 200 does not have to be sent by a single command; for example, part of the stop operation information may be sent by a different command (multiple commands).

Furthermore, the above-mentioned information (a) to (c) may not be transmitted as individual pieces of information, and may be obtained by the sub-control means 200 performing a predetermined arithmetic process on the information received from the main control means 100. For example, the numerical value transmitted from the main control means 100 may be divided, the quotient value indicating the symbol number to be finally stopped and displayed in the lower section, and the remainder value indicating the number of sliding frames. In other words, for example, as information for grasping the symbol number of the symbol located in the lower section of the display window W when the stop switch was operated (a), the sub-control means 200 can grasp the symbol number of the symbol located in the lower section of the display window W when the stop switch was operated by transmitting information from which the symbol number to be finally stopped and displayed in the lower section can be grasped and information from which the number of sliding frames can be grasped, rather than transmitting the symbol number itself of the symbol located in the lower section of the display window W when the stop switch was operated.

<Function block of secondary control means>
<Skill Judging Means>
In this embodiment, the performance management means 210 shown in Fig. 9 further includes a skill determination means. When a player shifts to a practice mode (described later) at the start of a normal big game (described later), this skill determination means determines the accuracy of the pressing based on the above-mentioned stop operation information transmitted from the main control means when a stop operation of the stop switch is performed in each game during the normal big game (details will be described later).

<Game specifications of this embodiment>
<Basic game flow>
In the slot machine of this embodiment, when the main game state is in the "normal zone" (MS=0) and a winning number corresponding to any one of the bonus condition device numbers of BB-A to D is determined by the role drawing, the main game state transitions to "inside BB-1/BB-1 in operation" (MS=3). Then, when a symbol combination (see FIG. 87) corresponding to any one of BB-01 to BB-04 is aligned, a normal big bonus game (BB-1 game) is started. The normal big bonus game is hereinafter referred to as "normal big". As mentioned above, the end condition of the BB-1 game is that the number of medals paid out exceeds 279 (see the remarks column of FIG. 87). Therefore, if only 10-coin roles are won during the BB-1 game, when the 10-coin role is won on the 28th time, the total number of medals paid out during the BB-1 game becomes 280, and the normal big (BB-1 game) ends. On the other hand, when the winning combination 38 (see FIG. 90) is won, seven medals are paid out, so if the winning combination 38 is won once during a type 1 BB game, the total number of medals won by the 28th game can be 277. If a 10-coin combination is won in the 29th game, a total of 287 medals can be won to end the normal big.

In this way, by winning the winning number 38 only once during a normal big, the number of medals paid out during a type 1 BB game can be increased. In this embodiment, during a type 1 BB game, the winning number α+13 (see FIG. 92(d)) is determined by a role drawing, and in a game in which the winning replay condition device number 22 (see FIG. 91(b)) of winning -N is stored in a predetermined memory area of the RAM of the main control means 100, reel stop control is performed that allows the symbol combination of the winning number 38 to be aligned when the right stop switch 26c is operated for the first stop. In addition, a cut-in effect is executed based on the winning number α+13 being determined, and the player is notified that the symbol combination corresponding to the winning number 38 can be aligned.

In addition, in a game during a normal big, when the start lever 25 is operated, the images shown in FIG. 101(a) and FIG. 101(b) may be displayed on the display screen 11a. The image in FIG. 101(a) is displayed when the performance group number becomes 14 or 15 because the winning number is determined to be α+11 or α+12 (see FIG. 92(d)) by the role drawing. This image instructs the player to perform the first stop operation of the center stop switch 26b (part surrounded by a broken line in the figure). In addition, the operation order and stop symbols for the left reel 3a and the right reel 3c are not important. Furthermore, it instructs the player to stop the "Replay A" symbol (symbol number 14) of the center reel 3b in the upper row of the display window W, the "Star A" symbol (symbol number 13) in the middle row, and the "Star B" symbol (symbol number 12) in the lower row (part surrounded by a broken line in the figure). When the image in Fig. 101(a) is displayed, the instruction A4 shown in Fig. 99 is also notified. In other words, it is a notification effect to press a specific reel (the center reel in this embodiment) at a specific position. Thus, the notification of the instruction A4 is also called a "single reel notification effect."

The image in Figure 101 (b) is displayed when the winning number is determined to be α+16 (see Figure 92 (d)) by the winning combination lottery, resulting in the performance group number being 19. This image indicates that for the left reel 3a, the "Star B" symbol (symbol number 15) should stop on the top row of the display window W, the "Star A" symbol (symbol number 14) on the middle row, and the "Blue Seven" symbol (symbol number 13) on the bottom row (parts surrounded by dashed line U in the figure). For the middle reel 3b, it indicates that the "Star A" symbol (symbol number 13) should stop on the top row of the display window W, the "Star B" symbol (symbol number 12) on the middle row, and the "Bar" symbol (symbol number 11) on the bottom row (parts surrounded by dashed line E in the figure). For the right reel 3c, the instruction is to stop the "Replay A" symbol (symbol number 1) on the top row of the display window W, the "Cherry B" symbol (symbol number 0) on the middle row, and the "Red Seven" symbol (symbol number 20) on the bottom row (parts surrounded by dashed line O in the figure). The order in which the stop switches 26a to 26c are operated does not matter. When the image in FIG. 101(b) is displayed, the instruction A5 shown in FIG. 99 is also notified. In other words, it is a notification effect that causes multiple reels (in this embodiment, the left reel, center reel, and right reel) to be pressed at specific positions. For this reason, the notification of the instruction A5 is also referred to as a "three-reel notification effect."

In a game in which the image in FIG. 101(a) is displayed, if the performance group number becomes 15, and the pressing is successful on the center reel 3b and the notified pattern sequence ("Replay A", "Star A", and "Star B") is stopped and displayed in the display window W, the reels are controlled to stop so that any of the winning pattern combinations 01 to 03 (see FIG. 87) are aligned on an active line. The above-mentioned "striking" is successful not only when the pressing is successful, but also when the stop switch is operated at a timing when the notified pattern sequence is a predetermined number of frames (for example, one frame) upstream from the display window W. As a result, the second AT game additional lottery shown in FIG. 98 is executed, and when the number of additional games is determined, the value is added to the AT game number counter shown in FIG. 96. On the other hand, if the performance group number becomes 14, the second AT game additional drawing will be executed even if the sequence of symbols notified on the center reel 3b cannot be displayed in a stopped state in the display window W.

In addition, in a game in which the image in FIG. 101(b) is displayed (i.e., a game in which the symbol combination associated with the condition device for winning-Q is in a state in which it is possible to align), reel stop control is performed so that if the eye-pressing is successful for all of reels 3a to 3c, the symbol combination of winning 28 (see FIG. 89) is aligned on an active line, if the eye-pressing is successful for two reels, any of the symbol combinations of winning 29 to 31 (see FIG. 89) is aligned on an active line, and if the eye-pressing is successful for one reel, any of the symbol combinations of winning 32 to 34 (see FIG. 89 and FIG. 90) is aligned on an active line. In addition, if the eye-pressing is unsuccessful for all reels, reel stop control is performed so that the symbol combination of winning 35 or winning 36 is aligned on an active line. Here, the above-mentioned "eye-pushing" success does not only mean a successful perfect push, but may also include a case where the stop switch is operated when the symbol number corresponding to the predetermined symbol that constitutes the winning symbol combination of 28 is located a predetermined number of frames (e.g., one frame) upstream from the reference position (e.g., the lower row).

In this way, when the eye-pushing is successful for three reels, when the eye-pushing is successful for two reels, and when the eye-pushing is successful for one reel, the number of medals paid out is the same, but the pattern combinations that line up on the active line are different. In this way, by judging whether the eye-pushing is successful for each reel and tallying up the results, it is not judged for how many reels the eye-pushing is successful, but rather it is judged for how many reels the eye-pushing is successful based on the pattern combinations (types of winning) that are stopped and displayed on the active line, so that the memory capacity of the RAM of the main control means is not strained and the processing load of the main control means can be reduced. Then, according to the number of reels that are successful in the eye-pushing, the 3 times drum add-on 1 lottery to the 3 times drum add-on 3 lottery shown in FIG. 98 is executed, and the number of add-on games determined in each add-on lottery is added to the AT game number counter shown in FIG. 96.

Specifically, if the eye-pressing is successful for three reels, three draws are executed: 3 times body-topping 1, 3 times body-topping 2, and 3 times body-topping 3. If the eye-pressing is successful for two reels, two draws are executed: 3 times body-topping 1 and 3 times body-topping 2. If the eye-pressing is successful for one reel, one draw is executed: 3 times body-topping 1. If the eye-pressing is unsuccessful for all reels, none of the draws: 3 times body-topping 1, 3 times body-topping 2, or 3 times body-topping 3 are executed. In other words, the more reels the eye-pressing is successful for, the more advantageous the result is for the player. Also, even if the eye-pressing for the first stop operation is unsuccessful, the player can obtain an advantageous result by eye-pressing the remaining reels. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a game with a high sense of tension throughout one game (i.e., until the final stop operation is performed).

When the end condition of the first type BB game is satisfied, if the count value of the AT game counter is 1 or more, the main game state transitions to "AT in progress" (MS = 4), but a lottery is held on the display screen 11a to determine whether or not the first AT game should be started. If the start of the first AT game is decided by this lottery, the first AT game is basically played for a predetermined number of times, and then the second AT game is started. However, the first AT game may be repeatedly executed by a loop lottery based on the loop rate determined by the loop rate lottery shown in FIG. 98. When the second AT game is played for the number of times added during the normal big, the game returns to the normal section. The first AT game and the second AT game are recognized as separate AT games by the player, but the main game state of both AT games is "AT in progress" (MS = 4).

(Benefits in "High Probability")
When the main game state is in "high probability" (MS=1), if a winning number linked to any of the bonus condition device numbers of type 1 BB-A to D is determined by a hand drawing, the state transitions to "type 1 BB inside/type 1 BB in operation" (MS=3). After that, when a normal big is started, if the image shown in FIG. 101(a) or FIG. 101(b) is displayed on the display screen 11a during the normal big, and the pattern of the displayed image can be stopped and displayed, the number of games of the second AT game that is added will be approximately double compared to when the state transitions from the "normal section" to "type 1 BB inside/type 1 BB in operation".

(Benefits during "AT")
When the main game state is in "AT" (MS=4), if a winning number linked to any of the bonus condition device numbers of BB-A to D is determined by the hand drawing, the state transitions to "inside BB-1/operating BB-1" (MS=3). If the symbol combination associated with the bonus condition device linked to the determined winning number is complete, a hyper big game (hereinafter referred to as "hyper big") is started instead of a normal big. In the hyper big, even if the image shown in FIG. 101(a) or 101(b) is displayed on the display screen 11a in a game, and the symbol of the displayed image cannot be stopped and displayed, an additional drawing for the second AT game is performed.

<Practice mode>
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, during a normal big, the player can transition to a practice mode in which the player's skill in pressing the button is judged. During the practice mode, the normal big also progresses in parallel, and when the normal big ends, the practice mode also ends. Even if the game mode is transitioned to the practice mode, the profit that can be enjoyed by the normal big remains the same as if the game mode had not been transitioned to the practice mode.

Switching to practice mode is possible after a type 1 BB symbol combination is complete. For example, as shown in FIG. 102(a), when a type 1 BB symbol combination is complete, a message MG2 saying "Press and hold the PUSH button to switch to PRACTICE MODE" is displayed on the display screen 11a below a message MG1 saying "Normal Big." If the specified number of medals are inserted in this state and the start lever 25 is operated, normal big will start without switching to practice mode.

In the state of FIG. 102(a), if the player continues to press the decision button 55 (see FIG. 1(a)), as shown in FIG. 102(b), the message MG2 disappears, and a message MG3 saying "PRACTICE MODE" appears in the upper left corner of the display screen 11a, informing the player that the mode has been switched to practice mode. At this time, if the decision button 55 is pressed again, the display of the message MG3 disappears, and the message MG2 appears again. Then, when a specified number of medals are inserted in the state of FIG. 102(b), a time TM indicating the elapsed time of the game is displayed below the message MG3, as shown in FIG. 102(c). The time TM indicates the cumulative time taken to play each game in the practice mode. Specifically, when a specified number of medals are inserted and the start lever 25 is operated, the sub-control means 200 starts timing, and when all the reels stop, the timing is paused. The displayed time TM is held as is, and when the start lever 25 is operated in the next game, the sub-control means 200 restarts the timing from the held time, and when all the reels have stopped, the timing is paused again. By measuring the elapsed game time in this way, the time required for the payout of medals, the time when a hopper empty error (an error that occurs when no medals are stored in the hopper) occurs when the medals are paid out, and the time when the player leaves the seat for business (toilet break) between games are excluded from the elapsed game time, and the skill of the player's eye-pressing is evaluated based on the net time spent playing, as described below, so that the player can enjoy playing in the practice mode with peace of mind.

(Eye-catching image)
During practice mode, when the performance group number becomes 14 or 15 based on the winning number determined by the role drawing, one of the pressing images 1 to 57 shown in Figures 103 to 105 is displayed on the display screen 11a together with the single drum notification performance (notification of the instruction content A4 shown in Figure 99). Also, when the performance group number becomes 19 based on the winning number determined by the role drawing, the image shown in Figure 101 (b) (hereinafter, also referred to as the "three drum vita pressing image" in this embodiment) is displayed on the display screen 11a together with the three drum notification performance (notification of the instruction content A5 shown in Figure 99).

The pressing images are images that indicate the operation sequence of the stop switches 26a, 26b, and 26c and the pressing symbols of each reel, and 57 types of pressing images, pressing images 1 to 57, are prepared as shown in Figs. 103 to 105. In the pressing images shown in these figures, the names of symbols and the pressing order are written in a grid consisting of 4 rows and 3 columns, with the left column corresponding to the left reel 3a, the center column corresponding to the center reel 3b, and the right column corresponding to the right reel 3c. In addition, the first row shows the name of the symbol to be stopped in the upper row of the display window W, the second row shows the name of the symbol to be stopped in the middle row of the display window W, and the third row shows the name of the symbol to be stopped in the lower row of the display window W. Furthermore, the fourth row shows numbers indicating the pressing order of each reel.

For example, the pressing image 1 shown in FIG. 103 indicates the order of pressing the stop switch from center → left → right. Also, the symbols to be pressed for each reel are as follows: for the left reel 3a, pressing the "bar" symbol (symbol number 6), the "watermelon" symbol (symbol number 5), and the "replay A" symbol (symbol number 4) from the top of the display window W; for the middle reel 3b, pressing the "replay A" symbol (symbol number 14), the "star A" symbol (symbol number 13), and the "star B" symbol (symbol number 12) from the top of the display window W; and for the right reel 3c, pressing the "star B" symbol (symbol number 4), the "watermelon" symbol (symbol number 3), and the "star A" symbol (symbol number 2) from the top of the display window W.

Note that the instructions are the same for push images 2 to 57, but all of the push images instruct the push order to be center → left → right. Also, the symbol numbers for the symbols to be pressed for each reel shown in push images 2 to 57 can be determined from the symbol arrangement shown in Figure 86, so a detailed explanation of these will be omitted.

When the player presses the symbol displayed on the display screen 11a for each reel when any of the eye-pressing images 1 to 57 or the three-drum vita-pressing image (see FIG. 101(b)) is displayed on the display screen 11a, the sub-control means 200 calculates a score that is an indication of the skill in eye-pressing, depending on whether the displayed symbol is stopped and displayed in the display window W, and if it is possible to stop and display it, depending on the accuracy of the vita-pressing. Also, since the practice mode is also during normal big, in a game in which the performance group number is determined to be 14 or 15 by the role drawing, if the "Replay A" symbol, "Star A" symbol, and "Star B" symbol on the center reel 3b are stopped and displayed in order from the top of the display window W, a second AT game addition drawing (see FIG. 98) is executed, and the number of second AT games is added depending on the drawing result.

In the eye-pressing images 1 to 57 shown in Figs. 103 to 105, the symbols that should be pressed on the center reel 3b are all "Replay A", "Star A", and "Star B". Therefore, even if the notification mode for the player (specifically, the notification mode shown in Fig. 101(a) and the notification mode shown in Figs. 103 to 105) differs depending on whether or not the practice mode is selected, this does not disadvantage the player.

Figure 106 shows the symbol numbers in the lower part of the display window W that are used to determine whether or not the vita-oshi has been successful for each of the eye-pressing images shown in Figures 103 to 105, and the difficulty level of the vita-oshi for each eye-pressing image. In this figure, for example, when eye-pressing image 1 is displayed on the display screen 11a, when the symbol number 4 (the "Replay A" symbol) of the left reel 3a is displayed in a stopped state in the lower part of the display window W, a determination is made as to whether or not the vita-oshi has been successful for the left reel 3a. Also, when the symbol number 12 (the "Star B" symbol) of the middle reel 3b is displayed in a stopped state in the lower part of the display window W, a determination is made as to whether or not the vita-oshi has been successful for the middle reel 3b. Furthermore, when the symbol number 2 (the "Star A" symbol) of the right reel 3c is displayed in a stopped state in the lower part of the display window W, a determination is made as to whether or not the vita-oshi has been successful for the middle reel 3c. Similarly, for other pressing images, the symbol number to be displayed in a stopped state is determined in the lower section of the display window W. Note that the position of the symbol to be referenced when deciding whether or not to perform a perfect pressing is not limited to the lower section, but may be the upper section or middle section.

In this embodiment, the difficulty of the perfect pressing is determined as five ranks, SS, S, A, B, and C, for the stop display symbols of each reel shown by the pressing images 1 to 57. Of these ranks, SS is the most difficult to perform perfect pressing, and the ranks are S, A, B, and C, which are easier to perform perfect pressing. These difficulty levels are determined, for example, according to whether or not a conspicuous symbol or symbol arrangement is included among the nine symbols shown by each pressing image, or in the vicinity thereof. Here, "in the vicinity" refers, for example, to the symbol position one position above in the upper row of the display window W, or the symbol position one position below in the lower row. Furthermore, "conspicuous symbols" refers, for example, to bonus symbols ("red seven" symbol, "blue seven" symbol, and "bar" symbol). Furthermore, "conspicuous symbol arrangement" refers to a case where symbols of the same kind (for example, "star A" symbol and "star A" symbol, "star A" symbol and "star B" symbol, etc.) are arranged consecutively.

(Selection of the image to display)
The eye-pressing image displayed on the display screen 11a during the practice mode is determined by a drawing (eye-pressing image drawing) executed by the sub-control means 200 when the start lever 25 is operated. In the eye-pressing image drawing, different drawing tables are referenced depending on the game elapsed time when the start lever 25 is operated (the time displayed in the time TM in FIG. 102(c)). In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 107(a), when the game elapsed time when the start lever 25 is operated is 0 seconds or more and less than 20 seconds, the drawing table A is referenced, when the game elapsed time is 20 seconds or more and less than 40 seconds, the drawing table B is referenced, when the game elapsed time is 40 seconds or more and less than 1 minute, the drawing table C is referenced, when the game elapsed time is 1 minute or more and less than 1 minute 20 seconds, the drawing table D is referenced, when the game elapsed time is 1 minute 20 seconds or more and less than 2 minutes, the drawing table E is referenced, and when the game elapsed time is 2 minutes or more, the drawing table F is referenced.

In this embodiment, the probability is set so that the greater the elapsed play time, the more likely it is that a more difficult pressing image will be selected. Therefore, the selection probabilities are set so that lottery table A has the highest probability of a less difficult pressing image being selected, and the probability of a more difficult pressing image being selected gradually increases in the order of lottery tables A → B → C → D → E → F. In other words, it is configured so that a shorter elapsed play time is more likely to result in a higher score, which will be described later, than a longer one.

(Score calculation)
As mentioned above, the score calculated in the practice mode is a numerical value that serves as an indication of the player's skill in pressing the buttons. This score is calculated by the sub-control means 200 based on whether or not the symbol shown in the pressing image displayed on the display screen 11a is displayed, the accuracy of the pressing, the type of condition device activated by the role drawing, and the like. Specifically, points are added to the score value based on the calculation table shown in Figure 107 (b). In this calculation table, "Pinch pressing judgment", "3-drum pitch pressing success points" and "Marvelous when number of coins is adjusted" are calculated.
The Act defines three items as "judgment".

The "vita-push judgment point" is a point that is added according to the accuracy of the timing of the stop operation of the stop switch when the symbol shown in the eye-push image displayed on the display screen 11a is stopped and displayed in the display window W. This point is added individually for each reel. In this embodiment, the accuracy of the stop operation timing is evaluated into four stages: "Marvelous", "Excellent", "Cool" and "So-so". "Marvelous" has the highest accuracy, followed by "Excellent" and "Cool". "So-so" is the evaluation when the stop switch is operated at a timing earlier than the vita-push stop operation timing, but the reel retraction control is performed, causing the symbol shown in the eye-push image to be stopped and displayed in the display window W.

Therefore, if the judgement is "So-so", no points will be added to the score.
When a "Marvelous" judgment is made, the points added to the score are the largest, followed by "Excellent" and "Cool," in which case the points added to the score decrease in order. Note that the method of determining the evaluation regarding the accuracy of the stop operation timing will be described in detail later.

Next, "3-time drum vita-oshi success points" are points added to the score when vita-oshi is successful for all reels under certain circumstances. "Single-time drum notification" is points added when vita-oshi is successful for all reels when the winning number α+11 or α+12 (see FIG. 92(d)) is determined by hand drawing during practice mode and the single-time drum notification performance (notification of instruction A4 shown in FIG. 99) is performed. "3-time drum notification" is points added when vita-oshi is successful for all reels when the winning number α+16 (see FIG. 92(d), FIG. 94(a)) is determined by hand drawing during practice mode and the three-time drum notification performance (notification of instruction A5 shown in FIG. 99) is performed.

Next, the "Marvelous Judgment at Number Adjustment" is a point that is added when a winning symbol combination of 38 (7 symbols, see FIG. 90) is achieved in a game in which the winning number α+13 (see FIG. 92(d) and FIG. 94(a)) is determined during practice mode (at this time, a cut-in effect is performed). If a winning symbol combination of 38 is achieved, a "Marvelous" evaluation effect is executed for the player.

In this embodiment, even in a game in which none of the eye-pressing images 1 to 57 are displayed, the three-reel vita-pressing image is not displayed, and the cut-in effect is not executed, the eye-pressing accuracy for only the center reel 3b is evaluated in the three levels of "Marvelous," "Excellent," and "Cool" described above only when the center stop switch 26b is operated to the first stop.

During practice mode, points related to the various items listed above are added to the score, but as shown in FIG. 107(b), the points associated with each item differ according to score calculation levels 1 to 5. In this embodiment, score calculation level 1 is set so that the points associated with each item are the lowest, and the points associated with each item gradually increase from score calculation level 2 to 5.

Which of score calculation levels 1 to 5 is used to determine the points to be added to the score, depending on the elapsed game time when the start lever 25 shown in FIG. 107(a) is operated. That is, if the elapsed game time when the start lever 25 is operated is 0 seconds or more and less than 20 seconds, the score is calculated according to score calculation level 3; if it is 20 seconds or more and less than 40 seconds, the score is calculated according to score calculation level 4; if it is 40 seconds or more and less than 1 minute, the score is calculated according to score calculation level 5; if it is 1 minute or more and less than 1 minute 20 seconds, the score is calculated according to score calculation level 3; if it is 1 minute or more and less than 2 minutes, the score is calculated according to score calculation level 2; and if it is 2 minutes or more, the score is calculated according to score calculation level 1.

Due to the above characteristics, until one minute has elapsed playing time, the difficulty of the selected eye-pressing image gradually increases (lottery table A → B → C), and the points added to the score also increase (score calculation level 3 → 4 → 5). Then, once one minute has elapsed playing time, the difficulty of the selected eye-pressing image increases (lottery table D → E → F), but since it is assumed that too much time has been spent on eye-pressing in each game, the points added to the score decrease (score calculation level 3 → 2 → 1).

In addition, the elapsed time of play may be directly reflected in the score calculation. Specifically, when comparing the scores of a game in which the accuracy of the eye-pressing was α when the elapsed time of play was A and a game in which the accuracy of the eye-pressing was α when the elapsed time of play was B (B is greater than A), the score of the game in which the accuracy of the eye-pressing was α when the elapsed time of play was A may be configured to be higher. In other words, even if the accuracy of the eye-pressing is the same, the score may be higher when the elapsed time of play is shorter. In addition, the elapsed time of play is the cumulative time taken to play each game in the practice mode, but the elapsed time of play may be measured for each game in the practice mode (for example, from the operation of the start lever 25 to the stop of all reels), and the score may be based on the elapsed time of play and the accuracy of the eye-pressing in each game (when calculating the score of each game, the shorter the elapsed time of play, the higher the score). By configuring it this way, not only the accuracy of the button presses but also the speed of the button presses are reflected in the score, providing players with a tense gaming experience.

<<Transition of notification mode with progress of game during normal big>>
Next, the transition of the notification mode with the progress of the game during a normal big will be explained separately for the case where there is no transition to the practice mode (non-practice mode) and the case where there is a transition to the practice mode.
<When a single drum notification is performed>
Figure 108 shows the transition of the notification mode when the winning number α+11 or α+12 (see Figures 92(d) and 94(a)) is determined by the role drawing and the notification of instruction content A4 (single drum notification performance) is performed, with Figures 108(a-1) to (a-3) showing the transition when there is no transition to practice mode, and Figures 108(b-1) to (b-3) showing the transition when there is a transition to practice mode.

(Transition of Notification Mode in Non-Practice Mode)
If the practice mode is not entered, the draw is triggered by the operation of the start lever 25, and when the winning number α+11 or α+12 (see Figures 92 (d) and 94 (a)) is determined, the display screen 11a will display the message of instruction A4, "Press (Replay, ☆, ☆) on the middle reel!", along with the image NDP shown in Figure 101 (a), as shown in Figure 108 (a-1).

As a result, when the player performs the first stop operation on the middle stop switch 26b, the number "1" indicating the push order of the middle reel is erased in the image NDP as shown in FIG. 108(a-2). Then, the second and third stop operations are performed in sequence to stop all the reels, and when the "Replay A" symbol, "Star A" symbol, and "Star B" symbol on the middle reel 3b are stopped and displayed in the upper, middle, and lower rows of the display window W, a lottery is held for the second AT game addition, and the number of added games determined by the lottery is displayed on the display screen 11a as shown in FIG. 108(a-3). Note that FIG. 108(a-3) shows that five games have been added to the second AT game.

(Transition of Notification Mode in Practice Mode)
In contrast, when the practice mode is entered, when the winning number α+11 or α+12 (see FIG. 92(d) and FIG. 94(a)) is determined by the hand drawing triggered by the operation of the start lever 25, the display screen 11a displays, as shown in FIG. 108(b-1), a message of instruction A4, "Press (Replay, ☆, ☆) on the middle reel!", together with one of the push images PDP from among the push images 1 to 57 shown in FIG. 103 to FIG. 105. Here, FIG. 108(b-1) shows the state in which the push image 1 is displayed.

As a result, when the player operates the middle stop switch 26b to perform the first stop operation, the game will be as shown in FIG.
108(b-2), the number "1" indicating the push order of the center reel is erased from the image PDP. At this time, when the "Replay A" symbol, the "Star A" symbol, and the "Star B" symbol are displayed stopped in the upper, middle, and lower rows of the display window W on the center reel 3b, respectively, the accuracy of the push operation for the center reel 3b is evaluated based on the timing of the stop operation of the stop switch 26b. The evaluation result of the accuracy of the push operation is displayed below the image PDP, and FIG. 108(b-2) shows the state in which "Marvelous" has been evaluated.

Then, when the second and third stop operations are performed in sequence, the accuracy of the eye-pressing is evaluated each time. When all the reels have stopped, if the "Replay A" symbol, "Star A" symbol, and "Star B" symbol on the center reel 3b are displayed stopped in the upper, middle, and lower rows of the display window W, a lottery is held to add to the second AT game. Then, as shown in FIG. 108(b-3), the number of added games determined by the lottery is displayed on the display screen 11a. Note that FIG. 108(b-3) shows that five games have been added to the second AT game.

<When the 3rd inning alarm is performed>
Figure 109 shows the transition of the notification mode when the winning number α+16 (see Figures 92(d) and 94(a)) is determined by the role drawing and the notification of instruction content A5 (three-drum notification performance) is performed, with Figures 109(a-1) to (a-3) showing the transition in non-practice mode and Figures 109(b-1) to (b-3) showing the transition in practice mode.

(Transition of Notification Mode in Non-Practice Mode)
First, the operation of the start lever 25 triggers a lottery draw, and when the winning number α+16 (see Figures 92 (d) and 94 (a)) is determined, as shown in Figure 109 (a-1), the display screen 11a displays a three-reel vita-push image SDP along with the message of instruction A5, "Vita-push (☆-☆-blue seven) on the left reel, (☆-☆-bar) on the middle reel, and (Replay A-Cherry B-red seven) on the right reel!"

As a result, for example, when a player performs the first stop operation on the left stop switch 26a, the area in the image SDP corresponding to the left reel goes dark, as shown in FIG. 109 (a-2). Furthermore, if the vita-oshi of the left reel 3a is successful and the "Star B", "Star A" and "Blue Seven" symbols of the left reel 3a are stopped and displayed in the upper, middle and lower rows of the display window W, the word "OK" is displayed below the image SDP. Note that if the vita-oshi is unsuccessful, the word "NG" is displayed.

Then, the second and third stop operations are performed in sequence, and each time, if the perfect push is successful, the same display as the left reel 3a is displayed. All reels stop, and depending on the symbol combination displayed in the display window W, a 3-times drum add-on 1 draw to a 3-times drum add-on 3 draw (see Figure 98) is performed. Then, as shown in Figure 109 (a-3), the number of added games determined by the draw is displayed on the display screen 11a. Note that Figure 109 (a-3) shows that 10 games have been added to the second AT game.

(Transition of Notification Mode in Practice Mode)
When the practice mode is entered, the operation of the start lever 25 triggers the drawing of the winning number α+16 (see Figures 92 (d) and 94 (a)) to determine the winning number, and as shown in Figure 109 (b-1), in the same way as in the non-practice mode, the display screen 11a will display a three-reel vita-press image SDP along with the message of instruction A5, "Via-press (☆-☆-blue seven) on the left reel, (☆-☆-bar) on the middle reel, and (Replay A-Cherry B-red seven) on the right reel!"

In this way, for example, when the player operates the left stop switch 26a to perform the first stop operation,
109(b-2), the area of the image SDP corresponding to the left reel goes dark. Then, when the "Star B", "Star A" and "Blue Seven" symbols of the left reel 3a are displayed stationary in the upper, middle and lower rows of the display window W, the word "OK" is displayed below the image SDP. If the above-mentioned sequence of symbols is not displayed stationary in the display window W, the word "NG" is displayed. If the above-mentioned sequence of symbols is displayed stationary in the display window W, the accuracy of the eye-pressing for the left reel 3a is evaluated based on the timing of the stop operation of the stop switch 26a. The evaluation result of the eye-pressing accuracy is displayed below the image SDP, and FIG. 109(b-2) shows a state in which the evaluation of "Excellent" has been made.

Then, the second and third stop operations are performed in sequence, and each time the notified pattern sequence is displayed in the display window W, the same display as the left reel 3a is displayed. In addition, the accuracy of the eye-pressing for the corresponding reel is evaluated based on the timing of the stop operation of each stop switch, and the evaluation result is displayed below the image SDP. When all the reels have stopped, a 3-times drum add-on 1 draw to a 3-times drum add-on 3 draw (see Figure 98) is performed according to the pattern combination displayed in the display window W. Then, as shown in Figure 109 (b-3), the number of added games determined by the draw is displayed on the display screen 11a. Note that Figure 109 (b-3) shows that 10 games have been added to the second AT game.

<<Main control processes related to play in practice mode>>
Next, the main control processes related to play in the practice mode will be described with reference to the flowcharts shown in Figures 110 to 118.
<Main control processes in the main control means>
With reference to the flow chart shown in Fig. 110, a part of the game state 3 full stop processing performed by the main control means 100 after all reels have stopped when the main game state is "inside type 1 BB/operating type 1 BB" (MS = 3) will be described. The game state 3 full stop processing is a processing performed in both the non-practice mode and the practice mode.

When all reels stop and game state 3 full stop processing is started while staying in "Type 1 BB inside/Type 1 BB in operation" (MS=3), the main control means 100 first judges whether or not Type 1 BB (RB-B) game, RB-A game, or SB game is being executed (step Sm10). If none of Type 1 BB game, RB-A game, or SB game is being executed, the judgment result of step Sm10 becomes NO, and other processing is performed. On the other hand, if Type 1 BB game, RB-A game, or SB game is being executed, the judgment result of step Sm10 becomes YES, and it is judged whether or not the performance group number has become 19 based on the result of the role drawing performed in the current game (step Sm12).

If the winning number is not determined to be α+16 in the role drawing and, as a result, the performance group number is not 19 (see FIG. 94(a)), the judgment result in step Sm12 is NO, and the main control means 100 then judges whether the winning number was determined to be α+11 or α+12 in the role drawing performed in the current game and, as a result, the performance group number was determined to be 14 or 15 (step Sm14). If the winning number was not determined to be α+11 or α+12 in the role drawing and, as a result, the performance group number was not 14 or 15, the judgment result in step Sm14 is NO, and the process proceeds to step Sm32, where 0 is saved in the provisional loading counter (see FIG. 96), and other processing is then performed. On the other hand, if the winning number is determined to be α+11 or α+12 in the role drawing, and as a result, the performance group number is 14 or 15, the result of the determination in step Sm14 will be YES, and the main control means 100 will perform the processing for the single drum notification performance described below.

(Processing during single drum notification)
First, the main control means 100 determines whether the winning number is α+
11, and as a result, it is determined whether the performance group number has become 14 (step Sm16). If the performance group number is not 14, the judgment result of step Sm16 is NO, and the main control means 100 judges whether the value of the AT flag (see FIG. 96) is 0 (step Sm18). If the value of the AT flag is 0, the judgment result of step Sm18 is YES, and then the main control means 100 judges whether any of the winning symbol combinations 01 to 03 (see FIG. 87) is aligned on an active line (step Sm20). Then, if none of the winning symbol combinations 01 to 03 is aligned on an active line, the judgment result of step Sm20 is NO, and the process proceeds to step Sm32, where 0 is stored in the temporary loading counter, and other processing is performed.

In the judgment process of step Sm16, if the performance group number is 14, the judgment result is YES, and in the judgment process of step Sm18, if the value of the AT flag is 0, the judgment result is NO, and further, in the judgment process of step Sm20, if any of the winning pattern combinations 01 to 03 are aligned on an active line, the judgment result is YES, but in either case, a second AT game addition lottery (see FIG. 98) is performed (step Sm22). Then, when the number of games to be added is determined by the second AT game addition lottery, that number of games is set in the provisional addition counter (see FIG. 96) (step Sm24), and then the value set in the provisional addition counter is added to the count value of the AT game number counter (see FIG. 96) (step Sm26).

Then, the main control means 100 judges whether the value of the high probability flag (see FIG. 96) is 0 or not (step Sm28). If the value of the high probability flag is 0, the judgment result of step Sm28 becomes YES, and the process proceeds to step Sm32, where 0 is stored in the temporary loading counter, and other processes are performed. On the other hand, if the value of the high probability flag is 1, this means that a type 1 BB game was started when the main game state was staying in "high probability" (MS = 1), so the value set in the temporary loading counter is added again to the count value of the AT game number counter (step Sm30). As a result, when the main game state transitions from "high probability" (MS = 1) to "type 1 BB inside/type 1 BB operating" (MS = 3), the number of games added during type 1 BB game is doubled compared to when the state transitions from "normal section" (MS = 0) to "type 1 BB inside/type 1 BB operating" (MS = 3). Then, the process moves to step Sm32, where the temporary loading counter is set to 0, and other processing is performed.

(Processing when the third drum is sounded)
In the judgment process of step Sm12, if the winning number is determined to be α+16 by the role drawing and the performance group number becomes 19 as a result, the judgment result becomes YES, and the main control means 100 performs processing when the 3rd drum is notified. First, it is judged whether the value of the AT flag is 0 (step Sm34), and if the value of the AT flag is 0, the judgment result of step Sm34 becomes YES, and then the main control means 100 judges whether the winning 28 symbol combination (see FIG. 89) is aligned on the effective line (step Sm36). If the winning 28 symbol combination is aligned on the effective line, that is, if the eye-pushing is successful for all reels, the judgment result of step Sm36 becomes YES, and first, 3rd drum addition 3 drawings are performed (step Sm38), and the number of games to be added determined by the drawing is added to the AT game number counter (step Sm40). Next, a 3-times drum add-on 2 lottery is performed (step Sm44), and the number of games to be added determined by the lottery is added to the AT game number counter (step Sm46). Furthermore, a 3-times drum add-on 1 lottery is performed (step Sm50), and the number of games to be added determined by the lottery is added to the AT game number counter (step Sm52). After the processing of step Sm52 is performed, the process proceeds to another process.

In the judgment process of step Sm36, if the symbol combination of the winning 28 is not aligned on the pay line, the judgment result is NO, and then the main control means 100 judges whether any of the symbol combinations of the winning 29 to the winning 31 are aligned on the pay line (step Sm42). If any of the symbol combinations of the winning 29 to the winning 31 are aligned on the pay line, that is, if the eye-pushing is successful for two reels, the judgment result of step Sm42 is YES, and first, a three-time body-addition 2 lottery is performed (step Sm44), and the number of games to be added determined by the lottery is added to the AT game number counter (step Sm46). Next, a three-time body-addition 1 lottery is performed (step Sm50), and the number of games to be added determined by the lottery is added to the AT game number counter (step Sm52). Then, after the processing of step Sm52 is performed, the process moves to another process.

In the judgment process of step Sm42, if none of the symbol combinations of winning 29 to winning 31 are aligned on the active line, the judgment result is NO, and the main control means 100 then judges whether any of the symbol combinations of winning 32 to winning 34 are aligned on the active line (step Sm48). If any of the symbol combinations of winning 32 to winning 34 are aligned on the active line, that is, if the eye-pressing for one reel is successful, the judgment result of step Sm48 is YES, and a three-times body-adding one lottery is performed (step Sm50), and the number of games to be added determined by the lottery is added to the AT game number counter (step Sm52). Then, after the processing of step Sm52 is performed, the process moves to another process. Note that in the judgment process of step Sm48, if none of the symbol combinations of winning 32 to winning 34 are aligned on the active line, the judgment result is NO, and the process moves directly to another process.

In the judgment process of step Sm34, if the value of the AT flag is 1, it means that the Type 1 BB game has started while the main game state is "AT" (MS = 4). Therefore, the Type 1 BB game in this case is Hyper Big, the judgment result of step Sm34 is NO, and the process related to the additional drawing is carried out as is in steps Sm38 → Sm40 → Sm44 → Sm46 → Sm50 → Sm52.

In the processing of steps Sm36 to Sm52 described above, the number of reels that were successfully pressed can be determined by determining the symbol combination (type of winning) that is lined up on the active line, so there is no need to perform separate processing to determine the number of reels that were successfully pressed, and the capacity of the control program can be reduced.

<Main control processes in the sub-control means>
Hereinafter, a score calculation process executed by the sub-control means 200 when the player transitions to the practice mode at the start of a normal big will be described. In the score calculation process, the sub-control means 200 grasps (a) the pattern number of the pattern that was located in the lower part of the display window W when the stop switch was operated (hereinafter, also referred to as the "pattern number at the time of the stop operation" in this embodiment), (b) the position of that pattern in the lower part of the display window W (specifically, the number of steps of the stepping motor. Hereinafter, also referred to as the "step number at the time of the stop operation" in this embodiment), and (c) the pattern number of the pattern that will finally be stopped and displayed in the lower part of the display window W (hereinafter, also referred to as the "pattern number at the time of the stop operation" in this embodiment) from the stop operation information transmitted from the main control means 100 in response to the operation of the stop switch. Therefore, the sub-control means 200 grasps the count value of the pattern number counter in the main control means 100 as the pattern number at the time of the stop operation, and the sub-control means 200 grasps the count value of the 1 pattern counter in the main control means 100 as the step number at the time of the stop operation. The sub-control means 200 then calculates a score based on the above-mentioned information (a) to (c) that has been grasped.

(Score calculation process when any of the push images 1 to 57 is displayed)
First, with reference to Figs. 111 to 113, the contents of the score calculation process when any of the timing images 1 to 57 (see Figs. 103 to 105) is displayed will be described.
112 is a flowchart of the score calculation process at the second stop time executed when the next reel stops (second stop time), and FIG. 113 is a flowchart of the score calculation process at the third stop time executed when the last reel stops (third stop time). In this embodiment, the first reel that stops is called the "first stopped reel", the next reel that stops is called the "second stopped reel", and the last reel that stops is called the "third stopped reel".

During practice mode, when any of the eye-pressing images 1 to 57 is displayed and the first of the reels 3a, 3b, and 3c stops, the sub-control means 200 executes the first stop time score calculation process shown in FIG. 111, and first determines whether the first stopped reel is the center reel 3b (step Ss10). If the first stopped reel is not the center reel 3b, the determination result in step Ss10 becomes NO, and information indicating that the first stop operation has failed (first stop operation failure information) is stored in a specified storage area of the RAM provided in the sub-control means 200 (step Ss12), the first stop time score calculation process ends, and other processes are performed.

On the other hand, if the first stopped reel is the middle reel 3b, the result of the judgment in step Ss10 is YES, and the sub-control means 200 judges whether the pattern of the middle reel in the eye-pressing image displayed on the display screen 11a (also referred to as the eye-pressing designated pattern, eye-pressing designated pattern number, or success judgment pattern number) matches the pattern of the middle reel 3b stopped and displayed (stopped and displayed) in the display window W (step Ss14). As an example of this judgment method, it judges whether the stop display pattern number grasped from the stop operation information transmitted from the main control means matches the above-mentioned eye-pressing designated pattern number. If they do not match, the judgment result is NO, and the process proceeds to step Ss12, where the first stop operation failure information is stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM provided in the sub-control means 200, and the first stop time score calculation process is terminated and other processes are performed.

If there is a match, the result of the determination in step Ss14 is YES, and the sub-control means 200 determines whether the perfect press of the middle stop switch 26b was successful (step Ss16). This determination is made based on the stop operation pattern number obtained from the stop operation information related to the middle stop switch 26b sent from the main control means 100. In other words, it is determined based on whether or not the success determination pattern number related to the middle reel of the press image displayed on the display screen 11a matches the stop operation pattern number obtained from the stop operation information, among the success determination pattern numbers related to each press image shown in FIG. 106.

If the success determination symbol number for the middle reel does not match the stop operation symbol number, the result of the judgment in step Ss16 is NO, and the display screen 11a displays an image of "So-so" indicating that the eye-pressing designated symbol was stopped and displayed but the vita-pressing failed (the eye-pressing designated symbol was stopped and displayed by the pull-in control) (step Ss18). On the other hand, if the success determination symbol number for the middle reel matches the stop operation symbol number, the result of the judgment in step Ss16 is YES, and the sub-control means 200 next judges whether the count value of the 1 symbol counter for the middle stop switch 26b is within the range of 5 to 9 (step Ss20). Then, if the number of steps at the stop operation grasped from the stop operation information transmitted from the main control means 100 is within the range of 5 to 9, the result of the judgment in step Ss20 is YES, and the image of "Marvelous" indicating the highest accuracy of the vita-pressing is displayed on the display screen 11a (step Ss22).

In the judgment process of step Ss20, if the number of steps at the time of the stop operation is outside the range of 5 to 9, the judgment result of step Ss20 becomes NO, and the sub-control means 200 next judges whether the number of steps at the time of the stop operation is within the range of 10 to 15 (step Ss24). If the number of steps at the time of the stop operation is within the range of 10 to 15, the judgment result of step Ss24 becomes YES, and the image of "Excellent", which indicates that the accuracy of the Vita-push is the second highest after "Marvelous", is displayed on the display screen 11a (step Ss26). On the other hand, if the number of steps at the time of the stop operation is outside the range of 10 to 15, the judgment result of step Ss24 becomes NO, and the image of "Cool", which indicates that the accuracy of the Vita-push is the second highest after "Excellent", is displayed on the display screen 11a (step Ss28).

Then, when the evaluation on the accuracy of the Vita-oshi is displayed on the display screen 11a by the processing of steps Ss18, Ss22, Ss26 or Ss28, the sub-control means 200 then calculates points according to the specifications shown in FIG. 107 according to the evaluation displayed on the display screen 11a. For example, if the game elapsed time when the start lever 25 was operated was 12 seconds, the score calculation level will be 3 (see FIG. 107(a)), and if the evaluation of the Vita-oshi accuracy was "Excellent", the points will be 36 (see FIG. 107(b)). Also, if the evaluation of the Vita-oshi accuracy was "So-so", the points will be 0. Then, the calculated points are added to the score stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM provided in the sub-control means 200 (step Ss30). This score is the total value of points calculated in one practice mode (also normal big), and scores corresponding to each practice mode are stored separately. Then, after performing the processing of step Ss30, the sub-control means 200 ends the first stop time score calculation processing and performs other processing.

As described above, in the judgment process of step Ss16, if the success judgment pattern number for the middle reel does not match the pattern number at the time of the stop operation grasped from the stop operation information, it means that the stop switch was not stopped at the timing of the vita push (also called the "first timing"), but at the timing when the retraction control of one or more reels is performed (also called the "second timing"). Therefore, in this case, without judging the number of steps at the time of the stop operation, the process proceeds to step Ss18, and an evaluation (So-so) is performed that means that the vita push was unsuccessful. This makes it possible to reduce the processing burden for evaluating the accuracy of the vita push. Also, for example, if the judgment of whether or not the vita push was successful is made based on the number of steps, there is no risk of the score being calculated erroneously based on the number of steps when it is judged that the vita push was not successful.

Next, in practice mode, when the second reel stops in a game in which any of the eye-pressing images 1 to 57 is displayed, the sub-control means 200 executes the second stop time score calculation process shown in FIG. 112. First, the sub-control means 200 judges whether or not the first stop operation has failed to be pressed perfectly (step Ss40). Specifically, the sub-control means 200 judges whether or not first stop operation failure information has been stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM provided in the sub-control means 200 by the process of step Ss12 in FIG. 111. If first stop operation failure information has been stored, the judgment result of step Ss40 becomes YES, and information indicating that the second stop operation has failed to be pressed perfectly (second stop operation failure information) is saved in a predetermined storage area of the RAM provided in the sub-control means 200 (step Ss42), the second stop time score calculation process ends, and other processes are performed.

If the first stop operation was successful in the judgment process of step Ss40 (i.e., the first stop operation failure information was not stored in the RAM of the sub-control means 200), the judgment result will be NO, and the sub-control means 200 will judge whether the second stopped reel is the left reel 3a (step Ss44). If the second stopped reel is not the left reel 3a, the judgment result of step Ss44 will be NO, and the process will proceed to step Ss42, where the second stop operation failure information is saved in a specified storage area of the RAM provided in the sub-control means 200. Then, the second stop time score calculation process will end, and other processes will be performed.

On the other hand, if the second stopped reel is the left reel 3a, the result of the determination in step Ss44 is YES, and the sub-control means 200 determines whether or not the symbol of the left reel in the eye-pressing image displayed on the display screen 11a matches the symbol of the left reel 3a stopped and displayed (stopped and displayed) in the display window W (step Ss46). If they do not match, the result of the determination is NO, and the process proceeds to step Ss12, where the second stop operation failure information is stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM provided in the sub-control means 200, after which the second stop time score calculation process is terminated and other processes are performed.

If there is a match, the result of the determination in step Ss46 is YES, and the sub-control means 200 determines whether or not the left stop switch 26a was successfully pressed (step Ss48). This determination is made based on the stop operation information for the left stop switch 26a sent from the main control means 100, just like in the case of the middle stop switch 26b described above. In other words, it is determined based on whether or not the success determination pattern number for the left reel of the press image displayed on the display screen 11a matches the pattern number at the time of the stop operation determined from the stop operation information, among the success determination pattern numbers for each press image shown in FIG. 106.

If the success determination symbol number for the left reel does not match the stop operation symbol number obtained from the received stop operation information, the result of the determination in step Ss48 is NO, and the image "So-so" is displayed on the display screen 11a (step Ss50). On the other hand, if the success determination symbol number for the left reel matches the stop operation symbol number, the result of the determination in step Ss48 is YES, and the sub-control means 200 next determines whether the stop operation step number obtained from the stop operation information for the left stop switch 26a is within the range of 5 to 9 (step Ss52). If the stop operation step number is within the range of 5 to 9, the result of the determination in step Ss52 is YES, and the image "Marvelous" is displayed on the display screen 11a (step Ss54).

If the number of steps at the time of the stop operation is outside the range of 5 to 9 in the judgment process of step Ss52, the judgment result of step Ss52 becomes NO, and the sub-control means 200 then judges whether the number of steps at the time of the stop operation is within the range of 10 to 15 (step Ss56). If the number of steps at the time of the stop operation is within the range of 10 to 15, the judgment result of step Ss56 becomes YES, and the image of "Excellent" is displayed on the display screen 11a (step Ss58). On the other hand, if the number of steps at the time of the stop operation is outside the range of 10 to 15, the judgment result of step Ss56 becomes NO, and the image of "Cool" is displayed on the display screen 11a (step Ss60).

Then, when the evaluation regarding the accuracy of the Vita-oshi is displayed on the display screen 11a by the processing of step Ss50, Ss54, Ss58 or Ss60, the sub-control means 200 next calculates points according to the evaluation displayed on the display screen 11a and in accordance with the specifications shown in FIG. 107. The sub-control means 200 then adds the calculated points to the score stored in a specified storage area of the RAM provided in the sub-control means 200 (step Ss62). Thereafter, the sub-control means 200 ends the second stop time score calculation processing and performs other processing.

Furthermore, in a game in which any one of the eye-pressing images 1 to 57 is displayed during practice mode, when the last reel stops, the sub-control means 200 executes the third stop time score calculation process shown in FIG. 113. First, the sub-control means 200 judges whether or not the second stop operation has failed to be pressed (step Ss70). Specifically, the sub-control means 200 judges whether or not the second stop operation failure information is stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM provided in the sub-control means 200 by the process of step Ss42 in FIG. 112. If the second stop operation failure information is stored, the judgment result of step Ss70 becomes YES, and information indicating that the third stop operation has failed to be pressed (third stop operation failure information) is saved in a predetermined storage area of the RAM provided in the sub-control means 200 (step Ss72), and the third stop time score calculation process is terminated and other processes are performed.

If the second stop operation was successful in the judgment process of step Ss70 (i.e., the second stop operation failure information was not stored in the RAM of the sub-control means 200), the judgment result will be NO, and the sub-control means 200 will judge whether the third stopped reel is the right reel 3c (step Ss74). If the third stopped reel is not the right reel 3c, the judgment result of step Ss74 will be NO, and the process will proceed to step Ss72, where the third stop operation failure information is saved in a specified storage area of the RAM provided in the sub-control means 200. Then, the third stop time score calculation process will end, and other processes will be performed.

On the other hand, if the third stopped reel is the right reel 3c, the result of the determination in step Ss74 is YES, and the sub-control means 200 determines whether the pattern of the right reel in the eye-pressing image displayed on the display screen 11a matches the pattern of the right reel 3c stopped and displayed (stopped) in the display window W (step Ss76). If they do not match, the result of the determination is NO, and the process proceeds to step Ss72, where the third stop operation failure information is saved in a specified storage area of the RAM provided in the sub-control means 200, after which the score calculation process at the third stop is terminated and other processes are performed.

If there is a match, the result of the determination in step Ss76 is YES, and the sub-control means 200 determines whether the perfect press of the right stop switch 26c was successful (step Ss78). This determination is made based on the stop operation information for the right stop switch 26c sent from the main control means 100, just like in the case of the middle stop switch 26b described above. In other words, it is determined whether the success determination pattern number for the right reel of the press image displayed on the display screen 11a matches the pattern number at the time of the stop operation grasped from the stop operation information, among the success determination pattern numbers for each press image shown in FIG. 106.

If the success determination symbol number for the right reel does not match the stop operation symbol number obtained from the received stop operation information, the result of the determination in step Ss78 is NO, and the image "So-so" is displayed on the display screen 11a (step Ss80). On the other hand, if the success determination symbol number for the right reel matches the stop operation symbol number, the result of the determination in step Ss78 is YES, and the sub-control means 200 next determines whether the stop operation step number obtained from the stop operation information for the right stop switch 26c is within the range of 5 to 9 (step Ss82). If the stop operation step number is within the range of 5 to 9, the result of the determination in step Ss82 is YES, and the image "Marvelous" is displayed on the display screen 11a (step Ss84).

If the number of steps at the time of the stop operation is outside the range of 5 to 9 in the judgment process of step Ss82, the judgment result of step Ss82 becomes NO, and the sub-control means 200 then judges whether or not the number of steps at the time of the stop operation is within the range of 10 to 15 (step Ss86). If the number of steps at the time of the stop operation is within the range of 10 to 15, the judgment result of step Ss86 becomes YES, and the image of "Excellent" is displayed on the display screen 11a (step Ss88). On the other hand, if the number of steps at the time of the stop operation is outside the range of 10 to 15, the judgment result of step Ss86 becomes NO, and the image of "Cool" is displayed on the display screen 11a (step Ss90).

Then, when the evaluation on the accuracy of the Vita-oshi is displayed on the display screen 11a by the processing of steps Ss80, Ss84, Ss88 or Ss90, the sub-control means 200 then calculates points according to the specifications shown in FIG. 107 according to the evaluation displayed on the display screen 11a. Then, the sub-control means 200 adds the calculated points to the score stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM provided in the sub-control means 200 (step Ss92). After that, the sub-control means 200 ends the third stop score calculation process and performs other processes.

(Score calculation process when the 3-time drum push image is displayed)
Next, the contents of the score calculation process when the three-cylinder vita-push image (see FIG. 101(b)) is displayed will be described with reference to FIG. 114 to FIG. 116. FIG. 114 is a flowchart of the first stop score calculation process executed at the first stop, FIG. 115 is a flowchart of the second stop score calculation process executed at the second stop, and FIG. 116 is a flowchart of the third stop score calculation process executed at the third stop.

In a game in which a three-drum vita-push image is displayed during practice mode, when the first reel stops, the sub-control means 200 executes the first stop time score calculation process shown in FIG. 114. First, the sub-control means 200 judges whether or not the symbol displayed (stopped) in the display window W for the first stopped reel matches the symbol of the corresponding reel in the three-drum vita-push image displayed on the display screen 11a (step Ss100). If they do not match, the judgment result in step Ss100 is NO, and the first stop operation failure information is saved in a predetermined storage area of the RAM provided in the sub-control means 200 (step Ss102), the first stop time score calculation process is terminated, and other processes are performed.

On the other hand, if there is a match, the determination result in step Ss100 becomes YES, and the sub-control means 200 determines whether the number of steps at the time of the stop operation determined from the stop operation information transmitted from the main control means 100 for the first stopped reel is within the range of 5 to 9 (step Ss104). If the number of steps at the time of the stop operation is within the range of 5 to 9, the determination result in step Ss104 becomes YES, and the image of "Marvelous" is displayed on the display screen 11a (step Ss106).

If the number of steps at the time of the stop operation is outside the range of 5 to 9 in the judgment process of step Ss104, the judgment result of step Ss104 becomes NO, and the sub-control means 200 then judges whether or not the number of steps at the time of the stop operation is within the range of 10 to 15 (step Ss108). If the number of steps at the time of the stop operation is within the range of 10 to 15, the judgment result of step Ss108 becomes YES, and the image of "Excellent" is displayed on the display screen 11a (step Ss110). On the other hand, if the number of steps at the time of the stop operation is outside the range of 10 to 15, the judgment result of step Ss108 becomes NO, and the image of "Cool" is displayed on the display screen 11a (step Ss112).

Then, when the evaluation regarding the accuracy of the Vita-oshi is displayed on the display screen 11a by the processing of step Ss106, Ss110 or Ss112, the sub-control means 200 next calculates points according to the evaluation displayed on the display screen 11a and in accordance with the specifications shown in FIG. 107. The sub-control means 200 then adds the calculated points to the score stored in a specified storage area of the RAM provided in the sub-control means 200 (step Ss114). Thereafter, the sub-control means 200 ends the first stop score calculation process and performs other processes.

In a game in which a three-reel vita-push image is displayed during practice mode, when the second reel stops, the sub-control means 200 executes the second stop time score calculation process shown in FIG. 115. First, the sub-control means 200 judges whether or not the first stop operation has failed to be vita-push (step Ss120). Specifically, the sub-control means 200 judges whether or not the first stop operation failure information has been stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM provided in the sub-control means 200 by the process of step Ss102 in FIG. 114. If the first stop operation failure information has been stored, the judgment result of step Ss120 becomes YES, and the second stop operation failure information is saved in a predetermined storage area of the RAM provided in the sub-control means 200 (step Ss122), the second stop time score calculation process is terminated, and other processes are performed.

In the judgment process of step Ss120, if the first stop operation was successful (i.e., the first stop operation failure information was not stored in the RAM of the sub-control means 200), the judgment result is NO, and the sub-control means 200 judges whether the symbol displayed (stopped and displayed) in the display window W for the second stopped reel matches the symbol of the corresponding reel in the three-reel vita-push image displayed on the display screen 11a (step Ss124). If they do not match, the judgment result of step Ss124 is NO, and the process proceeds to step Ss122, where the second stop operation failure information is saved in a specified storage area of the RAM provided in the sub-control means 200, the second stop time score calculation process is terminated, and other processes are performed.

On the other hand, if there is a match, the determination result in step Ss124 becomes YES, and the sub-control means 200 determines whether the number of steps at the time of the stop operation determined from the stop operation information transmitted from the main control means 100 for the second stopped reel is within the range of 5 to 9 (step Ss126). If the number of steps at the time of the stop operation is within the range of 10 to 15, the determination result in step Ss126 becomes YES, and the image of "Marvelous" is displayed on the display screen 11a (step Ss128).

If the number of steps at the time of the stop operation is outside the range of 5 to 9 in the judgment process of step Ss126, the judgment result of step Ss126 becomes NO, and the sub-control means 200 next judges whether the number of steps at the time of the stop operation is within the range of 10 to 15 (step Ss130). If the number of steps at the time of the stop operation is within the range of 10 to 15, the judgment result of step Ss130 becomes YES, and the image of "Excellent" is displayed on the display screen 11a (step Ss132). On the other hand, if the number of steps at the time of the stop operation is outside the range of 10 to 15, the judgment result of step Ss130 becomes NO, and the image of "Cool" is displayed on the display screen 11a (step Ss134).

Then, when the evaluation regarding the accuracy of the Vita-oshi is displayed on the display screen 11a by the processing of step Ss128, Ss132 or Ss134, the sub-control means 200 next calculates points according to the specifications shown in FIG. 107 in accordance with the evaluation displayed on the display screen 11a. The sub-control means 200 then adds the calculated points to the score stored in a specified storage area of the RAM provided in the sub-control means 200 (step Ss136). Thereafter, the sub-control means 200 ends the second stop time score calculation processing and performs other processing.

In a game in which a three-reel vita-push image is displayed during practice mode, when the last reel stops, the sub-control means 200 executes the third stop time score calculation process shown in FIG. 116. First, the sub-control means 200 judges whether or not the second stop operation has failed to be vita-push (step Ss140). Specifically, the sub-control means 200 judges whether or not second stop operation failure information has been stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM provided in the sub-control means 200 by the process of step Ss122 in FIG. 115. If second stop operation failure information has been stored, the judgment result of step Ss140 becomes YES, and the second stop operation failure information is saved in a predetermined storage area of the RAM provided in the sub-control means 200 (step Ss142), the third stop time score calculation process is terminated, and other processes are performed.

In the judgment process of step Ss140, if the second stop operation was successful in the vita-oshi (i.e., the second stop operation failure information was not stored in the RAM of the sub-control means 200), the judgment result is NO, and the sub-control means 200 judges whether the pattern displayed in the display window W for the third stopped reel matches the pattern of the corresponding reel in the three-reel vita-oshi image displayed on the display screen 11a (step Ss144). If they do not match, the judgment result of step Ss144 is NO, and the process proceeds to step Ss142, where the third stop operation failure information is saved in a predetermined storage area of the RAM provided in the sub-control means 200, and the third stop time score calculation process is terminated and other processes are performed.

On the other hand, if there is a match, the determination result in step Ss144 becomes YES, and the sub-control means 200 determines whether the count value of the 1 symbol counter included in the stop operation information transmitted from the main control means 100 for the third stopped reel is within the range of 5 to 9 (step Ss146). If the count value of the 1 symbol counter is within the range of 5 to 9, the determination result in step Ss146 becomes YES, and the image of "Marvelous" is displayed on the display screen 11a (step Ss148).

If the number of steps at the time of the stop operation is outside the range of 5 to 9 in the judgment process of step Ss146, the judgment result of step Ss146 becomes NO, and the sub-control means 200 next judges whether the number of steps at the time of the stop operation is within the range of 10 to 15 (step Ss150). If the number of steps at the time of the stop operation is within the range of 10 to 15, the judgment result of step Ss150 becomes YES, and the image of "Excellent" is displayed on the display screen 11a (step Ss152). On the other hand, if the number of steps at the time of the stop operation is outside the range of 10 to 15, the judgment result of step Ss150 becomes NO, and the image of "Cool" is displayed on the display screen 11a (step Ss154).

Then, when the evaluation regarding the accuracy of the vita-oshi is displayed on the display screen 11a by the processing of step Ss148, Ss152 or Ss154, the sub-control means 200 next calculates points according to the evaluation displayed on the display screen 11a and in accordance with the specifications shown in FIG. 107. The sub-control means 200 then adds the calculated points to the score stored in a specified storage area of the RAM provided in the sub-control means 200 (step Ss156). Thereafter, the sub-control means 200 ends the score calculation process at the third stop and performs other processes.

(Score calculation process when the symbol combination for adjusting the number of coins is completed)
Next, referring to FIG. 117, the contents of the score calculation process (score calculation when winning the number adjustment role) performed when the winning 38 symbol combination (symbol combination for adjusting the number of coins) is lined up during the practice mode will be described. First, the sub-control means 200 judges whether the winning 38 symbol combination (see FIG. 90) is lined up on the active line (step Ss160). If the winning 38 symbol combination is not lined up on the active line, the judgment result of step Ss160 is NO, and the score calculation process when the number adjustment role is lined up is terminated and other processing is performed. On the other hand, if the winning 38 symbol combination is lined up on the active line, the judgment result of step Ss160 is YES, and the sub-control means 200 displays the image of "Marvelous" on the display screen 11a (step Ss162). The sub-control means 200 then calculates the points when the number-adjusting role is won according to the specifications shown in Fig. 107 (see the "Marvelous Judgment at Number-Adjusting Role" column in Fig. 107(b)). The sub-control means 200 then adds the calculated points to the score stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM it has (step Ss164). After that, the sub-control means 200 ends the score calculation process when the number-adjusting role is won and performs other processes.

(Score calculation process when there are no instructions regarding pressing the ball)
As described above, during practice mode, even if none of the eye-pressing images 1 to 57 (see Figures 103 to 105) are displayed, nor is the three-reel vita-pressing image (see Figure 101 (b)), and no cut-in effect is generated when the pattern combination for adjusting the number of coins (the pattern combination for winning 38) is aligned (hereinafter, such a situation will be referred to as "no instruction"), when the middle stop switch 26b is operated to make the first stop, the eye-pressing accuracy for the middle reel 3b is evaluated.

The contents of the score calculation process when no instruction is given will be described below with reference to FIG. 118. First, the sub-control means 200 judges whether the first stopped reel is the middle reel 3b or not (step Ss170). If the first stopped reel is not the middle reel 3b, the judgment result in step Ss170 will be NO, and the sub-control means 200 will end the score calculation process when no instruction is given and perform other processes. On the other hand, if the first stopped reel is the middle reel 3b, the judgment result in step Ss170 will be YES, and the sub-control means 200 will judge whether the perfect press of the middle stop switch 26b was successful or not (step Ss172).

That is, a determination is made as to whether the arrangement of the "Replay A" symbol (symbol number 14), the "Star A" symbol (symbol number 13), and the "Star B" symbol (symbol number 12) on the middle reel 3b has been pressed into the upper, middle, and lower rows of the display window W. Specifically, if the symbol number at the time of the stop operation grasped from the stop operation information transmitted from the main control means 100 when the middle stop switch 26b is subjected to the first stop operation is 12, it is determined that the vita-push has been successful. If the symbol number at the time of the stop operation is not 12 and it is determined that the vita-push of the middle stop switch 26b has not been successful, the determination result of step Ss172 becomes NO, and the sub-control means 200 ends the score calculation process when no instruction is given and performs other processes.

In contrast, if it is determined that the center stop switch 26b was successfully pressed, the determination result in step Ss172 becomes YES, and the sub-control means 200 then determines whether the number of steps at the time of the stop operation, as determined from the stop operation information transmitted from the main control means 100 when the center stop switch 26b was subjected to the first stop operation, is within the range of 5 to 9 (step Ss174). If the number of steps at the time of the stop operation is within the range of 5 to 9, the determination result in step Ss174 becomes YES, and the "Marvelous" image is displayed on the display screen 11a (step Ss176).

If the number of steps at the time of the stop operation is outside the range of 5 to 9 in the judgment process of step Ss174, the judgment result of step Ss174 becomes NO, and the sub-control means 200 next judges whether the number of steps at the time of the stop operation is within the range of 10 to 15 (step Ss178). If the number of steps at the time of the stop operation is within the range of 10 to 15, the judgment result of step Ss178 becomes YES, and the image of "Excellent" is displayed on the display screen 11a (step Ss180). On the other hand, if the number of steps at the time of the stop operation is outside the range of 10 to 15, the judgment result of step Ss178 becomes NO, and the image of "Cool" is displayed on the display screen 11a (step Ss182).

Then, when the evaluation regarding the accuracy of the vita-oshi is displayed on the display screen 11a by the processing of step Ss176, Ss180 or Ss182, the sub-control means 200 next calculates points according to the evaluation displayed on the display screen 11a and in accordance with the specifications shown in FIG. 107. The sub-control means 200 then adds the calculated points to the score stored in a specified storage area of the RAM provided in the sub-control means 200 (step Ss184). Thereafter, the sub-control means 200 ends the score calculation process at the third stop and performs other processes.

The sub-control means 200 that executes the various score calculation processes described above can be said to function as a score determination means. In addition, among the various score calculation processes described above, only the score calculation process when a single drum vita-oshi image is displayed (Figs. 111 to 113) is executed, and the score calculation process when a three drum vita-oshi image is displayed (Figs. 114 to 116), the score calculation process when a symbol combination for adjusting the number of coins is completed (Fig. 117), and the score calculation process when there is no instruction regarding eye-pressing (Fig. 118) may not be executed depending on the specifications of the gaming machine.

<Example of using scores calculated during practice mode>
The score calculated by the score calculation process shown in Figures 111 to 118 may be configured to be displayed on the image display device 11 for a predetermined time at the end of one practice mode. Items to be displayed on the image display device 11 at this time may be, for example, the score in the practice mode (the total value of points awarded during the practice mode), the start date and time of the practice mode, the elapsed time of play at the end of the practice mode, the number of evaluations of "Marvelous", the number of evaluations of "Excellent", the number of evaluations of "Cool", the number of times a single drum alarm was issued, the number of times a three-time drum alarm was issued, the number of times a number-adjusting role was won, and the like.

In addition, the information on the above items may be configured to be stored in the RAM of the sub-control means 200 as a practice mode history for each practice mode that has been executed. In this case, the history of some of the practice modes that have been executed may be stored. For example, the history of the current practice mode and the history of the practice mode with the highest score among the practice modes executed up to that point may be stored in the RAM.

The history of each practice mode may be displayed on the display screen 11a by the player's operation. For example, when the decision button 55 is operated while no game is being played on the gaming machine, a menu screen may be displayed on the display screen 11a, and an option to display the history of the practice mode (for example, an item "Display practice mode history") may be provided in the displayed menu screen. When the player selects the item "Display practice mode history" from the menu screen, the display screen 11a displays the various information described above for each practice mode. In this case, if the history of multiple practice modes is saved and all the practice mode histories cannot be displayed on one screen, the history of each practice mode may be displayed individually, and the history of the practice mode displayed on the display screen 11a may be switched by operating the selection button 54.

The gaming machine of this embodiment may also be applied to a gaming machine in a gaming system mainly composed of a server connected to a network, an information terminal owned by a player, and the gaming machine. In such a gaming system, each player may transmit the history of the practice mode that he or she has performed to a specified server connected to the Internet, and the specified server may generate a ranking based on the scores contained in the transmitted practice mode history, and each player may view the ranking. For example, a player may perform a specified procedure to register his or her identification information (ID) with a specified server, and obtain from the specified server a password containing information that can identify his or her ID. The gaming machine is configured to allow the password issued by the specified server to be entered, and when the password is entered into the gaming machine and play is started, the sub-control means 200 records history information (including practice mode history information) of various items related to the game performed after the password is entered.

When a player wants to participate in a ranking of scores obtained during the practice mode (hereinafter, in this embodiment, referred to as "eye-pressing ranking"), the player transmits his/her score information stored in the RAM of the sub-control means 200 to the above-mentioned predetermined server. For example, in a gaming machine, an item "two-dimensional code display" is provided on the above-mentioned menu screen, and when this item is selected by the player, the sub-control means 200 displays a two-dimensional code including information (access information) of the URL (Uniform Resource Locator) of the predetermined server, the player's ID corresponding to the password entered at the start of the game, and the practice mode history information on the display screen 11a. Therefore, the sub-control means 200 also has a function as a two-dimensional code generating means. Here, the practice mode history information included in the two-dimensional code is related to the practice mode history showing the highest score among the practice mode history stored in the RAM of the sub-control means 200. Also, it may be configured to erase the practice mode history stored in the RAM of the sub-control means 200 by displaying the two-dimensional code on the display screen 11a. This makes it possible to prevent your practice mode history from being used as someone else's practice mode history.

When a player photographs the two-dimensional code displayed on the display screen 11a with the camera of an information terminal such as a mobile phone or smartphone, the player can access a specified server from the information terminal via the Internet based on the URL information contained in the two-dimensional code. When the specified server is accessed, the practice mode history information contained in the two-dimensional code is transmitted from the information terminal to the specified server. In addition, GPS information of the location where the two-dimensional code was photographed is obtained, and location information (e.g., latitude and longitude) that can identify the location where the two-dimensional code was photographed is generated based on the obtained GPS information, and the generated location information is also transmitted when the practice mode history information is sent.

The location information sent to the specified server may be location information of the location where the specified server is accessed from the information terminal. This location information is generated from GPS information acquired when the specified server is accessed from the information terminal. Also, if location information cannot be generated when the two-dimensional code is photographed by the camera of the information terminal, location information of the location where the player was when the specified server was accessed may be generated and transmitted. Also, the server may be provided with information on game arcades throughout Japan and their locations in advance, and the gaming machine may include information on the game arcade where the gaming machine is installed in the two-dimensional code described above. In this way, the server may determine the area where the player played based on the game arcade information transmitted from the information terminal that read the two-dimensional code.

The specified server that receives the practice mode history information from the information terminal determines which of the eight regions (Hokkaido, Tohoku, Kanto, Chubu, Kinki, Chugoku, Shikoku, and Kyushu) the location information sent together with the information belongs to, and associates the determined region and the player's ID with the received practice mode history information. The specified server also updates the eye-pressing ranking based on the received practice mode history information.

When a player wishes to view the ranking of pressing moves, the player accesses a specified server from an information terminal and selects the "Ranking of Pressing Moves" item on the menu screen displayed on the screen of the information terminal. This causes the contents of the ranking of pressing moves to be displayed on the screen of the information terminal. In this embodiment, the ranking of pressing moves can be a national ranking or a regional ranking. Here, FIG. 119 shows an example of the display of the national ranking, and FIG. 120 shows an example of the display of the regional ranking.

In the national ranking screen shown in FIG. 119(a), the screen dsp of the information terminal is a touch panel, and the character string "National Ranking" is displayed in the title display area ta provided at the top of the screen dsp. Below the title display area ta, a display switch button b1 is displayed with the character string "Go to Regional Ranking". When this display switch button b1 is tapped, the display of the screen dsp switches to the regional ranking shown in FIG. 120. Below the display switch button b1, four tabs t1 to t4 are displayed in the width direction of the screen dsp. Furthermore, the character string "My Ranking" is displayed in tab t1, the character string "Weekly" is displayed in tab t2, the character string "Monthly" is displayed in tab t3, and the character string "All Time" is displayed in tab t4. Furthermore, the display area below the tabs t1 to t4 is the ranking display area ra.

Figure 119(a) shows the weekly national ranking screen displayed in the ranking display area ra when tab t2 is tapped, and a period designation area tm for designating the period (one week) of the ranking to be displayed is displayed above the ranking display area ra. When the period designation area tm is tapped, a numeric keypad for inputting numbers and a cursor are displayed, allowing the start and end of the desired week to be input. When the display button b2 displayed below the period designation area tm is tapped, the ranking for the designated one week is displayed. In Figure 119(a), first, an individual ranking is displayed, including the nickname (Mr. XX) associated with the player's ID transmitted when accessing a specific server, the highest score (best score) associated with that nickname, and the national ranking (aaath place) based on that best score.

And, below the individual ranking, the national ranking for the specified week is displayed in order of score. For each rank, the player's nickname and the results of the practice mode are displayed, and the contents of the results include the score value (Score), the elapsed time of playing until one practice mode ends (TIME), the number of times that the player was evaluated as Cool (Cool number of times), the number of times that the player was evaluated as Excellent (Excellent number of times), the number of times that the player was evaluated as Marvelous (Marvelous number of times), the number of times that the single-time drum warning was performed (total number of times that the single-time drum warning was performed), and the number of times that the triple-time drum warning was performed (total number of times that the triple-time drum warning was performed). In FIG. 119(a), only the results of the second-ranked player are displayed on the screen dsp, but by flicking upward on the screen dsp, the display contents can be scrolled upward to display the results of lower rank players.

When tab t3 is tapped, the monthly national ranking screen is displayed in the ranking display area ra, and the displayed contents are almost the same as those shown in FIG. 119(a). However, the period that can be specified in the period specification area tm is one month. When tab t1 is tapped, the contents shown in FIG. 119(b) (My Ranking) are displayed in the ranking display area ra. In other words, for the player ID transmitted when accessing a specific server, the practice mode results from the past to the present that are stored on the server are displayed in descending order of score value.

Here, the content of the results in the practice mode is the same as that in FIG. 119(a), but in FIG. 119(b), the date the results were recorded is displayed next to each ranking. Also, in FIG. 119(b), only part of the results for the third place ranking are displayed on the screen DSP, but by flicking upward on the screen DSP, the display content can be scrolled upward and lower ranking results can be displayed. When tab t4 is tapped, the screen DSP displays the historical rankings. The display content of the historical rankings is the same as that of the My Rankings shown in FIG. 119(b), but for each ranking, the nickname of the player who was ranked in that position is displayed.

When the display switch button b1 is tapped on the national ranking screen shown in FIG. 119, the regional rankings shown in FIG. 120 are displayed on the screen dsp. At this time, the character string "Regional Rankings" is displayed in the title display area ta, and the character string "Go to National Rankings" is displayed on the display switch button b1. In addition, tabs t1 to t4, which are the same as those on the national rankings screen, are displayed below the display switch button b1, and the display area below the tabs t1 to t4 is the ranking display area ra.

FIG. 120(a) shows a screen of weekly regional rankings displayed in the ranking display area ra when the tab t2 is tapped. A period designation area tm for designating the period (one week) of the rankings to be displayed is displayed above the ranking display area ra, and a region designation area ar for designating the region of the rankings to be displayed is displayed in the period designation area tm. When the period designation area tm is tapped, a numeric keypad for inputting numbers and a cursor are displayed, allowing the user to input the start and end of the desired week. When the region designation area ar is tapped, eight options are displayed, namely, "Hokkaido region", "Tohoku region", "Kanto region", "Chubu region", "Kinki region", "Chugoku region", "Shikoku region", and "Kyushu region", and when one of the options is tapped, the name of the selected region is displayed in the region designation area ar.

When the display button b2 displayed below the region designation area ar is tapped, the rankings for the specified week are displayed for the practice mode history associated with the selected region. In FIG. 120(a), the Kanto region is selected as the region, and an individual ranking is displayed that includes the nickname (Mr. XX) associated with the player's ID sent when accessing the specified server, the best score corresponding to that nickname, and the rank in the Kanto region based on that best score (bbbth place).

Below the individual rankings, the rankings for the specified week in the Kanto region are displayed in order of score. For each ranking, the player's nickname and practice mode results are displayed, and the content of the results displayed is the same as in Figure 119(a). Also, in Figure 119(b), only the results of the top-ranked player are displayed on the screen dsp, but by flicking upwards on the screen dsp, the displayed content can be scrolled upwards and lower-ranked results can be displayed.

When the tab t3 is tapped, the monthly ranking screen for the selected region is displayed in the ranking display area ra, and the display contents are almost the same as those shown in FIG. 120(a). However, the period that can be specified in the period specification area tm is one month. When the tab t1 is tapped, the contents shown in FIG. 120(b) (my ranking) are displayed in the ranking display area ra. That is, for the ID of the player transmitted when accessing the specified server, the practice mode results that resulted in the best score are displayed among the practice mode history recorded in each region. In FIG. 120(b), only the best score results in the Kinki region are displayed on the screen dsp, but the best score results in other regions can be displayed by flicking upward on the screen dsp. When the tab t4 is tapped, the practice mode results that are the all-time top scores in each region and the rankings in which those results were recorded are displayed on the screen dsp. The display contents of the all-time rankings by region are the same as those of the my rankings shown in FIG. 120(b), but the nicknames of the players who achieved the best scores are displayed for each region.

In this way, in the third embodiment, since it is possible to know the timing skills (accuracy) of other players, it is possible to inspire a competitive spirit in players regarding timing skills, increasing their motivation to play, and providing a new interest in competing with other players in timing skills. Note that the items displayed on the screen of the information terminal are not limited to those shown in Figures 119 and 120. For example, some of the items shown in Figures 119 and 120 may be omitted. Also, for example, a message inviting top-ranked players to an event where they will compete in timing accuracy may be displayed on the screen of their information terminal or sent by email from the server of the gaming system.

In the third embodiment, a slot machine (reel type gaming machine) that uses gaming medals as gaming value is described as an example of a gaming machine, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention can be similarly applied to, for example, reel type gaming machines that use gaming balls as gaming value, reel type gaming machines that use information recorded on an electronic recording medium as gaming value, mahjong ball gaming machines, arrange ball machines, pachinko machines, etc., and similar effects can be obtained.

In addition, the machine may be a reel type gaming machine that does not pay out game media as a bonus and judges only the accuracy of the eye-pushing. In this case, as in the present embodiment, it is not necessary to divide the control means into a main control means and a sub-control means, and each part of the gaming machine may be controlled by a single control means. In addition, in the case of a reel type gaming machine that judges only the accuracy of the eye-pushing, the number of reels may be one or four or more. Furthermore, it may be configured to perform reel stop control that always pulls in each individual pattern of each reel with one frame slip without performing a role drawing, and for example, one eye-pushing image selected by drawing from the eye-pushing images 1 to 57 shown in Figures 103 to 105 is displayed, and if the displayed eye-pushing image matches the pattern of each reel that is stopped and displayed, it may be determined that the vita-pushing is successful. Even in this configuration, the accuracy of the vita-pushing can be judged in more detail using the pattern position detection means and skill determination means in the third embodiment. Also, in the case of a slot machine that judges only the accuracy of the button presses, the practice mode may be started by a trigger other than winning a bonus (for example, by pressing a specific button).

[Fourth embodiment]
Hereinafter, the slot machine according to the fourth embodiment (hereinafter also referred to as the "fourth embodiment slot machine") will be described with additional reference to FIGS. 121 to 133. Hereinafter, the characteristic parts of the fourth embodiment slot machine will be mainly described. The characteristic parts described below are not limited to the fourth embodiment slot machine, and can be combined with other embodiments. The fourth embodiment slot machine has a basic configuration that is common or similar to the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment described above, and the drawings referred to in the first embodiment will be referred to in this embodiment for the configuration, and detailed description will be omitted. In addition, each control process such as the role determination process and the reel control process described in the slot machine 1 can be applied to the fourth embodiment slot machine in the same manner or with some changes to the process contents.

Characteristic performance control in this embodiment
The following describes the details of the characteristic presentation control executed in the slot machine of this embodiment.

<Characteristic types of production control and their contents>
(Display control of rotation stop suggestion image)
In the slot machine of this embodiment, in order to prevent the performance of the stepping motors 35a, 35b, and 35c shown in Fig. 2 from deteriorating due to heat generated by continuous operation for a long period of time, if the player does not perform an operation to stop the reels even after a predetermined time has passed since the reels started to rotate, a rotation stop suggestion image is displayed on the image display device 11. This rotation stop suggestion image is, for example, an image showing a message such as "Please stop the reels", and may be displayed superimposed on the presentation screen that has been displayed on the image display device 11 until then, or the presentation screen that has been displayed until then may be switched to a notice screen including the rotation stop suggestion image.

The display control of the spin stop suggestion image is performed by the sub-control means 200 shown in FIG. 9. Specifically, when a specified number of medals have been inserted (or replay is possible), and the sub-control means 200 receives a specific control command from the main control means 100 in response to the operation of the start lever 25 shown in FIG. 1, the sub-control means 200 starts counting the timer, and when the timer counts a specific time while the stop switches 26a, 26b, and 26c remain in an unoperated state, the sub-control means 200 displays the spin stop suggestion image on the image display device 11.

The control commands sent from the main control means 100 when the start lever 25 is operated include, for example, an instruction number command, a performance group number command, and a command to start rotating all reels, as explained in the first embodiment. The sub-control means 200 starts the timer when it receives a specific control command from among these control commands (collectively referred to as "lever operation reception commands").

(Display control of game standby screen)
In the slot machine of this embodiment, after one game is ended by stopping all the reels, if a predetermined time is reached without any operation being performed on the slot machine (for example, inserting a medal to play the next game, or operating the BET switches 22, 23 or the settlement switch 24), the sub-control means 200 starts displaying a game standby screen (so-called "demo screen") on the image display device 11. This game standby screen is composed of, for example, an image showing the logo of the manufacturer that manufactured the slot machine, the model name of the slot machine, and animation of characters and the like used in the performance performed by the slot machine. The display control of the game standby screen is also performed by the sub-control means 200. Specifically, when the sub-control means 200 receives a predetermined control command from the main control means 100 triggered by the stopping of all the reels, the sub-control means 200 starts counting a timer, and when the timer counts a predetermined time while no operation such as inserting a medal is performed, the sub-control means 200 starts displaying a game standby screen on the image display device 11.

The control commands sent from the main control means 100 when all reels have stopped include, for example, the all stop command, the payout number command, and the role determination result command, as described in the first embodiment. The sub-control means 200 starts the timer when it receives a specific control command from among these control commands (collectively referred to as "all reels stop command").

(Volume control of performance sounds)
In the slot machine of this embodiment, after one game ends due to the stopping of all reels, when the sound effects (e.g., BGM) that were being output during the game are still being output, if a predetermined time is reached without any operation being performed on the slot machine (e.g., inserting a medal to play the next game, or operating the BET switch 22, 23 or the settlement switch 24), the sub-control means 200 reduces the volume of the sound effects output from the speakers 15a, 15b, 44a, 44b (see Figs. 2 and 9) in order to reduce power consumption. Specifically, when a predetermined control command is received from among the above-mentioned all reels stop command, the timer starts to count, and when the timer counts a predetermined time while no operation such as inserting a medal is performed, the volume of the sound effects is reduced. Here, "reducing the volume" also includes the case where the volume is zero (a state in which no sound effects are being output).

<Timing of various performance controls>
Next, the timing of the display control of the spin stop suggestion image and the game standby screen, and the volume control of the performance sound will be described with reference to the timing chart shown in FIG. 121. FIG. 121(a) is a timing chart showing the timing from the operation of the start lever to the display of the spin stop suggestion image, and shows the on/off of the start lever 25 and the stop switches 26a, 26b, and 26c, the spin/stop of the first to third stop reels, and the timing of the start of the display of the spin stop suggestion image. Here, the first to third stop reels indicate the order in which the spinning is stopped, and do not indicate the distinction between the left reel 3a, the center reel 3b, and the right reel 3c. That is, the first stop reel is the first reel to stop, the second stop reel is the second reel to stop, and the third stop reel is the last reel to stop.

Figure 121 (b) is a timing chart showing the timing from when all reels have stopped until the game standby screen is displayed and the volume of the background music, which is one of the sound effects, is reduced, and shows the timing of the on/off of the start lever 25 and the stop switches 26a, 26b, 26c, the rotation/stop of the first to third stopped reels, the start of the display of the rotation stop indication image, and the reduction in the volume of the output background music (marked as "Mute" in the figure).

In FIG. 121(a), when the start lever is turned on, all the reels start to rotate, and a lever operation reception command is sent from the main control means 100 to the sub-control means 200. When the sub-control means 200 receives a predetermined control command from the received lever operation reception command, the sub-control means 200 starts counting the timer. If the time when the sub-control means 200 starts counting the timer is _ts1 (the time when the time _d1 has elapsed since the start lever was turned on), when time T1 has elapsed from time _ts1 without a stop operation being performed on any of the stop switches, the spin stop suggestion image is displayed on the image display device 11. That is, when time T1 has elapsed from a predetermined timing (time _ts1 ) after the start lever is operated, the spin stop suggestion image is displayed on the image display device 11. When a player who has seen the spin stop suggestion image operates any of the stop switches to stop, the sub-control means 200 ends the display of the spin stop suggestion image.

The sub-control means 200 starts counting the timer again when it receives a predetermined control command from the main control means 100 in response to the stop operation of the stop switch. If the time when the sub-control means 200 starts counting the timer is _ts2 (the time when a time _d2 has elapsed since the first stopped reel stopped), then when a predetermined time (preferably equal to or shorter than time T1) has elapsed from time _ts2 without a stop operation being performed on the next stop switch, it causes the image display device 11 to display a spin stop suggestion image.

Next, in FIG. 121(b), when the start lever is turned on, this triggers a lever operation reception command to be sent from the main control means 100 to the sub-control means 200. If the performance group number indicated by the performance group number command in the received lever operation reception command is a specific performance group number, the sub-control means 200 outputs background music from the speakers 15a, 15b, 44a, 44b as a performance. After that, the player operates the stop switches 26a, 26b, 26c in sequence to stop the reels, and when all the reels have stopped, the main control means 100 sends the all reels stopped command described above.

When the sub-control means 200 receives a predetermined control command from among the received all reel stop commands, the sub-control means 200 starts timing the timer. If the time at which the sub-control means 200 starts timing the timer is _ts3 , the sub-control means 200 displays a game standby screen on the image display device 11 when time T2 has elapsed from time _ts3 (the time when time _d3 has elapsed since the third stopped reel stopped). In addition, when time T3 has elapsed from time _ts3 , the sub-control means 200 reduces the volume of the background music that had been output up until that point.

Here, if the time from a specified timing after the start lever is operated until the spin stop indication screen is displayed is defined as the first specified time, the time from when all the reels have stopped until the game standby screen is displayed is defined as the second specified time, and the time from when all the reels have stopped until the volume of the background music is reduced is defined as the third specified time, the second specified time and the third specified time are the same, and the first specified time is longer than the second and third specified times described above.

In the above example, the display of the game standby screen and the reduction in the volume of the effect sound are performed when all the reels have stopped and one game has ended, and a break has been reached, so even if the time from when the game standby screen is displayed or the volume of the effect sound is reduced after all the reels have stopped is set relatively short, there is little risk of the player feeling annoyed. On the other hand, since the spin stop suggestion image is displayed while the reels are rotating, that is, during a game, if the time until the spin stop suggestion image is displayed is set short, for example, when the player is watching the reels spinning to press the button or enjoying the effect image or sound, there is a risk of the player feeling annoyed. Therefore, by setting the third predetermined time longer than the first predetermined time and the second predetermined time, it is possible to perform display control of the game standby screen and suppression control of power consumption in the gaming machine while reducing the risk of causing stress to the player, and to encourage the player to stop the reels.

In the example shown in FIG. 121, the volume of the BGM is controlled to be lowered when a predetermined time has elapsed since all reels have stopped, but separately, the volume of the BGM may be controlled to be lowered when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start lever is operated. A case in which such BGM volume control is performed together with the display control of the spin stop indication image and game standby screen described above will be explained with reference to the timing chart shown in FIG. 122. Note that in FIG. 122, the same times and durations as those shown in FIG. 121 are given the same symbols as in FIG. 121.

Figure 122(a) is a timing chart showing the timing from when the start lever is operated to when the spin stop indication image is displayed and the volume of the background music is reduced, and is the same as Figure 121(a) except for the addition of a timing chart for reducing the volume of the background music (marked "Mute" in the figure). Figure 122(b) is a timing chart showing the timing from when all the reels have stopped to when the game standby screen is displayed, and is the same as Figure 121(b) except for the deletion of the timing chart for reducing the volume of the background music.

In FIG. 122(a), when the start lever is turned on, all the reels start spinning, and a lever operation reception command is sent from the main control means 100 to the sub-control means 200. As a result, if the performance group number indicated by the performance group number command in the received lever operation reception command is a specific performance group number, the sub-control means 200 outputs background music from the speakers 15a, 15b, 44a, 44b as a performance. In addition, when the sub-control means 200 receives a specified control command in the received lever operation reception commands, the sub-control means 200 starts timing a timer.

Here, assuming that the time when the sub-control means 200 starts counting the timer is _ts1 , when time T1 has passed since time _ts1 without any stop operation being performed on any of the stop switches, the sub-control means 200 displays a rotation stop suggestion image on the image display device 11. When time T4 has passed since time _ts1 without any stop operation being performed on any of the stop switches, the sub-control means 200 reduces the volume of the BGM that was being output. Then, when a player who has seen the rotation stop suggestion image operates any of the stop switches to stop, the sub-control means 200 ends the display of the rotation stop suggestion image and returns the volume of the BGM to the level before it was reduced.

122(b), when the start lever is turned on, this triggers the main control means 100 to send a lever operation acceptance command to the sub-control means 200. Thereafter, when the player operates the stop switches 26a, 26b, 26c in sequence to stop all the reels, the main control means 100 sends the all reels stop command described above. On the other hand, when the sub-control means 200 receives a predetermined control command from among the all reels stop commands it starts timing the timer. Here, assuming that the time when the sub-control means 200 starts timing the timer is _ts3 , the sub-control means 200 displays a game standby screen on the image display device 11 when time T2 has elapsed from time _ts3 .

Here, if the time from a predetermined timing after the start lever is operated until the spin stop indication screen is displayed is defined as the first predetermined time, the time from a predetermined timing after all reels have stopped until the game standby screen is displayed is defined as the second predetermined time, and the time from a predetermined timing after the start lever is operated until the volume of the background music is reduced is defined as the fourth predetermined time, in the example of FIG. 122, the first predetermined time, second predetermined time, and fourth predetermined time are all the same length of time.

The display of the spin stop suggestion screen and game standby screen, as well as the reduction in the volume of the background music, all affect the progress of the presentation during play (the display of the game standby screen, for example, affects continuous presentations that are implemented across multiple games). Therefore, if these controls are executed while the player is playing, there is a risk that the player will lose interest or feel annoyed, so it is desirable to execute these controls when a period of time during which it is estimated that no play is being performed has passed. Therefore, by executing the display of the spin stop suggestion screen and game standby screen, as well as the reduction in the volume of the background music, when "a period of time during which it is estimated that no play is being performed" has passed, it is possible to reduce the risk of the player losing interest or feeling annoyed.

In addition, because the timer measurement time (specifically the measurement value set in the timer) referenced when displaying the spin stop suggestion screen and game standby screen and when lowering the volume of the background music can be made common, the amount of data stored in memory can be reduced and the control flow can be simplified. Furthermore, lowering the volume of the background music in conjunction with the display of the spin stop suggestion screen can better attract the attention of players or hall staff, thereby increasing the likelihood that the reel spinning will be stopped.

Next, in the example shown in FIG. 122, the volume of the BGM is reduced when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start lever was operated, but in addition to this, control may also be performed to reduce the volume of the BGM when a predetermined time has elapsed since all the reels have stopped. Such control will be explained with reference to the timing chart shown in FIG. 123. Note that in FIG. 123, the same times and durations as those shown in FIG. 121 and FIG. 122 are given the same symbols as those in FIG. 121 and FIG. 122.

Figure 123(a) is a timing chart showing the timing from when the start lever is operated until the spin stop indication image is displayed and the background music volume is reduced, and is similar to Figure 122(a). Also, Figure 123(b) is a timing chart showing the timing from when all reels have stopped until the game standby screen is displayed and the background music volume is reduced.

In FIG. 123(a), when the start lever is turned on, all the reels start spinning, and a lever operation reception command is sent from the main control means 100 to the sub-control means 200. As a result, if the performance group number indicated by the performance group number command in the received lever operation reception command is a specific performance group number, the sub-control means 200 outputs background music from the speakers 15a, 15b, 44a, 44b as a performance. In addition, when the sub-control means 200 receives a specified control command in the received lever operation reception commands, the sub-control means 200 starts timing a timer.

Here, assuming that the time when the sub-control means 200 starts counting the timer is _ts1 , when time T1 has passed since time _ts1 without any stop operation being performed on any of the stop switches, the sub-control means 200 displays a rotation stop suggestion image on the image display device 11. When time T4 has passed since time _ts1 without any stop operation being performed on any of the stop switches, the sub-control means 200 reduces the volume of the BGM that was being output. Then, when a player who has seen the rotation stop suggestion image operates any of the stop switches to stop, the sub-control means 200 ends the display of the rotation stop suggestion image and returns the volume of the BGM to the level before it was reduced.

Next, in FIG. 123(b), when the start lever is turned on, the main control means 100 transmits a lever operation reception command to the sub-control means 200. After that, when the player operates the stop switches 26a, 26b, and 26c in sequence to stop all the reels, the main control means 100 transmits the above-mentioned all reels stop command. On the other hand, when the sub-control means 200 receives a predetermined control command from the all reels stop command, the sub-control means 200 starts counting the timer. Here, if the time when the sub-control means 200 starts counting the timer is _ts3 , the sub-control means 200 displays a game standby screen on the image display device 11 when time T2 has passed since time _ts3 . In addition, the sub-control means 200 reduces the volume of the BGM when time T3 has passed since time _ts3 .

Here, if the time from the specified timing after the start lever is operated until the spin stop indication screen is displayed is defined as the first specified time, the time from the specified timing after all reels have stopped until the game standby screen is displayed is defined as the second specified time, the time from the specified timing after all reels have stopped until the volume of the background music is reduced is defined as the third specified time, and the time from the specified timing after the start lever is operated until the volume of the background music is reduced is defined as the fourth specified time, in the example of FIG. 123, the first specified time and the fourth specified time are the same time, and the second specified time and the third specified time are the same time.

As mentioned above, since the display of the spin stop suggestion screen and game standby screen and the reduction in the volume of the background music all affect the progress of the presentation during gameplay, it is desirable for these displays to be performed when a period of time during which it is estimated that no gameplay is being performed has elapsed. Therefore, by displaying the spin stop suggestion screen and game standby screen when the "period of time during which it is estimated that no gameplay is being performed" has elapsed and by reducing the volume of the background music in conjunction with each display, it is possible to more effectively reduce the power consumption of the gaming machine. In particular, by reducing the volume of the background music in conjunction with the display of the spin stop suggestion screen, it is possible to more effectively attract the attention of the player or hall staff, thereby increasing the likelihood that the reel spinning will be stopped.

In the examples shown in Figures 121(a), 122(a), and 123(a), when the stop switch is operated after the spin stop suggestion image is displayed, the display of the spin stop suggestion image is terminated and the timer starts counting again, and when a predetermined time has elapsed without the next stop operation being performed, the spin stop suggestion image is displayed again, but after the display of the spin stop suggestion image is terminated, it may not be displayed again. Also, separately from this, when the spin stop suggestion image is displayed, it may be configured to continue to display the spin stop suggestion image until the end of the game, even if a stop operation is performed thereafter.

<Management and display of error history information>
Next, an overview of the management and display of history information of errors and the like in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

(Control command transmitted from control command transmitting means)
The control command sending means 151 (see Figure 9) in this embodiment is configured to send to the sub-control means 200, in addition to the control commands described in the first embodiment, a control command including information indicating that the setting confirmation mode is in effect (hereinafter referred to as the "setting confirmation state command" as appropriate), a control command including information indicating that the setting change mode is in effect (hereinafter referred to as the "setting change state command" as appropriate), a control command including information indicating that the door is in an open state (front door 2 is open) (hereinafter referred to as the "door open state command" as appropriate), and a control command including information indicating that the door is in a closed state (front door 2 is closed) (hereinafter referred to as the "door closed state command" as appropriate).

When the main control means 100 detects the occurrence of an error, it transmits a control command (hereinafter, appropriately referred to as an "error occurrence control command") including information indicating the type of error that has occurred to the sub-control means 200, and when the detected error is resolved, it transmits a control command (hereinafter, appropriately referred to as an "error resolution control command") including information indicating that the error has been resolved.

(Displaying history information such as errors)
The sub-control means 200 of this embodiment is equipped with an RTC (real-time clock) circuit, and each time it receives the above-mentioned door open state command, door closed state command, or error occurrence control command from the main control means 100, it obtains the time at which the command was received from the RTC circuit, and combines this time information (reception time information) with information indicating the event indicated by the received command (occurrence event information), and sequentially stores and accumulates it in RAM 73 (see Figure 2) as error etc. history information.

The error history information stored in the RAM 73 can be viewed by selecting the "error history display mode" included in the system menu screen displayed on the image display device 11. The system menu screen is displayed on the image display device 11 by a predetermined operation performed by the slot machine manager or the like when checking the error history information described above, adjusting various parameters related to the performance, adjusting the current time, etc., and cannot be displayed to general players. As a procedure for displaying the system menu screen, for example, it is possible to configure the system menu screen to be displayed on the image display device 11 when a predetermined operation is performed after switching to either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode described in the first embodiment. Note that the mode in which the system menu screen can be displayed may be limited to either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Also, examples of the "predetermined operation" for displaying the system menu screen include the operation of the decision button 55 shown in FIG. 1, or the operation of each switch (start lever 25, stop switches 26a, 26b, 26c, 1-BET switch 22, MAX-BET switch 23, settlement switch 24, reset switch 82, etc.) that outputs an on/off signal to the main control board 60 shown in FIG. 2. Furthermore, when the system moves to a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode (when the display of the system menu screen is limited to one of the modes, that one mode), the system menu screen may be displayed even if the "predetermined operation" is not performed.

Here, an example of the system menu screen displayed on the image display device 11 is shown in Fig. 124(a). The system menu screen shown in this figure is displayed when a specified operation is performed after switching to the setting confirmation mode, and the upper left corner of the screen of the image display device 11 displays the characters "System Menu" and below that the characters "Checking settings". In addition, in the centre of the system menu screen, four items are displayed from the top of the screen: "Volume adjustment mode", "Side lamp test mode", "Error history display mode", and "Time setting mode".

Of the four items mentioned above, the "volume adjustment mode" is a mode that allows the volume of the performance sound generated during the performance to be adjusted. The "side lamp test mode" is a mode that allows the blinking patterns of the first performance lamp 12, the second performance lamp 13a, 13b, the third performance lamp 14a, 14b, and the decorative lamps 32a, 32b shown in FIG. 1 to be tested. The "error etc. history display mode" is a mode that allows the error etc. history information stored in the RAM 73 mentioned above to be displayed on the image display device 11. The "time setting mode" is a mode that allows the time to be adjusted in the RTC circuit provided in the sub-control means 200.

The above four selection items can be selected by operating the up button 54U and down button 54D of the selection buttons 54 and the decision button 55 shown in Fig. 1. Specifically, in the initial state of the system menu screen, the topmost displayed item "Volume Adjustment Mode" is selected. That is, the display of "Volume Adjustment Mode" shows that "Volume Adjustment Mode" has been selected by displaying the background in a dark color (e.g., black) and the text in white. In contrast, non-selected items are displayed with a white background and dark text.

In this state, when the lower button 54D is operated, the next lower item is selected each time it is operated, and when the "time setting mode" is selected and the lower button 54D is operated, the "volume adjustment mode" displayed at the top is selected. When the "volume adjustment mode" is selected and the upper button 54U is operated, the "time setting mode" is selected, and thereafter, each time the upper button 54U is operated, the next higher item is selected. Then, when the decision button 55 is operated with the desired item selected, the display on the image display device 11 switches to the screen of the selected mode.

For example, when the "Time Setting Mode" is selected on the system menu screen and the decision button 55 is operated, the display on the image display device 11 switches to the time setting screen shown in FIG. 124(b). Almost in the center of this time setting screen, the current time in the RTC circuit at the time "Time Setting Mode" was selected is displayed in "year", "month", "day", "hour", and "minute", and adjustable items among these are sandwiched between markers mk displayed as "▲" and "▼". In the initial state of the time setting screen, the "year" is adjustable as shown in FIG. 124(b). When the upper button 54U is operated in this state, the number indicating the year increases by one, and when the lower button 54D is operated, the number indicating the year decreases by one.

For example, when the right button 54R is operated while the year is adjustable, the display position of the marker mk shifts one item to the right each time it is operated (year → month → day → hour → minute). For example, when the left button 54L is operated while the minute is adjustable, the display position of the marker mk shifts one item to the left each time it is operated (minute → hour → day → month → year). Then, when the up button 54U and down button 54D are operated at the position where the marker mk is displayed, the value of the corresponding item can be changed. However, at this stage, the changed time has not been set in the RTC circuit, and when the decision button 55 is operated while the time setting screen is displayed, the changed time is reflected in the RTC circuit and the changed time is confirmed as the current time. Also, when the changed time is confirmed, the display of the image display device 11 switches back to the system menu screen. Although the RTC circuit keeps track of the current time down to the second, the time setting screen does not allow you to reset the seconds value or set it to a desired value.

Next, when the "Error History Display Mode" is selected on the system menu screen and the decision button 55 is operated, the display on the image display device 11 switches to the error history display screen shown in FIG. 124(c). On this error history display screen ([Error History Display] (1/2)), the history of errors (hereinafter also referred to as "events") is displayed in a table format consisting of a "No." column, a "Content" column, and an "Occurrence Time" column. Specifically, the events shown in the "Content" column and the occurrence times of the events shown in the "Occurrence Time" column are displayed in correspondence with each of the numbers "1" to "5" displayed in the "No." column. The error history display screen is composed of two screens, and when the right switch 54R or left switch 54L is operated on the error history display screen shown in FIG. 124(c), the display switches to the second error history display screen ([Error History Display] (2/2)) shown in FIG. 124(d). When the right switch 54R or left switch 54L is operated while the error history display screen shown in FIG. 124(d) is displayed, the screen will switch back to the error history display screen shown in FIG. 124(c).

The error history display screen shown in FIG. 124(d) shows the same contents as the error history display screen shown in FIG. 124(c), but the numbers displayed in the "No." column are "6" to "10". Here, the numbers displayed in the "No." column indicate the order of occurrence of the stored events, and the smaller the value, the more recently the event occurred. Therefore, in the error history display screens shown in FIG. 124(c) and (d), the event displayed in the row in which "1" is displayed in the "No." column (hereinafter referred to as "event No. 1". The same applies to the other "No." columns) is the most recently occurred event, and event No. 10 is the first event to occur. In addition, when a new event is stored, the event is displayed as event No. 1 on the error history display screen, and the numbers of each event that had been displayed on the error history display screen up until that point are moved down by one. In addition, No. 1 to No. If event No. 10 is displayed and a new event is stored, event No. 10 is erased, events No. 1 to No. 9 are shifted down one row to become events No. 2 to No. 10, and the newly stored event is displayed as event No. 1.

When the decision button 55 is operated while the error history display screen shown in FIG. 124(c) or FIG. 124(d) is displayed, the display on the image display device 11 switches to the system menu screen shown in FIG. 124(a).

Next, referring to FIG. 125, we will explain how the contents of the error history display screen change when an event that should be displayed on the error history display screen occurs while the error history display screen described above is being displayed. In this figure, the main events that occur on the slot machine are shown by dots on the time axis. Here, a "▼" dot indicates an event that should be displayed on the error history display screen, and a "●" dot indicates other events. Furthermore, each dot on the time axis merely indicates the events that occurred in chronological order, and the intervals between each dot do not correspond to the elapsed time between each event.

In FIG. 125, for example, when the front door 2 of the slot machine is opened by the manager of the gaming center at 23:07, and the operation to switch to the setting confirmation mode is performed and the decision button 55 is operated, the system menu screen shown in FIG. 124(a) is displayed on the image display device 11. Then, when the manager closes the front door 2 at 23:09, selects the error history display mode on the system menu screen, and operates the decision button 55, the display on the image display device 11 switches to the error history display screen. At this time, as shown in FIG. 125(a), the error history display screen displays the most recent "door closing" that occurred at 23:09 for the event No. 1, and displays the "door opening" that occurred one event before that at 23:07 for the event No. 2.

If the front door 2 is opened again at 23:15 while the error history display screen is displayed on the image display device 11, the error history display screen will display "Door Open" that occurred at 23:15 as Event No. 1, as shown in FIG. 125(b). Also, if a CP error (illegal passage of inserted medals) as described in the first embodiment occurs at 23:16, this will be displayed as "Illegal medal passage error" on the currently displayed error history display screen, as shown in FIG. 125(c). Furthermore, if the front door 2 is closed again at 23:17, this event will also be displayed as "Door Closed" on the currently displayed error history display screen, as shown in FIG. 125(d).

In this way, in the example shown in FIG. 125, since the event that occurred while the error history display screen is displayed is reflected in the error history display screen being displayed, when an event that should be recorded in the history occurs, it is possible to check whether the event is detected in a timely manner and recorded in the history. In addition, in the "content" column of the error history display screen, a character string specifically indicating the content of the error that occurred may be displayed, or an error code may be displayed. For example, when the HP error described in the first embodiment occurs, the "content" column of the error history display screen may display "Payout medal retention error" or "HP error". In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 125, the front door 2 is opened at 23:07, the setting confirmation mode is entered, the system menu screen is displayed, and then the front door 2 is closed and the error history display screen is displayed. However, the error history display screen can be displayed without closing the front door 2. At this time, the No. displayed on the error history display screen may be displayed. The first event is "door open" at 23:07, and if the front door 2 is closed while the error history display screen is being displayed, the history of "door closed" is displayed as the first event along with the time.

In the example shown in FIG. 125, when an event that should be displayed on the error history display screen occurs while the error history display screen is displayed, the event is reflected on the currently displayed error history display screen in almost real time. However, an example in which the event is reflected on the error history display screen at a different timing will be described with reference to FIG. 126. Note that the meanings of the dots on the time axis in FIG. 126 are the same as those in FIG. 125.

In FIG. 126, for example, when the front door 2 of the slot machine is opened by the arcade manager at 23:07, and an operation is performed to switch to the setting confirmation mode, and then the decision button 55 is operated, the system menu screen shown in FIG. 124(a) is displayed on the image display device 11. Then, when the error history display mode is selected on the system menu screen with the front door 2 open and the decision button 55 is operated, the display on the image display device 11 switches to the error history display screen. At this time, the error history display screen displays "door opening" which occurred at 23:07 as event No. 1, as shown in FIG. 126(a).

Here, when the error history display screen is displayed on the image display device 11, even if the front door 2 is closed at 23:07, opened again at 23:15, the aforementioned C0 error occurs at 23:16, and the front door 2 is closed again at 23:17, unlike the example shown in Figure 125, these events will not be reflected on the error history display screen being displayed. In addition, at this time, by operating the right switch 54R or the left switch 54L, the "[Error history display] (2/2)" screen is displayed on the image display device 11 as shown in FIG. 126(b), and even if the right switch 54R or the left switch 54L is then operated again to return to the "[Error history display] (1/2)" screen as shown in FIG. 126(c), the same screen as that shown in FIG. 126(a) is displayed, and the history regarding the closing of the front door 2 at 23:07, the opening of the front door 2 at 23:15, the C0 error that occurred at 23:16, and the closing of the front door 2 at 23:17 are not reflected on the error history display screen.

On the other hand, when the decision button 55 is operated while the error history display screen is displayed, the display of the error history display screen is temporarily terminated and the screen transitions to the system menu screen as shown in FIG. 126(d), and then the error history display mode is selected to display the error history display screen again. As shown in FIG. 126(e), the "door closed" that occurred at 23:09 is displayed as the No. 4 event, the "door open" that occurred at 23:15 is displayed as the No. 3 event, the "medal illegal passage error" that occurred at 23:16 is displayed as the No. 2 event, and the "door closed" that occurred at 23:17 is reflected as the No. 1 event.

In this way, in the example shown in Fig. 126, since the events that occur while the error history display screen is displayed are not reflected on the currently displayed error history display screen, for example, it is possible to make it difficult for a person who commits a fraudulent act while the error history display screen is displayed (also called a "fraudster") to hide the type of error caused by the fraudulent act from the manager of the game center. For example, in the case where the events that occur while the error history display screen is displayed are reflected on the currently displayed error history display screen, if the fraudster does not want to know that he or she has caused a C0 error (unauthorized medal passage error), he or she can simply repeatedly open and close the front door 2 while visually checking the error history display screen, and increase the number of "door open" and "door close" histories until the "unauthorized medal passage error" history is removed from the error history display screen. For example, if a fraudster opens and closes the front door 2 five times in succession while the error history display screen is displayed, the error history display screen will display alternating records of "door open" and "door closed" five at a time (a total of ten records), and eventually the history on the error history display screen will be filled with "door open" and "door closed," making it easy to confirm that no history that would be unwanted for the amusement facility manager or the like will be left behind. However, the example shown in Figure 126 makes such behavior more difficult.

In the example shown in FIG. 126, if multiple events to be recorded in the history (door open, door closed, illegal medal passage error, etc.) occur while the error history display screen is displayed, those events are displayed without omission when the error history display screen is displayed again after the display of the error history display screen is once closed, so there is no risk of missing the history of errors caused by fraudulent acts. In the example shown in FIG. 126, the front door 2 is opened at 23:07, the setting confirmation mode is entered, and then the system menu screen is displayed to display the error history display screen. However, it is also possible to display the error history display screen after displaying the system menu screen and closing the front door 2. In this case, the history displayed on the displayed error history display screen as event No. 1 is "door closed" at the time when the front door 2 was most recently closed, and the history displayed as event No. 2 is "door open" at 23:07.

Next, with reference to FIG. 127, we will explain how the change in the time of the RTC circuit of the sub-control means 200 using the time setting screen shown in FIG. 124(b) affects the history displayed on the error history display screen. Note that the meanings of the dots on the time axis in FIG. 127 are the same as those in FIG. 125.

In FIG. 127, for example, when the front door 2 of the slot machine is opened by the arcade manager at 23:07, and an operation is performed to switch to the setting confirmation mode, and then the decision button 55 is operated, the system menu screen shown in FIG. 124(a) is displayed on the image display device 11. Then, when the error history display mode is selected on the system menu screen with the front door 2 open and the decision button 55 is operated, the display on the image display device 11 switches to the error history display screen. At this time, the error history display screen displays "door opening" that occurred at 23:07 as event No. 1, as shown in FIG. 127(a).

When the front door 2 is closed at 23:09 and the decision button 55 is operated while the error history display screen is being displayed, the sub-control means 200 displays the system menu screen shown in FIG. 124(a) on the image display device 11. When the administrator selects the time setting mode on the system menu screen and operates the decision button 55, the sub-control means 200 displays the time setting screen shown in FIG. 127(b) on the image display device 11. Here, if the time when the administrator selects the time setting mode and operates the decision button 55 is 23:12 on December 14, 2020, that time is displayed on the time setting screen. At this time, the RTC circuit in the sub-control means 200 continues to keep track of the time, but the time displayed on the time setting screen remains unchanged at 23:12 on December 14, 2020.

However, when the display of the time setting screen is terminated and the system menu screen is displayed, and the time setting screen is displayed again, the time at that time is displayed on the time setting screen. For example, when the display of the time setting screen shown in FIG. 127(b) is switched to the system menu screen and 23:01 is displayed,
If the time setting screen is displayed again at 4 minutes, the time setting screen will display a time of 23:14 on December 14, 2020, as shown in FIG. 127(c-1). Then, with the time setting screen displayed on the image display device 11, a C0 error occurs at 23:15, and the administrator then changes the time displayed on the time setting screen to 0:43 on December 15, 2020, as shown in FIG. 127(c-2). Note that at this stage, the time changed on the time setting screen (0:43 on December 15, 2020) has not been confirmed (the current time in the RTC circuit has not been updated to "0:43 on December 15, 2020").

When the decision button 55 is operated in this state, the current time is confirmed to be the changed time, and the sub-control means 200 displays the system menu screen on the image display device 11. When the error history display mode is selected on the system menu screen and the decision button 55 is operated, the sub-control means 200 displays the error history display screen shown in FIG. 127(d) on the image display device 11. The error history display screen shown in FIG. 127(d) shows that the most recent event No. 1, a medal illegal passage error (C0 error), occurred at 23:15 in accordance with the time before the time change. Also, the No. 2 event, "door closed", occurred at 23:09 in accordance with the time before the time change. In other words, even if the time displayed on the time setting screen is changed between the time setting screen displayed at 23:14 and the time after the change is confirmed at 23:16, the time measured by the RTC circuit of the sub-control means 200 is not affected. Also, simply changing the time displayed on the time setting screen (unless the OK button 55 is operated) does not change the time being measured, so the time of occurrence of an event that occurs while the time setting screen is displayed will be the time that corresponds to the passage of time before the time was changed.

In this way, in the example shown in FIG. 127, if the time is changed after a C0 error occurs, the time at which the C0 error occurred on the error history display screen is displayed as the time that corresponds to the passage of time before the change. Here, for example, if the time is changed after a specific error occurs, and the changed time affects the time at which the specific error occurred (for example, if the current time is set back 10 minutes, the time at which any errors that occurred before that also go back 10 minutes), there is a risk that the order in which the errors occurred displayed on the error history display screen will be swapped; however, the example shown in FIG. 127 makes it possible to avoid such a risk.

In the example shown in FIG. 127, the time in the middle of being changed is not reflected in the time kept by the RTC circuit on the time setting screen (the time of occurrence of an event that occurs while the time setting screen is displayed is not left in the history as a time in the middle of being changed), so it is difficult to tamper with the time of an event that occurs due to fraudulent behavior while the time setting screen is displayed. In addition, in the time setting screens shown in FIG. 127(b), (c-1), and (c-2), the current time cannot be adjusted in units of seconds, and the time keeping in units of seconds continues to be cyclically performed from 0 to 59 seconds while the time setting screen is displayed. Therefore, even if the current time is adjusted to a specific hour and minute, depending on the timing of the adjustment, it may happen that the minute unit increases by "1" immediately afterwards. Therefore, if there is fraudulent behavior that can be achieved by leaving a history of a specific event at a specific hour and minute, it can be made difficult to achieve.

Next, the display contents of the error history display screen when the current time is changed retroactively using the time setting screen shown in FIG. 124(b) will be explained with reference to FIG. 128. Note that the meanings of the dots on the time axis in FIG. 128 are the same as those in FIG. 125.

In Fig. 128, for example, when the front door 2 of the slot machine is opened by the manager of the gaming center at 23:07, and an operation is performed to switch to the setting confirmation mode, and then the decision button 55 is operated, the system menu screen shown in Fig. 124(a) is displayed on the image display device 11. Then, when the manager closes the front door 2 at 23:09, selects the error history display mode on the system menu screen, and operates the decision button 55, the display on the image display device 11 is switched to the error history display screen. At this time, as shown in Fig. 128(a), the error history display screen displays the most recent "door closing" that occurred at 23:09 as the No. 1 event, and displays the "door opening" that occurred at 23:07 as the previous No. 2 event.

When the decision button 55 is operated while the error history display screen is being displayed, the sub-control means 200 displays the system menu screen shown in FIG. 124(a) on the image display device 11. When the administrator selects the time setting mode on the system menu screen and operates the decision button 55, the sub-control means 200 displays the time setting screen shown in FIG. 124(b) on the image display device 11. Here, if the time when the administrator selects the time setting mode and operates the decision button 55 is 23:13 on December 14, 2020, that time is displayed on the time setting screen as shown in FIG. 128(b-1).

With the time setting screen displayed on the image display device 11, the front door 2 is opened at 23:16, the current time is changed to 23:09 on December 14, 2020 on the time setting screen in that state (the changed time is not confirmed at this stage), and the decision button 55 is operated at 23:19 to confirm the changed time. Then, when the manager closes the front door 2 at 23:12 on December 14, 2020 at the changed current time and then operates the decision button 55, the sub-control means 200 displays a system menu screen on the image display device. As a result, the error history display mode is selected on the system menu screen, and when the decision button 55 is operated, the sub-control means 200 displays the error history display screen shown in FIG. 128(c) on the image display device 11. The error history display screen shown in FIG. 128(c) shows that the most recently occurred event No. 1, "door closed", occurred at 23:12 in accordance with the time after the time change. Additionally, the previous event, No. 2, shows that "door opening" occurred at 23:16, in accordance with the time before the time change.

In this way, in the example shown in FIG. 128, the current time obtained from the RTC circuit is used as is for the occurrence time of events recorded in the history, but the order in which the events actually occurred is maintained regardless of the current time. This prevents, for example, a person committing fraud from arbitrarily changing the current time and falsifying the occurrence time of events to rearrange the order of occurrence of each event in order to make it difficult to detect the fraud or to make the fraud procedure difficult to understand. Note that in the time setting screens shown in FIG. 127 and FIG. 128, the displayed time is not updated over time, but the time displayed on the time setting screen may be updated in real time.

Next, referring to FIG. 129, a case where events recorded in the history differ between during setting confirmation mode and during non-setting confirmation mode (a state in which play is possible) will be described. For example, after all reels have stopped during non-setting confirmation mode, if an HP error (a medal retention error) described in the first embodiment is reported at 16:13, and a hall staff member who is called opens the front door 2 at 16:15 to resolve the medal retention error, and then closes the front door 2 again at 16:17, these events will be recorded in the history. Also, if a CE error (a medal retention error) described in the first embodiment is reported during play, the time when the medal retention error was reported and the time when the front door 2 was opened and closed to resolve the medal retention error will be recorded in the history.

In contrast, for example, suppose that the front door 2 of the slot machine is opened by the manager of the gaming facility at 23:07, and an operation to switch to the setting confirmation mode is performed, and then the above-mentioned inserted medal accumulation error occurs at 23:10 during the setting confirmation mode, and then a paid medal accumulation error occurs at 23:15. Here, in this embodiment, since these errors are not detected during the setting confirmation mode, the occurrence of these errors is not notified. Then, for example, suppose that the manager notices these errors visually, removes the medals that have accumulated in the selector or hopper, closes the front door 2 at 23:18, and displays the error history display screen from the system menu screen. In this case, the sub-control means 200 displays the "door closed" that occurred at 23:18 on the error history display screen, but does not display the inserted medal accumulation error that occurred at 23:10 and the paid medal accumulation error that occurred at 23:15.

By configuring in this way, for example, if it is extremely difficult to switch to the setting confirmation mode or setting change mode through fraudulent behavior, and fraudulent behavior against the selector or hopper is extremely difficult compared to opening and closing the front door 2, then even if a dispensed medal retention error or an inserted medal retention error occurs in the setting confirmation mode or setting change mode, it can be said that the possibility that such errors occurred due to fraudulent behavior is extremely low. Therefore, by excluding events with an extremely low possibility of fraudulent behavior from the events to be displayed on the error history display screen, for example, in cases where the number of events that can be displayed on the error history display screen is small and the earliest event that occurred is erased when a new event occurs, it is possible to make events with a higher possibility of fraudulent behavior remain on the error history display screen for as long as possible.

In addition, the time displayed for each error on the error history display screen may be the time the error was detected, instead of the time the error was notified, and may be recorded in the history and displayed. For example, if an error detected in a slot machine is not notified until the error is cleared, and if the error is detected while the reels are rotating, the error cannot be cleared until all the reels have stopped, the time the error was detected may be recorded in the history instead of the time the error was notified.

Next, when a specific error occurs while the reels are spinning, the relationship between the time at which the occurrence of the specific error is notified and the time at which the specific error occurs and is recorded in the history will be explained with reference to FIG. 130. Note that the meanings of the dots on the time axis in FIG. 130 are the same as those in FIG. 125.

In FIG. 130, after the player operates the start lever and all the reels start spinning at the same time, a specific error that is the subject of display on the error history display screen occurs, for example, at 14:38. If the specific error occurs, the occurrence of the error is not immediately notified, but is notified in the manner shown in FIG. 130(a) after all the reels have stopped (14:39 in FIG. 130). The above-mentioned specific error is displayed as "Ox Error" on the notification screen shown in FIG. 130(a). After the business hours of the arcade are over, for example at 23:07, the arcade manager opens the front door 2, performs an operation to switch to the setting confirmation mode, and then performs a specific operation, and the sub-control means 200 displays the system menu screen shown in FIG. 124(a) on the image display device 11.

As a result, when the administrator selects the error history display mode on the displayed system menu screen and operates the decision button 55, the sub-control means 200 displays the error history display screen shown in FIG. 130(b) on the image display device 11. Here, on the displayed error history display screen, the time of occurrence of a specific error (indicated as "Ox error" in FIG. 130(b)) is 14:39, when the error was notified, but rather, 14:38, when the error occurred.

In this way, by displaying the time when an error was notified instead of the time when the error occurred on the error history display screen, a time difference is unlikely to occur between the time when a specific error displayed on the error history display screen occurred and the time when the administrator became aware of the specific error. This makes it easier for the administrator to identify the circumstances under which the error occurred and the cause of the specific error displayed on the error history display screen based on his or her memory, thereby reducing the risk of taking incorrect measures to prevent the occurrence of the specific error, for example.

Next, referring to FIG. 131, we will explain how the history of a specific error is handled when a specific error occurs while the reels are spinning and the game transitions to setting change mode while the reels are spinning. Note that the meanings of the dots on the time axis in FIG. 131 are the same as those in FIG. 125.

In FIG. 131, suppose that after the player operates the start lever and all the reels start to spin at the same time, a specific error (for example, the E-system error described in the first embodiment) occurs at 14:38 while the reels are spinning. As a result, if, for example, the manager of the gaming facility opens the front door 2 and turns off the power to the slot machine at 14:39 before the occurrence of the specific error is notified, and then performs a specific operation and turns the power on to enter the setting change mode and perform the setting change operation, the E-system error is cleared by the setting change operation. Then, when the sub-control means 200 displays the error history display screen on the image display device 11 after the setting change operation, the history of the specific error that occurred between the occurrence of the specific error and the setting change operation and the opening of the front door 2 is not displayed, as shown in FIG. 131(a).

In this way, if an error corresponding to an E-system error occurs while the reels are spinning, and the administrator changes the settings before this error is notified, the error is cleared by changing the settings, and the administrator will not know what specific error occurred. In this situation, for example, if the history of errors that occurred is displayed when the error history display screen is displayed after a setting change, this could confuse the administrator who views the history, as it may contain errors that the administrator does not recognize. Therefore, by not displaying history of errors that the administrator does not recognize on the error history display screen, the risk of the administrator becoming confused can be eliminated.

Next, when multiple errors occur during the setting confirmation mode, the relationship between the timing at which each error is notified and the order in which the errors are displayed on the error history display screen will be explained with reference to FIG. 132.

First, the manager opens the front door 2 at 21:12 and switches to the setting confirmation mode, then an illegal medal passage error occurs at 21:14, and a medal retention error occurs at 21:16. In the example shown in FIG. 132, the medal passage error is reported when the reset switch 82 is operated in a state where play is possible (i.e., a state where the setting change mode and setting confirmation mode are not in effect), and the medal retention error is reported when the setting confirmation mode is terminated. As a result, when the manager first terminates the setting confirmation mode, the medal retention error is reported, and when the manager, recognizing this report, removes the cause of the medal retention error and then operates the reset switch 82 to cancel the medal retention error, the medal passage error is reported next. Then, after the manager removes the cause of the medal passage error, he operates the reset switch 82 to cancel the medal passage error, thereby canceling all errors, and then closes the front door 2 at 21:28 to allow the player to continue playing.

Then, after the business hours of the gaming center have ended, for example at 11:37 p.m., the manager of the gaming center opens the front door 2, performs an operation to switch to the setting confirmation mode, and performs a prescribed operation in the setting confirmation mode, whereupon the sub-control means 200 displays the system menu screen shown in Fig. 124(a) on the image display device 11. As a result, when the manager selects the error, etc. history display mode on the displayed system menu screen and operates the decision button 55, the sub-control means 200 displays the error, etc. history display screen shown in Fig. 132(a) on the image display device 11. At this time, the sub-control means 200 displays the history of the aforementioned medal illegal passage errors and medal payout retention errors in the order in which the errors were notified, but in the order in which they occurred, on the error, etc. history display screen.

In this way, when multiple errors occur during the setting confirmation mode, the errors are displayed on the error history display screen in the order in which they were reported, making it easier to match the multiple errors displayed on the error history display screen with the multiple errors that the administrator is aware of. This makes it easier for the administrator to identify the circumstances under which the errors occurred and the causes of the multiple errors displayed on the error history display screen based on their memory, thereby reducing the risk of taking incorrect measures to prevent the occurrence of the multiple errors, for example.

Next, with reference to Figure 133, we will explain how each error is displayed on the error history display screen when multiple errors occur in both a state where play is possible and in the setting confirmation mode.

First, as shown in FIG. 133(a), if an illegal medal passage error occurs at 20:48 while a game is being played on a slot machine, a notification is issued that an illegal medal passage error has occurred. Upon receiving this notification, an attendant at the game center opens the door at 20:51, eliminates the cause of the error, and operates the reset switch 82, which clears the illegal medal passage error. The game becomes available again when the door is closed at 20:52. If a medal retention error occurs at 21:02, a notification is issued that a medal retention error has occurred. Upon receiving this notification, an attendant at the game center opens the door at 21:04, eliminates the cause of the error, and operates the reset switch 82, which clears the medal retention error. The game becomes available again when the door is closed at 21:10.

Then, after the business hours of the arcade have ended, for example at 11:37 p.m., the arcade manager opens the front door 2 and performs an operation to switch to the setting confirmation mode. When the manager performs a prescribed operation in the setting confirmation mode, the sub-control means 200 displays the system menu screen shown in FIG. 124(a) on the image display device 11. As a result, when the manager selects the error history display mode on the displayed system menu screen and operates the decision button 55, the sub-control means 200 displays the error history display screen shown in FIGS. 133(a-1) and (a-2) on the image display device 11. At this time, the sub-control means 200 displays the history of the previously mentioned illegal medal passage errors and paid medal retention errors in the order of occurrence on the displayed error history display screen.

In a situation different from the example in Figure 133(a), for example as shown in Figure 133(b), the administrator first opens the front door 2 at 21:12 and switches to setting confirmation mode, after which an illegal medal passage error occurs at 21:14, and then a medal withdrawal error occurs at 21:16. Here, the medal withdrawal error is reported when the setting confirmation mode is ended. Also, the medal withdrawal error is reported when the reset switch 82 is operated after the setting confirmation mode is ended.

As a result, when the manager first ends the setting confirmation mode, a payout medal retention error is notified, and when the manager recognizes this notification, removes the cause of the payout medal retention error and then operates the reset switch 82 to cancel the payout medal retention error, and then an illegal medal passage error is notified. Then, after the manager removes the cause of the illegal medal passage error and operates the reset switch 82 to cancel the illegal medal passage error, thereby canceling all errors, the front door 2 is closed at 9:28 p.m. and the player is allowed to continue playing.

Then, after the business hours of the arcade have ended, for example at 11:37 p.m., the arcade manager opens the front door 2, performs an operation to switch to the setting confirmation mode, and then performs a specified operation, which causes the sub-control means 200 to display the system menu screen shown in FIG. 124(a) on the image display device 11. As a result, when the manager selects the error history display mode on the displayed system menu screen and operates the decision button 55, the sub-control means 200 displays the error history display screen shown in FIG. 133(b-1) on the image display device 11. At this time, the sub-control means 200 displays the aforementioned illegal medal passage errors and paid medal retention errors on the error history display screen in the order in which the errors were notified, but in the order in which they occurred.

In this way, when multiple errors occur during play and in the setting confirmation mode, the errors are displayed on the error history display screen in the order in which they were reported, making it easier to match the multiple errors displayed on the error history display screen with the multiple errors that the administrator is aware of. This makes it easier for the administrator to identify the circumstances under which the errors occurred and the causes of the multiple errors displayed on the error history display screen based on his or her memory, thereby reducing the risk of taking incorrect measures to prevent the occurrence of the multiple errors, for example.

In the examples shown in Figs. 125 to 133, in order to display the error history display screen, the mode must be changed to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and in order to change to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the front door 2 must be opened. Under these conditions, the error history display screen displays the door opening and closing and the time of occurrence. For this reason, if the time between the door opening and closing is significantly long, or if the door opening history is arranged in order of the time of occurrence and the door is closed again after closing, or the door is opened again after opening, it is highly likely that the current time has been changed. Therefore, when the current time is changed, it is possible to determine whether the current time has been changed based on the door opening and closing and the time of occurrence displayed on the error history display screen, even if this is not recorded in the history.

The events displayed on the error history display screen are not limited to those shown in Figs. 125 to 133, and events indicated by control commands sent from the main control means 100 can be appropriately determined. For example, if the control commands sent from the main control means 100 include commands indicating a transition to a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode, or commands indicating the on/off state of the setting key switch 83 or the reset switch 82, the events indicated by these commands may be displayed on the error history display screen together with the occurrence time of the events. In addition, the error history display screen shown in Figs. 124(c) and (d) displays the time when each event was detected or notified, but instead of displaying the time, the time elapsed since the slot machine was turned on may be displayed. Even in such a case, the display contents of the error history display screen may be configured with a "No." column, a "content" column, and a "occurrence time" column (however, the time elapsed since the power was turned on is displayed) in the same manner as the error history display screen shown in Figs. 124(c) and (d).

In the above example, the opening and closing history of the front door 2 and the history related to errors are displayed on the error history display screen, but the opening and closing history of the front door 2 and the history related to errors may be displayed separately. For example, a door opening and closing history display screen may be added in addition to the error history display screen, and the opening and closing history of the front door 2 may be displayed on the door opening and closing history display screen, and the history related to errors may be displayed on the error history display screen. The history display screen to be displayed on the image display device 11 may be selected, for example, by adding an item called "Door opening and closing history display mode" to the system menu screen and selecting "
When the "door opening/closing history display mode" is selected, the image display device 11 should be configured to display the door opening/closing history display screen, and when the "error etc. history display mode" is selected, the error etc. history display screen should be displayed.

In addition, the opening and closing history of the front door 2 displayed on the error history display screen (or the door opening and closing history display screen described above when the opening and closing history of the front door 2 is displayed separately) may be set so that only "door open" (opening of the front door 2) is recorded in the history, and "door closed" (closing of the front door 2) is not recorded in the history.

In the above-described embodiments, a slot machine (reel type gaming machine) that uses gaming medals as gaming value has been described as an example of a gaming machine to which the present invention can be applied, but the present invention is not limited to this, and can be similarly applied to, for example, reel type gaming machines that use gaming balls as gaming value, reel type gaming machines that use information recorded on an electronic recording medium as gaming value, mahjong ball gaming machines, arrange ball machines, pachinko machines, etc., and similar effects can be obtained. The present invention can also be similarly applied to slot machines with four or more reels, and similar effects can be obtained.

[Fifth embodiment]
The gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment will be described below with additional reference to Figs. 134 to 154. The following mainly describes the characteristic parts of the gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. The characteristic parts described below are not limited to the fifth embodiment and can be combined with other embodiments. Figs. 134 and 135 show a slot machine SM as an example of the gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment, and Figs. 136 and 137 show a pachinko gaming machine PM as another example of the gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. Before describing the characteristic parts of the fifth embodiment, the schematic configurations of the slot machine SM and the pachinko gaming machine PM will be described.

<General Configuration of Slot Machine SM>
The slot machine SM has a basic configuration similar to or common to that of the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment described above, and the drawings referred to in the first embodiment are also referred to in this embodiment, and detailed description of the configuration is omitted. In addition, the control processes such as the role determination process and reel control process described in the slot machine 1 can be applied to the slot machine SM in the same manner or with some changes to the process contents. In addition, in Figures 134 and 135, the same components as those in the slot machine 1 are given the same symbols (numbers, English letters, etc.) as those used in the drawings referred to in the first embodiment.

As shown in Figures 134 and 135, the slot machine SM comprises a box-shaped housing 5 (main body member) with an open front (forward) and a front door 2 attached to the front opening of the housing 5 so as to be able to open and close. When viewed from the front, the front door 2 is attached to the front opening of the housing 5 so as to be able to open and close sideways using hinge mechanisms 6a to 6c arranged at the front of the left side plate 5a of the housing 5. Attached to the front of the front door 2, in order from the top, are an upper panel assembly 10, a middle panel assembly 20, a lower panel assembly 30 and a tray assembly 40.

The middle panel assembly 20, the lower panel assembly 30, and the tray assembly 40 in the slot machine SM have the same configuration as those in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment. On the other hand, the upper panel assembly 10 in the slot machine SM is different from that in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment in the following points. That is, in addition to the first performance lamp 12, the second performance lamps 13a, 13b, and the third performance lamps 14a, 14b, the upper panel assembly 10 in the slot machine SM has fourth performance lamps 16a, 16b arranged on both the left and right sides of the display screen 11a, which are not present in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment. Also, the shapes and positions of the first performance lamp 12 and the upper speakers 15a, 15b are different from those of the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 135, a hopper 50, an auxiliary storage 85, and a power supply unit 80 are provided in the lower part of the housing 5 (above the bottom plate 5d). A middle plate 5f is provided in the center of the housing 5 so as to span the left and right side plates 5a, 5b, and a reel unit RU having three reels 3a, 3b, and 3c is provided on this middle plate 5f.

A main control board case unit 160 having a main control board 60 (see FIG. 2) is provided in the upper part of the housing 5 (upper inner surface of the back panel 5e) so as to be swingable in the front-rear direction via a board case holding bracket mechanism 170. In addition, a sub-control board case unit (not shown) having a sub-control board 70 (see FIG. 2) is provided on the rear part of the front door 2.

<<Overview of the Pachinko Machine PM>>
Next, the outline of the structure of the pachinko game machine PM will be described. For convenience, in the following description, the directions indicated by the arrows in FIG. 136 will be referred to as the front-rear direction, the left-right direction, and the up-down direction, respectively. As shown in FIG. 136, the pachinko game machine PM has an outer frame 401 that is a vertically oriented fixed holding frame that is configured to have a rectangular outer frame size, and a front frame 402 that is configured to have a rectangular frame size that matches this and is configured to be an opening/closing mounting frame, which is attached to the front of the opening of the outer frame 401 so that it can be opened and closed sideways and detached by upper and lower hinge mechanisms 403 arranged on the left front edge of each other, and is always held in a closed state in which it is engaged and connected to the outer frame 401 by using a locking device 404 called a double lock that is provided on the right front edge.

A square glass frame 405 that fits the upper front area of the front frame 402 is attached to the front frame 402 using upper and lower hinge mechanisms 403 so that it can be opened and closed sideways and can be attached and detached, and is always kept in a closed state that covers the front of the front frame 402 using a locking device 404. A game board 410 is set and held in the front frame 402 in a detachable manner, and the game area PA in front of the game board 410 can be seen through the double-glazed glass 405a of the glass frame 405, which is always kept closed.

The lower part of the glass frame 405 is provided with upper and lower ball trays (upper ball tray 406a and lower ball tray 406b) for storing game balls, and a launch handle 407 for launching the game balls is provided on the front right side of the lower ball tray 406b. On the front side of the glass frame 405, there is an illumination lamp 408 having light-emitting elements such as light-emitting diodes (LEDs), and a speaker 409 that generates sound effects according to the development of the game.

Although detailed illustration is omitted in Figure 136, the game board 410 has a base made of a decorative board formed by attaching cells printed with a predetermined pattern to a rectangular laminated plywood that has been processed using a router, etc., and a roughly circular game area PA is formed surrounded by rail decorations above and below. The game area PA is provided with game components such as numerous game nails, a windmill, a central decoration, an effect image display unit that displays a predetermined image depending on the progress of the game, and various winning holes (all not shown), and an outlet (not shown) is formed at the bottom end of the game area PA that penetrates the game board 410 from front to back to discharge game balls that fall to the back side without falling into the winning hole.

As shown in FIG. 137, on the rear side of the front frame 402, a rear set board 430 is based on a base frame body formed in a rectangular frame shape somewhat smaller than the front frame 402 and having a window communicating front and rear in the center, and is connected to the rear of the front frame 402 via upper and lower hinge mechanisms 403 so that it can be opened and closed sideways and can be attached and detached. A rear set cover 430C in the shape of a rectangular box with an open front is attached to this rear set board 430 in a removable manner, and is always arranged to cover the rear side of the game board 410 attached to the front frame 402.

Each part of the rear set board 430 is provided with a ball storage tank 431 for storing a large number of game balls, a tank rail 432 that extends from the ball storage tank 431 to the right with a gentle downward slope, a ball supply passage member 433 that connects to the right end of the tank rail 432 and extends downward, a prize ball payout unit 434 that pays out the game balls guided by the ball supply passage member 433, and a prize ball passage member 435 that guides the game balls paid out from the prize ball payout unit 434 to the upper ball tray 406.

On the rear side of the game board 410, a main control board case unit CU1 having a main control board (not shown) that controls the overall operation of the pachinko game machine PM, a performance control board case unit CU2 having a performance control board (not shown) that controls the overall performance such as image display, effect lighting, and sound effects according to the game development, etc. are attached so as to be covered by the back set cover 430C. On the other hand, on the rear side of the back set board 430, a payout control board case unit CU3 having a payout control board (not shown) that controls the launch and payout of game balls, a power supply board case unit CU4 having a power supply board (not shown) that receives power from the game facility and supplies power to various control boards and electric and electronic components, etc. are attached. These control boards and the electric and electronic components of each part of the pachinko game machine PM are connected by harnesses (connector cables) to configure the pachinko game machine PM to be operable.

The pachinko game machine PM is played with the outer frame 401 fixed to the game island (installation frame stand) of the game facility, and the front frame 402, glass frame 405, etc., closed and locked. The game begins by storing game balls in the upper ball tray 406a and rotating the launch handle 407. When the launch handle 407 is rotated, the game balls stored in the upper ball tray 406a are sent one by one to the launch mechanism by a ball feed mechanism arranged on the back side of the glass frame 405, and the balls are shot into the game area PA by the launch mechanism, and the pachinko game then unfolds.

Characteristic Configuration of the Present Embodiment
The following describes the characteristic configuration of the gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. Note that the following description (characteristic configuration) is applicable to both the slot machine SM and the pachinko gaming machine PM.

<LED board and light-emitting components>
First, the LED boards and light emitting components shown in these figures will be described with reference to Figures 138 to 145. For the sake of convenience, in the following description, these LED boards and light emitting components will be described as those for the performance lamps of the slot machine SM, but they are not limited to this.

(LED board component surface shape and light-emitting component configuration)
The LED board 310 shown in Fig. 138 is an example of an LED board used for the first performance lamp 12 of the slot machine SM (see Fig. 134). Similarly, the LED boards 320 and 330 shown in Fig. 138 are examples of LED boards used for the fourth performance lamps 16a and 16b of the slot machine SM. The LED boards 310, 320, and 330 are arranged around the display unit (here, the display screen 11a) that the player often pays attention to during play.

The component surface 311 of the LED board 310, the component surface 321 of the LED board 320, and the component surface 331 of the LED board 330 are each formed in a curved shape when viewed from the front. That is, the component surface 311 of the LED board 310 has an upper edge 312a and a lower edge 312b that are generally curved, and the component surface 321 of the LED board 320 has a shape that generally curves to the right as it goes upward.
Component surface 331 of No. 0 has a shape that curves generally to the left as it goes upward. Note that the curved shape of a component surface is not limited to the shapes of component surfaces 311, 321, and 331 described above. For example, LED substrate 301 shown in FIG. 139(A) has bent portion 303 or curved portion 304 formed in part of the side edge of component surface 302, and LED substrate 306 shown in FIG. 139(B) has component surface 307 that is generally curved at one or more positions are also considered to be LED substrates with curved component surfaces.

A plurality of light-emitting components 340 (only some of which are numbered) are mounted on the component surface 311 of the LED board 310, the component surface 311 of the LED board 320, and the component surface 331 of the LED board 330. As shown in FIG. 140, the light-emitting component 340 is a surface-mounted PLCC (with molding frame) type LED device having a lamp house (molding frame) 341 formed in a rectangular parallelepiped shape, a lead frame (electrode) 342 provided on the lamp house 341, and three light-emitting elements installed in a cylindrical recess 343 formed in the lamp house 341. The three light-emitting elements are composed of a red LED element 344R, a green LED element 344G, and a blue LED element 344B, and are connected to the lead frame 342 by a bonding wire (not shown). Resin is injected into the recess 343 of the lamp house 341 to seal the three light-emitting elements.

In the light-emitting component 340, as shown in FIG. 140, three light-emitting elements (red LED element 344R, green LED element 344G, and blue LED element 344B) are positioned in an equilateral triangle shape, and are arranged in the order of the blue LED element 344B and the green LED element 344G clockwise from the red LED element 344R. In this way, the relative positions of the three light-emitting elements are determined. Note that the arrangement of the three light-emitting elements is not limited to this. For example, as in the light-emitting component 340A shown in FIG. 141 (A), the three light-emitting elements (red LED element 344R, green LED element 344G, and blue LED element 344B) may be arranged in a straight line, or as in the light-emitting component 340B shown in FIG. 141 (B), the three light-emitting elements (red LED element 344R, green LED element 344G, and blue LED element 344B) may be arranged in an L-shape. Furthermore, the arrangement of the red LED element 344R, the green LED element 344G, and the blue LED element 344B may be different from that shown in the illustrated example (for example, the positions of the red LED element 344R and the green LED element 344G may be swapped, or the positions of the green LED element 344G and the blue LED element 344B may be swapped in the illustrated example).

Here, a surface-mounted PLCC type LED device has been described as an example, but other types of LED devices, such as a surface-mounted PCB (circuit board) type LED device or a pin-insertion type (vertical) LED device, may also be used. Also, in addition to the red, green, and blue light-emitting elements that make up the three primary colors of light, an LED device equipped with light-emitting elements of other colors (for example, white and yellow) may also be used.

(Installation position of light-emitting component and orientation of red LED element)
Each of the light-emitting components 340 mounted on the component surface 311 of the LED board 310 is installed in the same orientation. Also, each of the light-emitting components 340 mounted on the component surface 321 of the LED board 320 is installed in the same orientation, and each of the light-emitting components 340 mounted on the component surface 331 of the LED board 330 is installed in the same orientation. Specifically, on the component surface 311 of the LED board 310 arranged above the display screen 11a, as shown in FIG. 142(A), each of the light-emitting components 340 is installed in the same orientation (the red LED element 344R is biased toward the display screen 11a) with the red LED element 344R facing downward (toward the display screen 11a). The four arrows in FIG. 142(A) indicate the up, down, left, and right directions with respect to the component surface 311 when the LED board 310 is installed in the slot machine SM.

Also, on the component surface 321 of the LED board 320 arranged to the left of the display screen 11a, as shown in Fig. 142(B), each light-emitting component 340 is installed in the same orientation (in which the red LED element 344R is biased toward the display screen 11a) with the red LED element 344R facing to the right (towards the display screen 11a). Furthermore, on the component surface 331 of the LED board 330 arranged to the right of the display screen 11a, as shown in Fig. 142(C), each light-emitting component 340 is installed in an orientation (in which the red LED element 344R is biased toward the display screen 11a) with the red LED element 344R facing to the left (towards the display screen 11a). The four arrows in FIG. 142(B) indicate the up, down, left and right directions relative to the component surface 321 when the LED board 320 is installed in the slot machine SM, and the four arrows in FIG. 142(C) indicate the up, down, left and right directions relative to the component surface 331 when the LED board 330 is installed in the slot machine SM.

In this way, by aligning the light-emitting components mounted on the component surface of one LED board in the same position, the light of each light-emitting component can be made uniform, so that the performance effect of the illumination by each light-emitting component can be enhanced. On the other hand, if the positions of the light-emitting components mounted on the component surface of one LED board are different, there is a risk that the light of each light-emitting component will vary and the performance effect will be reduced when the light-emitting components are made to light up with the same color at the same time. It is preferable to align all the light-emitting components mounted on the component surface of one LED board in the same position, but some light-emitting components may be installed in different positions. The proportion of light-emitting components installed in the same position is preferably 70% or 80% or more of all the light-emitting components arranged on the component surface of one LED board, but if 50% or more of the light-emitting components are installed in the same position, it is possible to obtain a certain effect. This also applies to the effect of the orientation of the red LED element 344R described below.

Also, as described above, by installing each light-emitting component 340 so that the red LED element 344R is biased toward the display screen 11a, the following effect can be obtained. That is, the red light emitted by the red LED element 344R has a longer wavelength than green or blue light and is more likely to reach the human eye. Also, red is a color that attracts people's attention and stands out. On the other hand, the display screen 11a is often the focus of players during play. Therefore, by installing each light-emitting component 340 so that the red LED element 344R faces the display screen 11a, the red light can easily reach the eyes of the player looking at the display screen 11a, which visually enhances the glow of the light-emitting components 340, thereby enhancing the presentation effect of the lighting.

In addition, in the light-emitting component 340, the posture in which the red LED element 344R is biased toward the display screen 11a preferably refers to a posture in which the red LED element 344R is located closest to the display screen 11a compared to the green LED element 344G and the blue LED element 344B (the posture shown in Figures 142 (A) to (C)), but is not limited to this. For example, consider a case in which the light-emitting component 340 is installed in the posture shown in Figure 143 (A). In this case, the display screen 11a is disposed on the right. In this posture, the green LED element 344G is located on the right side (closer to the display screen 11a) than the red LED element 344R. However, if a virtual line L11 is set that divides the light-emitting component 340 in the left-right direction, the red LED element 344R is located in the area to the right of this virtual line L11, and in that respect, it can be said to be facing the display screen 11a. Therefore, the position of this light-emitting component 340 is also such that the red LED element 344R is biased toward the display screen 11a (to the right).

Similarly, consider a case where the light emitting component 340 is installed in a position as shown in FIG. 143(B). In this case, the display screen 11a is disposed downward. In this position, the blue LED element 344B is located lower (closer to the display screen 11a) than the red LED element 344R. However, when a virtual line L12 is set to vertically bisect the light emitting component 340, the red LED element 344R is located in a region below the virtual line L11, and in this respect, it can be said that the red LED element 344R faces the display screen 11a. Therefore, the position of such a light emitting component 340 is also set to a position in which the red LED element 344R is biased toward the display screen 11a (downward).

(Installation density of light-emitting components)
As shown in FIG. 138, the component surface 311 of the LED board 310 is divided into two regions, an area AR1 and an area AR2. The area AR1 is disposed on the lower side closer to the display screen 11a than the area AR2. The area AR1 is set so that the installation density (the number of light-emitting components 340 installed per unit area) is higher in the area AR1, which is relatively closer to the display screen 11a, than in the area AR2, which is relatively farther from the display screen 11a (for example, the distance from the center of the display screen 11a). That is, the light-emitting components 340 are installed so that the arrangement pitch (the distance between adjacent light-emitting components 340) of the plurality of light-emitting components 340 in the area AR1 is shorter than the arrangement pitch of the plurality of light-emitting components 340 in the area AR2.

In this way, by setting the installation density of the light-emitting components 340 higher in area AR1, which is relatively closer to the display screen 11a, than in area AR2, which is relatively farther from the display screen 11a, the following effects can be obtained. That is, by increasing the installation density of the light-emitting components 340 in area AR1, the light intensity per unit area of each light-emitting component 340 in area AR1 can be increased. Also, because area AR1 is closer to the display screen 11a than area AR2, the light from the light-emitting components 340 in area AR1 is more likely to reach the eyes of a player looking at the display screen 11a. Therefore, by increasing the light intensity per unit area of each light-emitting component 340 in area AR1, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect of the lighting.

The installation density of the light-emitting components 340 is configured similarly for the component surface 321 of the LED board 320 and the component surface 331 of the LED board 330, and the same effect can be obtained. That is, as shown in FIG. 138, the component surface 321 of the LED board 320 is divided into five areas, areas AR11 to R15. Area AR11 is arranged on the right side closer to the display screen 11a than area AR12, and the installation density of the light-emitting components 340 is set higher in area AR11 than area AR12. Area AR14 is arranged diagonally lower right closer to the display screen 11a than area AR15, and area AR13 is arranged diagonally lower right closer to the display screen 11a than area AR14. The installation density of the light-emitting components 340 is set higher in area AR14 than area AR15, and higher in area AR13 than area AR14.

Similarly, the component surface 331 of the LED board 330 is divided into five regions, regions AR21 to R25. Region AR21 is located on the left side closer to the display screen 11a than region AR22, and the installation density of the light-emitting components 340 is set higher in region AR21 than in region AR22. Region AR24 is located diagonally lower left closer to the display screen 11a than region AR25, and region AR13 is located diagonally lower left closer to the display screen 11a than region AR14. The installation density of the light-emitting components 340 is set higher in region AR24 than in region AR25, and higher in region AR23 than region AR24.

(Red LED elements should not be placed close to each other)
On the component surface 311 of the LED board 310, the component surface 321 of the LED board 320, and the component surface 331 of the LED board 330, the light-emitting components 340 are arranged so that the red LED elements 344R are not close to each other. Here, the state in which the red LED elements 344R are not close to each other means that, on the component surface of one LED board, two light-emitting components are arranged so that an LED element of a different color (green LED element 344G or blue LED element 344B) other than red is located between the red LED element 344R of one light-emitting component and the red LED element 344R of the other light-emitting component, which are arranged closest to each other. This point will be specifically described below.

For example, in the region AR1 of the component surface 311, the two light-emitting components 340 that are closest to each other in the left-right direction are arranged in a state as shown in FIG. 144(A). At this time, between the red LED element 344R of the light-emitting component 340 on the left side of the figure and the red LED element 344R of the light-emitting component 340 on the right side of the figure (more specifically, in the region between the two red LED elements 344R and within the vertical width of the two light-emitting components 340 (the rectangular region surrounded by the two-dot chain line in the figure)), the green LED element 344G of the light-emitting component 340 on the left side of the figure and the blue LED element 344B of the light-emitting component 340 on the right side of the figure are located. Therefore, the two light-emitting components 340 are arranged so that their red LED elements 344R are not close to each other.

As another example, in the region AR11 of the component surface 321, the two light-emitting components 340 that are arranged closest to each other in the vertical direction are arranged in a state as shown in FIG. 144(B). At this time, between the red LED element 344R of the light-emitting component 340 on the upper side in the figure and the red LED element 344R of the light-emitting component 340 on the lower side in the figure (more specifically, in the region between the two red LED elements 344R and within the width of the two light-emitting components 340 in the left-right direction (the rectangular region surrounded by the two-dot chain line in the figure)), the blue LED element 344B of the light-emitting component 340 on the upper side in the figure and the green LED element 344G of the light-emitting component 340 on the lower side in the figure are located. Therefore, the two light-emitting components 340 are arranged so that their red LED elements 344R are not close to each other.

In addition, if there is no LED element of a color other than red between the red LED element 344R of one of two light-emitting components that are arranged closest to each other on the component surface of an LED board and the red LED element 344R of the other light-emitting component, then the two light-emitting components are arranged with their respective red LED elements 344R in close proximity to each other.

For example, consider a case where two light-emitting components 340 that are arranged closest to each other in the left-right direction on the component surface of one LED board are arranged in a state as shown in FIG. 145(A). In this case, neither the green LED element 344G nor the blue LED element 344B is located between the red LED element 344R of the light-emitting component 340 on the left side of the figure and the red LED element 344R of the light-emitting component 340 on the right side of the figure (within the area between the two red LED elements 344R and within the vertical width of the two light-emitting components 340 (the rectangular area surrounded by the two-dot chain line in the figure)). Therefore, the two light-emitting components 340 are arranged with their red LED elements 344R close to each other.

Note that between two light emitting components 340 arranged as shown in FIG. 145(A), another light emitting component 340 may be arranged, for example, as shown in FIG. 145(B). In that case, the green LED element 344G and blue LED element 344B of the light emitting component 340 on the lower side of the figure will be located between the red LED element 344R of the light emitting component 340 on the left side of the figure and the red LED element 344R of the light emitting component 340 on the right side of the figure (within the rectangular area surrounded by the two-dot chain line in the figure). Therefore, this eliminates the state in which the red LED elements 344R are arranged close to each other.

As described above, by arranging each light-emitting component 340 so that the red LED elements 344R are not close to each other, the following effects can be obtained. That is, as mentioned above, the red color emitted by the red LED elements 344R is a conspicuous color that attracts people's attention. Therefore, if the red LED elements 344R are close to each other, the red color may be biased in such close areas, causing visual color unevenness. By ensuring that the red LED elements 344R are not close to each other, it is possible to eliminate partial red bias and make the color uniform, thereby enhancing the lighting effect.

It is preferable that all light-emitting components mounted on the component surface of one LED board are installed so that their red LED elements are not close to each other, but some light-emitting components may be installed so that their red LED elements are close to each other. The proportion of light-emitting components installed so that their red LED elements are not close to each other is preferably 70% or 80% or more of all light-emitting components arranged on the component surface of one LED board, but it is possible to obtain a certain effect if 50% or more of the light-emitting components are installed so that their red LED elements are not close to each other.

Here, we have explained the characteristic configurations related to the shape of the LED board and the arrangement of the mounted light-emitting components using the LED board 310 used in the first performance lamp 12 in the slot machine SM and the LED boards 320, 330 used in the fourth performance lamps 16a, 16b, respectively, as examples, but this is not limited to this and the above-mentioned characteristic configurations can be applied to any LED board and light-emitting components. In addition, the above-mentioned characteristic configurations of the LED board and light-emitting components can also be applied to any LED board and light-emitting components in the pachinko game machine PM.

Here, the display screen 11a in the slot machine SM has been described as an example of a display unit, but this is not limited thereto, and for example, the display window W or the lower panel cover 31 may also be used as the display unit. Also, an area in which a specific character is displayed may also be used as the display unit. Examples of display units in a pachinko game machine PM include the play area PA or an effect image display unit provided within the play area PA, or an area in which a specific character is displayed.

<Board case unit>
Next, the board case unit 500 shown in these figures will be described with reference to Figures 146 to 154. In the following description, for convenience, the board case unit 500 will be described as equivalent to the main control board case unit CU1 (see Figure 137) of the pachinko game machine PM, but is not limited to this. In addition, in the following description, for convenience, the front, back, left, right, up and down directions are defined as directions in the state of attachment to the pachinko game machine PM, based on the state of Figure 146, and the directions of the arrows shown in Figure 146 will be described as front, back, left, right, up and down, respectively.

The main control board case unit 500 is mainly composed of a main control board 510, which is responsible for the central control of the pachinko game machine PM, and a board case 560 in the shape of a roughly rectangular container that houses the main control board 510 inside.

The main control board 510 is configured as a rectangular printed wiring board, and as shown in Fig. 149, a CPU 520, a setting change unit 530, a setting value display monitor 540, a performance display monitor 550, and a plurality of connectors (only connectors CN1 to CN5 are numbered in the figure) are mounted on the component side (also called the "mounting side") 511. Although not shown in detail, electronic devices such as ROM and RAM, and electronic and electrical components such as resistors are also mounted on this component side 511. The CPU 520 is disposed on the component side 511 so that its long side is aligned with the long side direction of the main control board 510 (the left-right direction in Fig. 146). The main control board 510 has screw insertion holes 512a to 512d at its four corners, and is fixed to the inner surface of the board case 560 (top case 565 described later) by screws (see screws 513 shown in Figure 154) inserted into each of the screw insertion holes 512a to 512d.

As shown in FIG. 149, the setting change unit 530 is configured to have a setting key switch 531 and a setting change switch 536. The setting key switch 531 is a switch operated when checking and changing the setting of a setting value that determines the degree of advantage for the player, for example, the degree (rank) of the winning probability in a predetermined winning/losing lottery that affects the ball payout rate, such as a winning/losing lottery for a special pattern, and the setting change switch 536 is a switch for changing the setting value in multiple stages (six stages in this embodiment). The setting key switch 531 has a setting change key cylinder 532 that can be turned by inserting a setting change key (not shown) held by the gaming store clerk, and the setting key switch 531 is configured to be switched by turning the setting change key cylinder 532. The setting change switch 536 has a setting change button 537 that is pressed by the gaming store clerk, and is configured to be switched by pressing the setting change button 537. The setting change unit 530 (setting key switch 531, setting change switch 536) may be provided on a board other than the main control board 510, or may be provided in a location other than the board.

When power is supplied to the setting change unit 530 in a state where power is not supplied to the main control board 510, the setting change key is inserted into the setting change key cylinder 532 and rotated approximately 90 degrees clockwise (also referred to as the "setting change key operation direction") as viewed from the rear, and the setting change switch 536 is in the on state (the setting change button 537 is pressed), the setting change unit 530 starts a setting change mode (a mode in which the setting value can be changed). In addition, in this setting change mode, the setting value is switched between 1 to 6 in six stages each time the setting change switch 536 (setting change button 537) is pressed, and the switched setting value is displayed on the setting value display monitor 540. When the setting change key is returned to its original position, the setting value is confirmed, the setting change mode is terminated, and the mode transitions to the normal mode (a mode in which play can be performed and the setting value display monitor 540 is in a non-illuminated state). In addition to the above conditions, a condition for starting the setting change mode may be that the front frame 402 is open relative to the outer frame 401 (also referred to as the "front frame open state"). Also, if the front frame is not in the open state, it may be possible to prevent the transition from the setting change mode to the normal mode. When transitioning from the setting change mode to the normal mode, a setting change sound is output from a specified speaker to notify that the setting change has been completed.

The setting change switch 536 in the setting change unit 600 is also configured to function as a RAM clear switch. That is, when the power is turned on while the setting change switch 536 (setting change button 537) is pressed to start the setting change mode, the main control board 510 clears at least the information about the game state (normal state, probability change state, time-saving state, latent probability change state, etc.) from all the information stored in the RAM. At this time, the setting value is updated to the setting value with the lowest ball payout rate (for example, setting 1). It is also possible to provide a dedicated RAM clear switch (RAM clear button) separately, without using the setting change switch 536 as a RAM clear switch. In this case, when the dedicated RAM clear switch is in the on state and power is supplied, the setting change mode may be started. Also, the setting value may be configured to have only one stage (for example, setting 1). In that case, the setting value is not updated even if the setting change switch 536 (setting change button 537) is pressed (for example, it remains unchanged at setting 1).

Furthermore, when power is supplied to the setting change unit 530 in a state where the main control board 510 is not supplied with power and the setting change key cylinder 532 is inserted and rotated about 90 degrees in the setting change key operation direction (however, the setting change switch 536 is in the OFF state), the setting change unit 530 starts a setting confirmation mode (a mode in which the setting value can be confirmed) and displays the current setting value on the setting value display monitor 540. When the setting change key is returned to its original position, the setting confirmation mode ends and the normal mode is entered. In addition to the above conditions, the front frame may be in an open state as a condition for starting the setting confirmation mode. In the pachinko game machine PM, even if the setting change key cylinder 532 is rotated by the setting change key to turn the setting key switch 531 on after the power is supplied, the setting change mode does not enter either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and the setting value is not displayed on the setting value display monitor 540.

The board case 560 is configured with a bottom case 561 that is detachably attached to the back of the game board 20, and a top case 565 that is detachably attached to the bottom case 561, and an engagement connection mechanism 570 is provided on the right edge of the case that is aligned front to back when the bottom case 561 and the top case 565 are attached and closed. The bottom case 561 and the top case 565 are combined and integrated in a closed state with their openings facing each other. The bottom case 561 and the top case 565 are both formed by a molding method such as injection molding using a colorless and transparent resin material (e.g., polycarbonate, etc.), and are configured so that the inside of the board case 560 can be seen from the outside.

The bottom case 561 is generally formed in a rectangular box shape with an open rear, and the top case 565 is generally formed in a rectangular box shape with an open front. The top case 565 is configured to be slidably attached to the bottom case 561 in the left-right direction. That is, the top case 565 is slightly shifted to the left relative to the bottom case 561, and the two cases 561 and 565 are combined while facing each other in the front-rear direction, and the top case 565 is slid to the right (hereinafter also referred to as the "closing direction") to integrate the bottom case 561 and the top case 565 in a closed state with their openings facing each other. On the other hand, the integrated two cases 561 and 565 can be separated by sliding the top case 565 to the left (hereinafter also referred to as the "opening direction") a predetermined distance relative to the bottom case 561.

The engagement and connection mechanism 570 further engages and connects the integrated bottom case 561 and top case 565 to each other using a crimping member 575, thereby restricting the top case 565 from sliding in the opening direction relative to the bottom case 561. That is, the engagement and connection mechanism 570 is configured to have a bottom side locking part 571 (see FIG. 148) provided on the right edge of the bottom case 561, a top side locking part 573 (see FIG. 147) provided on the right edge of the top case 565, and a crimping member 575 (see FIG. 146) for engaging and connecting the bottom side locking part 571 and the top side locking part 573.

The bottom locking part 571 has a bottom locking hole (not shown) that opens toward the rear, and the top locking part 573 has upper and lower top locking holes 573a (see FIG. 146) that are formed in a position aligned with the bottom locking hole in the front-rear direction and penetrate the front and back. The crimping member 575 has a shaft part 575a that extends forward and backward, an operating part 575b that is formed in a disk shape with a larger diameter than the shaft part 575a, and a cylindrical locking pin 575c that is provided in a pin receiving hole (not shown) recessed in the shaft part 575b and is supported so as to be freely advanced and retreated in a direction perpendicular to the central axis of the shaft part 575a. The locking pin 575c is biased so that the pin tip protrudes outward from the shaft part 575a by the repulsive force of a spring (not shown) provided in the pin receiving hole.

In the engagement and connection mechanism 570 having such a configuration, the bottom case 561 and the top case 5
When the bottom case 561 and the top case 565 are integrated in a closed state, the bottom-side locking portion 571 and the top-side locking portion 573 overlap each other facing front to back. In this state, the shaft portion 575a of the crimping member 575 is inserted so as to straddle the bottom-side locking hole and the top-side locking hole 573a, and the crimping member 575 is engaged and connected to the bottom-side locking portion 571 and the top-side locking portion 573, so that the top case 565 is in a closed state relative to the bottom case 561 and cannot be removed (cannot be opened).

The top case 565 is formed with connector insertion/removal openings (not shown) that penetrate the top case 565 from the front to the back corresponding to the mounting positions of each connector (including connectors CN1 to CN5) of the main control board 510. When the main control board 510 is attached to the top case 565, each connector of the main control board 510 is exposed to the outside through the connector insertion/removal openings (see Figure 146), and can be electrically connected to the performance control board, image control board, payout control board, etc. via harnesses (connector cables).

The top case 565 is also formed with a setting change unit corresponding opening (not shown) that penetrates from the front to the back corresponding to the mounting position of the setting change unit 530 (setting key switch 531 and setting change switch 536) of the main control board 510, and when the main control board 510 is attached to the top case 565, the setting change unit 530 is exposed to the outside through the setting change unit corresponding opening (see FIG. 146). A small door 567 (see FIG. 147) that covers the setting change unit 530 facing rearward from the setting change unit corresponding opening is attached to the top case 565 so that it can swing open and closed (not shown in FIG. 146). When operating the setting change unit 530 (setting key switch 531 and setting change switch 536), this small door 567 is swung upward to expose the setting change unit 530.

The board case unit 500 configured as above, housing the main control board 510 in the board case 560, is attached to the rear side of the game board 420 with the bottom case 561 on the front side and the top case 565 on the rear side. When the board case unit 500 is attached to the rear side of the game board 420, the right edge of the board case 560 (the side edge of the left and right side edges of the board case 560 on which the engagement connection mechanism 570 is provided) is located on the side of the open end side edge of the front frame 402 (the side edge of the left and right side edges of the front frame 402 on which the front frame 402 opens, opposite the side edge on which the hinge mechanisms 403a, 403b are provided).

(Differences in the configuration of 7-segment LEDs)
The above-mentioned set value display monitor 540 is composed of a single-digit LED indicator lamp (7-segment LED with dots) 541, as shown in Fig. 150. This LED indicator lamp 541 is composed of seven bar-shaped LED segments arranged in a figure of eight and one point-shaped LED segment formed in a dot point shape. Each LED segment of the LED indicator lamp 541 is configured to light up in red, and is configured to appear red even in a non-lighted state (light-out state). For example, a red-lighting LED element is used as the light-emitting element of each LED segment, and the cover member (lamp cover) and diffusion sheet covering the LED element are made of a red light-transmitting material.

In addition, the red color of the LED segment in the lit state and the red color of the LED segment in the unlit state are not necessarily the same color. Specifically, for example, when expressing colors in a 256-level RGB color system, if the red color of the LED segment in the lit state is (R, G, B) = (255, 0, 0), the red color of the LED segment in the unlit state is not necessarily (R, G, B) = (255, 0, 0). For example, in the case of a color in which the R component is "200" or more and the G component and the B component are "100" or less, specific examples such as (R, G, B) = (237, 26, 61) and (R, G, B) = (241, 91, 91) are also included in the red color. In addition, the color of the LED segment in the unlit state is the color when the LED segment in the unlit state is illuminated with white light (including the light of the indoor lighting in a game arcade). In addition, taking into consideration the exact color differences, in the following description, the color of the LED segment in the lit state will be referred to as "red," and the color of the LED segment in the unlit state will be referred to as a "reddish color."

Figure 150 (A) shows a case where all LED segments of the LED indicator lamp 541 are in a non-illuminated state, and Figure 150 (B) shows a case where all LED segments of the LED indicator lamp 541 are in a lit state. Also, Figure 150 (C) shows the lit/non-lit state of each LED segment when the LED indicator lamp 541 displays the number "6". In these figures, for convenience, the lit LED segments are shown in black (actual color is red) and the non-lit LED segments are shown in gray (actual color is reddish) to distinguish between the two. Red is a conspicuous color that attracts people's attention and has high visibility. Therefore, by configuring each LED segment of the LED indicator lamp 541 to light up in red, it is possible to increase the visibility of the LED indicator lamp 541 in the lit state. Also, the LED indicator lamp 541 of the setting value display monitor 540 is configured so that each LED segment appears red (reddish color) even in the non-illuminated state, so that it is highly visible and easy to notice even in the non-illuminated state.

On the other hand, the performance display monitor 550 is composed of 4-digit LED indicator lights (7-segment LEDs with dots) 551-554, as shown in FIG. 151. Each digit LED indicator light 551-554 is composed of 7 bar-shaped LED segments arranged in the shape of a figure of eight and one dot-shaped LED segment formed in a dot point shape. Each LED indicator light 551-554 can display numbers from 0 to 9, alphabetic characters, hyphens, etc. by selectively lighting up the 8 LED segments. The LED indicator lights 551 and 552 of the upper two digits display, for example, an identification symbol (for example, "bL.") for identifying the type of gaming performance data of the pachinko machine PM. On the other hand, the LED indicator lights 553 and 554 of the lower two digits display a numerical value (calculated value "00" to "99") indicating the calculation result of the gaming performance data. Each LED indicator lamp 551-554 is flashing when the number of samples of the count data (accumulated number of played balls) has not reached a preset number, and is lit when the number of samples reaches the preset number. Each LED indicator lamp 551-554 of the performance display monitor 550 is flashing all LED segments, including the dot-shaped LED segments, for a predetermined period (e.g., 5 seconds) from when the power is turned on. This is provided as a test pattern to make it possible to visually check whether all LED segments can be lit. The flashing display is performed in a pattern in which the lights are turned on and off alternately every predetermined time (e.g., 0.3 seconds ±10% error; a time in the range of 0.297 seconds to 0.33 seconds) according to the interval at which the interrupt process is executed.

Each LED segment of the LED indicator lamps 551 to 554 in the performance display monitor 550 is configured to light up in red (for example, (R, G, B) = (255, 0, 0)) and to appear whitish in the non-lighting state (lights-off state). For example, a red LED element is used as the light-emitting element of each LED segment, and the cover member (lamp cover) and diffusion sheet covering the LED element are made of a whitish translucent material. In addition, the whitish color basically means an achromatic color containing R, G, and B components equally and uniformly and relatively bright (for example, brightness 7 or more), such as white (R, G, B) = (255, 255, 255) or milky white (R, G, B) = (243, 243, 243), but also includes colors in which the ratios of R, G, and B components differ by about 10%, such as (R, G, B) = (250, 240, 230). Red is a conspicuous color that attracts people's attention and has high visibility. Therefore, by configuring each LED segment of the LED indicator light 541 to light up in red, it is possible to increase the visibility of each LED indicator light 551 to 554 when it is turned on. On the other hand, whitish colors are less conspicuous and have low visibility compared to red (reddish colors). Therefore, the setting value display monitor 540, which is configured so that each LED segment of the LED indicator lamps 551 to 554 appears whitish in a non-illuminated state, is designed to have low visibility and to be inconspicuous in a non-illuminated state.

Figure 151 (A) shows the case where all LED segments of LED indicator lamps 551 to 554 are in an unlit state, and Figure 151 (B) shows the case where all LED segments of LED indicator lamps 551 to 554 are in an lit state. Also, Figure 151 (C) shows the lit/unlit state of each LED segment when LED indicator lamps 551 to 554 display "bL.53". For convenience, in these figures, lit LED segments are shown in black (actual color is red) and unlit LED segments are shown in white (actual color is a whitish color) to distinguish between the two.

The LED indicator lamp 541 of the set value display monitor 540 and the LED indicator lamps 551 to 554 of the performance display monitor 550 each have an LED segment that is lit red (or flashes red) when lit, so both have equally high visibility when not lit. On the other hand, the LED segments of the LED indicator lamp 541 of the set value display monitor 540 are configured to look reddish even when not lit, while the LED segments of the LED indicator lamps 551 to 554 of the performance display monitor 550 are configured to look whitish when not lit, making it easier to distinguish between the two when not lit. Also, since the LED indicator lamps 551 to 554 of the performance display monitor 550 may flash when lit, each LED segment is configured to look whitish when not lit and red when lit, making it easier to distinguish between the LED segments that are intermittently lit when flashing and the LED segments that are off. In contrast, the LED indicator lamp 541 of the set value display monitor 540 does not flash when lit.

In addition, the cover members of the LED indicator lamps 541 of the set value display monitor 540 may be made of a translucent material of a white color so that each LED segment of the LED indicator lamps 541 of the set value display monitor 540 appears to be whitish in the unlit state, making them relatively inconspicuous, and the cover members of the LED indicator lamps 551 to 554 of the performance display monitor 550 may be made of a translucent material of a red color so that each LED segment of the LED indicator lamps 551 to 554 of the performance display monitor 550 appears to be reddish in the unlit state, making them relatively noticeable. In this case, the LED indicator lamps 551 to 554 of the performance display monitor 550 in the unlit state are easier to see than the LED indicator lamp 541 of the set value display monitor 540 in the unlit state. In addition, since the LED indicator lamps 551 to 554 of the performance display monitor 550 are more likely to light up or blink than the LED indicator lamp 541 of the set value display monitor 540, the LED indicator lamps 551 to 554 (LED elements) of the performance display monitor 550 are more likely to deteriorate over time. However, even if the light emission intensity of the LED indicator lights 551 to 554 decreases due to aging or the like, and the red color weakens, this can be compensated for by the red color of the cover members of each LED segment. Note that each LED segment of the LED indicator light 541 of the setting value display monitor 540 and each LED segment of the LED indicator lights 551 to 554 of the performance display monitor 550 may be configured to appear reddish or white in a non-illuminated state.

The setting value display monitor 540 remains in a non-illuminated state and does not turn on when the power is turned on under a specified condition, whereas the performance display monitor 550 transitions from a non-illuminated state to a lit state or a blinking state even when the power is turned on under the same specified condition. When the power is turned on under a specified condition, it means a state in which the power is turned on without any special processing or operation, for example, when the power is turned on without the setting key switch 531 of the setting change unit 530 being rotated (also referred to as "normal power-on"), or when the power is turned on in an error state with the power off and the setting key switch 531 being not rotated (in this case, an error state occurs after power-on). However, in the case of an error state that cannot be restored, by transitioning from a non-illuminated state to a lit state or a blinking state when the power is turned on under a specified condition, it becomes possible to make the LED indicator lamps 551 to 554 of the performance display monitor 550, which are not noticeable in the non-illuminated state, noticeable immediately after power-on. The LED indicators 551 to 554 of the performance display monitor 550 may be configured to be lit or blinking even when an error occurs or when settings are being changed. However, the performance display monitor 550 may be configured to be turned off when an error occurs that makes it impossible to recover from the error state.

The LED indicator lamp 541 of the set value display monitor 540 is larger than the LED indicator lamps 551 to 554 of the performance display monitor 550 (see FIG. 149), and in this respect, it is more visible and conspicuous than the LED indicator lamps 551 to 554 of the performance display monitor 550. The LED indicator lamp 541 of the set value display monitor 540 and the LED indicator lamps 551 to 554 of the performance display monitor 550 may be configured to be the same size, or the LED indicator lamps 551 to 554 of the performance display monitor 550 may be configured to be larger than the LED indicator lamp 541 of the set value display monitor 540. The LED indicator lamp 541 of the set value display monitor 540 and/or the LED indicator lamps 551 to 554 of the performance display monitor 550 may be configured as 7-segment LEDs without dots.

Here, the difference in the configuration of the LED indicator lamp (7-segment LED) is explained using the setting value display monitor 540 and the performance display monitor 550 in the pachinko game machine PM as an example, but it is not limited to this, and when any different 7-segment LED is used, it is possible to give them the above-mentioned difference in configuration. In addition, the above-mentioned difference in the configuration of the 7-segment LED can also be applied to the multiple LED indicator lamps used in the slot machine SM. For example, in the main control board 60 of the slot machine SM, a display monitor with a similar configuration to the performance display monitor 550 (for example, a role ratio display monitor that displays the role ratio) and a setting value display monitor with a similar configuration to the setting value display monitor 540 may be provided, and these display monitors may have the above-mentioned difference in the configuration of the 7-segment LED. In addition, the storage number display lamp 46h and the payout number display lamp 46j may have the above-mentioned difference in the configuration of the 7-segment LED.

(Colored crimping parts)
As described above, the right edge of the substrate case 560 is provided with an engagement and connection mechanism 570 (see FIG. 146), and the rivet member 575 is disposed in the engagement and connection mechanism 570. In this embodiment, the rivet member 575 is made of a colored member (a colored member). The colored member refers to a member whose surface is colored or plated, or a member made of a colored material. Any material such as resin, wood, or metal can be used to form the colored member. Note that colored means a state in which any color is added, excluding a colorless and transparent state, and includes achromatic colors such as white, gray, and black. If it is colored, it may be transparent (colored and transparent) or opaque.

By constructing the crimping member 575 from a colored member, the following effect can be obtained. That is, when the board case unit 500 is attached to the back side of the game board 420, if one tries to look into the inside of the board case 560 from the direction of arrow K in FIG. 147 through the right edge of the board case 560, the line of sight is blocked by the colored crimping member 575, making it difficult to see inside the board case 560. Therefore, for example, even if the front frame 402 is opened slightly and one looks into the pachinko game machine PM from the open end side edge, it becomes difficult to see inside the board case 560 through the right edge of the board case 560, making it difficult to commit fraud against the board case 560. In addition, removal and/or installation of the board case unit 500 from the rear part of the game board 420 (for example, a bracket member (not shown) provided on the rear part of the game board 420 to hold the board case unit 500) may be performed from a side edge part (upper edge part, left edge part, lower edge part) other than the right edge part of the board case 560, or may be performed from the right edge part of the board case 560.

147, the crimping member 575 is configured so that the diameter dimension (diameter dimension) D of the shaft portion 575a of the crimping member 575 is longer than the width dimension W of the short side of the CPU 520 (the vertical direction of the CPU 520 in FIG. 147). In addition, when the component surface 511 of the main control board 510 is taken as the reference plane for height (the position in the front-to-back direction in FIG. 146), as shown in FIG. 152, the height H12 of the crimping member 575 from the component surface 511 is configured to be higher than the height H11 of the CPU 520 from the component surface 511. Furthermore, the crimping member 575 arranged at the lower of the upper and lower crimping members 575 and the CPU 520 mounted on the main control board 510 are arranged in a linear position in the left-right direction (on the same imaginary straight line extending in the left-right direction) as shown in FIG. That is, when looking at the board case 560 from the direction of arrow K in FIG. 147, the CPU 520 is positioned in a position hidden behind the crimping member 575. Therefore, if one opens the front frame 402 slightly, peers into the pachinko gaming machine PM from the edge of the open end, and attempts to see inside the board case 560 through the right edge of the board case 560, the CPU 520 is hidden behind the crimping member 575 and cannot be seen. This makes it difficult to commit fraud targeting the CPU 520 inside the board case 560.

Here, the crimping member 575 has been described as an example of a colored member installed in the board case unit 500, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the same effect can be obtained by placing any colored member other than the crimping member on the right edge of the board case 560. For example, a test connector mounted on the main control board 510 for electrical connection with the test device during a type test of the pachinko game machine PM may be formed from a colored member, and the test connector and the CPU 520 may be placed in a position where they are lined up in a straight line in the left-right direction on the component surface 511 (for example, the position between the CPU 520 and the crimping member 575 in FIG. 147). In this case, it is preferable to configure the width dimension of the test connector (the vertical width dimension in FIG. 146) to be longer than the width dimension W of the short side of the CPU 520, and to configure the height of the test connector from the component surface 511 of the main control board 510 to be higher than the height of the CPU 520 from the component surface 511. This means that when you try to look inside the board case 560 through the right edge of the board case 560, the CPU 520 is hidden behind the test connector and is difficult to see.

The colored members as described above may also be provided on side edges (upper edge, left edge, or lower edge) other than the right edge of the board case 560. For example, if a colored member is placed on the upper edge of the board case 560 when the board case unit 500 is attached to the back side of the game board 420, when someone tries to look inside the board case 560 from above through the upper edge of the board case 560, the line of sight is blocked by the colored member, making it difficult to see inside the board case 560. The same effect can be obtained when a colored member is placed on the left edge or lower edge of the board case 560.

(Steps at the side edges of the board case)
As shown in Fig. 146 and Fig. 147, a step portion 580 is provided on the right edge of the board case 560. This step portion 580 is formed integrally with the top case 565, and as shown in Fig. 153, has three steps, a first step portion 581, a second step portion 582, and a third step portion 583, a first wall portion 584 connecting the first step portion 581 and the second step portion 582, a second wall portion 585 connecting the second step portion 582 and the third step portion 583, and a third wall portion 586. Fig. 153(A) shows the step portion 580 as viewed from the direction of the arrow L in Fig. 147, and Figs. 153(B) and (C) show the step portion 580 as viewed from the direction of the arrow K in Fig. 147.

By providing such a step portion 580 on the right edge of the board case 560, the following effect can be obtained. That is, when the board case unit 500 is attached to the back side of the game board 420, if one tries to look into the board case 560 through the right edge of the board case 560 from the direction of the arrow K in FIG. 147, the state (scenery) inside the board case 560 is divided or distorted by the step portion 580 (mainly the second step portion 582 and the third step portion 583), so the visibility inside the board case 560 is reduced. Therefore, for example, even if the front frame 402 is opened slightly and the inside of the pachinko game machine PM is looked into from the open end side edge, it becomes difficult to see the inside of the board case 560 through the right edge of the board case 560 (step portion 580), so that it becomes difficult to commit fraud against the board case 560.

A colored member as described above may be placed in the step portion 580. For example, a test connector as described above may be placed in the step portion 580. By placing a colored member in the step portion 580, when looking into the inside of the board case 560 through the right edge of the board case 560, not only is the state (view) inside the board case 560 divided or distorted by the step portion 580, but the line of sight is blocked by the colored member, making it difficult to see inside the board case 560, and therefore visibility inside the board case 560 can be further reduced.

Here, the step 580 is provided on the right edge of the board case 560 as an example, but the step may be provided on a side edge (upper edge, left edge, or lower edge) other than the right edge of the board case 560. For example, if a step is provided on the lower edge of the board case 560 when the board case unit 500 is attached to the back side of the game board 420, when someone tries to look inside the board case 560 from below through the lower edge of the board case 560, the view inside the board case 560 is divided or distorted by the step, making it difficult to see inside the board case 560. The same effect can be obtained when the step is directed toward the left edge or upper edge of the board case 560.

The step 580 described above is formed in the top case 565, but the step may be formed by the bottom case 561 and the top case 565 (for example, the step is formed at the boundary between the bottom case 561 and the top case 565). Also, the step may be formed by the engagement coupling mechanism 570 and the board case 560 (for example, the step is formed at the boundary between the engagement coupling mechanism 570 and the board case 560), or the step may be formed by the bracket member provided on the back of the game board 420 and the board case 560 (for example, the step is formed at the boundary between the bracket member and the board case 560).

(Colored seal member)
As shown in FIG. 146 and FIG. 147, a seal member SL may be attached to the step portion 580. The seal member SL is made of a strip-shaped colored sheet-like member, and is attached to the right edge of the board case 560 along the step portion 580 as shown in FIG. 153(C). The colored sheet-like member refers to a member formed in a sheet shape with a colored paint or print on the surface thereof, or a member formed in a sheet shape from a colored material. Any material such as resin, paper, metal foil, etc. can be used as a material for forming the colored sheet-like member. As described above, colored means a state in which any color is applied, except for a colorless and transparent state, and includes achromatic colors such as white, gray, and black. If it is colored, it may be transparent (colored and transparent) or opaque. The seal member SL may be any seal member, such as a seal seal indicating that the board case has been sealed, or an identification seal on which a one-dimensional or two-dimensional code (identifier) representing predetermined information is written.

By attaching the colored seal member SL to the step portion 580 (the right edge portion of the board case 560), the following effect can be obtained. That is, when the board case unit 500 is attached to the rear side of the game board 420, the board case 560 can be easily moved from the direction of the arrow K in FIG.
When someone tries to look into the board case 560 through the right edge of the front frame 402, the line of sight is blocked by the colored seal member SL, making it difficult to see inside the board case 560. Therefore, for example, even if the front frame 402 is opened slightly and the inside of the pachinko game machine PM is looked into from the open end side edge, it becomes difficult to see inside the board case 560 through the right edge of the board case 560, so that it becomes difficult to commit fraud against the board case 560. By providing the seal member SL on the step portion 580, a synergistic effect of the seal member SL and the step portion 580 is obtained, which is an excellent effect of more effectively reducing the visibility inside the board case 560, but the seal member SL may be attached to a part of the right edge of the board case 560 where the step portion 580 is not formed.

Also, the colored seal member (sheet-like member) as described above may be provided on a side edge (upper edge, left edge, or lower edge) of the board case 560 other than the right edge. For example, if a colored seal member is placed on the upper edge of the board case 560 when the board case unit 500 is attached to the back side of the game board 420, when someone tries to look inside the board case 560 from above through the upper edge of the board case 560, the line of sight is blocked by the colored seal member, making it difficult to see inside the board case 560. The same effect can be obtained when a colored seal member is placed on the left edge or lower edge of the board case 560.

(Board mounting screws and connectors)
As described above, the main control board 510 has screw insertion holes 512a to 512d at its four corners as shown in Fig. 149, and is fixed to the inner surface side of the top case 565 by screws inserted into each of the screw insertion holes 512a to 512d. Fig. 154 shows the relationship between the screw 513 inserted into the screw insertion hole 512b and the connector CN3. Of all the connectors mounted on the component surface 511 of the main control board 510, the connector CN3 is the connector located closest to the screw insertion hole 512b.

As shown in FIG. 154, a cylindrical screw receiving portion 566 perpendicular to the component surface 511 is formed integrally with the top case 565 on the inner surface of the top case 565 (the surface facing the component surface 511). The screw 513 penetrates from the solder surface 515 side of the main control board 510 to the component surface 511 side and is inserted into the screw insertion hole 512b. The screw 513 is attached so as to enter the inside of the screw receiving portion 566 while screwing into the inner surface of the screw receiving portion 566, and fixes the main control board 510 to the top case 565.

As shown in FIG. 154, when the main control board 510 is fixed to the top case 565 (the screw 513 is fixed to the screw receiving portion 566 via the main control board 510), the height of the screw 513 from the component surface 511 (the length of the portion of the screw 513 protruding from the component surface 511) is H1. Also, the height of each terminal pin PN of the connector CN3 from the component surface 511 is H2, and the height of the connector CN3 from the component surface 511 (the height of the housing surrounding each terminal pin PN) is H3. At this time, the height H1 of the screw 513 is configured to be higher than the height H2 of each terminal pin PN of the connector CN3 and lower than the height H3 of the connector CN3.

By setting the height H1 of the screw 513, the height H2 of each terminal pin PN of the connector CN3, and the height H3 of the connector CN3 in this way, the following effect can be obtained. That is, when the board case unit 500 is attached to the rear side of the game board 420 and an attempt is made to insert a cheating device (e.g., a rod-shaped device) used for cheating into the board case 560 to cheat on the main control board 510, the height H1 of the screw 513 is higher than the height H2 of each terminal pin PN of the connector CN3, so that the screw 513 can block and prevent the cheating device from contacting or impacting the terminal pin PN.

On the other hand, if an unauthorized tool is inserted into the board case 560 and an impact is applied to the screw 513 in an attempt to damage it, the height H3 of the connector CN3 is greater than the height H1 of the screw 513, so the connector CN3 can block and prevent the unauthorized tool from impacting the screw 513, or the connector CN3 can mitigate the impact. This makes it difficult for the screw 513 (and the screw receiving portion 566) to be destroyed and the main control board 510 to be removed.

Here, the example has been described in which the heights of the screw 513 and the connector CN3 from the component surface 511 are set as described above, but the heights of any screw used to fasten the main control board 510 or any connector placed near the screw can also be set as described above to obtain the same effect.

The characteristic configuration of the board case unit 500 (board case 560 and main control board 510) described above can be applied to other board case units than the main control board case unit CU1 in the pachinko game machine PM, such as the performance control board case unit CU2, payout control board case unit CU3, and power supply board case unit CU4, to obtain similar effects. It can also be applied to the main control board case unit 160 and sub-control board case unit in the slot machine SM to obtain similar effects.

In the above-mentioned embodiments, as examples of gaming machines to which the present invention can be applied, slot machines (reel type gaming machines) that use gaming medals as gaming value and pachinko gaming machines that use gaming balls as gaming value have been described as examples, but the present invention is not limited to these, and the present invention can be similarly applied to, for example, reel type gaming machines that use gaming balls as gaming value, reel type gaming machines, pachinko gaming machines, mahjong ball gaming machines, arrange ball machines, etc. that use information recorded on an electronic recording medium as gaming value, and the same effects can be obtained. The present invention can also be similarly applied to slot machines with four or more reels, and the same effects can be obtained.

1 Slot machine 2 Front door 3a, 3b, 3c Reels (first embodiment)
25 Start lever 26a, 26b, 26c Stop switches (first embodiment)
60 Main control board 70 Sub-control board 70A Sub-main control board 70B Sub-sub control board 100 Main control means 200 Sub-control means 200A Sub-main control means 200B Sub-sub control means RE1, RE2, RE3 Reel (Second embodiment)
SS1, SS2, SS3 Stop switches (second embodiment)
W: display window DP: image display section SM: slot machine (fifth embodiment)
PM Pachinko Game Machine (Fifth embodiment)

Claims (1)

A time adjustment screen is available for adjusting the time.
Capable of detecting certain events that may occur in the gaming machine;
a history screen capable of displaying a history relating to a certain event can be displayed on the display means;
The history screen can display the time of an event,
Certain events that can be displayed on the history screen include certain abnormalities ,
When a change operation is performed on the time adjustment screen, the time can be changed, and when a confirmation operation is performed on the time adjustment screen, the time changed by the change operation can be confirmed.
This gaming machine detects the specified abnormality when a time adjustment screen is displayed, and after a change operation is performed on the time adjustment screen from a certain time to another certain time, but a confirmation operation is not performed for the other certain time after the change operation, and when a confirmation operation is performed for the other certain time and then a history screen is displayed, a time based on the certain time before the change operation was performed on the time adjustment screen can be displayed on the history screen as the time related to the specified abnormality .

Images